The Practical Linguist: Being a System Based Entirely Upon Natural Principles of Learning to ...

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http : //books . google . com/|

J-'t'^J^lxT.

^^^K'tJl^.^r I

^^'^-m-

'k

/&.*1A^

THE

PEACTICAL LINGUIST;

BEING A BTBTEM BASBD KNTIBBLT UPON

Itatural IgrinnpUs

OF

LKARNING TO SPEAK, READ, AND WRITE

TUB

GEEMAN LANGUAGE.

BY

DAVID NA8MITH, LL.B., F.S.S.,

\

OF THE MIDDLB TBMPLB, BAKRMTBR-AT-LAW,

AUTHOR OF
THB CHBONOMBTBICAL CHART OP THB HI8T0KT OF ENGLAND.

IN TWO vol.1 TMKS.

VOL. I.

• <

LONDON:
DAVID NUTT, 270, STRAND.

1870.
All rights reserved*

W-:^^.-' ^""'^

L

TO NEW YORK

PUBLIC UTT.AWJ

155082A

TILL- t.i> r O J N D A'i IONS
M U>-4 I.

"/

^

CONTENTS.

VOL. I.

EzPLARATlOlf or THB StiTBM V

PART I.
ThB ACdDUCCB 1

PART n.
Enqlum akd AifOLicisiD Gb&mam £xa&GUB« AKD An KCDonw 66

PART in.

ThX GmAMMATICAL €k>inCBlfTARIBt Ill

VOL, 11.

PART IV.
Thb Gbbmak Exbbgisbs r. 7

TrB GXBICAH AwkCDOTM 31

PART V.

Tbb Pbbjcakbnt Vocabulary 59

Thb Auxiliabt Vocabulabibs 93

I

PREFACE.

The Author avails himself of this opportunity to return his
sincere thanks to his Mend, Herr James Wohack, for much valuable

and gratuitous assistance rendered in connection with this work ; he

also begs to acknowledge the services of the following German

professors : — Mrs. Frederick Bevill, Herr H. Hoffinan, and particularly

those of Herr E. Schinzel.

The lists of exceptional words, and some other portions of the
matter appearing in the Accidence, have been derived chiefly from the
German Grammar by the Rev. J. G. Tiarks, ]Ph. Dr.

The opinions and suggestions of those who test the system will be
thankfully received.

4, GARt)EN Court, Temple,
London.

INTRODUCTION

AND

EXPLANATION OF THE SYSTEM.

This work, the result of many years' meditation upon the study o
foreign languages, is offered by its Author to the public with entire
confidence in the soundness and importance of the principles upon which
it is based.

Any attempt to facilitate the study of foreign languages is jus*
tified by the £Etct that existing systems, whatever be their merits in
particular cases, are nevertheless essentially unsatisfactory. It is indeed
impossible to reflect upon certain incontrovertible facts without
becoming convinced that the authors of the various systems extant
have, to a large extent, failed to make the acquisition of a language,
by the means of books, that which it is by nature — an easy and agreeable
undertaking. As matters of fact, we know, —

(1) That from eight to twelve years are spent in our schools and
colleges in the study of the classics, and in the end no student can
speak Latin or Greek ; that few can write either correctly ; and that the
great majority fail even to attain the power of reading with either
pleasure or ease.

(2) That the same student, though giving less than half that time
to German and French, attains a fair degree of proficiency in speaking
and writing those languages, and considerable ease in reading them.

(3) That persons who visit a foreign country in order to study its
language, acquire no small proficiency in the space of one year, or
even less, provided that they are excluded from the society of those
who speak their own language.

(4) That many infants of four years of age speak their native
tongue with fluency and comparative accuracy, notwithstanding the
infirmities incident to their age.

(5) That children trained by foreign nurses and governesses,
as well as many illiterate waiters and couriers, are able to converse
freely in two, three, or even more languages, although they possess but
little knowledge of reading or writing.

VI THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

It i», therefore, but reasonable to institute an inquiry into the
cause of these differences ; to investigate the course pursued by the
learner in each case, and to endeavour to discover whv the results are
so unsatisfactory to those who are apparently and presumably furnished
with the best means and appliances for attaining the common aim, — ^the
acquisition of a language.

It may be suggested that the different results in the case of the
classics and of modem languages are attributable to the fact, that the
former are more difficult to master than the latter. This suggestion,
however, is inconsistent with the hypothesis that a Greek or Roman
child was no more backward in his speech than is a French, a German,
or an English child; and if the children of these several countries
acquired their native tongues with equal facility and correctness, it
cannot be a fact that the one is essentially more difficult than the
other ; and if such is the case, the difference must be attributed solely
to the system pursued.

Four ideas^at least force themselves upon us when considering the
foregoing five propositions.

The first is, that those who make the most rapid progress cannot,
in the case of infants, use books, and especially grammars ; and in that
of adults, do not, or at most but to a very limited extent.

The second is that the respective languages are acquired correctly
without any knowledge of the principles of grammar.

The third — exemplified in the case of children with foreign
nurses — is that the rapid acquisition of a language is not incident
solely to the fact of residence in the country where it is commonly
spoken.

The fourth is that the course pursued by the infant, the nurse, and
the waiter, be it what it may, is better adapted to attain its end than
that followed by the collegiate student ; the unavoidable inference from
which is — that our books are constructed upon false principles.

The reason of this defect in our present most approved system,
which, to distinguish it from others, may be termed the classical
method, appears to the Author to be susceptible of explanation by
reference to the mode in which our present system of teaching languages
was developed. In the middle ages, when Latin was the common
medium of communication among literary Europeans, it was prac-
tically a living language, and men and women who laid any claim
to learning, spoke it fluently and wrote it correctly and with ease.

IKTB0DU0TI01<r AND EXPLAKATTOV OF THl BT8TBH. VU

How was it then taught P Certainly not as at present. It was
taught much as the mother then taught, and now teaches her child
English. It is not too much to say that from the moment printing
enabled and induced the master to delegate a part of his work to
the inanimate book, he began to neglect his duty; for though he
placed in the hand of his pupil an instrument which, as an auxiliary
and supplement to the right discharge of his own functions, was of
the greatest value, yet not being a real eqxiivalent, he imposed upon
the learner a task which time has abundantly proved was in itself suffi-
cient to prevent his ever mastering the language. What, indeed, could
be more absurd than to give an infant an English grammar, and to t«ll
him to learn his language? Nature will not sufiPer her laws to be
violated with impunity, and in this instance she has punished us, as it
were, by striking the teacher speechless, and has left us, so far at least
as the classics are concerned, dumb teachers of the dumb.

What, then, is it, that secures to the non-user of books his
advantage? The answer is, that it is neither science nor art, but
simple obedience to the dictates of nature. The name of the object
most necessary to the learner is first sought by him ; the form of expres-
sion which conveys his most frequent want is first acquired, and the
words, forms, and modes of expression, are mastered by and rank with
him, unconsciously it may be, but, nevertheless, actually, in the order
of their numerical value to him. Certain words and expressions he
uses daily and hourly. They form part of his every utterance ; and as
his wants increase, and his ideas expand, so does he extend and use his
stock of words and phrases.

Great as is the superiority of the system followed by those who
simply obey the dictates of nature, it has obviously within itself serious
imperfections which entail much unnecessary labour, necessitate con-
siderable loss of time, and in all cases make the learner solely reliant
upon memory and example, inasmuch as it leaves him without the aid
of principle and science.

Nature's student sits as the suppliant by the wayside, he receives
what he can get, he has to take from whomsoever he may be who is
disposed to give, and in one respect he is worse off than the beggar,
for he lacks the knowledge which would enable him to reject the
impure. His ear is constantly assailed by a torrent of sounds which he
cannot comprehend, his mind is bewildered by a flood of words which
he cannot retain, yet he waits and watches, and at length he notices

Viii THE PRACTICAL UKOUIST.

that the soundB are different, that some of them are often repeated,
and with these he grows familiar ; still he watches, and he finds that of
these some refer to things he knows and wants, and he tries if he can
make the sound, and if the sound that he can make tells others
what he wants.

In this way, by a slow and tedious process, he picks out of the con-
fused mass of words those he requires, as, and when, he requires them.
The individual word, the phrase, the entire sentence, are alike to him ;
he regards each as a sound, simple or complex, which expresses a given
want ; he knows that it has done so before, he believes that it wiU do so
again, and that is all he knows about it; by degrees his stock of
sounds increases, and in the course of time he speaks as others speak,
but he understands not how or why. Cases and conjugations, concords
and governments, are mysteries which never troubled him. Had his
words and sentences been collected for him and arranged in the order
he wanted them, he would have accomplished what he has, in infinitely
less time. Had he been shown the principles upon which most of his
labour proceeded and depended, he would have avoided much of it,
and would have had the satisfaction of being able to test others and to
justify himself. He has been obedient to nature, though destitute of
science, and has fared better than those who have relied upon a science
which ignored the suggestions of nature.

The Practical Linguist is an attempt to follow nature as closely as
possible. It is an endeavour to reduce to a science the suggestions
of our instincts, in order to secure and retain the advantages of the one,
while it supplements those of the other.

Being satisfied that the object of primary importance was to endea-
vour to ascertain the numerical value of words, that is, to determine which
words recur the most frequently, the author employed a clerk, about seven
years ago, to count out all the words contained in five different books of the
most dissimilar character ; one being a large book of dialogues. The
first time a word occurred it was written down, and upon every subse-
quent recurrence a tick was placed by its side ; these ticks were, from
time to time, counted up as the space allotted to each word was filled,
and the number substituted for them ; and after rather more than one
year's labour the task was accomplished. All the words were then
placed in their numerical order, that is, the word of highest numerical
yalue or most frequent recurrence, at the head ; and the result proved
that, whereas some words had a numerical value of upwards of one
thousand, others fell to and below five.

IWTBODCrCTlON AND KXPLAWATIOW OF THE SYSTEM. IX

The careful study of this vocabulary displayed another most
important fact, viz., that the vocabulary of every language consists of
two distinct branches ; they are here termed respectively the Permanent
Vocabulary and the Auxiliary Vocabulary; the latter is divided into,
or consists of, a number of distinct groups, the group, in this case, and
not the individual word, determining the numerical value. Take, for
example, the words " and," " of," " have," " bread," " coat," " chisel."
Without using the first three, it is absolutely impossible to speak for a
few seconds consecutively and intelligibly, whereas we can readily
conceive it possible for a man not to use the word " chisel " once in a
whole year ; the word " bread " will be used whenever he attends the
meal-table ; and " coat " when he dresses himself for the day, or has
occasion to adapt himself to a change of temperature. Nor must the
fact be overlooked that acquaintance with a language is not necessarily
coterminous with articulate utterance. We think far more than we
speak, and we must think in language, though the language of thought
is, or may be, different from that of utterance, as different, perhaps, as
ifl the phraseology of ordinary conversation from that of the pulpit or
the platform. Reflecting that the word " bread " is incidental to the
meal-table, we naturally collect all kindred words, and term this
group the Auxiliary Vocabulary of Food, which will contain in it the
ordinary appurtenances of the meal-table. So the word " coat " imme-
diately suggests the other portions of dress, whether male or female ;
while the word ** chisel" suggests the contents of the carpenter's
chest, and the smallest modicum of common sense would indicate to
the student the wisdom of learning these in the order of real or
apparent practical utility. Food would come before raiment, and
raiment far before the carpenter's chest.

We have, then, two distinct vocabularies : the Permanent Vocabu-
lary, the individual words of which stand in the order of their
numerical value actually ascertained ; and the Auxiliary Vocabulary,
the groups being arranged according to their presumable value.

The attempt was next made to construct the first exercise in
English by taking the ten words of the highest numerical value from
the Permanent Vocabulary, and a like number of words from the Auxi-
liary Vocabulary of Food. Here another difficulty presented itself : the
difference between written and spoken language became apparent, and
as the intention was to speak with the small stock of words, so far as
they would permit of combination, certain copulative words had to be

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

dhxfted and imported earlier than their numerical value as ascertained
from written language indicated. This difficulty, however, soon dis-
appeared, and after the first few exercises, no further alteration of this
nature was found necessary. A fresh supply of words from the Per-
manent and from the Auxiliary Vocabularies was imported with each
exercise. In the case of the words peculiar to the Permanent Vocabu-
lary, they continually and necessarily recur, while in that of the Auxi-
liary Vocabulary they are never, or but rarely, repeated.

The soundness of the principles upon which this system proceeds, is
abundantly proved by the result of the first ten exercises, for, with the
words contained in them, the dialogue immediately following them was
composed. From an inspection of this dialogue it is at once apparent
that the pupil who has mastered these ten exercises has such a com-
mand of language, though only knowing about one hundred and fifty
words of the Permanent Vocabulary, as to enable him to carry on a
conversation of considerable range ; and that a principle has been
pursued consonant to the genius of the language, is evidenced by the
fact, that the words that have come, so to speak, to the top, are essentially
those of most force and simplicity in our language.

The same system has been pursued in the construction of the first
forty exercises, in which a vocabulary sufficient for all practical purposes
is contained, and in which it is believed that every form of expression,
and consequently every rule of grammar of any importance, has been
included, illustrated, and explained.

When the fifty exercises were completed in English, they were
carefully translated into German by a native well acquainted with both
bngoages, the strictest attention being paid to render the English as
accurately as possible, but at the same time, in no instance to violate
the gymius of the German language.

In conjunction with this part of the scheme, it is well to direct
attention to the fact, that in learning a foreign language we proceed,
if we may so express it, from within outwards. Ideas originating in
the mind are first clothed in the native language of the thinker, and
subsequently replaced by that of the language in which the idea is
to be expressed ; it is, therefore, obvious that necessary native expres-
sions should be first ascertained, and then, that their exact equivalent
should be given, and these should be so constantly repeated as to
become natural to the mind, and to be instantaneously uttered without
the process of translation. Whenever this is not attained, the speaker

INTBUDUCTIOK AKD KXFLAK/LTIOV OF THS STBTIM. XI

of a foreign language is a mere translator, and at every turn proves
himself an alien.

After the completion of the exercises in English and German, the
German was retranslated, word by word, into English, without any
regard to the sense as English, a faithful likeness in English of the
German arrangement of words being all that was sought. This part
of the work is styled Amolicised German — a term, it is freely admitted,
open to objection, but one which, on the whole, was preferable to any
other that presented itself.

In the study of a foreign language two difficulties at the least
present themselves simultaneously to the student — first, he does not
know the meaning of the individual words ; secondly, the words are
arranged in a different order to that with which he is familiar. And of
these two difficulties, the latter is unquestionably the greater obstacle to
his progress, for it not unfrequently occurs that when he has translated
each word he cannot understand the meaning of the passage. Nor is
this surprising when we consider that the meaning of an English
passage is not unfrequently far from obvious to the English reader.
These difficulties being entirely independent, they are here treated
separately ; and it is believed that by this method the learner may
readily and perfectly master the genius, the mould, and the syntax of
any lang^ge, without knowing one word of the language itself; that he
may accustom himself to think in the foreign mould, and that, as his
vocabulary of foreign words increases, the words will readily and
naturally fall into their proper places: in addition to which, the
peculiarities of the language are rendered obvious aud are riveted
upon the memory. Nor is it too much to say that, in this in-
stance, soimd instruction and amusement are combined. The student
should read and re-read the Anglicised German till he is able to
speak and write fluently, and until he can conform thoroughly to his
model.

The exercises being complete in the three forms, the next step was
to commence with the first, to note the difference between the English
and the Anglicised German, and to explain the grammatical principles
upon which the differences depended. This part is termed the Gram-
matical Commentaries, and will be found to contain all the essential
rules of German grammar ; and as they follow the order of words and
sentences, they also stand in the order of their nimiei ical value, so that
in fact the student has presented to him — firsts the words ; secondly

xii THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

the oombinations ; and thirdly, the grammatical rules each in the order
of their numerical value.

Afl it is of the utmost importance to be accurate, particularly in the
commencement of the study of a foreign language, the fifty exercises
and Accidence are printed in Roman characters, and not in German, the
advantage of which is too obvious to need argument to justify it.

The Accidence will be found, in accordance with the principles
hitherto laid down, to be strictly utilitarian, and though this portion of
the work of necessity more closely resembles the same part in any other
system, yet upon examination it will be found to diflTer widely both m
form and substance, and though it is apparently not half the length of
the Accidence in ordinary Grammars, yet, in fact, it contains more
practical matter than some of the larger books.

In the construction of the exercises the object constantly in view
was to avoid repetition, unless for an express purpose, and to permit the
sentences and exercises to grow in complication, so as gradually and
regularly to exhaust the Permanent Vocabulary, so far as it is here
used, together with the difficulties incident to the words it contains.
These exercises must, therefore, be carefully distinguished from those
contained in ordinary books, in which, perhaps, there are two or three
hundred. The intention is that these exercises should be committed
to memory, and that each should be thoroughly mastered before the next
is attempted.

The practice of giving the pupil English sentences to turn into a
foreign language with which he is not acquainted, somewhat resembles
the task cast by the Egyptians upon the Jews, and in most cases proves
equally unsatisfactory to both parties.

The argument upon which the Author is disposed to rest his case
against the adverse critic is this — every step has been taken upon a given
principle, the end has in each case satisfied the expectation, and the
result of the whole is a very snjall book, which the student is recom-
mended to repeat and study, step by step, with the assurance that when
he is master of the whole he will possess an infinitely greater acquaint-
ance with German than he may be disposed readily to believe can be
contained within so narrow a compass.

PAET L

THE ACCIDENCE.

Part 1.

THE ACCIDENCE

The GesEman Alphabet.

PRIWT>a> CAPITALS.

a h c
nop

PRINTED SMALL LETTERS.

q r 10 t tt » vt)

WRITTEM" CAPITALS.

t I m
* 9 »

-X^ 2^ <^:^ .

TVBITIEN SMALL LETTERS.

/(^,

yfU

^yf^i^^/ ^^f-l

^M^^ /

^€rf

y^ y^''

^ y X;'' J^

<^

y^'t^ .y^/ yC^/

^' T^-

CQlfPOnXD CQNSOMANTS.

THE ACCIDENCE.

S

PART I.

THE ACCIDENCE.

PRONUNCIATION.

The sounds of letters and of words appeal to the ear and not to the eye.
Great and most unsatisfactory labour must therefore attend any attempt accu-
rately either to express in, or to realise by, written symbols the sounds given
to them by others, and especially by foreigners. No such attempt is here
made, and the learner is referred to a native for a few lessons in pronuncia-
tion as the proper introduction to this or any other system of learning a foreign
language ; should he, however, be unable to obtain such assistance, the follow-
ing table will serve as a guide to the leading peculiarities of German pronun-
ciation : —

The German a is pronounced like a in the word /cUher,

ri

»>

a

>»

mare.

>»

ai

>»

•

♦»

line.

»

• •

au

>»

^y

>•

boy.

>»

an

»>

ou

>»

mouse.

>>

e

>»

ai

>>

main.

>»

eu

>»

oy

>»

boy.

»

i.}

»

ee

»»

glee.

»

•

J

>f

y

>♦

yit.

»

o

t9

9>

cone.

>»

9J

ou

»

enough.

>»

8

>»

z

>>

za/mhra.

»

u

»♦

oo

»

moon.

uel

u J

»

u

»»

vniure.

>>

V

»>

/

>l

)l

w

»

V

»

n

7

>>

•

♦»

bit.

»

z

»

ts

>»

B 2

THE rHAKTlCAL UMQVm.

THE ABTICLK

Thert aj>r \w^y Ar:i'.-i**, tht? Definite and the Indefinite. The

two niutibert, u^ «fiii;rj]*r and the pIumL Each Artide kafi tliroe
the jouubcuJixke. t&^ ftrtxiixiine. and the neuter. Each Article i» dedmed is
CMCtf, the in'AMtisjMiv^, iL^ gexiitive, the dative, and the aocoaatEve,

The Defivite Abticle.

•

FewL N^Mi.

JftT

4er

die ... das

• • ■

die .. <*&

60m

der ... des

■ • •

der ... cfike.

u

dem

dor ... ddin

• • •

A.

dta

die . das

• • «

die ... <A«.

The LrDEPiirrrB Article.

Mtue. Fern.

Keut,

9. ..

ein . . eine

... ein

a.

.

elnes... elner

... eines .. of a.

/>

elnem . einer

... einem . <oa-

A. ...

elnen... eine

... ein

a.

SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNa

A 11 I^rmnii tutft written with a capital initial letter.

f^oiiriN hav#i three genders, the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter.

Th^ ^ndnr AAcrihed to nouns in German is highly artificial, and can ha
iwvturMf^ly known only by the study of each word. A few general rules will,
bowAVfir, materially a^ist the learner.

Coin |M Mind words take the gender of their last component, if a sabsiaiitiTe ;
^g., drr lilumon(/vir/<a, the flower-garden.

Witli ciim|iarative]y few exceptions the following are

Masculine.

Tha iiainen, iitateK, and oonditions of Males. Winds, SeamiUw MiiiiskL
Days, Ht^jntM, Mouutuiiti. wcrdb ending in 6, y, m, sv, Cc, img^ Um/f^ mJL aai
monoaylUhic noun* in n. WLm tb& feminine constitutes the iwif <f ihe
MfiecitiH, th«i maaniline iv ezjv«Mitid by the termination er or ndk :
Taulie, Ihe tiort ; der Taubtr. O^ m^!

'V\m iiaiiiiw. MUlea, aad 'wmcji^jaift "/ F'im^U^ Trves. Fniiitfw aaii Fj

THS ACCIDENCE.

than one pliable ending in e, ei, eit, heit, keU, m, cA/, Bchafty ung, cUh, uth^
ur, uhvy and monosyllables in ucht and wn^. When the masculine constitutes
the name of the species the feminine is expressed hj adding in : e.g,f der Lowe,
the lion; die Lowin, the lioness,

Neuter.

The names of metals, countries, inhabited places. Nouns ending in thum,
sal, self nisSf (ni^), diminutives ending in chen and lein. Words and letters
which though not substantives are used as such. The general name of the
species when each sex has a distinct name. All collective substantives that
take the prefix ge to denote a number of the same kind. All frequentative
substantives derived from infinitives by cutting off the termination n or en
and by taking the prefix ge to denote the repetition or continuance of the act
expressed.

Nouns have two numbers, the singular and the plural.

Noims have four cases, the nominative, genitive, dative, and accusative.

Nouns have various declensions, that is, peculiar forms of construction, to
express the gender, number, and case of different words. Grammarians differ
as to the number of Grerman declensions ; they are here treated as being four,
the respective peculiarities of which will be readily learned by the study of
the following table, the examples which are set out in full, and the notes upon
them : —

The Declensions.

Masculine or Neuter, Feminine, Neuter or Masculine,

1st 2nd ^rd ^th

A.'l . • • . w • • • w ... w • • • "

G, ... •S ... •!! ... • ... •dS

D, ... • ... •U ... • ... •e

A , , , , 9 ... vXX ... V ... V

N, ... • ... •n {a)mQ or (6)«H (a)#e or {h)mQT

G, ... • ... •!! •e •]! •€ •er

D, ... •!! ... mn •en •n •en •em

A, ... • ... •n •e •!! #6 •er

(•) indicates the Noun in its nominative singular form.

N.B. — To determine how a noun shall be declined, observe —

Ist. All feminine nouns belong to the .... 3rd declension.
The (a) plural of the 3rd declension is used —

(1) In the case of original feminine monosyllables.

(2) Feminine words ending in nias,

(3) In the word Trubsal, affliction.

The (6) plural is used in the case of any other feminine noun.

8

2nd. All neuter nouns in el^ eMy er, eken^ lein, and wd belong to

the Ist declension.

All other neuters belong to the .... 4th declension.

The list A ^\page 9) contains all the wcHrds of the 4th (6) pluraL

3rd. All masculines ending in el, en, er to the

»>

>»

not ending in e, el, em, er

t»

1st declension.
2nd declension.
4th declension.

4th. As above stated, the masculines in e, and the words contained in list B
(Le,, words that have lost their final e) include all that belong to
the second declension.

EXAMFLES IH FuLL.

\9t Deela

mon.

K

der Apfel

the apple.

die Aepfel* ...

the apples.

0.

des ApfelS ...

of the apple. ...

der Aepfel

of the apples.

D.

dem Apfel

to the apple. ...

den Aepfeln ...

to the apples.

A.

den Apfel

the apple.

die Aepfel

the apples.

N.

der Garten ...

the garden.

die Garten* ...

the gardens.

G.

des Gartens...

of the garden. . . .

der Garten

of the gardens.

D.

dem Garten ...

to the garden. . . .

den Grarten

to the gardens.

A.

den Garten ...

the garden.

die Garten

the gardens.

2nd Dedennon.

F.

der Knabe . . .

the hoy.

die Ejiaben ...

the hoys.

0.

des Knaben ...

of the boy.

der Ejiaben ...

of the hoys.

D.

dem Knaben ...

to the hoy.

den Knaben •••

to the hoys.

A.

den Knaben ...

the hoy.

die Knaben

the hoys.

^rd Declension.

IT.

die Hand

the hand.

die Hande

the hands.

0.

der Hand

o/the hand. ...

der HandG

qfthe hands.

D.

der Hand

to the hand. ...

den HandOn

to the hands.

A.

die Hand

the hand.

die HandG

the hands.

* In the following wordi, the radical vowel of the plural is modified so that, whether
by the sound in spesking, or tlie Tisible alteration in writing, it may be at once detennined
whether the singolar or ploral is intended : Apfel, Acker, Brader, Faden, Garten, Graben,
Htfen, Hammel, Hammer, Handel, Kloster, Laden, (the shop), Mangel, Mantel, Nabel,
flsttd, Sehaabelf Sebwsfv, Vster, Vogel.

THB AOCIDSirOI.

N.

die Armee

... the army.

die Armeell

the armie$»

0.

der Armee

... of the army, ...

derArmeen

of the armies.

D.

der Armee

... to the anny, ...

denArmeen

to the armies.

A.

die Armee

... the army.

die Armeell

the armies.

N.

die Tugend

... the virtue.

die Tugenden ...

the virtues.

G.

der Tugend

... o/the virtue, ...

der Tugenden ...

of the virtues.

D.

der Tugend

... to the virtue. ...

den Tugenden ...

to the virtues.

A.

die Tugend

... the virtue.

die Tugenden ...

the virtues.

ith Declension.

N.

der Tag

... the day.

die Tage

the days.

0.

des TageS

... of the day.

der Tage

of the days.

D,

dem Tage

... to the day.

denTagen

to the days.

A,

den Tag

... the d<iy.

die Tage

the days.

N,

der Ckist

... the spirit.

die GeisteP

the spirits.

G,

des G^isteS

of the spirit. ...

der .Geister

of the spirits.

D.

dem CkistO

... to the spirit. . . .

den Geistem . . .

to the spirits.

A.

den Geist

... the spirit.

die Geister

the spirits.

C

Observe : — In tl

\e plural all the cases o

f any noun have the

s same termina

tion, except that the dative plural of all nouns ends in n.

In every case where s, n, or r is added, euphony determines whether it is to
be so added alone, or whether it must be preceded by the letter e ; thus all
nouns of more than one syllable ending in el, en and er take s only.

When the singular and plural nominatives are alike, the genitive singular
ends in s.

The accusative is the same as the nominative, except in the second de-
clension ; there are also a few nouns which having in the course of time
dropped the final n of their nominative, now stand as exceptions to this rule ;
e.g., der Wille, originally der Willen, the resolve, des Willens, dem Willen,
den Willen ; der Funke, spark ; der Buchstabe, printing type.

Feminine nouns have all their cases in the singular alike.

Nouns that form the nominative plural by the addition of e or er to the
singular, take es in the genitive and e in the dative singular.

When the nominative plural is formed by the addition of n or en to the
nominative singular, all the cases in the plural are alike.

When e is added in the plural, the radical vowel, a, o, u, or au is generally
softened or modified into ct, d, iiy or du; the like is the case in forming
feminines and diminutives.

The plural adcb er to the greater part of the neuters and to some mascu*
lines ; in both cases the radical vowels are softened.

A. The following nouns form the plural in er, and the a, o, or u of the sin-
gular is changed into d, d, or u in the plural.

(a) Those ending in thum.

10 THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

(b) The following masculines : — Bosewicht, villain; Gott, a heathen idol;
G^ist, the spirit; Leib, body; Mann, man; Ort, place; Rand, edge; VormuDd,
guardian; Wsld,/ore8t; Wurm, worm.

(c) The following neuters : — ^Amt, office; Augenlied, eyelid; Bad, bath;
Band, ribbon; Bild, picture; Blatt, lecLf; Brett, board; Buch, book; Dach,
roof; Dorf, village; El, egg; Ysuch., department; Fasa,ca8k; Feld, Jield; Geld,
money; Gemach, apartment; Gemiith, mind; Gespenst, spectre; Geschlecht,
sex; Gresicht, /ace; Glas, glass; Glied, limh; Grab, grave; Gras, grass; Gut,
estate; Haupt, head; Haus, house; Holz, wood; Horn, horn; Hospital, hos-
pital; Huhn, fowl; Kalb, calf; Kind, child; Kleid, gc^rment; Korn, grain;
Kraut, h,erb; Lamm, lamb; Land, land; Licht, light; Lied, sotig; Loch, hole;
Maul, moitth; Nest, nest; Pfand, pledge; Bad, wheel; Regiment, regiment;
Schild, hovse-sign; Schloss, lock; Schwert, sword; Spital, hospital; Thad,
valley; Volk, nation; WajninB, ja^cket ; Weib, uoife; Wort, word,

•

B. The following words have lost their original final e: — Advocat, barrister;
Antagonist, antagonist; Astronom, astrorunner; Bar, bear; Barbar, barbarian;
Consonant, consonant; Christ, christian; Demagog, demagogue; Ducat, ducal;
Elephant, elephant; Fiixst, prince; Geograph, geographer; Gesell, companion;
Graf, earl; Herr, master; Held, liero; Hirt, herdsman; Husar, hussar; Idiot^
idiot; J esuitf Jesuit; Katholik, roman catholic ; Klient, client; Komet, comet;
Monarch, monarch; Mohr, moor; Methodist, methodist; Narr, yboZ; Ochs, ox;
Patient, the patient; Patriarch, patriarch; Philosoph, philosopher; Planet,

.planet; Poet, poet; Pralat, prelate; Prinz, prince; Protestant, protestant;
Quadrant, quadrant; Soldat, soldier; Student, student; Theolog, tJi/eologian ;
Thor, fool; Tyrann, tyrant; TJngar, Hungarian; Vorfehr, ancestor,

C. The following are examples of words, the signification of which is varied
by prefixing articles of different genders.

der Band, a volume, the binding of a das Band, a ribbon, union,

book;

der Bauer, the peasant ; das Bauer, the bird-cage.

der Bulle, the bull ; die Bulle, a letter ptiblislied by the

Pope,

der Bund, a covenant, league ; das Bund, a sheaf, bundle,

der Chor, the chorus ; das Chor, the choir.

der Erbe, llie heir ; das Erbe, the inheritance,

der Gehalt, the contents ; das Gehalt, the salary,

der Heide, the pagan ; die Heide, the heath,

der Kunde, the customer ; die Kunde, knowledge,

der Leiter, the guide ; die Leiter, the ladder,

der Lohn, the reward ; das Lohn, M« wages. / — ^.

der Mangel, the want ; die Mapgel, the mangle,

die Mark, the mark, boundary ; das Mark, the marrow,

der Marscby the march ; die Marsch, the marsh, fen,

der Beis, the rice ; das Reis, a twig, sprig.

THE ACOmSMCB. 11

der See, the lake ; die See, the sea,

der Thei], a part of the whole ; das Theil, the ahare^ portion,

der Thor, the fool; das Thor, the gate,

der Verdienst, the profit of labour ; das Verdienst, the merit,

D. The following words are not used in German in the plural : die Ankunfb,
arrival; der Anschein, the appearance; das Ansehn, atUhority; der Argwohn,
nupicion; die Asche, ash; der Beginn, beginning; das Bestreben, the endeavowr;
der Bund, alliance; der Dank, thanks; der Druck, oppression; die Ehre, honor;
der YlachSyflax; das Einkommen, revenue; das Eleud, misery; der Empfang,
receipt; die Flucht, flight; die Furcht, yc»r; die Gerste, barley; das Gluck,
fortune; die Gnade, m^cy ; d^ Gram, grief; der Hader, dispute ; der Hafer,
ooto; der Hanf^ hemp; der Hopfen, Aoje'^/ der Jammer, misery ; der Klee,
dover ; der Knoblauch, garlick ; der Kohl, cabbage ; der Kummer, eviction ;
das Leben, ^t/e; die Liebe, Zai7«/ das Lob, praise; der Lohn, reward; der
Mund, motUh; der Mord, murder; die Pracht, splendour; der Rath,
advice; der Baub, i|p(n/y der Sand, sand; der Schein, * a/>;96arance/ der
Schmuck, omam^n^; der Segen, ^^ blessing; der Streit, dispute; der
Sturz, yo^; der Tadel, reproach; der Tausch, exckamge ; der Tod, death;
der Trost, consolation; das XJnkraut, weeds ; das TJnrecht, injustice; das
Ungliick, misfortune ; der Unterricht, instruction; der Verdacht, suspicion;
das Yergehen, fauU; das Yergniigen, pleasure; das Yerlangen, iitmA; der
Yerstand, understanding; der Yerdruss, veaxUion; die Yorsicht, precau>tion;
der Wahiiy f(Mncy ; der Weizen, wheat ; der Zank, qua/rrel; der Zwang, con-
«^niin< ; der Zwist, dispute.

Most words that express number, weight, and measure, are used in the sin-
gular, as in English we say three dozen, not three dozens of wine, e.^., Sechs
Buch Papier, mo; ^'t^tr^ jEKij^er ; Zwolf Dutzend Aepfel, ^loe^ (^02;en apples ; ,
Zwei Glas Wein, ^t(7o ^^« tc^rt^ ; Zwei Paar Schuhe, two pair shoes ; Yier
Ffimd Zucker, four pound sugar ; Sieben Stuck Tuch, seven piece doth.

The following take the plural : die Elle, the yard ; die Flasche, the bottle ;
die Meile, the mile ; die Tonne, the tun ; die Tasse, the cup ; die Unze^ t^te
ounce.

Unless they are used partitively, substantives, the measure, weight, or
number of which is expressed by the above-mentioned words, are not put
in the genitive, but in the same case as the preceding word.

THE ADJECTIYE.

The Adjective expresses the quality of the noun ; therefore, when one noun
is used to qualify another, it becomes, while so used, an adjective, and subject
to the rules applicable to adjectives ; so also does any other word so used. On
the other hand^ adjectives are frequently used and treated as noims.

13

THE PRAOrriCAL UHOUIST.

Adjectiyes have three degreee of comparison, the Positiye, the CompanitiTe^
and the Superlative.

Many adjectives are formed from other parts of speech by a change of ter-
mination, e.g., from nouns, as from

Dank

MetaU

Holz

Salz

Himmel

Meister

Wort

Rath

Grund

{thanks,
gratitude,

a metal,

wood,

saU.

heaven,

nuuter,

toord.

advice,

ground.

From adverbs^ as from

morgen . . . UHnorrow.

heute

to-day.

dank bar ..•

metallon •••

holz 6m ...

salzig, or )
sabsioht J

himmliSOll

meister liait

wortlioll ...

rathsaJH ...

grund lOS ...

morgend . . .
heutigf

From prepomtions, as from

. . before.

gratefuL

metal,
wooden,

salt,

heavenly,

masterly,

literal.

advisable,

groundless,

der morgende Tag,

to-morrow,
der heutige Besuch,

to-dax/s visiL

vor

vorig^ . . . der vorige Sommer,

last su/mmer,
iiber ... over, iibrig ... die Ubrigen Brocken,

the remaining crumbs.
wider . . . against, widrig^ . . . ein widriger Mensch,

a repulsive person.

Diminutives are formed by adding the syllable lich, and changing a, o, u into
d, d, tt ; e.g,y blau, blue; blaulich, bluish.

When the adjective follows the substantive, or is used as a predicate, it is
not declined ; but when it is placed before the substantive, or is used as an
attribute, it is declined in gender, number, and case in one of the three
following forms : —

u

CO

i

1st Fw

fm.

%^d Form.

^rd F(yrm,

M,

F,

N.

M,

F, N,

M.

F. N.-

N.

er

6

es

6

6 6

er

6 es

G.

es

er

68

en

en en

en

en en

D,

em

er

em

en

en en

en

en en

A.

en

e

68

en

6 6

en

e es

N,

e

en

en

G.

er

en

en

D.

en

en

en

A.

e

en

en

THJE ACCIDSMGS. 13

In the following pages the phrajies ** good man/' ** good woman/' and ''good
child" are declined in full in the positive, comparative, and superlative degrees.

The 1^^ Farm is employed when the adjective is not preceded by an article
or pronoun.

The 2nd Form is employed when the adjective is preceded by either of the
following words, which indicate the gender, and which are declined like the
definite article or the first form : —

the

this

that

which

many a

every

Af.

der

dieser

jener

welcher

mancher

jeder

F.

die

diese

jene

welche

manche

jede

N,

das

dieses

jenes

welches

manches

jedes

The 3rrf Form is used when the adjective is preceded by either of the follow-
ing words, which do not indicate the gender, and are declined like the indefinite
article : —

a my thy his her our your their no

M. ein mein dein sein ihr unser* euer* ihr kein

F, eine meine deine seine ihre uusere euere ihre keine

N, ein mein dein sein ihr unser euer ihr kein

* The t in the terminations ««, em, ^ may be omitted ; e.^., unsen schonem Gartens.

The principle of these rules is, that as the letters r, «, m indicate the gender
and case, their repetition in the adjective should be avoided.

The Coupabatite and Superlative Degbees.

The comparative and superlative degrees have the same terminations in each
form as the positive degree, but to these terminations is prefixed er to express
the comparative degree, and est to express the superlative degree. The e is
dropped when the r or 9t can be added to the word without it.

The vowels a, o, ««, in monosyllables, are mostly changed in the comparative
and superlative degrees into d, d, a.

Adjectives ending in the unaccented syllables e/, en, er generally drop the
e before /, n, r in the comparative.

The word " am'' is a contraction of '' an," o^, to, &c., and '' dem," the^ and is
placed before the adverb or predicate in the superlative degree, which then
takes the termination "en," e.^., am ersten, fir%ty in the first place; mein
Garten ist am schonsten, my garden is the finest.

Whenever, however, the superlative is accompanied by a substantive, "am"
cannot be used ; e.g., es ist das jUngste ELind von alien, he is the youngest
child o/aUy and not, es ist am jUngsten Kind von alien.

14

THE PRACTICAL UKOtJiST.

Maacvline,

b* N. Outer Mann
G, Gutes

z>. Gutem
^ A. Guten

^ N. Gute
g G. Guter
J D. Guten
^ A. Gute

ManneS

Manne

Mann

Manner
Manner
Mann em
Manner

IsT Form.
Positive,

Feminine,

gute Frau

guter Frau

guter Frau

gute Frau

gute
guter
guten
gute

Frau en
Frauen
Frau en
Frauen

NetUer,

gutes Kind

gutes KindeS

gutem Kinde

gutes Kind

gute
guter
guten
gute

Kinder

Kinder
Kind em
Kinder

y. Besserer Mann
G, Besseren^Mannes
J), BesseremManne
A. Besseren Mann

^. y. Bess ere Manner
G. Besserer Manner
g. 2>. Besseren Mann em
^ A. Bessere Manner

CamparcUive,

bessere Frau

besserer Frau

besserer Frau

bessere Frau

bess ere Frau en
besserer Frauen
besseren Frauen
bessere Frauen

bessereS Kind

besseren KindeS

besserem Kinde
bessereS Kind

bessere Kinder

besserer Kinder

besseren Kind em

bessere Kinder

b' y. Bester Mann
G. BeSten* ManneS
D. Be stem Manne

c? A, Besten Mann

,^ N. BeSte

I G, Bester
^ B. Besten

^ A. BeSte

Manner
Manner
Mann em
Manner

Superlative.

beste Fi-au

bester Frau

bester Frau

beSte Frau

beSte

bester
besten

beSte

Frauen
Frauen
Frauen
Frauen

bestes

besten
be stem

beSteS
beSte

bester
besten

beSte

Kind
KindeS
Kinde
Kind

Kinder
Kinder
Kind em
Kinder

• It is imnmterial whether the genitiye singular of an a<^it!ctive without an article or
pronoun ends in n or « — thus, besseren or besseres Mannes. Euphony has sometimes to be
considered.

THE ACCIDENCB.

15

OQ

*^ ts ts tj
.^ a d

M^

^ ^ s ^

o o o o

TS TJ TS TS

d (h H d

• ^ •rH 'F^ 'f^

OQ

"^ '^ '^ "^

.9 .a .9 .a

iij ^ S ^

o o o o

n3 TS TS TS

d q d d

OQ

n3 '^ '^ n3

o o o o

•^ TJ TS tS

<D <D

•^ .ta -ta -49

§D §D t£ §D

at)

a s

dddd

^a ^a ^a ^a

2

ts tj tj

dd

^ ^ ^1 ^

I

a «

r^ r^ "73

^ ^ & &

jj jj

a> ^ d a>
•^ tJ "tJ '5

5555 5555

OQ m OQ OQ n OQ oq m

££££ ££££

$ ^ 3 d

53 !? d :?

5? s? s? d

d d d d

d d d d

5? s? d d

££££ ££££ ££pci&! pci£pq£ £pq££ P^im^;^

gi

£

I

S

d d

C9

'w TS "^ 'U

o M g a>
•^ TJ "^ '9

® ^ o .®
'9 tj tj '9

^3 ^O TJ T5 ^3 TiJ *t3 'O

f^ ^1 C |4

3 3 e( o( :3 :3 :m :3

^ a ^ a

lis S

^iiiiii

Q 0000 0000

ddd

^ b & &

ddd dddd

5555 5555

J^'(iq'^' J^'<iq-^ Jei^iq-^ S5;<iq^* J^^ci^ Je5<iqH

'MDjnSufgt tV^d 'M>jn/kitgi 'P>^d 'J/ofnAmg 'tP^d

16

THE PmACTICAL UMGUIST.

OQ

*0 TJ TS 'O

• H *fm •^ "H

^ ^ s ^

o o O

^ Ti Ti TS

g d

•^ TJ TJ TJ
•^* 'H '3 "3

& (^ i ^

Q> O O O

•« '^ '^ ^

0^0
••H •ph .a .,M

5 § d

^ ^ S »4

•73 nfl tS Tj

s ^ s s

•« 'PN 'H •»*

^ §d§d§d3> SdSd§d§d

J 8 8 S 8 8
J JJJJ

QQ QQ CO OD

S§

•S 'S 'B 'H

B B B B

^ »4 ^ li*

s

S S S €

'H 'CJ 'H '^

« a> a> 0}

g g g a

»4 »4 h Pi

S

.g .a .g .g

o 0) « o

a a a g

uu

g g

III!

III!

Hit

^111

•jft

V S -4^ -4* -4^ -4*

i s (^ §D 3) 3d 3)

S «M ©ss©

3 9'

to

.^ ^ .ta ^ ^(S

dd

ssss

g a a a

d d

^ OQ GQ CO CD

dddd

f^ d

1^ 1^ 1^ »«

^ ^ C ^

^ ^ C ^

m^9 m^m am* •

^ f^ c %«

_

S| S i :g:S:S|

i^gdd dddd

0000 0000

3 0000 "**"**'a5

^ddd

u

i^ddd gddd

5525 5555

CO QQ CD n COQQQQa

££££ ££££

8S^

g L
•§ •§ -g

a a a

•^ rt -.

U, h u u*

9 0) 9 fi

3

Si ^

.9 ill

a I a a

1^ 1^4 1^4 L4

« s s s

« 2 Z X

OQ d d

■3 (S •S 'S

I g a I

tei'i<:5H fe^iajci'.: feii^cS-.,- fe-aJci-i >;y;ci->j feii^cS-^

•^u^nSutg TOMjj -MOinSufg •Jtunjj MBjnSmg 'f'^d

THE ACCIDENCE.

17

There are three wayB of expressing degrees of comparison : —
1st. By regular inflexion, as already explained and illustrated.

2nd. By prefixing mehr, more, to express the comparative, and <Mm mskrUen^
or am meUten, most, for the superlative.

3rd. By the use of different words, thus : —

Gut, good; Lesser, better; best^ or am besten, besL

Yiel, much; mehr, more; meist, or am meisten, moet.

Hoch, high; hoher, higher; hochst, or am hochstes^ higheet.

Nahe, n<sar; naher, nearer; nachst, or am naohsten, nearer.

The second mode is employed

(a) When two different qualities of the same object are compared with each
other ; e,g., he is more sad than HI: er iei mehr trcvurig ale krcmk.

(b) When the adjective does not admit of declension.

When the positive ends in d, ty e, m, ech, z, or et, the superlative adds eei,
except in the case of participles ending in end or et.

A List of Adjectiveb.

ahU

fahig.

good

gut.

reculy

bereit.

active

fhatig.

great

gross.

red

roth.

advisable

rathsam.

grate/id

dankbar.

redish

rothlich.

qfiraid

bange.

green

griin.

rigid

Starr.*

aged

bejahrt.

happy

glUcklich.

right

recht.

amwMe

liebenswiirdig.

hard

hart.

rotten

morsch.*

aokgry

hose.

hqreh

harsoh.*

rough

rauh.*

tmxiouB

angstlich.

hasty

hastig.

round

rund.

" bad

schlecht.

healthy

gesund.

rude

roh.»

bald

kahl.»

hollow

hohl>

rugged

schroff.*

beatUifid

schon.

honest

ehrlich.

salt

salzig.

biuer

bitter.

hot

heisa.

satisfied

satt*

black

schwarz.

idle

faul.»

secret

geheim.

Mue

blau.

iU

krank.

sharp

scharf.

hktish

blaulich.

joyful

froh.*

short

kurz.

blunt

stumpf*

just

gerecht.

sUk

seiden.

brave

brav.*

kind

gutig.

slack

schlaff.*

* The vowels a, o, and u are not modified in the comparative and superlative
degrees.

18

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

bfXfWH

braun.

hflme

lahm.*

slender

schlank.*

caiUums

vorsichtig.

lazy

trage.

slow

langsam.

charming

be?»ubern(i

ham,

mager.

smooth

glatt.*

cheap

wohlfeil.

literal

wortlich.

soft

weich, sanft.*

childish

kindisch.

long

lang.

sound

gesiind.

dean

sauber.

loose

lose.

(healthy)

dea/r

klar.

lovely

hold.*

sowr

sauer.

j^lumsy

plump.*

mad

tolL*

straight

gerade.

cold

kalt.

massive

massiv.

strong

stark.

common

gemein.

masterly

meisterhaft.

sweet

siiss.

convenient bequem.

m/can

geizig.

tall

gross.

dangerous gefahrlich.

m>emorable denkwurdig.

tame

zahm.*

dark

dunkeL

metal

metallen.

tender

zart.

dear

theuer.

mild

mild, sanft.*

thick

dick.

diseased

krankhftft.

mindful

eingedenk.

tight

straff,* knapp.*

dreadful

furchtbar.

moderaie

massig.

tired

miide.

dry

trocken.

muddy

schmutzig.

true

wahr.*

dw^(«ow7M£)dump£*

naked

nackt*

vgly

hasslich.

dwmh

stumiD.

neat

sauber.

useful

niitzlicli.

eoffihen

irden.

nice

hiibsch.

variegated bunt.*

elegant

nett

oily

ohlig.

warm

warm.

envious

neidisch.

old

alt.

weak

schwach.

faded

falb w iklil.*

pale

blass.*

weary

matt*

fa^hful

getreu.

paternal

vaterlich.

wet

nass.*

false

felsch.*

patient

geduldig.

wicked

bosbaft.

fast

sclmell.

pious

fromm.

willing

willig.

filial

kindlich.

poUte

artig, hbflich

white

weiss.

fvne

schon.

poor

arm.

wise

weise.

firm

fest.

proud

stolz.*

wooden

hobem.

fUU

flach,* platt.*

prudent

king.

worthy

werth.

foolish

thoricht.

quick

schnell, rasch.

* wrong

irre.

fall

voU.»

rash

Ubereilt.

young

jung.

gold

golden.

raw

roh.*

•

* The Yowels a, Oy and u are not modified in the oomparatiye and superlative
degrees.

J

THE AC

The Ni

CIDENCE.

19

JHERALS.

CardinaU.

f OrdinaU.

1

Ein, eine, ein, or einer.

Iflt,

der eratti.

cine, eines.

2

2nd,

der zweite.

dr«L

3H.

der dritte.

vier.

4th,

der vierte.

funf:

5th,

der fdnfte.

MChfl.

6th,

der sechflte.

rieben.

7th,

der siebente or aiebte.

Mht

Sth,

der ftchte.

neun.

9th,

der neunte.

• 10

Mhn.

10th,

der zehnte.

11

tXioreWl

nth,

der elfte.

12

BWolf.

12th,

der zwolfte.

13

dreizehn.

13th,

der dreizehnt«.

14

vierzeha.

Hth,

der vierzehnte.

15

fiinfzeha.

15th,

der filnfzehiite.

16

sechszehn.

16th,

17

aiebenzehn or mebMhn.

17th,

zehnte.

IS

Bchtzehn.

18th,

der achtzehnte.

19

neuuzehn.

19th,

der neunzehnte.

20

inruizig.

20th,

der zwanzigste.

21

ein und zwanrig.

2lBt,

der ein und zwanzigBte.

22

zwei imd cwaimg, Ac.

30

dP8i«dg.

30th,

der dreiesigste.

40

riewig.

40th,

der vierzigste.

SO

fiinfzig.

50th,

der funfzigBte.

60

8ech«ig.

60th,

der Hechazigst«.

70

siebenrig or mebrig.

70th,

80

Bchtzig.

80th,

90

neunzig.

90th,

der nennzigsta.

100

hundert.

100th,

der hundertste.

101

hundert (und) ein.

lOlrt,

der hundert und erste.

102

hundert (und) zweL

102nd,

der hundert und zweite, ibo.

200

zwei hundert

200th,

300

drei hundert.

SOOtli,

der drei hundertate.

1,000

tftusieiid.

1000th,

10,000

zctiii taiiitc'iid.

100,000

Iiimdf rt tiiu)i<}n(l.

AmWum,

, eine MUliu.i.

Ein tauaend aclit hundert acht iind

Dm tauseiid acht hundert acht und

dreisflig.

drcissigste .lahr.

Observe (a) the units precede the tens, {b) Ein ia u-tually written with a
capital letter; it is rh,tlinf"l like the indefinite article, unless when preceded
by the definite article, in which oisi- it is declined on the 2nd Form, (c) In
counting, one is written eins. {d} The ordinals have the three forms of declen-
sion of adjectives, (e) The ordinals and not the canlinals are used to exprete
the day of the month,

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

PRONOUNS.

Personal.

SiiUjfular.

iV. Ich /. Du thou. Er he. Sie she.

G. Meiner of nie. Deiner of thee, f^mer of him. Ihrer o/ her.

D. Mir to me. Dir to thee. Ihm to him. Ihr to her.

A. Midi me. Dich thee. Ilm him. Sie her.

Es t/.

Seiner of it.

Ihin to t<.

Es it

Plural.

N, Wir we. Ihr

^. Unser o/" U8. Euer

/>. Uns to us. Euch

^. Una t«. Euch

Possessive.
M.d^N. Fern.
mein meine
dein deine
Rein seine
ihr ihi*e
unser unsere
euer euere
ihr ihre

yon.
of you.
to you.
you.

Sie they.
Ihrer of them.
Ihnen to them.
Sie them.

• • •

Demonstrative.

my.

thy.

his or its.

her.

our.

your.

their.

dieser*

jener*

der

derjeniget

derselbet

solcher

jeder*

mancher*

diese

jene

die

diejenige

dieselbe

solche

jede

manche

dieses
jenes

thiSf the latter,
that, the former.

J . . I that, the one.
dasjenige j

dasselbe
seiches
jedes
manchefi

the same,
such.

each, every,
many cl

Disjunctive Pronouns

Are formed by adding the syllable ige to the possessive, thus :

der meinige die meinige das meinige

der deinige die deinige das deinige

der seinige die seinige das seimge

&c. &c. &c.

but instead of der meinige, &c., it is more common to say der meine, &c,
or meiner, &c., omitting the article.

mine
thine
his

The Conjoined Possessive Pronouns
Are inflected like the indefinite article, thus :

Singular.
N. mein Bruder
G. meines BruderS
D. meinem Bruder
A. raeinen Bruder

my brother,
of m.y brother,
to my brother,
my brother.

Plwral.

meine Bruder

meiner Briider

meinen Briiderll

meine Briider

my brother,
of my brother,
to my brother,
my brother.

The Relative Pronoun.

Masc.
iV. welcher

G. dessen
/>. wciciiem

A. welchen

SivgfiJnr.
Fern.
welche

deren

welcher
welche

yeut.
welches

dessen

welchem*
welches

Pbind.
J/. F. d: N.
welche

deren

welchen
welche

who, which.

• Are declined like the definite article.

t The article prefix varies with each case, and their termination is declined like' the
adjective. Form 2.

THX AOCIDXirCV.

The Intebhooativx Pronouk.

(Used with a

Substantive i

following.)

Singular,

Plural.

Afase,

Fern,

NeuL

M.KikN.

N.

welcher

welchO

welches

welche \

G.

welches

welchor

welches

welcher f

D,

welchexn

welcher

welchem

welchen 4

A.

welchen

welche

welches

welche J

21

which.

The Definite Article,
When used as a relative pronoun, is declined thus :

Singular. Plural.

Mage, Fern, Neat. M. F. d: X.

N, der die das die.

^. dessen deren dessen deren.

D, dem der dem deiieil.

A. den die das die.

The Demonstrative *'Der,''

When used instead of dieser, jener, or derjenige, and when not accompanied
by a substantive, is declined thus :

Singular. Plural,

M. F, N,

N. der die das that, die those,

G. dessen deren dessen of that. derer of those.

D. dem der dem to that. denen to those.

A. den die das that, die those.

Indefinite, Relative, and Interrogative.

X. wer who. was u)hat

G. wessen, or wess whose. wessen, or wess of what,

D. wem to whom,

A. wen whom. was whai,

N.B. — ^This pronoun is also used as a relative when the English "who"
does not refer to a noun previously mentioned ; e,g. :

I know who has done that. Ich weiss, wer das gethan hat.

Indefinite Pronouns.

einer sovne one, nichts nothing.

keiner no one, man one, they, people,

jemand somebody/, anybody, selbst, selber self, itsdf, even.

niemand no body. jedermann every one,

etwas, was something.

The personal pronouns in the oblique cases are also used as reflective
pronouns, except the third persons singular and plural, which are declined
as follows :

G, seiner of himself, or itself. ihrer of herself ihrer of themselves,
D. sich to himsdf or itself, sich to herself. sich to thetfiselves,

A. sicli himself, or if^elf sich herself. sich themjtehnis.

(' *>

22

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

The Auxiliary Verb "To have."

Infinitive,
baben to Juive.

gebabt baben to have Jiad.
baben werden to he about to have.

Pa/rticiples,
habend having. gebabt had.

Indicative.

Present.

.S'l

>jijbjunctive.

(1) Icb babe

/ have.

Icb babe

I may have

Du St

thou hast.

Ihi

— est

thou ,y

Kr — t

he Jias,

Er

— e

lui

Wir — ben

we have.

Wir

— en

we „

Ibr bt

you have.

Ibr

et

you „

Sie — ben

thty have.

Sie
Imperfect.

— en

tliey „

(2)* batte

had.

batte

might have.

— est

— est

>♦

— e

— e

>»

— .en

— en

>»

— et

— et

11

— en

Perfect.

— en

)f

(3) gebabt have had.

•

gebabt

might have had.

(Prefix present tense

.)

(Prefix present tense.)

(4) gebabt had had.

(Prefix imperfect tense.)

Phiperfect.

gebabt migJU have had.
(Prefix imperfect tense.)

(5)

>»

»>

>>

M

(6)

(7)

First Ftiture.
shall hai'^. werde baben shall have.

— est

— e

— en

— et

— en
Second Future.

werde gebabt baben shaU have had. \ werde gebabt babc^n shaU have had.
(Repeat as in 5. ) (Repeat as in 5.)

First Conditional..
wiirde baben should hare.

— est

— e

werde baben
wirat
wird
werden

— et

— en

»

— en

— ot

— en

>>

M

»»

>»

>»

fP)

Second Conditional.
wiirde gebabt baben shouUl hare had.
Repeat (7) with gchabt.
Imperative.
babe (du) have (tliou).

— er let him have.

— en wir let us hare.

— t (ibr) have ye.

— en sie let them hai^.

* Prefix the appropriate pronoun throughout.

THE A0C1D£N(*E.

23

The Auxiliary Vekb "To be.'

Infinitive.
Sein to he.

Gewesen uein to have been.
Sein wenlen to he about to he.

Particijdts,
Seiend heiiiy. Gewesen been.

Indicative,

Subjunctive.

Present.

♦bin

am

sei niaj/ be.

bist

art

seist mayst be.

Lit

is

sei inay be.

sind

are

seien „

seid

ty

seiet ,y

sind

»

*

Imperfect.

seien „

war

imis

ware laiyht be.

— cat (at) „

— est

>»

— e

— en

>»

— en

— et

>»

— et

— en

ft

Perfect.

— en

gewesen

(Prefix the present tense.)
Pluperfect.

- geweseu

geweseu

(Prefix the imperfect tense.)
First Future.

gewesen

werde sein

shall he.

werde sein si

wirst „

- ■ est ,y

wird „

— e n

werden „

— en „

— et „

et „

— en „

— en „

shall be.

Second Future.
werde gewesen sein shall have been. werde gewesen sein

First Conditional.

shall have been.

wiirde sein

— est

— e

I should he.

>>

— en

— et

— en

»>

j>

>»

>>

it

>>

Second Conditional.
wiirde gewesen sein slundd have been.

Imperative.
sei (du) be (thou).

sei er let him be.

seien wir let us he,
seid (ihr) be (ye).
seien sie let them be.
* Prefix the appropriate pronoun throughout

24

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

The Eegular Verb

Active.

Lobe.u to prcdge.

Gelobt haben to have praised.
Loben werden to be about to praise.

Lobend
Gelobt

praising.,
praised.

InduxUive.

PreseiU.

SvJtjmictive.

lobe I praise.
— est (lobst)

lobe / may praise.
— est

— -t

— e

— en

— en

— et (lobt)

— et

— en

— en

lobte / praised.
— est

Imperfect.

lobte / might praise.

'— est

— e

— e

— en

— en

— et

— - et

— en

— en

babe gelobt / have praised.

hatte gelobt / had praised.

werde loben / shall praise.

Perfect.

habe gelobt / may have praised.

Pluperfect.

hatte gelobt / might have praised.

First FtUure.

werde loben / sIuM praise.

Second Fviure.
werde gelobt haben / shall have werde gelobt haben / shall have

praised. praised.

First Conditional.
wiirde loben / sh(mld praise.

Second C&iidUiomd.
wiirde gelobt haben / should have praised.

Imperative.
Lobe (du) praise {thou).
Lobe er let him praise.
Loben wir let vs praise.
Lobet (ihr) praise ye.
Loben sie let them praise.

THE ACCIDENCE.

25

I/>BKN, to praise*

Passive.

(Jelobt werden to he praised,

Gelobt worden sein to /uive beeti praised.

Werden gelobt werden to be about to he praised,

Gelobt worden heta praised.

Iiulicative.
werde gelobt / am praised.

Suhjunctlre.
Present.

weixle gelobt / may he praise*1.

wiirde gelobt / was praised.

Imperfect.

wiirde gelobt / might he jtraiscd.

Perfect.

bin gelobt worden / /uive heen sei gelobt worden / may have been

praised, 7^at>e(/.

Pliq)erfect.

war gelobt worden / Jiad heeti wiii-e gelobt worden / might Iiave heen

praised. ' praised.

First Future.

werde gelobt werden / sJudl he wcixle gelobt werden / shall be praised.

praised.

Second Future.

werde gelobt worden sein / shall Juive werde gelobt worden sciu 7 shall have

heen praised. heen praised.

First Conditiojud.
wiirde gelobt werden / s/MuId he praised.

Second Conditional.
wiirde gelobt worden sein I should luive heen praised.

ImpercUive.
werde (du) gelobt he thou praised.
werde er gelobt let him he praised.

werden wir gelobt let us he praised.
wei*det (ihr) gelobt he (jye) praised.
weixlen sie gelobt let them be praised.

26

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

Werden, To become.

Infinitive.

Werden

to become.

Greworden sein to have become.

Werden werden to be about to become.

Participles,

Werdend becoming. Gewoi-den becatne.

Indicative.

Subjunctive.

•

Present.

werde

/ become.

werde / may become.

wirat

werdest

wird

werde

irerdeu

werdeu

et

et

— en

- en
I'mper/ect.

wurde

I became.

wiirde / wight become.

— est

— est

— e

— e

— eu

— en

— et

et

— eu

— en
Perfect.

jin geworden / have become.

sei geworden / may have be-

come.

Pluperfect,
war geworden / had become, ware geworden /• might have

become.

First Future,
werde werden / shaU become, werde werden / shall became.

Second Future.
werde geworden sein / shall have werde geworden sein / shall have

become. become.

First Conditional,
Ich wiirde werden / shotdd become.

Second Conditional,
Ich wiirde geworden sein / should have become.

Imperative,
Werde (du) become (thou), Werden wir let its become.

Werde er let him become, Werdet (ihr) become ye,

Werden sie Jet them become

THE ACCIDENCE.

27

WoLLEN, To be ivilling.

Indicative.

Ich will.

— 8t

wollen.

— et (t).

— en.

FreseiU.

SuJbjunctive,

Ich wolle.

— est.

— e.

— en.

— et

— en.

wollte.

Imperfect

wollte.

habe gewollt.

hatte gewollt.

werde wollen.

Per/ed.

Pluperfect.

First Future.

habe gewollt.

hatte gewollt.

werde wollen.

Second Future.

werde gewollt haben.

werde gewollt haben.

First Conditional.
wiirde wollen.

Second Conditional.
wiirde gewollt haben.

Note 1. This auxiliary is never used to denote future time.

2. It expresses will, intention, inclination.

3. It is often used elliptically : e.g., er will eSy it is his u>ilL

4. When future time is intended, the word " will," in such sentences
as, He will do it, They will go, must be rendered by the verb werden, and not
by wollen.

28

THE PRACTICAL UNOUI8T.

SoLLEN, To be obUged (shall).

Indicative.

Ich soil.
— st.

Present,

— en.

— et (t).

— en.

Subjunctive,

Ich Bolle.

— est.

— e.

— en.

— et.

— en.

Imperfect.

sollte.

sollte.

Perfect.
habe gesollt habe gesoUt.

Pluperfdct.
hatte gesollt hatte gesollt

First Future.
werde soUen. werde sollen.

Second Future,
werde gesollt haben. werde gesollt haben.

First Conditional,
wiirde sollen.

Second ConditionaL
wiirde gesollt haben.

The dominant idea in the word ''sollen" is action produced by external force,
moral or otherwise, as opposed to simple yolition ; therefore the sentence, '' I
Bhall do it^" must be rendered by " Ich werde es thun," for the German, " Ich soil
es thun," means ''I am to do it" For the same reason '' Shall I do it ? '* is
translated by '' Soil ich es thun)" and the sentences, '' I was to do it," '' He is
to go," " Am I to have it 1 " "I ought to do it," by " Ich sollte es thun,"
" Er soil gehen," " Soil ich es haben 1 " " Ich sollte es thun.''

" He," or " it, is said to be " is translated by " Er soil sein."

In conditional sentences the contingent future is expressed by " sollen :" e.g^,
" If he should come, I wiU tell him so," '' Wenn er kommen sollte, so will ich
es ihm sagen."

The word " can," in questions implying doubt or surprise, is also rendered
by " sollen :" e.g., " Can that be true 1 " " Sollte das wahr sein ? "

THE AOCIDEHCE.

29

ICH

KANN, / caf^y am i
/lenitive.

able.

Kiinnen to be able.

Gekonnt habeu to have been able.

Participle.

Crekonnt been able.

Indicative.

Present.

Subjunctive.

Icli kann.

Ich kiinue.

— St.

— est.

konneii.

e.
— eu.

— et.

— et.

— eu.

Imperfect.

— en.

konnte.

Perfect.

konnte.

habe gekouut.

Pluperfect.

habe gekonnt.

hatte gekonnt.

First FvJture.

hatte gekonnt

werde konnen.

Second Futwe.

werde kiinnen.

werde gekonnt haben.

weixle gekonnt haben.

First Conditional.
wiirde konnen.

Second Coiruiitionol.
wiirde gekonnt haben.

Icu Muss, / must, am obliged,
Ii^niiivef miissen.

Indicative.

Prese^U.

Subjunctive.

Ich mnss.

Ich musse.

— t.

— est.

A

miissen.

— en.

— et.

— et.

— en.

— en.

musste

Imperfect.

miisste.

habe gemusst
hatte gemusst

Perfect.
Pluperfect
First Future.

habe^musst
hatte gemusst.

werde miissen

Second Future.

werde miissen.

werde gemusst

haben

werde gemusst haben.

First Conditional.
wiirde miissen.

Second CandiiumaL
wiirde gemusst haben.

30

THE PBACTICAL UNOUI8T.

MOOEN,

To be able.

Ind, Frea. Ich mag, / may.

Stbbj. Ich moge.

— St.

— est.

—

— e.

mogeu.

— en.

— t (et).

— et.

— en.

— en.

Imp/.

mochte.

mochte.

Per/.

babe geiuocht.

habe gemocht.

Pluperf.

hatte geiuocht.

hatte gemocht.

First FvJt.

werde mogen.

werde mbgen.

Second Fui,

. werde gemocht

haben.

werde gemocht haben.

First Conditio7ial. wiirde mogen.
Second Conditional, wiirde gemocht haben.

DuRFEN, To be permitted, allowed , to dare.

Subj. Ich diirfe.

— est.

— e.

Ind. Pres. Ich darf, / dare.

— St.

ImpJ.

Per/.

Pluperf.

diirfen.

— t (et).

— en.
dnrfbe.
habe gedurft.

hatte gedurfl.
First Fut. werde diirfen.
Second Fut. werde gedurft haben.

First ConditioncU. wiirde diirfen.

Second Conditional. wiirde gedurfb haben.

— en.

— et.

— en.
diirfte.

habe gedurft.
hatte gedurft.
werde diirfen.
werde gedurft haben.

Lassen, To let, make, order.
Ind. Pres. Ich lasse, / let, SidjQ. Ich lasse.

Impf.
Perf.
Pluperf.
First FuJt.

lassest.

lasst.

lassen.

— et (t).

— en.
liess.

habe gelassen.
hatte gelassen.

— est.

— e.

— en.

— et.

— en.
Hesse.

habe gelassen.
hatte gelassen.
werde lassen.
werde gelassen haben.

werde lassen.
Second Fut. werde gelassen haben.

First ConditioncU. wiirde lassen.
Second Conditional, wiirde gelassen haben.
ImpercUive. Lass (du), Lasse er, Lassen wir, Lassct (ihr), Lassen sie.

THE ACCIDENCE.

31

COMPOUND VERBS.

ere are two kinds of Compound Verbs, the SEPARABLis and the inseparable.

rhe Separable Verbs commonly begin with one of the prepasitions ab, off ;

on ; auf, up ; aus, out ; bei, by ; bevor, before ; in, in ; ein, in ; mit, tci^A /
h, afier ; vor, before; zu. <o, &c. ; or one of the adverbs da, dar, there; fort,

avoay ; weg, avcay ; ohne, rjoi^hout ; hin, along ; fehl, wrong, mis; loa,
re, off, avxiy fromii you ; or nieder, down, downwards,

Ik>mpound Verbs formed by the prepositions durch, hinter, Uber, um,
er, are sometimes separable, at others inseparable, according as the accent
►n the particle or on the verb.

EXAMPLES OF SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS.

A ctive.

Anfanoen, To begin.

Subjunctive.
Present.

Tn/licative.

I begin, dec.

Ich fange an.
Du fangst an.
Er fangt an.
Wir fangen an.
Ihr fangt an.
Sie fangen an.

Ich fing an.

Ich habe angefangen.

Imperfect.

Perfect,

If I begin, dec.

Ich fange an.
Du fangest an.
Er fange an.
Wir fangen an.
Ihr fanget an.
Sie fangen an.

Ich finge an.

Ich habe angefangen.

Pluperfect,
Ich hatte angefangen. Ich hatte angefangen.

First Future.
Ich werde anfangen. Ich werde anfangen.

Second Future.
Ich werde angefangen haben. Ich werde angefangen haben.

First Conditional.
Ich wiLrde anfangen.

Second Conditional.
Ich wiirde angefangen haben.

32 THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

Imperative.
Fange (du) an, <&c.

Infinitive.

Anfangen.
Angefangen Imben.
Anfangen werden.

Participles.

Anfangend.
Angefangen.

Passive.
Aboesetzt werden, To be discharged.

Indicative. Subjunctive.

Present.
Ich werde abgesetzt. Ich werde abgesetzt.

Imperfect.
Ich wurde abgesetzt. Ich wiirde abgesetzt.

Perfect.
Ich bin abgesetzt worden. Ich sei abgesetzt worden.

Pluperfect.
Ich war abgesetzt worden. Ich ware abgesetzt worden.

First Future.
Ich werde abgesetzt werden. Ich werde abgesetzt werden.

Second FtUure.
Ich werde abgesetzt worden sein. Ich werde abgesetzt worden sein.

First ConditioTud.
Ich wiirde abgesetzt werden.

Second Conditional.
Ich wiirde abgesetzt worden sein.

THE ACCIDENCE.

33

NevJter,

AusGEHEN, To go otU.

IndiccUive.

Svbjunctive,

Present.

I go out, d:c,

Ich gehe aus.

gehst —

geht —

gehen —

gehet (or t) —

gehen —

If I go outy etc.
Ich gehe aus.
—est —

— en —
— et —
— en —

Imperfect

ging aus.

ginge aus.
—est —

Perfect

bin ausg^^angen.

sei ausgegangen.

Pluperfect.
war ausgegangen. ware ausg^angen.

First Future,
werde ausgehen. werde ausgehen.

Second Future.
werde ausgegangen sein. werde ausgegangen sein.

First and Second Conditional.
wUrde ausgehen. wiirde ausgegangen sein.

ImpercUive,
gehe aus, kc

Participles.

ausgehend, going out

ausg^angen, gone out.

N.6. — ^The separable particle stands at the end of the sentence in the
imperative, in the present and imperfect, unless the sentence b^^ins with a
relative or a conjunction. The conjunctions und, oder, aber, allein, sondem,
and deun are, however, exceptions.

34

THE PRACTICAL LINCUI8T.

00

o
o

6

4)

•

•

M

^

J

«2

^

•^

^

^

fl a)
g $

CO

;^

O O
4) 0>

&

a

JO

•—4 Mt

a—'
s

I— ^

:o

«

^ J

-s

I ii

a

o o

-^ a

rd ^ ja

o

H

►

ad
o

s

o
:e«

Xi

M .2 :5

^ '^ '^

• IH «i «^

d
d

P

2
I

1

1

b€

d

d

^4

•

d

o

O

s

<u

^

Xi ^ Xi ^

J&

4^

bO

&

0)

bl

d

d d

Xi ja
be bo

bo

be ^.

<W •!-* "F^ •»- 'F^

^ X ,d ^ ^

-2s 2

■»» OS

■

1

£

4*

cl

•?

O

o
o

bO

■♦3

x>

xi
o

9

bp Q» Q) $ Q>

^ bb-S d .2 » o o

5 :§^:o :S iS :d ;d ;i:

xui^^dx^x ^^

bo

8

S g-o 3 fl5:d ;5 ;3
xxpd^xx rd^

bo

■^"

^

^1

o

•«3
CO

d

00 ^ ^

d «*5 ^
d &"§)«; ^

^ ^ O X X X
^ o o o o

d ". -^ S'

X

X

o

X

i I

Its

1= M

JpqS

I ^

I

I <B

' •»4

i

o S

XX

X X ^

o o o

a>

or

X
o

-^.S if

■§

o

-g

:3

3

X

S^^^

o
•XI

I

^aaa

•^ i

^5 5^

"M

11*3

o o o o

■«iA "M -ViA "M

t

7i O a

fSt > ^ ^
PQ PQ PQ

§1
PQ PQ

qd

d

.9 *

d §
J.?

d

4>

d 5

(§•■''1(2 (S

d

\P '^ 'f^ "FM "M ^^

pqpqpqpqpQ

d ©

. Cl

S3 S

C3 "

a'

•-s

THE ACCIDENCE.

35

a

I

en Tp © © © ©

So Sb 60 So 60 tfi

1 1
11

2
B

0)

o

5

<*3

S3

•g 2-2 SJii

»& ^ »A 'U TS n?

3

§

S3

3*3

0)

©

■«3

I

s.

a

>

30

©

^

^ 45 p d Q i-d Zr-«ri S^ d *'

2.g| 2=g:S:§|:g|:
o o o ^ o o o

•^^ t^ '^i^ '^ '^ 'iH 'IH

»4

_ -d

i

i

p2

rd

•g

>
•4

^

a

I

d

t

-■3
I

B

.a

I

o

e

49
If

d "—
^ g

o

.2

I

■e !i ^ ^:

'o o o o o o

9 >fft

5^5

d

I

mm

PQ

^ g -C § .3 2 X :d

S^ d £j

'^ t* e®

.5 d a

d
&• jS ^

a

d

2

:d

Sdl

•I

o
-g

d
d V

^ pd

HpqEc^pqpE^Ec^^Ec) ^^

36

THE FRA.CnOAL LIK0UI8T.

I

o

6

I

S.
B

00

3

8

I

I

v s

^

b

;l3

"8

II

_ O C3 © _
U) bC ttO tdD &« 60

o

I 1

^

J

111

<S tin CO

1

1

:l

_ ® 9 :o :3 ^
«M <fl ca <•-• <4-i (Q

:o

^

iS

1

•I

«C <fl ^ ^ <S ^
c5 o o o o o

I

•s

:i

1

s

I

I

I

O

d

8

I

I

252223

«!. I I

I
I

I

•8

►

I

THE AOdBBKCE.

«7

3.

04

«)&&&

i

w f3 a

So bo Sd

toSo &

eS O «

3 d

o ^

&

i

Is

itill

3

C8 O Q

I

■g

5

■1=3 ill

-0,1)% & &

• M (^ tM •M 'P^

w tn 5

•p^ •^ :o

'So'Sd'S)

O O Q

•^ •iH •F^

.a .15 ^ :g

5d^ ^ .jq

^ ^ ^ ^ ^
.2 .S .2 .2 3

►

n

tiC tdO 66
000

^1 eg I ;SS |>

i

I i"!^ § I

«• •^ •»i« •^ '^ ••■4

2 -8 1

O U O O

08 «

»4

U4

9

flT 'o 'd -r

M

e2

0)

^^

<&

a

•3

00

fl^:§m:l'*:SII

H

^

dill 1st *l

4^

s*

35o

1 6

il

-8

■S S

J

1

il

ti

•c ^

a
.25

4) S
3 ®

s s

D 2

38

THE PRACTICAL LIN0UI8T.

bOtti

3

o

t

M

It

i

fl
®

.g

d

& Sd

So & & Sd

O d) o
tMD to bo

^

S.-

M

5

S ;2 ;S ;S a a -.*

-g -§ -§ -S -S -3 -s

IS

o

^

^

-s

2

.2

:o

•s

-s

::: *^ ;:: ;3

O O P Q

■I

till

5-3 -3.

^ lii^ J^ ^ ^ (i^

o

M

S

Q p o o o

• M *r4 '^ '^ t^

g-s-s

-^1

^ ;5 ;=!

^

o

-s-g-s-s

•^ 'rt "^ 'F^

OOP

•«3

o

•J --13

f>4

f

00 '^

00 000

a

c

9

o
^

a

5

^^

d d ^ P d S o

:§ -n

M

M

§

d
.0

gg

TBS AOCIDBNCB.

39

L

i i

11

to to

&0

■4^

B

to

a

B

o

So

-2' ^

a Ph
tc tc

to bo

a

^

^

g>

So

a

§

0)

to to bO

•E S

o

to

1

O 9

a a

a

•a

a

ha

^k

P4

•3

'I?

■«a rS •IS .Ti P

e £ & g £

•■g

0) Q>

a a a

a

•s

•S

a

Si

P ^

& i

0)

P- a^

g

"Ci

^ 'S .4 ^ ^ ^ ^

O O V o o o

s

•SI

-g-g

a
-g

a

o

a p^
p p

•g

•^1

MM
p p

•S '^ » « r

I.

p p p p p p

p

a

53

'd :o g^ «'

is

a

•i ^

p

:3

P^

Si''

CD "TJ

7i

U4

P

p

OB

CO "XJ
^ P

P^ .2 ^

P

I

P

■s

=2 \i ^ ^ ^,

-§ !3 !S ^ S3
- - ^ -. P*^

P UP P

i.4S :| 1i ^ 1 1 -^ S

2 £ ^ S £

■g-g-g-g-g

*^^ 'fH 'M "fH »f^

I

55

9d

•S5

1

O
>0

I

■s

•i.r

5S

p p

g
3

1^

d
p

a

■g
;z5

g

S

Is-

£

g s

Is

g

g d

S ^ p d p

fd rS .p ."^ d

pq p^ pq pq pq

rS

40

THB PSACnCAL LINGUIST.

9

a

I

I

u

L

to

I-
s.

s

1
c

•3

n

1

a>

OB S r^ ®

S 8 8

e
8 |00

I,!-

a

.8

a>

4) ^-K

'S I 'C '8

P p

P 9 O .^-^ -J
I .§ ^ ^ :S

POP P

»m* 'S '^ .M

i! I

:0

1

P

P

1

•I

P

T 8

p p

^'3

ri

P P r3
o o o

g

.a .a

8

1

f

II 1

p

P ^

11

:i:a

s

•fVt

a

p

I

i fT

p

p

p

d i3

ee* as*

S S

® p

&

4" si

•5? 'f^ (U

I I

p p

id

Si

.1

3

-g

i«^ii^a

I

P o

8;S8

P

J ^ ^ 3 -^U*

THE AOQIDBKOB.

41

t

4<

i

a

>

S

I

-I

S a

8|

■s

^

60

«o 60 e« M)

a „

III

c«

&o

I

il&li'^l'l|-'2|JSS§
•9. fb-s-a XM S«.£i S^^ua.fi.ct

.1

1

Si's

^l^ll^lllll

1 -s

SJ 5 8

:t a> « ^ :o

'2'CX'C ^
iS p^ tS j^ M

w n 2 OB 2
« V 2 « «

I

0)

I

1

1

:! :!

3° 9

a> Q> :^

o

1

M J^ M M ^
2 2 2 2 S

o

a

^Mjcij::

s .s .s .a .s

§-9

-g

1 1

as

a«|<gj

Si

I E

Sil

•3-3

1

« r73 a

'^-fl

SJSsi

■S2

^a

I

og

p£3
OQ

9 a

-« 8c

Si Si

•s-s

'O 5c

.a .9

§ :2:i :3*:2:§ :sJH.a*:l J^l 1.1

II

■sa

0}

42

THE P&ACnCAL LINGUIST.

s

•I

o
to

^ d

W) to tc

■MM 3h CT^

$ S S
tiO tc &tO

o

30

0)
CO

S Ob n

^ O ® 0)

• {H (M 'fS 'H
OO GO CD QQ

•a

5

(0

CO

a d

CO OQ

'El cu

00 00

■l

O d

CO OO

« CO

1

a

>

o

a

f

QQ

=9 5 »

^ ^ ^ d :S

00 Q *n 2 ^

Q C> V O

I

® ® © x-v

•3 :5 ^5 :S d
00 00 CO a .Q

^ ^ ^ ^ >£.^ ^ ^

o o

OOP

>4'

d

2 d -S^

^ ^^ d 3

00 'S s s ^

p p p p

p

•» -1^

p p p p

p p p

8 I

d

9

d

•T °°
• 9 P

P

-1^

M
2

•a
&

I ^ ^^

^'S d-^ .
S ^'^-^

p p p

*"§
.9

d^
,^ ^

P 0)
00 gg

-S.fa d
.^ ^.p

p

00

^- &>■ ^ ^

• od od 00
" d Ef ^

S13

^ 00
CO, p

HH «. _. p-

•^ f I ^- S,J2 §

'•:?» S^ d d d

^ -M © 00 w " 00

*a^ m^ m^

_ P

d d qT

OO 00 Co GO OQ

^ ^ ^ s^^ ^

p c3 p p p

u

p

I

•c

^. "
OO d

d-S

00 CO M 00 OQ

$ ^ V

■•A "M <«5

55^5

1

•■§41

555

•M 8

55

1:1

55

-g
QQ

g

^ d.9

p p p

mmm

d d d d

o P V P

S d d S

• iH "M 'p^ '^ii*

OQOQCQaS

- - "S

QQ QQ QQ

d
p

g

GQOQ

g

QQQQ

p P
QQQQ

TBB AOdDSKCB.

43

I

QO

Ills?

Sd W) &0 t€ U

d
if

S>

!

•I

OQ

"to "«

■I
•I

9

^

■11:3

if

I

i

a

t

CO

.2 .S .3

•^

p p

1^5 S)^

a s ^j -«j ^
p p p p p

1 1

'St

o

II

s

2

I PI

00 f^ OQ

s

00

•1^ p"

•Sis

•c g

•»^ "^ •M '^ "i-^ 'P^ "^ "iH 'fH "M "iH '^ "^ '^

II

•f'S

-s

ad

I

I

•g

&

•g

g

oj

P

I

4" oT-^

^ p p p

*

53-5

lit:

-g -g -^ -g -g -^ "g -g ^-g

P 'S ^

'3

^ I

•• So

I in

r

OQ

§

OQ

00 09

S
•J

00

£ 2

a Is

I -III

•r* •? n 'H

Ml

Jw p p

h f4 ^

OOP

H >-^t>

44

THE P&AOTIGAL UVOUIST.

I

I

B

B

>

S

I

1

-s

lis

^ ^ ►

o

•s-s

to

•a

•ill
111

I

I

I

5
1

o o

> >

%

S -3 -S-S "i

II

11

1

111

►

•a

► .; ^
5s « ^

-1i|

I'l^i^'m

I

-g

I

^.a

1|
"11

S

1

>

I

P4

I

!

a

(

•a
t

1

■^

THE AOGZDXVOB.

II

!

I

-a

►
GO

.49

^5

5

•a S

•9

i

ad's
P

o «

d

d

gs

.a J

'S

rS-g

^^

^

eStS

>v— •^w.^

46

THE PHACnCAL LtETOUIST.

THE ADVERB.

Adverbs are indeclinable, but adverbs of manner and quality, together with
a few others, have degrees of comparison, which are formed in the same way
as those of adjectives.

Adverbs are frequently formed from verbs, adjectives, or substantives, by
the addition of the syllable, idhj lioh., or baft, and most adjectives expressing

ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL

PHRASES OF TIME.

cUready

schon.

never

nie.

»

bereits.

99

niemals.

always

immer.

now

jetzt.

99

stets.

9»

nun.

>»

allezeit.

not long ago

kiirzlich.

at last

endlich.

II

vor kurzem.

at the same time

zugleich.

now and then

dann iind waun.

at the soonest

ehestens.

not yet

noch nicht

at the longest

langstens.

often

bfters.

at that time

damals.

II

oft.

n

zu der Zeit.

II

oftmals.

be/ore

zuvor.

once

einst.

early

frUh.

one day

II

ever

je.

sometimes

bisweilen.

»

jemals.

II

zuweilen.

formerly

vormals.

II

mitunter.

»

ehedem.

II

manchmal.

»

ehemals.

soon

bald.

)>

sonst.

the day before

Iienceforth

fortan.

yesterday

vorgestem.

91

forth in.

Hie day after

hitherto

bisher.

to-morrow

ubermoigen.

immediately

sogleich.

to-morrow

morgien.

late

spat.

to-day

heute.

lately

neulich.

ifien

j^sLtin.

long ago

laiigst.

wlie7if

wann 1

meanwhile

indessen.

yesterday

gestem.

»

inzwischen.

yet

noch.

Morgens

)

Mittags \

des Morgens

> in tJte morning.

des Mittags v

at mid-day.

am Morgen

)

am Mittage )

Vormittags

Al>ciids \

des Vormittags

> in the forenoon.

des Abends >

in the evening.

am Vormittage

)

am Abende )

NachmittagE

' )

Naclits \

des Nachmittags ^ in the cfterruxm.

des Nachts >

in the night.

am Nachmittagc

> )

bei Nacht i

■

THE ACCIDENCE.

47

OF PLACE.

1

abwesend.

near

nahe.

>und

rings umher.

nowhere

nirgends.

d me

um mich her.

on the right

rechts.

him

„ ihn „

„ ¥t

links.

U8

„ uns „

„ way

unterw^es.

vom.

out

hinaus.

I

hinten.

out here

heraus.

hinab.

present

. gegenwartig.

hinunter.

somewhere

irgendwo.

here

herab.

there

da.

\ere

anderswo.

■

dort

oltiCre

Uberall.

thither

bin.

y

allenthall^en.

up

hinau£

fern.

up here

herauf.

weit.

toithin

drinnen.

hier.

unthotU

draussen.

her.

where

wo.

i

herein.

whence

woher.

hinein.

whither
Miscellaneous.

wohin.

t

beinahe.

moreover

iibrigens.

fast.

no

nein.

iher

ganz und gar.

not

nicht.

al8.

not at all

gar nicht.

wie.

othenmse

anders.

at

wenig8ten.H.

perhaps

vielleicht

schlecht

probably

wahrscheinlich.

Ubel.

99

vermuthlidu

'means

allerdings. .

partly

theiL).

means

keinesweges.

scarcely

kaum.

rdy

gewiss.

surely

sicherlich.

rh

genug.

shortly f in short

kurz.

hj

ganz.

so

so.

ganzlich.

there/ore

danim.

aUy

besonders.

thus J so

also.

nely

Uberaus.

too

zu.

\y 80

gerade so.

truly

wahrlich.

gut.

tvell

wohl.

'v

grossartig.

99

gut.

r

umsonst.

unllingly

gem.

y

schwerlich.

when

als.

wie.

m

II

wie. •

d

wirklich.

wholly

ganz.

freUich.

wherefore

wessw^^en.

in der That.

yes

ja-

in

umsonst

48

THE FRACTIGAL LXKaUIBT.

PREPOSITIONS.

THE FOLLOWING OOYERN THE GEKITITB CUBE.

cuscording to laut.

abdve, on the upper side oberhalb.

by means of
by dint of
below

by the power of
during

/or the eake of
instead of

9»

vermittelst.

vennbge.

unterhalb.

kraft.

wahrend.

um — ^willen.

statt.

anstatt.

not far from
notwithstanding
on account of

»

99

on this side of

on the other side of

within

without

unweit

ungeacbtet

wegen.

balbeiL

balber.

diesseitB.

jenseits.

innerbalb.

auaserfaalbb

GOYERK THE DATIVE.

after f to, according to

nacb.

out of, from

auB.

aty to

zu.

out of, besides

auRRer.

by, near

beL

opposite to

entgegen.

conformable

gemass.

over ctgainst

gegeniiber.

contrary to

zuwider

since

seit.

in

in.

together unth

nebst.

next

nacbst.

» .

sammt.

»

zunachst.

unth

mit.

of from, by

VOIL

within

binnen.

OOVEBN THE

ACCUSATIVE.

around

um.

tiU

bia

by, through

durcb.

to, towards, against

g^ion or g^u

/or

fiir.

unthout

obna

in, into

in.

99

Bonder.

GOVERN THE GENITIVE AND DATIVE.

in consequence qf zufolge. in spite of

trots.

before, ago
behind
below, under,

amnong
between

GOVERN THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE.

vor. beside,atthe side qf neben.

binter. in, into in.

on, near an.

unter. over, at iiber.

zwiscben. upon, on auf.

The following take the dative in answer to tbe question " wbere V wben
indicating a state of rest, and tbe accusative in answer to tbe question

THX AOOIDBKCB.

40

itherf** with a. yierb denoting direction or motion from one place to
ber.

iriih dat) at
irith ace.) to.

upon, an.
behind.

in in, cU,

in (with ace.) into.
neben near, beside.
$r Oehtna, vor be/are, (xgo.

B. — ^The following contractions are in frequent

^or an dem at the. durch's ^br

to the Yom

into the. Tor*B

in the. iiber*B

into (motion). znm

„ an das
,, aof das

9t

9f

in dem
in das

99
99

bei dem near the (reet).

zor

»

Uber over, across.
unter (place) under.
unter (number) among.
zwischen between.

use.

durch das through the.
Yon dem from the (dat)
Tor das btfore the.
iiber das aerou the.
zu dem to the.
zu der to the.

dingly
thai

ugh

ince, when

jenachdenL

nachdeuL

auch.

wie auch.

wiewohL

und.

als.

wia

CONJUNCTIONS.

in etue that

99

in case that, if

»»

in order that

99

namely
nevertheless, still

ince

da.
gleicbwie.

99

moe, whilst

indem.

notwithstanding

vr <u

ab.

since

t

so weit.

99

1

wiefem.

stm

ng <u

als.

tiU, until

«

so lang.

though, although

on <u

als.

99

99

so bald.

99

ise, since

weiL

99

«

bevor.

99

ebe.

99

however

aber.

n

i>

allein.

without

99

sondem.

fj^ether

4

ausser, wenn.

whilst

wenn, so.

y^

er, though

wenn auch.

99

99

wenn gleioh.

99

sethat

dafem.

falls.

im Falle.

wofem.

sofem.

damit.

auf dass.

namlich.

dessenungeachtet.

nichts desto

weniger.
ungeachtet.
seit.

seitdem.
doch.
bisL

ob aaoh.
obgleich.
obschon.
obwohL
wenn anoh.
wenn gleicb.
wenn schon.
ohnedats.

wlihrauL
doch.

■o doch.

60 THE PBACnOAL LINOniST.

either — or entweder — oder.

neither — nor weder — ^noch.

the (sign of proportion) je.

the more — the more je mehr — desto mehr.

the leea — the — je weniger— desto—

the greater — the — je grosser — desto —

INTEBJECTION.

INDICATIVE OF JOT AND MIRTH. *

ah ! ha ! hei ! heisah ! juchhei ! Gottlob ! hurrah ! wohl mir !

SORROW AND DISPLEASURE.

ach I ah ! oh ! o, weh ! weh dir ! weh mir !

PAIN AND DISGUST.

ach ! o weh ! oh ! leider ! fi ! pfui !

SURPRISE AND ADMIRATION.

hem ! ha ! haha ! potztausend ! o ! oh ! ei !

TO ATTRACT ATTENTION.

he ! holla ! pst !

PREFIXES AND AFFIXES.

Words are either simple or compound. Simple words are either derivative,
primitive, or radical. The composition and modification of words is very
common in Grerman, therefore the Affixes by which they are largely affected
should be carefully studied. The following are some of the principal

PREFIXES.

Bo (1) gives to intransitive verbs a transitive signification : e.g,^ die Sonne
scheint, the sun shines; die Sonne bescheint die Erde, the sun shi$ie8
upon the earth,

(2) It extends the action of the verb over the whole object : e.g.^ Er
reiset durch Deutschland, he travels through Germany ; Er bereiset
Deutschland, A^ travels all over Gennany.

(3) It forms transitive verbs from nouns : e.g.y Freund, a Jriend;
befreunden, to befriend.

Durcll, through, by, by mea/ns of during, giveis a transitive signification to
verbs, &c..: e.g., arbeiten, to work; durcharbeiten, to work Uirough ; aus,
out ; durchaus, Hiroughout, tlwrovgldy ; duften, to exhale, to scent ; durch-
dufben, to Jill tJoiUt perfume

THB ACCIDEKCK. 51

Ent, (1) before transitiye verbs, denotes a removal of the object : eg,, fiihren,
to carry ; entfuhren, to carry off,

(2) Before intransitive verbs denotes a removal of the subject : e.g.,
laufen, to run ; entlaufen, to run off,

(3) It denotes beginning or commencement : e.g.^ entstehen, to take
rise,

Er adds either to the force of the original meaning or expresses, 1st, acquisi-
tion, obtaining, kc ; 2nd, producing, raising, change from one state to
another: e.g.y bauen, to build; erbauen, to build up; tonen, to sound;
ertonen, to resound ; kalt, cold ; erkalten, to grow cold.

Qe (1) renders a word more expressive, as denken, to think; gedenken, to
think (carefully J,

(2) It sometimes alters the signification of the verb, as loben, to praise ;
geloben, to promise,

(3) It is invariably prefixed to the past participle of all simple verbs,
and of those compound verbs that have the principal accent on the first
syllable : e,f/., sehen, gesehen.

(4) It signifies "provided with": e.g.y Zweig, a branch or bough;
gezweigt, branched,

(5) When prefixed to a concrete name it forms a collective noun : e.g.,
Wolke, a cloud ; Gewolk, a group of clouds.

Hinter, backf hind, behind, after , &c. : e.g,y gehen, to go ; hinter, behind ;

i.e.y hinteigehen, to deceive ; halten, to hold ; hinter, back ; hinterhalten,

to conceal,
UebGr, over, above, ai, during, about, on, upon, &c. : e.g., Uberall,* everywhere,

cUl over ; uberbeugen, to bend too much ; iiberdenken, to reflect upon,
Unii about, near, round, at, for, in combination with verbs, &c., signifies

alteration, or doing over again, repetition, turning, bringing to an end, &c. :

e,g., umarbeiten, to work over again; umbringeu, to kill (to bring to an

end).
TJn has a negative, or inverting power, and has always the accent : e.g.,

ungliicklich, unhappy,
Unter, under, below, beneath, among, amid, by, during : e.g., unterschatzen,

to under-ratc.
Ver, before transiti\e8, denotes a loss : e.g., spielen, to play ; verspielen, to lose

at play ; lemen, to leam ; verlernen, to forget,

(2) It denotes gradual destruction, deterioration, <&c. : bliihen, to bloom,
verbliihen, to fade ; schallen, to sound ; verschallen, to cease sounding,

(3) Before reflective verbs it denotes a wrong or mistake : e.g,, rechnen,
to reckon ; sich verrechnen, to misreckon.

(4) Before nouns and adverbs it converts them into verbs, denoting
that the subject or object becomes what the noun indicates : e,g,, 6r|>er,
body ; verkorpcm, to embody ; Holz, wood ; verholzen, to turn into wood ;
jung, young ; verjiingen, to make young,

(5) It intensifies the meaning : e,g., ehren, to honour ; verehren, to revere.

* Ue aiMl ii are the same. The necessity of a capital determines which most be used.

9

52 THE PRACTICAL UNQUI8T.

Wider, in opposition to, contrary to: e.g,, widersprechen, to gainsay,
Zer denotes disTinion^ separation of parts, dispersion, destruction : e.g., gehen,
to go ; zei'gehen, to disperse ; brechen, to break ; zerbrechen, to shatter,

SUFFIXES.

— bar (1) when added to nouns denotes bearing, producing, causing, con-
taining: e,g.,{nichthaT,/ruit/tU; dankbar, ^o^t^.

(2) When added to the radical syllable of infinitives, it signifieB

capable of being: e.g., braucbbar, serviceable.
— Clieil forms neuter diminutives to denote what is pleasing : e.g., Hauschen,

pretty little hotise.
— e forms abstract feminine nouns from adjectives, of which the vowel becomes

modified : e.g., roth, red ; die Rothe, redness.
— el forms feminine nouns from names of persons to denote their trade or

the place where it is carried on : e.g., die Druckerei, jonVi^iTi^, the printing

house.
— en and ern signify being of, when added to names of materials : e.g.^

golden.
— er (1) forms masculine names of persons from nouns and verbs of which

the vowel is modified : e.g., der Schiller, the pupil. .

(2) Forms names of inhabitants of a place : e.g.. Hamburger.
— haft (1) signifies being addicted or devoted to: e.g., tugendhafb, mrtuova,
(2) When added to the names of existences it signifies ** like " : e.^.,

schiilerhaft, schoolboy like.
— helt (1) forms feminine nouns from nouns and adverbs: e.^.,die Kindheit,

childhood ; die Freiheit,yree€?<wi.

(2) Denote the collective body of persons of the same kind : e.^.,

Menschheit, nuinkhid.
— icllt) resembling, like : e.g., haaricht, like hair.
— ig (1) when added to nouns, it signifies having, containing : e,g,, fleissig,

diligent, having diligence.

(2) Being of : e.g., die heutige Welt, the present age.
— in or inn (l) signifies wife, when added to titles of office or dignity : e.g.^

Doctorinn, tJie wife of a doctor.

(2) Denotes the female sex : e.g., Freundinn, a female friend.
— iSOll forms adjectives and adverbs from the names of persons and places :

e.g., jUdLsch, jeioish ; dichterisch, poetical.
— keit (instead of heit).
— lein (1) (from klein) forms neuter diminutives : e.g., das Briiderlein, the

little broifier.

(2) Added to the names of adults expresses contempt, &c. : e.g,, das
Koniglein, petty king.

(3) Das Fraulein, a title of unmarried ladies.

— licll (1) like, conformable to, forms adverbs, &c., from nouns, &c., of which
the vowel must be modified : e.g., mannlich, manly.

(2) Signifies every : e.g., taglich, every day, daily.

(3) Denotes manner : e.g., angj^tlich, anxious.

THE ACCIDENCE. 53

— Ung forms masculine names to denote a person who is, does, &c., that
which the radical word expresses: e.g., Jiingling, a young man; GHinstling,
a /avoiMrUe.

— ^lOS signifies destitute of, without : e.g., freudelos, joyless.

— Tl ^W denotes being that which the radical word expresses : e.g., die Fin-
stemiss, darkness.

— 881X1, inclined to, tending to : e.g., tugendsam, virtuously inclined ; arbeitsam,
laboruyus.

— SOliaft (1) li&s a collective signification : e.g., die Priesterschaft, the priest-
hood.

(2) From schaffen, to produces, cause, &c. : e.g., die Freundschaft,
friendship.

— BOllS^fuU of: e.g., miihselig,yt^ of toil, toilsome.

— t-l^TiTn (chiefij added to names) denotes the collective idea of all that
pertains to the person or thing: e.g., Christenthum, Christianity.

— HHg (1) forms feminine nouns from infinitives, and denotes both being
and doing what the verb expresses : e.g., Erziehung, education.

(2) Has sometimes a collective signification : e.g., die Elleidung, clothing.

ENGLISH AND ANOLICISED OEBUAN EXEBCI8E3.

an

PAKT II.

ENGLISH AND ANGLICISED GERMAN EXERCISES.

For the explanation of (rrammatical Peculiarities, see Commentaries,

Part II T, page 109.

EXERCISE I.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

1 Bread and milk. 2 The Tneat
and the gravy. 3 Some brandy

and looter. 4 I sJudl eat bread

and butter. 5 lie and I tmll drink
coffee. 6 Shall you and I drink coffee 1
7 She has eaten some luim. 8 Ue imU
drink beer. 9 WiU any one driiik coffee?
10 We unU eat cheese. 11/ have

eaten it. 12 Ha/ve I eaten it f

13 Some one Juu eaten it. 14 / Iiave
eaten something. 15 Has he eaten

anything? 16 We eat some-

times. 17 They drink anywiiere.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

1 Bread and Milk. 2 The Meat
and the Gravy. 3 Some (A little)
Brandy and Water. 4 I shall Butter-
bread eat. 5 He and i will Coffee
drink. 6 Will we both Coffee drink 1
7 She has Ham eaten. 8 He will Beer
driuk. 9 Will Any-one Coffee drink ]
10 We will Cheese eat. Ill have
thereof eaten. 12 Have i it eaten?
1 3 Some-one has it eaten. 14 1 have
something eaten. 15 Hjis he any
something eaten? 16 We eat some-
times. 17 They drink anywhere.

1 We are thirsty,
hungry f No. 3 Is any one hunr

gry 7 4 / am satisfied. 5 WiU you
have breakfast ? Yes ; and we vnll liave
same chops. 6 Tliere is the dish.

7 Have you a cup and saucer ?

8 WiU amybody ha/oe fish? 9 I vnll
have a chop and some beer. 1 TheytoiU
have a cake andsoms chocolate. 1 1 He
has luid his breakfast. 12 Will you
have a bottle of beer ? No. 1 3 Haveyou

EXERCISE II.
2 Are you 1 Wo are thirsty. 2 Are You

hungry ?. No. 3 Is Any-one hun-
gry 14 1 am satisfied. 5 Will You
breakfast ? Yes, and we will Cliops.

6 There is the Dish.

7 Have You a Cup (and Saucer)?

8 Will Anybody Fish eat ? 9 1 take
a Chop and Beer. 10 They will Cake
and Chocolate. 11 He
has Ids Breakfast had. 12 Will Yon
a Bottle Beer? No. 13 Have You

F

56

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIPT.

EXGUSir EXERCISE.

no mustard ^ 14 Here is a chair.

15 You. are hungry : eat.

16 We are thirsty aud woidd drink.

1 7 They have eaten and are satisfied.

18 Tliey haxnt drunk and s/iould be
satisfied. 19 H^re are Hie candles.
20 Is this vnnei 21 There is the
bill.

ANGUCISED GERMAN.

no Mustard ? 14 Here is a Chair.

15 You are hungry, eat You do.

16 We are thin?ty and might drink.

1 7 They have eaten, and are satisfied.

18 They have drunk and should
sjitisfied }>e. 19 Here are the Candles.
20 Is that Wine] 21 There is the
Bill.

EXERCISE III.

1 Are you not hungry? We are
all hunyry and thirsty. 2 Dinner is
on the table. 3 / have this place.

4 Have you roast meat and onions^ or
cold meat and salad ? 5 7^ there

salad fior all? 6 Do you

eaifat ? No ; I tcill have some sauce.
7 We ha^i^ no napkins. 8 Here are
som£ eygs. 9 Have you the salt-cellar ?
10 We uyill have some jyie. 11 There is
no pepper here. \2 Is tJtere any fruit
for dessert? 13 That is it. There
it is. 14 Have yoti no more? No^
but I toill huve a tart.

1 Are You not hungry ] We are
All hungry and thirsty. 2 The Eating
is on the Table. 3 I have this Place.
4 Have You Ttoastmeat and Onions
or cold Meat and Salad ? 5 Is Salad
enough thttre for AH] 6 Eat You
Fat? No, i beg for some Sauce.
7 We have no Napkins. 8 Here are
Eggs. 9 Have You the Salt-cellar?
10 We beg for some Pie. 11 It is no
Pepper there. 1 2 Is Emit there to-the
Dessert] 13 That is it There
stands it. 14 Have you none more?
No, but I might some Tart eat.

EXERCISE IV.

1 May he have some fruit ? 2 Here
is the mine card; which mine vrill
you have ? 3 Who is this ? 4 Whose
knife is this? 5 This glass was on
the table ? 6 Is there game upon the
table ? 1 It is by you. 8 For

whom have you made this tea ]

9 / made it for you.

10 ]Mteredirl you make it ?

1 1 Have you any more spoons ?

\2 Is there a saucer Jiere? 13 Shall I
makejor you (d! ? 14 Have you

had tea, ? Yes ; we have had tea. No ;
we have not had tea. 15 Is

any one hungry or thirsty ? No.

1 May he Fruit have] 2 Here
is the Wine-card, which Wine will
You] 3 Who is that] 4 Whose
Knife is that? 5 This Glass was
on the Table. 6 Is Game upon the
Table ] 7 It stands by You. 8 For
whom have You this Tea cooked]

9 I have him for You cooked.

10 Where have You him cooked]

11 Have You yet more Si>oons]

12 Is a Saucer there ] 13 Shall i
for You All make] 14 Have You
Tea drunk ] Yes, we have Tea drunk,
No, we have no Tea drunk. 15 Is
any-one hungry or thirsty ] No.

ENGLISH AND ANGLICISED GERMAN EXERCISES.

57

EXERCISE V.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

ring rae some mutton and the oil.
U I bring yon some pork ?
rets no more chicken 1 4 What
>les shall we hare /or siipper ?

5 lie w thirsty y for he haA.1 salt
or his breakfast.

I you take some lean veal ? 7 Th^
^s were on your table. Were
lere / 8 Will you bring it near
>lel 9 Wluitl 10 Do you
ea unfJiout sugar ? 11/ take
unth ten but not tenth coffee,
here sJuiU I take this ?
ike it hiio the dining-room,
lis is too much. 1 5 My chmr
\he tuble. 16 There

iairs there. 17 Our dinner is

table.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

1 Bring You to-me Mutton and the
Oil. 2 Shall i to- You Pork bring]
3 Chicken is not more there. 4 What
for Vegetables shall we to-the Supper
have 1 5 He is thirsty, for he has
stilted Meat to-the Breakfast eaten.
6 Will You some lean Yeal ? 7 The
Matches lay upon Your Table. Lay
they there ? 8 Will You it near
the Table bnng? 9 How? 10 Drink
You the Tea without Sugar ? 1 1 Tea
drink i with Sugar, but not Coffee.

12 Wliither shall i this carry?

13 Carry You it into the Dining-room.

14 This is too much. 15 My Chair
stands by to-the Table. 16 There
stand Chairs. 17 The Dinner is
served.

EXERCISE VI.

WTuU shall toe do for dinner 1

f, can dine here^ for we have meat,
^ruit and wine. 3 Can I do

4 He tells me they were there.
5 / teU you they toere not
6 What can I give you?
\at can I do for youl 8 / was
her at table ; so were you.
Is he speaking to her ? 10 That
9ir table. 11 Where is he?

wWiin.

licU have we to do with you?

an I speak with you? You can.

hat shall we have to do? 15 Should

t be here ? 16 TeU ms what is

17 I cannot tell you.

18 Will you tell me what that is?

19 I would, but I cannot.

20 You ca/n speak ; can

ot? No I cannot.

1 How get we something to eat?
(How make we it with our Dinner).
2 You can here to Midday eat; we have
Meat, Fishes, Fruit and Wine. 3 Can
i that do? 4 He says to-me, they were
there been. 5 I say to-You, they were
not there. 6 What can i to-You give?
7 What can i for You do? 8 I sat
near by her at-the Table and You
also. 9 Speaks he with her? 10 That
is their Table. 11 Where is he?
He is to House (he is in his Room).

12 What have we with You to do?

13 Can i with You speak? Yes.

14 What have we to do? 15 Should
he not here be? 16 Tell You to-me do,
what that is? 17 1 can it to-You not
say. 18 Will You to-me say, what
that is? 19 Right willingly, but i
can not. 20 You can I-hope speak,
not true? No i can not speak.

f2

58

THE PRACTICAL LINOUTST.

EXOUSH EXERCISE.

1 / triitk t/ou would do thin.

2 / desire to do ify but I can-
not. 3 That U enough, you will not.

4 Yon shull see thut I cannot.

5 Tdl me is any one here 1 Yes there
is some one here. 6 Who is it ]
7 WJmt do you say? 8 Did yon not
ask me loJio is here? 9 Yes ; J said

I do not see any one, for no ane is here.
10 / say that some one is here.

I I Jfow can you say so ?
1 2 ]F7// yon drink a glass of lolne, before
dinner?

EXERCISE VIT.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

1 It were to- me dear, if You tliis do
would 2 I might it do, but i can
not. 3 Enough, You will not.
4 You will 8ee, that i it not can.
T) Say You to-me, is Any-one here?
Yes here is Some-one. G Who is it?
7 What say You? 8 Have You me not
asked who here were? 9 Yes, i wud :
i see No-one here, for here is No-one.

10 I assei-t, that Some-one here is.

11 How can You that say?

12 Drink You a Glass Wine before
Table? (Will you a little-Glass
Wine, ere we to Table go?)

EXERCISE VIII.

1 Yaa are very good, too good.
2 Go and see who tJiat is.

3 /
'ioent before, btit no one v:a8 there.

4 Shall I give you some
other ivine? 5 / thank you, no, give
me tJie sams. 6 Thi^ is not the

same. 7 Will you try it ?

S If I drink a
bottle I cannot say if U is the same or
not. 9 Let

me see if I can. 10 This is not

bad. 11 I do not say that it is

bad ; l/ut I say that it is not the same,
and we asked for the same.
12 These wbies will not do.

13 Why not? Beeanse
they a/re not what we asked for. 14 No
one can tell tlt^esefrom tJiose.

15 Say, you cannot.

1 You are very kind, much too
kind. 2 Go and see, who that i&
(See You do, who that is.) 3 1
am already once gone, but No-one
was there. 4 Shall i to- You otlier
Wine give? 5 I thank, give You to-
me of the same. 6 That is not the-
same Wine. 7 Try You him do
(Taste You him). 8 If i also a Bottle
full di'ank, so could i not say, whether
it the-same Wine is or not. 9 I^et
You me see, if i it can, 1 This Wine
is not bad. Ill say not. that he bad
is, but I say, it is not the-same, and
wo have the-same Wine demanded.
12 These Wines are not the right
(suit not) 13 Wliy not? It are not
those, which we ordered have. 1 4 No-
one can them from the others distin-
guish. 15 Say You rather, You can
it not.

1 Wliy did you do that ?

2 Because you told m>e.

3 How do you do?

EXERCISE IX.

1 Why have You that done?

2 Because You it to-me ordered have.

4 How 3 How goes it to-Yout 4 How

ENGLISH AND ANGLICISED GERMAN EXERCISES.

61)

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

}H do that ? 5 Conie ami see

6 Do yoti think he icill corned

7 Where did you find tJuit ?
stilL 9 / am still hiau/ry.
tvi^h he woidd he still,

''ou are always hungry or thirsty.
12 Give one to each.

1 3 Every one can take one. 1 1 Do
jvernef 15 Xo, I cannot. 1<) When
'te do that? \1 I cannot say.
^here can ire find it. 19 They

to know wJiere they can find you.

20 i)o they ?
'Hiotforl 22 I do not know,
hall I t^Jl them? 24 WJiat

I think of you?

ANGLICISED GEKMAN.

make You that? 5 Come and see
this. G Believe You, that he come
will ? 7 Where have You that found?
8 Be Htill ! 9 I am still hungry.

10 I would, he were still (quiet).

11 Thou art (You are) always hungry
or thii-sty. 12 Give You to-Each
One. 1 3 Each can (me take. 14 Love
You m«*? 15 No, i cannot. 16 When
will he that do? .17 I can it not say.
18 Where can we it find? 19 They
might willingly (will) know, whore
one You find can. 20 So ! (indeed !)
21 Why? 22 I know it not.
23 Shall i it to-them say ? 24 What
shall i of You think ?

EXERCISE X.

Xow you may do it. 2 Does he
that i 3 They are too young.

en so am J.
Ins on the table,
9 at the table.
xin aUo come,
e dining-room ?

5 Put tlus,

6 Place the
7 YoUy he aiul

8 Will you show
9 Ymi

nve eitlier this or that. 10 27iey
uve neitJier this nor that,
^"^hat do I hear ? 12 Yon did not
%nyUiing. 13 You know I did.

14 Xow I know it l>ecause
ay so. 15 TJiat is enough.

9 it? 17 T/uit is very

18 You speak too much,
f I spenk too much you do not
ttouyh.

1 Now can You it do. 2 Knows
he that? 3 They are too young.
4 Then am i it also. 5 Fut the
Napkins on the Table. C Place the
Chaii-s at tlie Table. 7 You, he and
they can also come. 8 Will You to-
me the Diniug-room show? 9 You
can eitlier this or that have. 10 They
will neither this nor that have.
11 Wliat hear i? 12 You have
nothing lieard. 13 You know the
Contrary. 1 4 Now know i it, because
You it say. 15 That is enough.
16 Believe You? 17 That is right
good. 18 You speak too much.

19 1 Hj)eak too much, and You speak
not enougli.

Dialogue,
Based on prev^ious Exercises. •

are you seen my knife? 1 Have You my Knife seen?

o, / liave not ; but 1 can tell you 2 No, that have' i not, but i can

?rc it is. to- You say, wliere il is.

60

THE PRACTICAL LINOUI8T.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

3 How can you M me where it is,
if you have not seen it/

4 Because I heard him tell her where
to put it.

5 Di<l she say where she hud put It ?

6 YeSy she did; and that is how I
know where it is.

7 Tell me then.

8 / loill if you will not lei her know
t/uU I told you.

9 / unll not if you wish it; but
why should I notf

10 Because if tfiey think I tell all tJiat
I hear, they vnU not speak before
me.

11 You can show me tmthout telling
me.

1 2 Tliat is tlie same.

13 Here conies some one.
U W/wisit?

15 I do not know. Let me see : I do
not think it is either oftfiem.

1 6 ThtU is so ; it is neither of them.

17 I wish you would teU me where it
is.

18 iVb, / caimot ; you must go and
fiivd it.

1 9 Here I may tell you this : it is in
tJie dining-room. I may also say tJuxt
it is near the table ; but whether it is
on it or not, I shall 'not say.

20 If you do not tell me where it is,
I shall find it and will tell them
what you have told me about it,
which is as bad as telling me
all.

21 Now tJvat I know wJiat you are, I
will not teU you any ntore.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

3 How can You to-me aaj, where it
is, if You it not seen have]

4 Because i him have say heard,
where-to she it put should.

5 Hass]iesaid,where-tosheitputhas7

6 Certainly, and from-that know i,
where it is.

7 Well then, so say You it to-me.

8 Right gladly, if You toher not
say will, that i it to- You said have.

9 Right gladly, if You it so wish ; but
why may i it not ?

10 Because one nothing more in my
Presence speak will, if one believes,
that i all again-say.

1 1 You can it to-me show, without a
Word to say.

1 2 That were quite the-same.

13 It comes Some-one.

14 Who is it?

15 I know it not, let You once see,
i believe not, that it One of them ia.

16 Quite Rigbt, it is none of them.

17 1 would You said to-me, where it
is.

1 8 No, that can i not ; You must it
self seek.

19 So much may i to- You well say,
it is in-the Dining-room, also still,
that it near by the Table b, whether
however there-upon or not, that
keep i for me.

20 I shall it however find, if You it
to-me also not say will and shall
to-the Others tell, what i of You
heard have, and that is just so bad,
as if You to-me All said ha(L

21 Now as i You know, shall i to-
You nothing again say.

EXERCISE XI.
1 Have you anything of which I can 1 Have You something, whereout

nuike an apron l
nothing hut this.

2 / have i an Apron make can? 2 I have
3 What is this? nothing than that. 3 What is this I

ENGLISH AND AXOLICIBED GERMAN EXERCISES.

61

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

ive tnore for my bontiet tJian yon
r yours, 5 Did you?

l you ]}ut this button on my che-
7 Yes, if you will give
nething to piU it on with,
ir cloak has no bravl. 9 / couhl
old you tJuit myself. 1 Stay :
brooch do you wish /
It/ier toill do. 1 2 A re my boots
enough to go in / 13 Do

%nd there ; you, mtist not.

14 What toill you give me
y bracelet ? 10/ must

more than that. IG What

u leant /

1 7 You will not have
rom me. 1 8 Do you dress for
r? 19 iVo, we

ss. 20 What are you saying ?

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

4 I have more for my Hat given,
tliau You for the Yours. 5 Really?
6 Will You this Button on my Che-
mise sew? 7 Yes, if You to-me
sonu'thing give will, him ou-to-sew.
8 Your Cloak has no Braid. 9 That
coul»l i to- You also told have. 10 One
Moment ! which Brooch wish You ?
11 Any oue. 12 Are my Boots t'>-the
Out-^oing good enough? 13 Tlace
You yourself not thither, that dare
You not. 14 Wliat will You to-nie
for my Bracelet give? 15 I must
more have. 16 How

much will You ? (What wisli You ?)

1 7 That will You not
from me get. 18 Dress You your-
self to-the Dinner on? 19 No, we
dress us out. 20 What say You ?

EXERCISE XII.

We never wear garters. 2 Xo

ears crinolines now. 3 Your

ught not to be worn out. 4 There
buckle to this necklace. 5 Why
ti wear a net 1 6 Because almost
>ne does. 7 What a great cJtain
have ! 8 What do you

of my dress coat ? 9 Come here ;
not see it. 1 You will

yurselfin your collar. 1 1 Why, is
large 1 12 It is nexirly

enouyhfor two. 13 After that
lay go. 14 You can never be found
you are icatUed. 15 27ien I am
wanted when I can be found.

1 We wear never Garters. 2 No-
one wears still Crinolines. 3 Your
Coat should not off-worn be. 4 It is
no Buckle on this Necklace. 5 Why
wear You a Net ? 6 Because almost
All it weai\ 7 What for a great
Chain You have ? 8 What say You
to my Dress-Coat? 9 Come You
here, i can him not right see. 10 You
will in Your Collar sink. 1 1 How so ?
Is he too great ? 1 2 He is nearly
great enough for two. 13 Now cau
You go. 14 One can You never find,
when one You wants. 15 Therefore
wants one me never, when one me
find can.

>

EXERCISE XHI.

This dress is a little too good. 1 This Dress is a little too good.

n anything be too good 1 3/2 Can anything too good be ? 31

8omA flannel ; vnU you show me want Flannel, will You to-me some

62

THE PRACTICAL LXKOUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

sonie ? 4 / have never worn a dress-
ing-gown. 5 These drawers and
nightshirts will do. G Ifie
have ribbon enough biit tvant pocket-
luind kerchiefs. 7 None of these
will do. 8 WiU any of tJiese ?
9 Let me see a few more ; I
toill teU you aftenoards. 1 Few
can show you as many, and no one
more tlian we can.

1 1 What are these earrings made
off 12 / jiever can find my cuffs

when I want them. 13 I have

not 80 many wants as you : now, have
I?

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

show] 4 I have never a Dressing-
gown worn. 5 Those Drawers and
Nightshirts are goocl enough. 6 We
have Ribbon enough, but we want
Pocket-hanclkerchiefs. 7 Of these can
i none use. 8 Are to- You these
right ] 9 Let You me still some see,
i will it to-You then say. 10 Few
Mercliants can to-You so many, and
none can to-You more before-lay, than
we. 1 1 What-of are these E^arrings
made? 12 I can never my Cut&
find, when i them want. 13 Say
You self, whether i not less Wants
have, than You?

EXERCISE XIV.

1 / tvant a hat. 2 27iis

wiU not do. 3 Perhaps t/us will.

4 No ; look for one a little larger, if you
please. 5 This is too large ; one

a very little smalier will do.

G Did you ever see such a liead-
dreas as this ? 7 Wliat do you

think of this jacket? S It is too long; I
do not like it. 9 Are there any

pockets in it? 10 My thiiigs are under
yours ; may I get tJiein out ?

11 Is not t/iis jersey made of flannel ?

12 What have you done with my go-
loshes? 13 I put them
with your muff. \i Do you want
a necktie? 15 No; but I very
miich tvant some gloves. 16 Will
you look at these stays ?

1 7 YeSy if you please.

1 I have a Hat necessary. 2 Tliis
fits to-me not. 3 Perhaps fits this.
4 No, pi-ay, seek You tome one some-
what larger. 5 This is too large ; if
he a little smaller were, so would he
suit. 6 Have You ever a such Head-
dress seen as this 1 7 Wliat say You
to this Jacket 1 8 She is too long ;

i may her not suffer. 9 Are Pockets
thei-e-in ? 10 My Things are under
the Yours ; can i them out-take t

1 1 Is this Under -sliirt not of Flannel ?

12 What have You with my India-
rubber-shoes made ] 13 1 have them
to Your Muff put. 14 Want You
a Neck-cloth ? 15 No ; but i have
Hand-shoes very necessary. 16 Will
You to-yourself this Stays on-look?
17 Oh yes, pray.

EXERCISE XV.

1 Will you be so kind as to bring
my shoes aiul overcoat ?

2 Is it true he lives a good life ?

3 Although I do not like him, I must
my that is true.

1 Will You so kind be, to-me my
Shoes and my Overcoat to bring?

2 Is it true, that he a good Life leads)

3 Although i him not suffer may,
must i though say, that that true is.

EXOLISn AND ANOUCI8ED GERMAN EXERCIBKS.

63

ENGLISH EXEtlCISE.

iall see in time. 5 What

tnef 6 Can you find

Uriiig? 7 / mil tn/y

I do not think I can,

8 It i^ too bad to
ny shirts without buttons.

9 W/uit is the price of
ecta/iUsl 10 That is too much ;
ant a loatch also, and shall 7iot
yughfor both if I (jive so much
e. 11 Will you give rne

/ ring, or shall I have to make
urn it? 12 Your petticoat

yng for your dress. 13 Will

g do for your shawl ? 14 Give
trousers aiul waistcoat.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

4 That will itself show. 5 How
much Clock is iti 6 Can You to-
me a String find? 7 I will it try,
but i doubt it 8 It is indeed too bad,
to-me my Sliirts without Buttons
back-to-send.

9 How much costs
this Spectacle] 10 That is too much ;
for i have also a Watch necessary, and
shall not enough have, if i so much
there-for give. 11 Will You to-me
my Ring back-give, or shall i You thei'e-
to force must? 12 Your Petticoat
is too long for Your Dress. 1 3 Will
this Riug forYour Shawl suit? 1 4 Give
You to-me my Trouser and my
Waiscoat.

EXERCISE XVI.

ave you much money ? 2 We
ore than we want : however, it is
9 have too much than too little.

3 / hope we sJuill find it
; but, between you and -me, I do
nk we shall. 4 What fine

8 ymi have ! 5 Y^es ;

ow wlio rfutde tttem ? Do you not!
'ou are against me I shall not
da. 7 Well note, what

say to this? 8 You are quite
tJiat is my umbreUa. 9 Am
dways right ? 10 Will you

jcks or stockings ? 11 WluU

Jo loith shoes without laces ?
3 luis too mitch velvet on her
or me. 13 Y^ou have

ny studs. \i Is it not a

king to have hope ? 15 7 think so.

1 Have .You much Money? 2 We
have more, tlian we. want ; still is it
better, too much to have than too
little. 3 I hope, we shall it suffi-
cient find ; but, under us said, i
believe it not. 4 What for beau-
tiful Slippers You have ! 5 Yes ;
You know, who them maile has, not
true ? G If You against me are, shall
i it not again try. 7 Now then, what
say You there-to? 8 You have quite
Right, that is my Umbrella. 9 Have
i not always Right? 10 Will You
Socks or Stockings wear ? 11 What
shall i with Shoes without Laces do?
12 After my Taste has she too much
Velvet on her Dress. 13 You have
too many Cuff-buttons. 14 Is it not
good, Hoj)e to have? 15 Cei-tainly.

EXERCISE XVII.

7h/it will your father say to youl 1 What will Your (Sir) Father say?

will not say anything, but my 2 He will nothing say, but my
• may when she sees it. Mother will perhaps something say,

when she it sees.

Gi

THE FBACnCAL LINGUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

3 How tminy brothers and listers have
you? 4 We have two brothers

and three sisters. 5 My uncle ic'dl
not believe tluU you gave v{e permission
to go aiul see my amd.

6 Thanks ; I am very m\ich obliged to you,

7 / am sure my "nephew w in trouble.

8 You must not trouble
yourself; he is cdl right. Your niece
assures me of it, 9 She be-

lieves so ; but sh€ is not certain.
1 My daughter is full of hope, II Is
she? 12 My son is full of wants.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

3 How many Brothers and Sisters
have You] 4 We have two Brothers
and three Sistei-s. 5 My Uncle will
not believe, that You to-me Per-
mission given have, my Aunt to visit.

6 I thank, i am to- You very obliged.

7 I am convinced, my Nephew is in
Troubles. 8 Disquiet You yourself
not ; it goes to-him quite good. Your
Niece assures it to-me. 9 That be-
lieves she, but she knows it not certain.
10 My Daughter is full Hope. 11 Sol
(Really) 1 12 My Son has many
Wants.

EXERCISE XVIII.

1 / unll tell you what it is ; if you
do not keep your promise no one will
believe you, 2 Well, I always

m^an to do so, 3 Whut is t/te matter
with ycm now ? 4 His sweetJieart

unll not speak to him ; tJiat is all.

h Why not ? 6 / U7id^stand
tliat sJie has another lover ; and I am
very glad of it, for I do not like her.

7 Do you think grandfather
and grandmot/ier unU come ? .
8 It is more tlian probable, I may say
thai I am certain they will — that is, if
they can. 9 / quite understand

you, my friend ; you are going to tell
my guardian. Do so ; but you need not,
for my trustee knows it, and that is
enough, 10 I never make

an enemy of my servant ; therefore send
for her. 1 1 What do you think ? I

have five wards.

1 I will to- You say, if You Your
Promise not keep, so will No-
one to- You believe. 2 Good, i have
always the Intention, it to do. 3 Wliat
ails to- You now ] 4 His Sweetheart
will not with him speak, that is
All. 5 Why not] 6 1 hear, she
has an other Lover, and i am very
glad thereover, for i may her not
suffer. 7 Believe You, that Grand-
father and Grandmother come will?
8 That is more than probable. I can
say, i believe it certain, that means,
if they can. 9 I understand You right
good, my Friend ; You will it to-my
Guardian say. Quite good, but it ia
not necessary, as my Trustee it knows,
and that is enough. 10 1 throw-out
myself never with my Servant ; there-
fore call her. 1 1 Think You to-your-
self once, i have five Wards.

EXERCISE XIX.

1 IIow many clerks do you keep ?
2 About twenty, 3 / am nineteen

and my brother-in-law is eighteen.

4 What do you tMnJc of that?

1 How many Clerks keep You?
2 About twenty. 3 I am nineteen
and my Brother-in-law is eighteen
Years old. 4 What say You thereto ?

KK0LI8U AND ANGLICISED GERMAN EXERCISES.

65

ENGLISH EXERCISB.

do not knaw anything about it. I
ot trouble myself about other people,
y master w one of eleven priiicipals.
7 Your master has twelve ser-
s ; has he not ? 8 Have you

\en to your partner for his opinimi ?

9 / beg your par-
; I have not, h\U ought to have

8o long ago.
^lave you Iieard the news about my
partner f 11 Your father-

to told me something about it, but

not believe it. 12 It is quite

for my brother-in-law saw it.

13 What (or what kind of)
8 do you read J

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

5 I know nothing thereof, i
trouble myself not about other People.

6 My Master is one of eleven Prin-
cipals. 7 Your Master has twelve
Servants, not true ? 8 Have You to
Your Partner written and him for
his Opinion asked 19 1 pray for For-
giveness, i have to-him not written,
b\it i had it longest do should.
10 Have You the News over my
new Partner heard ] 1 1 Your Father-
in-law has to-me something thereof
said, but i believe it not. 12 It is quite
true, for my Brother-in-law has it
seen. 1 3 Wliat for Books read you ?

EXEKCISB XX.

Which way shall we take 1 2 This

e most agreeable. 3 / am going

; will you come with me or not ?

e urill caU on your father on oicr

for his reply.

'op here till we come. 6 /

ot ; for I have left somebody , and

\fore cannot \oait.

iall we go now ? 8 Not yet.

'^hat reply shall I give him ?

10 Say wluit you like.
Ts it the first, second, or third?
I want twenty-one of these atid
hfour of those; that is, sixty five
U. 13 WJiat

is all about ? 14/ vnU tell you

noards. 15 Can you

tiU I go, or must you go now ?
r can wait if you loill not be long,
are too long ; you said, you would
be long.

1 Which Way shall we take ? 2 This
is the agreeablest. 3 I go back,

will You with me come or not?

4 We will under-way's by Your
P\ather call, for his Answer to fetch.

5 Remain You here, till we come. 6 That
can i not, for Someone waits on me,
and therefore can i not remain.
7 Shall we now go? 8 Yet not.
9 What for an Answer shall i to-him
give? 10 Say You, what You will.

11 Is it the fii"st, second, or third?

12 1 require one and twenty of these
and four and forty of those, that are
five and sixty in-the Whole. 1 3 What
signifies all this? 14 I will it to-
You afterwards say. 15 Can You
wait, till i go, or must You now go ?
16 1 can wait, if it not long lasts; You
make too long, You said. You would
not long make.

ANECDOTE.

Sagacity of a Monkey.

he servant of a Doctor, who The Servant of-a Doctor, who a

for some time in India, took a Time long in India lived, took a

66

TIEE PRACTICAL LIUQUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

youiig monkei/ from its another and
brought it to his tent, where every
care was taken ofit hut the motlcer
was so much distressed with the loss of
her littls one that site always
stayed near tJie tent whining.

Ttie Doctor tJierefore told his
, servaid to give hack the little one
to its mother^ which lie did, and the
mother took it away with her.
But not many days after she brought
the little one back and placed it in tJie
tenty and having done so, she went out
and died.

It was afterwards found tJiat
tJie mother was scratched all over ; and
it is believed tJiat when slie returned
with Iter young 07i€, the otJier monkeys
would not let tJiem stay rvit/i tliem.

AXGLICISED GERMAK.

young Monkey from his Mother and
brought him into his Tent, where
he carefully nursed became ; but the
Mother was over the Loss of-her Young
so inconsolable, that she lamenting in
the Nearness of-the Tent stop|>ed.

The Doctor ordered therefore to-his
Sei'vant, the Young to-liia Mother
back-to-give ; this-one did it, and the
Mother took it with herself awav.
But only few Days later brought she
her Young again and placed it in the
Tent, went again out and died.

One discovered afterwards, that
she over and over scratched was, and
believed, that the other Monkeys, as
she with her Young back-turned, her
not more under themselves had suffer
would.

EXEECISE XXI.

1 Good morning : good evening : good
night. ' 2 How do you do to-

day / ' 3 / am very well.

4 How is your father 1
5 He is not very weU.

6 / am very sorry to hear it.
7 We hope so. 8 / must go. Good-

bye. 9 My compliments to

your brother. 10 Eememher me

to all at honte. 1 1 By your leave.

12 Will you have tice good-
ness to. . . Will you be so kiiul as

to. . . I am nuwh obliged to you.

Thank y Oil. 13 / a7n sorry to

trouble you so much.

14 No trouble at aU.

15 You are very

kind. 16/ assure you, tJuit. . . I

beg your pardon. 17 Do not mention it.

1 Good Morning, Grood Evening,
Good Night. 2 How find You your-
self to-day? 3 I find myself very
well. 4 How finds himself Your Sir
Father] 5 He finds himself not very
well. 6 That does to-me very grief.
7 To-be-hoped-for. 8 I must go. Ui)on
Again-see, 9 Recommend You me to-
Your Mr. Brother. 1 Greet You Your
Family from me. 1 1 With Your Per-
missioiL 12 Will You the GJoodness
have and. . . Will You so good be
and. . . I am to -You very obliged. I
thank to- You. 13 It does to-me
giief, tliat i to- You so much Trouble
make, 14 Pray.

15 You are very
kind. IG I assure You, that. . .
I pray for Forgiveness. 17 Pray.

ENGLISH AKD ANGLICISED GERMAN EXEIiaSES.

67

EXERCISE XXII.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

1 I ptomise you, tfuit. , . 2 What?

3 What do you mean ? i I say it w.

5 / say it is not. 6 / do^it know

ichnt you mean. 7 Ift it

certmn theU. . .? 8 Do you believe it ?

9 / arn sure of it.

10 Imleed ! Is U possible ? 110/
course. It is a matter o/ course.

12 What a shame ! pity.
\Z Be quiet. I am not in a good
humour.

14 / arn exceedingly glad of it. W/uU
is to be done f 15 I do not know wJiat
to do. 16 I am of ojnnion that. . .
17 WJiot do you say about it ?

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

1 I promise to- You, that. . . 2 Howl
3 Wliat moan You ? 4 I say to- You
yes. 5 I sjiy no. 6 I know not,
what You mean (say will). 7 Is it
suixj, that . . 1 8 Believe You it?

9 I am of-it sure (thereof convinced).

10 Really! Is it possible? 11 Na-
turally ! That understiinds itself of
itsel£ 12 What Disgrace! Pity!

1 3 Be you quiet ! I am not in good
Humour (I am not good tempered).

14 1 am very glad thereover. What
shall one do? 15 I know not, what i
do shall. 16 My Opinion is, that. . .
1 7 Wliat mean You there-to ?

EXERCISE XXIII.

1 Let us do so. 2 I ask

your pardon. 3 / have a good ap-

petite. 4 What will you eat? 5 /

have dified with a good appetite.

6 Will you take a glass of
wine ? 1 Is tfiere anything iimo ?
8 I have not heard of anything, d How
do you know tfiat ? 10 IIow long is it
since he wrote to you ?
1 1 WItere are you going ? 12 lam going
home; uyill you come with me? 13 Wliidi
way shall we go? 14 Wliich ever

way you please. As you please.

15 Is Mr. B. at home?
16 He is gone out. 17 Do you know
wluin he will return ? 18 He Jias

gone after you.

1 Let You us that do. 2 I pray
for Forgiveness. 3 I have good Ap-
petite. 4 What will You eat ? 5 I
have with much Appetite (to Mid-
day) eaten. 6 Will You a Glass Wine
drink ? 7 Gives it something New ?
8 I have nothing heard. 9 How
know You that? 10 How long is it
ago, that he to- You not written has ?
1 1 Where-to go You ? 1 2 I go after
House. Will You with go? 13 Which
Way will we take ? 14 Wliich You
will As it to- You pleasing is (How
You will). 15 Is Mr. B. to House?
16 He is out-gone. 17 Know You,
when he bock comes? 18 He goes
to You.

EXERCISE XXIV.

1 / want to speak to you. 2 What
is it? 3 What is your j)leasure ?

4 Do you hear ? Do you un-
derstand me? 5 Why don't you answer

1 I would with You speak. 2 What
is it? 3 What stands to (Your) Ser-
vices? 4 Hear You ? Understand
You me ? 5 Why answer You to-me

me? 6 Do you not speak German ? not ? 6 Sjieak You no German ]

68

THE PRACTICAL LINOUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

7 Very little^ sir. 8 Who toll

you that ? 9 What do you mean ?

10 What do you call that ?

11 That is called 12 What

is your age ? 13/ thought you were
older.

14 What o* clock is it? 15 It is

07ie () clock. It wards ten minutes to
two. It is twenty-one minutes past
three. 16 What sort of weather

is it? 17 It is badf cloudy, fine,

foggy, rainy, raw weather.

AN(JLICISED OERMAX.

7 Very little, my Sir. 8 Who has
to- You that said ] 9 Wliat will You
say? 10 How call You that]

11 That is-caUed 12 How

old are You ? 13 1 held You for

older.

14 How much Clock is it ? 15 It ia
One Clock. It is ten Minutes before
two. It is one and twenty Minutes
after three. 1 6 What for Weather
have wel 17 It is bad, dull, fine,
foggy, rainy, rough Weather.

EXERCISE XXV.

1 Somebody knocks ; go and see who
it is. Go and open the door.

2 Pray be seated.
Give a chair to Mrs. ... 3 /

cannot stay. 4 Why a/re you in such

a hurry 1 5 1 have ma^iy things to

do. 6 Have you breakfasted ? 7 Not
yet. 8 Do you drink tea or coffee /
9 Iprefer coffee. 10 At

what time do we dine to-day f

1 1 Do you expect company f
12 I expect Mr. B. 13 What shall I
help you to? 14 Wliat

part do you prefer ? 15 Gentleman,

help yourselves.

1 6 Shall I help you to some vegetables ?

1 7 Have you carried in the tea-things ?

19

little.
wiU do.
say I liear !
mention it.

18 Wait a

All right. 20 TluU

21 Never mind. I

22 Don't

23 Where

do you buy it? 24 They sell it

across the road. 25 WIuU is the day of
the month ? 26 How did he excuse
himself when you accused him of it?
27 Do you intend to iiuiict him ?

1 Somebody knocks (It knocks).
Go and see, who there is. Go and
open the Door. 2 Pray, seat You
yourself. Give Mrs. ... a Chair. 3 I
can not remain. 4 What-for are
You so hiuTying 1 5 1 have much to
do. 6 Have You breakfasted ? 7 Yet
not. 8 Drink You Tea or Coffee?
9 I draw the Coffee before. 10 When
(At what Time) eat we to-day to
Mid-day ] 11 Expect You Company ?
12 1 expect Mr. B. 13 What shall
i to- You before-lay 1 14 Which
Piece have You on -the dearest] 15 My
Gentlemen, serve You yourselvea

16 May i to- You Vegetables give?

17 Hafit Thou all brought, what to-
the Tea belongs ? (Hast Thou the Tear
things here-in- brought?) 18 Wait a
little. 19 Quite right. 20 So is it
good. (That suffices.) 21 That makes
nothing (hurts nothing). Hear You !
22 Mention You it not. 23 Where
buy You it ? 24 One sells it
over the Way. 25 The how-many-eth
is to-day? 26 Wherewith excused
he himself, as You him of-it accused ?
27 Intend You, him judicially to prose-
cute? (Have You before, him ju-
dicially to prosecute ? )

ENGLISH AND AKOUCISED OEBMAN ANECDOTES.

69

ANECDOTE.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

Parental affection,

Cornelia f the motJier of the Gracchi,
after the death of her husband, who
left her unth twelve children, gave
(devoted) the whole of her time to the
wants of her family. Only three of
the tioelve lived till they were twenty-
one, — one daughter, Sempronia, whom
she married to the second Scipio Afri-
oanus,and two sons, Tiberius and Cains,
whom she brought up with so intich
trouble that, in the opinion of all who
knew ihein, they were Tnost indebted to
her for their virtues. The answer
she gave a Campanian lady about them,
is very fine. The lady, who was very
rich, and still more fond of show, after
having laid before Cornelia all Jier
jewellery, asked to see hers. Cor-
nelia, upon the return of her children,
who were at the moment out, said to
the Campanian lady, " These are m.y
jewels, and the only ornaments I ad-

mtre.

It

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

Mother -love.
Cornelia, the Mother of-the Gracchi,
devoted herself after the Death of-her
Husband, who her with twelve Child-
ren behind-left, solely and only to-the
Cai^ of-her Family. Of the twelve
reached only three the one and twen-
tieth Year : a Daughter Semj)r()nia,
which slie to-the second Scipio Africa-
canus married, and two Sons, Tilerius
and Caius, who a so careful Education
received, that they after the Opinion
of- All, who them knew, to-her their
Virtues owed. Very beautiful is the
Answer, which she to-a Camimnian-
Lady in Reference upon her Children
gave. Tliis-one, who groat Riches and
not less Show-love possessed, spread
all her Jewels before her out and
desired then, the hers to see. At the
Return of-her Sons, who just out were,
said Cornelia to the Campanian-Lady :
This are my Jewels and the only
Ornament, that i admire."

EXERCISE XXVI.

1 WhcU are your terms ? 2 Upon
what conditions unll you do it ? 3 Yon
should not be so dull. 4 How

can I help it? 5 How smooth this

animal is I 6 Yes it is as

smooth as silk. 7 Are yo7i alone ?
8 This bird is the only thing with
me. d You go too fast. 10 Don^t

go so fast. 11 Here is a preseiU for
you. 12 Were you present wJien

they said so? 13 Let me present to
you my sister.

14 Surely you must be
wrong. 15 We have thought so all
along, 16 WUl you come along with
mef 17 Where shall we put them?

1 Which are Your Terms ? 2 Under
which Conditions will You it do? 3 You
should not so out-of-tune be. 4 What
can i therefor] 5 How soft this
Animal itself on-feels. 6 Yes it is so
soft as Silk. 7 Are You alone?
8 This Bird forms my entire (only)
Company. 9 You go too fast. 10 Go
You not so fest. 1 1 Here is a Present
for You. 12 Were You present, when
th^ it said? 13 Allow You, that
i to-You my Sister before-place (in-
troduce). 14 Certainly, You mistake
yourself. 15 That have we to-us
always thought 16 Will You with
me come? 17 Where-to shall we

70

THE PRACTICAL LIXOUIST.

ENGLISH EJ^CBriSE.

18 Along this »ih of the room.
10 Iloir slow yon are / 20 Do you
think so? 2\ I work much Jast^r than
you. 22 Tfiey are yoing to have

a hfiU In the IxM-room this evening ; so
J sh/jU stay in my bed-room.
23 / never saw a b<dlo<m before to-day :
it htoks just like a ball.

24 Is not Uie bit to make the
animal go slowly ? 25

WluU is this bark good for ? 26 /

do not know the use of it. 27 I do

not un/lerstand those things. 28 Can
you see if that barge has an anchor or
wjtl 29 Will you get the

barrow off the bank, ami take it with
the axe into the house ?

30 What do you think of chess ?
31 / imU tell you in anotJier exercise.

AXGUCISED GERMAN.

thcTn place ? 18 At this Wall
1 9 How slow You are : 20 Think
You ? 211 work much quicker than
YoiL 22 One will to-day Evening
in-the Ball-room dance ; consequently
shall i in mv Bed-room remain.
23 Till to-dav have i never an Air-
b<ill«x>n seen; he looks quite like a Ball
out. 24 Serves the Bit not hereto,
the Animal slower go to let? 25
Whereto serves this Barkf 26 I
know the Use of-her not. 27 Such
Things understand i not. 28 Can
You see, whether that Barge an Anchor
leads or not ? 29 Will You the Bar-
row from-theBank away-take and her
together- with the Axe into the House
get? 30 What hold You of-the
Chess game? 31 That will i to- You
in an other Exercise say.

EXERCISE XXVII.

1 It seems to me that you do not
know what you want.

2 Appearances
are not always correct.

3 W/uU was your reason for
doing tluU 1 4 He reasons very cor-
rectly. 5 / wish you would
learn to reason. C It is far more easy
to object tJuin to do what is objected to.

7 Are
not these fine objects ? 8 We

are all fond of play, though one plays
in one way and another in another.
9 T/iey will never accept that, unless
you can find a good reason for it.

10 Permit me to tell you, that
it is impossible to do it in that way.

11 You
could have done it in fudf the time
yo^i fiave already taken, if you Iiad

1 It seems to-me (it comes to-me

before), as if You not knew, what You

will (To-me appears, You know not,

what You will). 2 The Appearance

deceives.

3 Out-of what Ground did

You that 1 4 He makes very right

Conclusions. 5 I would, You learned

logically think. 6 It is far easier,

to blame, than it better to make.

7 Are

that not beautiful Objects ? 8 We
all play willingly, although the One on
this, the Other on that Way plays.
9 One will that never grant, if You
not very good Grounds there-for give
can. 10 Permit You to-me, to-You
to say, that it upon this Way impos-
sible is. (Permit You, that i to-You
say, thiLs lets it itself not do). 11 In
the half Time, which You thereover
spent, had You it already do can, if You

SNGLTSH AKD ANGLICISED OEBMAN EXERCISES.

71

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

gone about it the right way. 1 2 Sit
here till I come back. 13 Lie

down.

14 WJiai a fine boat that is going under
the bridge! 15 What

a shame it is to find a bug in the dining-
room cushion. 16 That bull
is going qfier the barley in the bam.

17 Shut the gate ; there is afi/re
in the field. 18 Bid you

ever see a branch like this? 19 WJujU
do you think this cabin is made of?
20 Brick? 21 Whoeverheard

of a brick cabin? 22 All

animals require the bridle^ but none so
much cu man.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

it correctly begun had. 12 Romaiu
You here sit, till i again come. 1 3 Lay
thyself down (Lay You yourself).
14 What for a beautiful Boat goes
there so j ust under the Bridge ! 1 5 How
dirty, a Bug upon a Cushion in-the
Dining-room to find ! 16 The Ox
there goes at the Barley in the
Bam. 17 Make the Gate to, uj)on
the Field bums it. 18 Have You
ever such a Branch seen ? 19 What-
of, believe You, is this Cabin made?
20 Out-of Brick 1 21 Who has ever
of a stone Cabin heard? 22 All
Animals want of-the Bridle, but none
so very, as the Man.

EXERCISE XXVIII.

1 It seems to ms that you are never
tired of work. 2 You are

right ; nothing is so fatiguing as the
toant of something to do. 3 We

have spent a quiet evening.
4 / have lost all my m>oney ; I have
nothing left. 5 They have

come to the conclusion to leave here to-
day. Thoit is the result ofyov/r recom-
mendtUion. 6 / differ from you.

7 The dif-
ference is, that I am right and that
you are wrong. 8 May I draw upon
you for it? 9 I doubt whether

I shaUbe able to accept it if you do.

10 They represent themr
selves as more than they are. 11/
was just saying so. Was it not very
unjust to do so? 12/ cannot think
sOy for you are always just.

13 Shall we go in a cah to the city
church, or would you prefer to go to
our own chapel?

1 4 Our horse is of no use either for
our cart or carriage, for he has lost his
shoe.

1 To-me appears, You become
of-the Working never tired. 2 You
have Right, Nothing tires more, than
the Want on Occupation. 3 We have
a quiet Evening lived-away (spent).
4 I have all my Money lost ; i have
nothing remaining kept. 5 They have
themselves resolved, to-day from here
away-to-go; that is the Result of-Your
Advice. 6 I am of-other Opinion (I
agree not with You together). 7 The
Difference consists therein, that i
Right have, and You not. 8 May i the
Sum upon You draw? 9 I know
not, whether i the Bill accept can, if
You it do. 10 You give yourself for
more out, than You are. 1 1 Exactly
that have i just said ; was it not very
unjust, it to do? 12 That cah i not
accept, for You are always just,

13 Shall we in a Cab to-the City-
Church ride, or i)refer You our own
Chapel ?

14 Our Horse is neither for our Cart
nor for the Carriage to use ; because
it has its Hoof-iron (Shoe) lost.

G

72

THE PRACTICAL LnTOUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

15 Have you ever been to the
hotel near the canal i
16 That hedge wants more bushes.

1 7 What are you going to do
with this grass i 18 Look at the clouds :
I think we shall h-ave rain.

19 Have you never thought
that o^ir ceilings would look much
better if they were higlier ?

ANGUCISED GERMAN.

15 Are You ever in the
Hotel near bv-the Canal been?
16 That Hedge should more Bushes
have. 17 What intend You with this
Grass to do ? 18 Look You onc^the
Clouds on, i believe, we shall Rain
have. 19 Is it to- You never in the
Mind come, that our Ceilings much
prettier look would, if they higher
were 1

EXERCISE XXIX.

1 They listened, hoping to hear
what was said. 2 Few listeners hear
muc/i that is good of themselves.

3 / am sorry to
find thai your sorrow is so great.
4 No man is so weak as he who
is not ahle to say no, when he
means it. 5 Strotig, stronger,
strongest is only weak, weaker, weakest
put backward. 6 No one

can excel in everything. 7 He is an
excellent judge of things of that kind.

8. JSx-
cellence can only be attained by tim^
and labour.

9 An hour to corne appears a
long time; an hour passed seems but an
instant : we expect nvachfrom the one
and find hut little in the other.
10 We think we are able to judge
whether a thing suits us or not, bui it
is possible that the judgment of others
is more correct.

11 Tliere is neither pavement nor
rails before the opera-house,
12 Whai is tJuit ditch round the monur
mentfor ? 13 You must not put corn
into the cellar, it is so very damp.

14/ shoidd think it must be built
upon clay. 15 There is a man in the
court w^ith your carpet-bag : shaU I tell

1 They listened in the Hope, to hear,
what spoken was. 2 Seldom hear
Listeners much Good over them-
selves (The Listener at the Wall hears
his own Disgrace). 3 It does to-me
grief, Your Sorrow so heavy to find.
4 Nobody is so weak as that, who
not No say can, when he it upon the
Tongue has. 5 Strong, stronger,
strongest is only the Backward of
weak, weaker, weakest. 6 No-one
can in All excellent be. 7 He is a
great Knower of such-likes.

8 Only
with the Time and only through
Perseverance can one to Distinction
get. 9 An Hour before us seems
long, one behind us seems only one
Moment ; we expect much of the one
and find only little in the other.
10 We believe ourselves in-the Po-
sition, to judge, if this or that us
suit or not, but it is possible, that the
Judgment of-Others much correcter
is. 11 Neither Pavement nor Hails
finds itself before the Opera-house.
12 Where-to is the Ditch round the
Monument ? 13 You must no Com
in the Cellar bring, it is there so
damp. 14 Me thinks, he is on Clay
built 15 A Man is in-the Court
with Your Ti-avelling-bag ; shall

ENGLISH AND AN0LTCT8ET) GERMAN EXERCISES.

:)

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

him to come in? 16 The falling

of the leaves should remind us of the
faUing of men ; both came from, and
must return to, the earth

17 The cow is one of the
most usejul of animals. 1 8 The engine
may he considered the dam' leading from
the ancient to the modern.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

i him here-in-call ? 16 The Falling
of-the Leaves should us on tlie Passing-
away of-the Man remind ; both come
from the £arth and must thereto
back-turn. 17 The Cow is one of-
the usefuUest Animals. 18 One could
the F]rigine the Gate call, which out-of
the old Time in the new leads.

EXERCISE XXX.

1 Youth has its pleasures as xcell
as old age. The form^er are those of
hope ; the latter of reflection.

2 A loise man des-
pises nothing hut cidpahle deficiency.

3 Many questions are far
from easy to decide.

4 Every one must have ad-
mired the way in which he acted under
the circumstances. 5 There is no fall
less pitied than thai of the unjust man.
^ It is exceedingly unjust to jtidge
the acts of men without well consider-
ing the circumstances.

7 I shall take action upon
it. 8 He who conceals his thoughts
frequently conceals his ignorance. 9
He who has a fixed purpose has a fixed
occupation^ and tiierefore never feels the
want of something to do. 10 I should
like to goon deck, hut there is too much
dew. 11 Do you know how many

docks there are in London f 12 I

suppose the expression ^^ all right"
signifies that all is well.

13 T?Mt farm is a fine estate.

14 Why should
good people he compa/red to sheep, and
had to goats ? Surely the one animal
is no worse than the other. That is
quite true; hut you must remember
that this is a metaphor, and never
forget that figurative language muM
not he construed literally.

1 The Youth has her Enjoyments
(her Pleasures) even-so good, as the
Age ; those belong to-the Hope, these
to-the Reflections. 2 The Wise
despises nothing than culpable De-
ficiency. 3 It gives many Questions,
which themselves throughout not
easily decide let. 4 Each must his
Manner-of-acting under the Circum-
stances admired have. 5 The Fall
of-an Unjust becomes least pitied.
6 It is highest unjust, the Actionsof-
a Man to judge, without the Circum-
stances in earnest Consideration to
draw. 7 I shall my Measures there-
after hit. 8 Who his Thoughts hides,
hides sometimes his Ignorance. 9
Who a fixed Plan has, has a fixed
Occupation and feels therefore never
Want on Occupation. 10 I would-
go gladly upon the Deck, but it is
too dewy. 1 1 Know You, how many
Docks it in London gives ? 12 1
suppose the Expression "quite good **
means, that Everything in good Order
is. 13 That Farm (Peasant-yard) is
a beautiful Estate. 1 4 Why should
good Men with Sheep compared be-
come and bad with he-Goats, since
indeed the one Animal not worse is
than the other ] That is quite right ;
but one must consider, that it a
Metaphor is, and one must not forget,
that a figurative Expression not

literally understood become must.

2 o

74

THE PRACTICAL LINOUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

15 Th^ rigffvig is nwde of rope, biU
what is the rudder made of?

16 vl man without knowledge
is like a house without a roof neither
useful to himself nor to others.

ANGUCISED GERMAN.

15 The Rigging becomes of Rope
made, but whereof is the Rudder
made? 16 A Man without Know-
ledge Ls like a House without Roof, to-
him self of no Use and also to-Othere
not.

EXERCISE XXXI.

1 The 71 umber of our ideas depends
upon the variety of our knowledge.
2 No one loses by giving good ujeighi
or measure, 3 Sonu

one has been moving my things; I
wish people would leave t/iem alone.
4 Wh^re were you born f 5 Are you
beside yourself? 6 Come and sit
bedside me. 7 Hoiv do

you generally occupy your time in the
evenings? 8 / am equally

fond of reading and of aynusement,
and tJierefore sometimes stay at home,
and at otJiers go out. 9 What do you
t/iink of tJie principles of your prin-
cipal ? 10 The principal fauU that I
have to find with our chief is, thai he
has no /lead. 11 What w that man
doing in the forest tmth a lamp ?
12. WJuU a quantity of flour there is
on the mill floor I 13 TJiere is a
mouse under the strata on the platform.
14 / am sure of it.

15 n w
impossible to study in the library; there
is too much talking. Can I be alon^ in
the sitting-room ?

16 Which do you prefer
for a long voyage, a ship or a steam-
boat ? 17 It is difficult to say.
Each has advantages; b'ut; on the whole,
J think the preference must be givefi to
the steamboat.

18 It is scarcely possible to conceive of
anything more a-greeable, than to sit by
a fotnitain in th^. evening.

1 The Wealth of-our Ideas hangs
from the Variety of-our KLnowlet^esoff.
2 No-one loses thereby, that he fiill
Measure and Weight gives. 3 Some-
one has my Things in Disorder brought;
i would^ one remained therefrom.
4 Where are You bom ? 5 Are You
out-of Senses? 6 Come You and
seat You yourself aside me. 7 Where-
with occupy You yourself generally
of-the Evening ? 8 1 like the Reading
even so very as Pleasures and remain
therefore sometimes to House and go
sometimes out. 9 What hold You
of the Principles of-Your Princi-
pal 1 10 What i on-the most on our
Chief to blame have, is, that he little
Head has. 11 What makes the
Man in-the Forest with a Lamp?
12 What for a Quantity Flour is on
the Mill-floor ! 13. There is a

Mouse under the Straw upon the
platform. 14 I know it cei-tainly (I
am thereof convinced). 15 It is
impossible, in the Library to work ;
one speaks (talks) there too much ;
can i in-the Dwelling-room for me
alone be ? 16 What draw You for a
far Voyage before, a Sailing-vessel or
a Steamship ? 17 That is difficult to
say, each has its Advantages; however,
in-tlie Whole taken, believe i, belongs
the Preference to-the Steamboat
18 One can oneself scarcely some-
tiling More-agreeable think, than of-
Evening aside a Fountain to sit.

XH0LI8U AND AN0LIGI8£1> GERMAN EXEUC18ES.

iO

ENGUSU BXERCISE.

19 You 8ay fleas and mice are of no
possMe use. It may he so ; hut my
opinion is, thai such things do more
than we think towards t/ie cUanliness
of our persons a^iul /tomes, hy compel-
ling attention that would not otlierwise
be given.

ASGLlCiSED GERMAN.

19 You say, Fleas and Mice can of no
Use be ; that may be ; but my Opinion
is, that tbe-saine more, than we think,
to-the Cleanliness of-us ft<»lf and of-our
Dwellings contribute, whilst they us
to-the Carefulness force.

EXERCISE XXX II.

1 They seetned rattier disposed to
favour iL 2 It may he true Uiat tie
suffers much J but certainly not i/u>re
than he miglU Juive expected. 3 We
can accustom ourselves to alnwst any-
thing. 4 She is quite overcome ; let
her compose herself. Hest tmll do her
most good. 5 The case

must be plaitdy stated to he clearly
understood ; and the contrary is no Uss
true. 6 To-morrow is a day

about tahic/t the unse man does not
trouble liimself and to wJucJi he leaves
nothing thcU can he done to-ilay.

7 I am disjwsed
to tkink that your inclinations are
behind your age. 8 T/ie flowers

and the flies come together : such is life.
9 Are there not more large
screw-steamers with two funnels
than with one? 10 Will you oblige
me hy shtUting the window? it is begiti-
ning to hail. 1 1 Well-kept

gravel patlis greatly increase the heauty
of a garden. 12 It is scarcely ]Mssihle
to over-estimate t/ie value of railways
to a nation, or their VHjrtJdessnesa to
the s/uMreholders.

13 Rats are said to live a hundred
years Can it he possible ? 14 The
wheatshecf affords more true pleasure
to the village than the (Jieatre to the
town. 15 J)o you know how

many different kinds of parsnips there
are, and which is considered the hest?

1 One seeme<l rather inclined, it to
favour. 2 May be, that he very
suffers, but indeed surelv not uioiv,
than he had expect can. 3 We

can us almost on Everything ac-
custom. 4 She is quite out-ofhei*self;
she must herself compose. Repose will
to- her on-the most well-do. 5 To-the
clear Understanding of-a Thingbolongs
a clear Exj>o.sition, and the Reverse is
even so true. 6 The to-morrow Day
is Something, about that the Wise
liimself not worries, and upon which
he nothing i>ost|>one8, that to-day
done become can. 7 It appears to-
me, as if Your Years to- Your Inclinil-
tions far beyond are. 8 Flowers and
Flies apj)ear at same Time ; so goes it
in-the Life. 9 Gives it not more great
Screw-Steamers with two Funnels than
with one? 10 Will You to-me the
Favour do, the Window to-to-make 1
It catches on, to hail. 1 1 Well kept
Gravel-paths heighten very the Beauty
of-a Garden.' 12 It is scarcely pos-
sible, the Value of-the Railways for a
Nation, or of-them Worthlessness for
the Shareholders to over-estimate.
13 One says. Rats live hundred
Years; is that possible? 14 The
Wheatsheaf brings to-the Village
more true Pleasure, than the Theati'e
to-the Town. 15 Know You, how
many Kinds Parsnips it gives, and
which one for the hofX holds ?

76

THE PliACTICAL LINGUIST.

EKGLISH EXERCISE.

1 6 Of all roots, the most difficult to get
at, is tJuU called tJie root of evil —
money.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

16 Of all Roots is the on-the most-
difficult to get the so-called Root of-
all Evil — ^the Money.

EXERCISE XXXI 11.

1 ** Employ your time profitably /"
has a nuianiiig when we are paid far
what we do ; but we do ivell to re-
member tfiat money is not tlie atdy
payment for labour, 2 Jf we

could see the ejid- from the beginning,
we s/iould often not begin. 3 The last
time I asked you to lend me some
money, you said it was the last you
had. You say the same now : pray
how many " lasts " have you ?

4 Men hire aU sorts of
things : some hire others to praise t/iem-
selves.

5 A good
memory is not always a good thing :
for instance, Vie remend^rance of
unpleasant things and especially
others' faults. 6 No one who can
walk is without the means of acquiring
pleasure as profound as that vnthin
the reach of t/ie most wealthy.

7 AU
mortals are liable to ynisfortune ; but
the greatest misfortune, or what is so
called, is not to be able to bea/r misfor-
tune properly. 8- Take a fork
and get some ftay from the Juiyst<ick.

9 Do not use (lie whip
too much when you are dnving up hill,
10 l^iere is something the 7n<Uter with
that Jiorse's lioof ; it cannot step jyro-
fterly. It ivi/l certainly fall, and if it
ilofH, it will break the sJuifts. 1 1 Uow
very carfflfffis, to leave the spade vpo?i
tJie stairs ; any one migJU luive fallen
over it and hurt himself.

1 "Turn thy Time usefully on,"
has a Meaning, if we for our Work
paid become; but we should well con-
sider, that the Payment of-our Work
not alone in Money consista 2 Could
we always the End foresee, so should
we often at-all not begin. 3 When
i You the last Time asked, to-me some
Money to lend, said You, it were Your
Last. Now tell You again the-same^
How much "Last" have You then
really? 4 The Men hire to-them-
selves all-sorts-of-things. Some hire
to-themselves Others, in-order them-
selves Incense strew to let. 5 A good
Memoiy is not always a Blessing ; to-
the Example, the Recollection on
Unpleasant and particularly on the
Faults of-Others. 6 None, who sound
Legs has, lacks the Means, to-himself
even so high Enjoyments to procure, as
they to-the Richest accessible are.

7 All
Moi*tals are to-the Misfortune subject.
But the greatest Mishap, as one be-
lieves, is : the Mishap not in right
Manner bear to can. 8 Take a Hay-
fork and sting some Hay from-the
Ha3r8tack off. 9 Let thy Whip in
Rest, when thou mount-on drivest.
10 The Horse has any sometliing on-
the Hoof ; it can not right uj)-step. It
will surely yet fall, and if it falls, will
it the Shaft break. 11 What

Carelessness, the Spade upon the Stair-
case lie to let ; it coukl Someone there-
over fallen be and hirarelf hurt have.

EXOLISH AND ANGLICISED OEKMAN EXERCISES.

77

ENGLISH EXSBCISE.

12/ believe more people go to places
of amusemerU to be seen than to see,
because eo Jew of them will get up to
see the finest of ail sights — the sun
rise.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

12 I believe more Men visit public
Amusement-places, in-order seen to
become than in-order tliemselves to
see ; for so Few use up-to-staiid, in-
order tlie most-glorious of-all Sights —
the Sun-up-going to see.

EXERCISE XXX lY.

1 One would imagine tluit those who
are always finding fault with society ^
forget that they form a part of it.

2 Xoticithstanding all
we hear about the value of money ,
which is indeed great, yet, iciiliout
thubt, tuisdom should be tlie chi^f aim
of our lives. 3 W/tat

subject is generally supposed to be tlie
most pleasing to young ladies? A
good offer. 4 TJue chief

advantage of having Science for your
friend is, that you wUl always be able
to find something fresh in her.

5 If you liave not made up your
mind, do not post your letter. 6 Y^ou
will be able to see your path, for tJiere
is a good moon ; it rose early.

7 I am very fond of being
on a mountain in the muist of lightning
and ravfh.
8 The omnibus is very late.

9 We shall
not be able to get through the park, for tlie
mist is beginning to rise, and we shaU
lose our way; and, as totJie marshes,
they are covered with mivd and little
pools,

10 The monkey luis taken tlie oafs up
tlie mast. 11 As it

is now evident that we have a suffi-
dent number of words, to enable us to

1 One should think, that those,
who always something on the Society
to blame have, quite forget, that they
themselves a Part thereof fonn.
(Those, who always something on the
Society to blame find, must quite
forget, etc.) 2 Notwithstanding All,
what one over the Value of-the Money
say hears, and that really great is,
should yet Wisdom unconditionally
the Chief-aim of-our Life l>e. 3 Which
Subject, think You, is generally to-the
Ladies on-the must-agreeable? A
good MaiTiage-offer. 4 The Principal-
advantage, the Science to-the Friend
to have, consists therein, that one
always something New in her discover
Ciin. 5 So long thou still undecided
art, send thy Letter not off. 6 You
will Your Way well to-see be-able; for
it is clear Moon-sldne; the Moon is
early up-gone. 7 I am very willingly
u[>on a Mountain, amidst in a
Storm.

8 The Omnibus comes very late
(remains very long out). 9 We shall
not more through the Park to-come
be-able ; for the Fog catches on (be-
gins) to rise and we shall our Way
lose; what the Marshes concerns,
they are full Mud and little Pools.
10 The M(mkey is with' the Oat
upon the Mast climbed. 11 As we
now clearly a sufficient Word-store
have, in-order sometliing more to-write

78

THB PRACTICAL LXKOUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

write Sf/nuilhing more Ouui has hitherto
been attempted, we purpose devoting the
rer/utining fifteen exercises to brief
sketches, which, it is hopeti, wiU at the
same time prove useful as subjects far
compositioti arid matter for reflection.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

to be-able, than till-now tried become
is, so think we, the remaining fifteen
Exercises to short Sketches to em-
ploy, which, as we hope, useful
Material to Compositions as well, as
to-the fiirther Reflection offer will.

EXERCISE XXXV.

1 Cause and effect should be con-
sidereal together J fur the one cannot be
understoofl without the other.

2 The ejffect of your conduct
will be to alienate all your friends.

3 How
often do we accept and enjoy witJuyut a
single thought about the great First
Cause, to whom toe are indebted.
4 Wfien I teas a boy I thought as a
boy, spoke as a boy, and acted as a
boy; }uivifvg become a man, I s/u)iUd
think, speak, and act as one.

5 No one can
live without making enemies ; but that
very fact gives him the opportunity of
converting them into friends.

6 W/ien we are dissatisfied
with our lot, by looking around us, we
shall find m/iny in a much worse con-
dition, and thus discover a reason to be
tJuinkful.

7 Never abandon a friend in
distress. 8 TJie burning sands,

tfts snow-clad roads, tlie starry sky, the
rapid or the still river, are alike able
to gladden man.

9 What is the worth of this saddle and
these reins ? 10 They are not worthy
of yovr notice. \\ A willing horse
iieeds no sjmrs. 12 Wait here a

moment ; I will run up to the sigii-
jjost, aiui see wtuit it says,

13 Few sights a/re inore
pleasing than thai of the rainbow.

1 Cause and Effect should with
oiie-another considered be ; for the one
can one without the other not under-
stand. 2 The Consequence of-thy
Behaviour will be, that thou to-thee
all thy Friends estrangest. 3 How
often take we away and enjoy, without
a single Thought on the great Origina-
tor of-all Things, to-whom we All owe.
4 When i yet a Boy was, thought i
as a Boy, spoke as a Boy and acted
as a Boy; as i now a Man become
am, should i think, speak and act
like a Man. 5 No-one can live,
without to-himself Enemies to ac-
quire. But just that gives . to-him
Opportunity, them into Friends to
change. 6 When we discontented
with our Fate are and around iis about
look, so shall we Many see, who much
worse thereon are and shall therein
a Ground (a Cause) to-the Thankful-
ness find. 7 Forsake never a Friend
in the Distress. 8 The burning Sand,
the snow-covered Path, the starry
Heaven, the foaming, as the softly
gliding River, all can the Human-
heart in equal Manner rejoice.
9 How much is this Saddle and this
Bridle worth? 10 They are of- Your
Notice unworthy. 1 1 A spirited Horse
needs of-no Spure. 12 Wait here a
Moment ; i will to the Way-shower
run and see, what thereon written
stands. 13 It gives scarcely a more-
beautiful Sight, than that of-the Rain-

ENGLISH AND ANOUCISED GERMAN EXERCISES.

79

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

14 If we were to put all our good
sajfbigs and dteds on the one side of a
date J and our had on the other , we might
not like to see the restUt,

1 5 Seed, no matter of what kiiul, if
properly sown, will produce fruit, pro-
vided it is sound; therefore if you wish
good fruit, sow good seed.

ANGLICISfiD GERMAN.

bow. 14 If we all, wlmt we Good
speak and do, on the one Side of-a
Tablet wrote and all our Defects
upon the other, so would-look we
the Result perhaps rather at-all not at.
15 Sound Seed of any a Kind will
Fruit bring, if it properly sown
become is. If thou therefore good
Fruits desirest, sow good Seed.

EXERCISE XXXVI.

I It is not so very difficult to under-
siandj that liberty ought only to be
given to, and can ofdy be enjoyed by,
persons able to use without abusing it.

2. It is am, error to suppose
that those who constantly seek whcU is
commonly called pleasure, have real
enjoyment ; for true joy is inseparable
from that peace which is only known to
the moderate, 3 Though

you may know another to be in error,
it is not always wise to tell him of it.
For exa^mple ; time spent in endeavour-
ing to convince a fool of his foUy, is
time lost, unless you are paid for it,
4 If you throw a stone into a deep
well, you can thus ascertain its depth.
5 Storms serve to clear t/ie
air. 6 If you feel disposed to

come with me into my warehouse, I tmU
show you the difference between wheat
and this weed. 7 Tlie

trunk of this tree toas greatly htjured
during the thunderstorm,
% It is difficult for us, a^^customed as
we are to railways, to understand how
persons in olden times did as much as
they did.

9 I do not know what your
opinion may be, but I think tJiat a
person who can possess a horse or a
dog, without taking an interest in its

1 It is not difficult, to understand,
that Liberty only to-those granted
become should and that only those
of-her rightly enjoy can, who her
to use understand, without her to
misuse. 2 It is an Error, to believe,
that they, who constantly after so-called
Pleasure strive, real Enjoyment have ;
for true Joy is from that Peace of-
the Soul unseparable, which only the
Temperate-one knows. 3 When one
Somebody err sees, so is it not always
wise, with him thereover to reason ;
for, to-the Example, a Fool of his Folly
to convince is Time-loss, in-case one
not perhaps therefor paid becomes.
4 There- by, that one a Stone into a
deep Well throws, can one his Depth
measure. 5 Storms serve there-to, the
Air to clear. 6 If thou Desire hast,
with me into the Warehouse to go, so
will i to-thee the Difference between
Wheat and this Weed show. 7 The
Trunk of-this Tree has by the Storm
very suffei-ed (is injui'ed become).
8 We, who we on Iron-roads (Rail-
ways) accustomed are, have Trouble,
to understand, how the Men in
earlier Times yet so much accomplish
could. 9 I know not, of-which Opi-
nion You be may ; but i think that
a Man who a Horse or a Dog possess
can, without himself about of-him

80

THE PKACTIQAL LINQUI8T.

EK0U8H EXEBCISE.

comfort, is one whose friendship is of
little value.

10 I avi quite of that opinion; hut what
do you say of one who does not take so
m/uch interest in the comfort of his
servants y as he does in tluU of his dog ?

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

Wants to trouble, also in the Friend-
ship of no particular Worth is (be).
10 I am quite of- Your Opinion. But
what say You of one, who not even
so much Care about his Servants
carries, as about his Dog?

EXEECISE XXXVII.

1 Though t/ie word " noise " means
any sound, it is chiefly applied to those
sounds that are not pleasing to tlie
person using the word; it therefore
signifies rather the taste of the person
at the time than any positive thing, for
the same individual wiU at different
times call t/ie same thin^g " music " or

*^noise.^^

2 The importance of cleanliness
cannot be too higJdy estimated, or too
strongly urged. Dirt is ruinous both
to the body anvd the soul. How can
it be expected to find a pure mind in a
fUhy body ?

3 Home I There is iw place like it;
there is no place that cannot be made
it ; there is nothing that cam compen-
sate for the want of it. The poor
fMin in it is more' happy than the
rich man in his grand house, if it is
not it.

4 Duty is the only thing tJuU should
compel a mem to change his course, to
do that which he is not doing, or to
leave undone that which he is doing.
We have duties to ourselves and to
others, and it unll seldom or never
happen that the one is incmisistent toith
the other ; but, till duty becomes our
pleasure, we shall never do our duty,
either to ourselves or to others.

5 We are all, or ought all to be,
fond of glory — thcU is, Iwnour, praise,
fame. The love of it induces exertion;

1 Though the Woi'd '* Noise" any a
Sound means, so becomes it however
particularly of the Sounds used, which
to-the Speaking disagreeable are. It
signifies therefore more temporary
Taste, than any something Positive ;
for-the same Person will at different
Times the-same Sounds now ** Music "
now " Noise " call.

2 The Value of-the Cleanliness
can not too liigh rated and not too
pressingly recommended become. Dirt
is for Body and Soul injurious. How
can one a clean Mind in an unclean
Body exi)ect?

3 Home! It gives after-all no
Place, which to-it like-comes and none,
out-of which itself not a "Home"
make let ; it gives nothing, what it
replace could. The Poor is therein
happier, than the Rich in his grand
House ; if it to-him none offera

4 The Duty alone should the Man
compel, his Actions-manner so to alter,
that he that do, what he till-now
neglected, and that neglect, what he
to do uses. We have Duties towards
us ourselves and towards Others, and
it will rarely or never happen, that
both inconsistent are. So long how-
ever the Duty not bur Pleasure is,
shall we neither towards us ourselves
nor towards Others our Duty do.

5 We All love the Glory, or should
him yet love, that is-called : Honour,
Praise, Fame ; this Love compels us

EXQUSH AND ANQUCI8ED GERMAN EXERaSES.

81

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

but, as ti is possible to seek it in tite
wrong direction^ arid to receive iifrom
ike worthless^ we should take care to
undertake things that must be useful
to ourselves and may he so to others^
foTy by so doirig, we secure good and do
no harm.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

to Exertions. But since it easily
}>ossible is, him in fali^ Directions to
seek, or out-of unworthy Hands to
receive, so should we Care carry, only
that to undertake, what to-us our-
selves useful be must and to-Others
useful be can, for thereby secure we
to-us ourselves Good, and hurt No-one.

EXERCISE XXXVIII.

1 A letter I Hope, joy, fortune,
CMadety, grief, ruin, are aU contained
in that little representative of the ab-
sent ! Little does the carrier think how
much pleasure and -pain he daily dis-
tributes ; how indifferent does the writer
too often feel as to the grief he may
inflict, or the pleasure he nuiy give, by a
few costless words !

2 A child shoidd altoays be regarded
by the parent as his future self. He
should therefore be anxious to make
him ft to perpetuate his existence, and
to feel satisfied thai he wiU never do that
of which he would himself be asfuimed.
In order to secure this, he must make
him his companiim and his confidant,
and teach him to think as he thinks.

3 A friend is one who takes a deep
interest in your welfare, who delights
in everything that can do you good, and
dislikes anything that can harm yo^i,
no matter whether the good or the evil is
in you or proceeds from arwilver ; ilvere-
fore he who overlooks your faxdts, or
suffers another to please you to your
injury, whatever may be his inteiUion,
he is not your friend,

4 Virtue is a word that is fre-
quently misunderstood. It is com-
monly applied to that course of coyiduct
that is approved by the person who uses

1 A Letter I Hope, Joy, Fortune,
Anxiety, Grief, Ruin — are all in the
little Representative of-the Absent
contained. Little ' thinks t)ie Letter-
carrier how much Pleasure and Pain
he daily distributes ; how indiffe-
rent is often the Off-sender towards
the Pain, which he causes, or towards
the Joy, which he by a pair Words
makes, which him nothing cost.

2 A Father should alwavs his Child
as his own future Self regard and
should therefore Care carry, it to enable,
that it his own Existence continue can,
and never Actions commit, of- which he
himself ashamed have would. To this
End should he his Child to his Com-
panion and Confidant make and should
it teach, so to think, as he self thinks.

3 That-one is our Friend, who
warm Share on our Well-going takes,
who himself over All rejoices, what us
well-does, and who All hates, what us
hurt could, all-the-same, whether the
Gooil or Bad within us ourselves is, or
from Others out-goes. Therefore is that-
one not our Friend, who our Faults
overlooks, or who admits, that an
Other us to our Harm pleasing is,
what also ever his Litention be may.

4 The Virtue is an often misunder-
stood Notion. He becomes generally of
the Action-manner used, which one ap-
proves. It may therefore not Wonder

82

THE PRACTICAL LINOUI8T.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

tJie tenn. We are tlierefore not surprised
to find tJuU opposite things are fre-
quently so styled; and indeed that
which is virtus at one time is not
necessarily so at anotJi^r, for virtue is
the doing that whicJi at tJts tinie and
wiuhr the circninstances will, or is
intended to, jMrod-uce the greatest good to
tlie greatest nmnber.

AKOLICISED GERMAN.

take, tliat often just Contrary with
the-same Word called becomes, and in
the Deed find we, that that, what to-
day Virtue called becomes, not neces-
sarily also to-morrowVirtueis; because
Virtue is that, what just at-the Time
and under the Circumstances the most
Good in -the widest Extent forth-calls,
or however fbrth-to-call intended was.

EXEECISE XXXIX.

1 A moment ; toait a momsnt; I tmll
do it in a m>oment ; it will not take a
mom^efU — are all expressions of desire
for delay, or valuations of tim>e indi-
cating the inferior importance of otie
thing to another. If the estimate is
correct, the assertion is jtist ; for all
things have a relative value, and should
he regarded accordingly.

2 Look ai those cows sheltering t/iemr
selves utuler the shade of those twble
trees. What a plea^dng sight it is !
What is it but a recognition of weak-
ness and reliance on external protec-
tion? ThiLS, the infant runs from
the stranger to its mother, youUi in
difficulty to hisfatlier, aspiring genius
to the aid of ths great, and all alike to
God ; for, he we what we mxiy, there are
forces w/iic/i unaidsfl we cannot with-
stand.

3 Forget. — Few jyersmis forget what
they really urish to remember, urdess
they attempt too much at a time. There
are several degrees of m^m,ory. It is
not necessary, nor is it indeed possible,
to impress the mind equally with all
things. Those things which at the time
give us great pain or pleasure are
seldom forgotten. The reason is, because

1 "A Moment!" "wait a Moment!"
" i will it directly do ; " " it will no Mo-
ment Time Cost" — are all Expressions,
in-order Delay to demand, or it are
Time-valuations, which indicate, that
the One of inferior Imi>ortance is, than
the Other. Is the Estimate just, so is
also the Expression allowable ; because
All has after-all only a proportionate
Value and should accordingly regai*ded
become.

2 Behold yonder the Cows, which
under the majestic Trees Shelter seek.
What for a lovely Sight ! What is it
else, than a Confession of Weakness
and Dependence of foreign Protec-
tion] So flees the Child from-the
Stranger to-the Mother, the Youth in
Difficulties to-the Father, the upstriv-
iiig Genius to-the Support of-the
Great, and we All to Gkxi ; for what
we also be may, it gives Forces, to-
which we without Aid not withstand
can.

3 Forget. — Only few People forget,
what they really in-the Memory keep
will, in-case they not perhaps too
much upon one Time undertake. It
gives several Degrees of-the Memory-
power. It is neither necessary, nor
possible, to-oneself E very-thing with
equal Strength to-impress. That, which
to-iis great Pain or great Joy makes,

ENGLISH Am) ANGLICISED QEBMAN EXERCISES.

83

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

tee aUow, or cannot helpj their taking
for a given time, sole possession of the

4 Prudence accomplishes more than
might. Hie strong man, without it,
wastes much of, and relies too much
upon, his strength. The weaker man,
with it, reserves his strength for the
right momerU, cmd does not rely upon
it, if he can find auadliaries. The
BtraigJU course is not always the
shortest; the prudent boatman keeps
out of the current, when he has top^dl
against the tide.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

becomes seldom forgotten. The Ground
hereof is, that it, with or against our
Will, for the Moment our Soul quite
rules.

4 Prudence accomplishes more, than
Might. Without her wastes the Strong
much Strength, upon which he him-
self too very relies. With her saves
the Weaker his Strengths for the right
Moment up and depends himself not.
thereon, if he otherwise Help find
can. The straight Way is not always
the shortest. The sensible Boat-man
keeps himself from the Current far,
when he stream-upwards to row has.

EXERCISE XL.

1 War is of two kinds, offensive and
defensive. It is ujuler any circum-
stances a great calamity, as it etitails
m^vch misery upon all connected vnth it.
There are, however, times when it must
be undertaken in order to avert still
greeUer evils. When war has become
a necessity, it should he prosecuted with
the greatest energy and ability ; and
glorious is the death of those who die
fighting t-o defend tlve right. The best
safeguard against war and its attendant
ills, is readiness to undertake it whtn
necessary, and the re^mtation that, if
forced into it, you will never aba^idon
it alive without victory.

2 Fire is one of those things the
value of which as a servant, or the
danger of which as a master, can
scarcely be overestimated. We must not,
however, suppose that because its de-
structive nature, as seen in a great con-
fiagration, is so co7ispicumtsly terrible
that it is, in fact, m^xre dangerous than

1 It gives two Kinds Wars; Offence-
and Defence-wars. Tlie War is imder
all Circumstances a great Misfortune ;
for he brings much Misery over All,
who therewith to do have. It gives
however Times, where he undertaken
become must, in-order greater Evils
off-to-ward. Is he however a Neces-
sity become, so should he with the
greatest Energy and with all Ability
prosecuted become, and glorious is the
Death of-those, who in the Defence
of-the Right die. The best Safeguard
against the War and his Terrors is
the Readiness, him to undertake, as-
soon it necessary is, as-well as the
Reputation, that, once thereto forced,
one 1dm, not alive without Victory
upgive will.

2 The Fire belongs to those Things,
whose Worth as Servants or whose
Danger as Masters one scarcely too
high rate can. When, however, this
Danger itself in a Conflagration in
so terrible Greatness shows, so must
we therefore however not assume,
that she really greater be, than other

84

THE PRACTICAL LIXOriCT.

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

other Us8 obvious evils ; for example,
had habits often fail to attract atten-
tion, till they have wrought irreparable
mischief

3 Order should he cultivated as a
habit. The orderly man always knows
where to find a thing, because he has a
place for each thing, ami lie imturaUy
puis it there. The same disposition ex-
tends to his mitui, for lie keeps his
knotoledge in the same way as his
other matters. This mental order is
exhibited in his speech, which is dear
and methodical; he is therefore able to
make himself readily u^uler stood. It is
a pleasure to have intercourse with
such a man ; whereas the sloven aniwys
you with his confusion and endless
repetitions.

ENOUSH EXERCISE.

less in the Eyes fidling Evils as, to-
the Example, bad Habits, which only
little noticed become, till they irre-
parable Damage caused have.

3 Order-love ought to-the Habit
cultivated become. An order-loving
Man knows always a Thing to find ;
because for each has he a Place and puts
it naturally thereto. The-same Prin-
ciple turns he also upon his Inner on ;
for also his Knowledge treats he as the
other Objects, and this mental Order
shows itself in the Clearness and
Method of-his Language ; he can, him-
self therefore easily comprehensible
make. It is a Joy, with a such Man
to associate; whilst the Untidy us
with his Confusion and his endless
Repetitions wearies.

EXERCISE XLI.

1 A painter who had turned
physician, was asked why he had left
his profession. " Because^' replied he,
"^y former business exhibited my
mistakes in too plain a manner; I
have therefore now chosen one in which
they unll be buried."

2 During the South Sea Mania a
company opened an office in Change
Alley to receive subscriptions for rais-
ing a mdllion of money, for a purpose
to be made known after the million was
raised. The people flocked in, and
paid five shilli^ngs on every Jifty pounds
they subscribed. A large sum was
thus collected, when an advertisement
appeared stathig that the subscribers
might luive their deposits loithout any
dediiclion, as the project of the directors
was merely a trial to see how many

fools they could make in one day.

1 A Painter, who to-the Doctor
changed had, became asked, why he
his Profession up-given hava "Out
of-the Ground," said he, " because my
former Occupation my Errors too
clearly betrayed ; i have now an other
chosen, in which they buried become."

2 During the South-Sea-Mania
opened a Company an Office in Change
Alley, in-order Subscriptions to-the
Amount of-one Million for a Purpose
to-receive, which only after Signing of-
that Sum known made become should.
The Public streamed by and paid five
Shillings upon every fifty Pound of-
the Subscription. Upon this Manner
was a great Sum together brought,
when in a Notice known made became,
that the Subscribers their deposited
Moneys back have could, as the
Directors only intended had, to see,
how many Fools themselves on one
Day together bring let.

BN0LI8H AND ANGLICISED OEBMAN EXEBaSES.

85

ENGLISH EXEKCISE.

3 Dr. Pease, Dean of Ely, was ofice
at dinner, when just as t/ts cloth was
removedf the tndjject of discourse
happened to he that of extraordinary
mortality among laicyers. " We have
lost," said a gentleman, " not less than
six eminent barristers in as many
months" The Dean, who icas very
deaf rose as his friend finished his
remarks, and gave the company grace —
" J^or this and every other mercy, make
us truly thankful"

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

3 Dr. Pease, Dean of Ely, assisted
once to-a Dinner at, when just at-the
Conclusion of-the-same, the Conversa-
tion herself on the extraordinary
great Mortality among the Lawyers
turned. " We have," said one of-the
Gentlemen, **-no less than six eminent
Lawyers in just as many Months lost."
The Dean, who very heavy-hearing
was, raised himself, when his Friend
just this Kemark made had and spoke
the Thanks-prayer: "For these, as for
all other Blessings, make us sincerely
thankful, O Lord : "

EXERCISE XLIL

1 One of the favourites of Henry
Prince of Wales, afterwards Henry
v., having been indicted for some mis-
demeanour, was condemned, notwith-
standing all (lie hUerest lie could make
in his favour. The prince teas so
incensed at the issue of the trial that
he struck the judge. This magistrate,
whose name was Sir William Gascoign,
instantly ordered the prince to be com-
mitted to prison; and young Henry,
by this time sensible of t^ie insuU he
had offered the laws of his country,
suffered himself to be quietly conducted
to prison by tlie officers. The king,
Henry IV., was no sooner informed
of this transacti4m than lis cried out,
in a transport of joy, " Happy is the
king who Juis a magistrate possessed
of courage to execute t/ie laws ; and
still more happy in having a son who
will submit to such chastisement.

2 Richard /., while attacking the
castle of Chalons, was shot in tlie
shoulder. The castle havi^ig fallen, and
Richard, being convinced that he would
not live, ordered Bertram de Gourdon,
from, whom he received his wound, to

be broitght before him. Upon seeing

1 One of the Favourites of-Henry,
Prince of Wales, afterwards Henry of-
the Fifth, was any of-one Offence for
before Court placed and notwith-
standing of-all Influence, which he to
his Favours employ could, condemned
become. The Prince became over the
Result of-the Trial so irritated, that
he the Judge struck. This, William
Gascoign with Name, gave imme-
diately Order, the Prince to imprison,
and the young Henry, who mean-
time comprehended had, what Oflfence
he to-the Laws of-his Land inflicted,
let himself quietly by the Oflicers into-
the Prison off-lead. As-soon-as the
King Henry the Fourth thereof in-
formed was, cried he in joyful Out-
burst out : " Hail to-the King, who
Judges has, courageous enough, the
Law upright to keep, and thrice Hail,
if he a Son possesses, who himself
such to-a Chastisement submits."

2 Richard, the First, became in
an Attack upon the Castle Chalons
into the Shoulder shot. When now
the Castle fallen was, and Richard
his End approach felt, let he Bertram
of Gourdon, the-same, from whom

86

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

hiniy tlie king said, " What harm did I
ever do to you tJuU you should kill
me ? " Bertram replied, " With your
own hand you killed my /aiher and
two of my brothers, arid you intended
to kill m-e. You may now satisfy your
revenge, for I loill cheerfuUy suffer any
torments to which yo%i can subject mc,
believing that I Juive delivered the
world from a tyrant,^^ This bold a7iswer
so affected Richard that he ordered tlie
prisoner to be presented unth one hun-
dred shillings, and to be set a4 liberty.

ANOUCISED GERMAN.

he wounded become was, before him-
self come. When the King him
saw, said he, " What have i to- thee
done, that the Death from thy Hand
deserved ] " Bertram replied : " My
Father and two of my Brothers hast
thou with own Hand slain, and me
wouldst thou likewise kill (to-me
strivest thou likewise after the Life.)
Now mayest thou thy Revenge on
me cool ; for joyfully bear i every
Torture, to-which thou me submit
canst, since i convinced am, that i
the World from a Tyrant freed have.*'
This bold Answer seized Richard so
very^that he Order gave, the Piisoner
with a Present of hundred Shillings
in Liberty to place.

EXERCISE XLIII.

1 " Pray, Mr. Opie, muy I ask
what you mix your colours with ? "
sadd a student to the great painter.
" With brains, sir,^* was the reply,
and tlie right one. It did not give
much of what toe call information, but
it was enough to awaken the inquirer.
Many other artists, when asked su^ch
a question, would have set about de-
tailing the mechanical composition of
such and such colours, in such and
stich proportions, rubbed so and so; or,
perhaps, they would have shoum him
how tliey laid them on. Bui even this
would leave him at the critical point.
Opie preferred going to the heart of
the matter — " With brains, sir.^^

2 Etty was appointed teacher of the
students of the Royal Academy. One
student came up to him and said,
" How shotdd I do this, sir f " " Sup-
pose you try." Another said, " What

1 "Pray, may i ask, Mr. Opie, what-
with You Your Colours mix?" ad-
dressed a Student the great Artist at.
" With Brain," was the Answer, and
that wai} right. Much Information
might just not therein lie, but it suf-
ficed, the Inquirer on-to-stir. Many
an-other Artist would upon a such
Question a detailed Answer with
Regard on the mechanical Composi-
tion of-these and of-those Colours, on
the Proportion, on the Manner of-the
Rubbing given have ; or he had to-
him perhaps the On-putting of-the-
same shown. But even this would
him in-the decisive Moment in-the
Lurch left have. Opie went rather
directly on the Core of-the Thing :
" With Brain."

2 Etty was to-the Teacher of-the
Students at the Royal Academy i^
pointed. One came to him and asked :
" How must i this make 1" " Try You
self!" An Other asked: "What

ENOLISn AlTD AN0UCI8ED GERMAN EXERCISES.

»7

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

this mean, Mr, Etty / " " Suppose
look,'' ''But I have looked:'
opose you look agatTu" And
did try, and they did look, and
d again; aivd they saw and
ved what they never cotUd have,
ihe " How" or the " What'' been
them or done for them, . . .
\e one case siglU and action were
ydiate, exact, intense, ofnd secure ;
i« other medicUe, feeble, and lost
oon as gained. Seeing is the
ve state, and at best 07dy registers,
ing is a voluntary act : it is the
within coming to the window, —
J. Brown.

ANGLICISED GERMAN. ,-

means this, Mr. Etty V " Look You only
there-at ! " " But that have i already
done." " Look You yet once there-at ! "
And they tried, and they looked there-
at and saw yet once there-at; and saw
and performed, what they never to
perform, in-the Position been were,
were the "Why " or the " What " to-
them explained, or for them out-carried
become. .... In the one Case
were Perceiving and Out-carrying im-
mediate, exact, vivid and sure, in the
other mediate, weak and at-once after
the Acquisition again away-flown.
Seeing is passive and makes at-the-
highest Notes. Perceiving is volun-
tary; it is the Man in-the House,
who on-the Window stepa

EXEECISE XLIV.

A young preacher, in the time of
IS I,, being appointed to hold forth
9 the Vice-ChanceUor and /ieads of
^es of Oxford, cliose for his text,
lo/ / cam/not ye tvatch one hour ? "
\e Vice-Cha/ncellor was very sleepy,
quite unable to conceal it, the
her repealed his teoct in an emr
c manner cU t/te end of each
ion of his discourse. The unfor-
le Vice-Chancellor as often awoke,
this happened so often that at
ill present covld very well see the
The Vice-Chancellor uxis so
yed at the disturbmice Ite Iiad inet

and the talk it occasioned, that
nplained to the Archbishop of Can-
ry, who imm^iately sent for the
g dergymoM to reprove him for

he had done. In the covrse of
inference which took place between
irchbishop and the preacher, the
* gave so many proofs of his
and good sense that his Grace

I At-the Time of-James of-the First
chose a young Clergyman, who asked
was, before the Vice-Chancellor and
the Heads of-the Oxford Colleges to
preach, the Text " Can ye then not
one Hour with me wake ] " As the
Vice-Chancellor very sleepy was and
quite out-of Position, it to hide, so
repeated the Preacher his Text very
emphatically at-the Conclusion of-each
Division of-his Sermon. Each-time
awoke the poor Vice-Chancellor, and
this repeated itself so often, that all
Present at- last the Joke clearly under-
stand could. The Vice-Chancellor be-
came over the Disturbance, which to-
him happened and over the, thereby
caused. Talk so irritated, that he him-
self at-the Archbishop of Canterbury
complained, and this let imitiediately
the young Clergyman come, in-ordw
to-him on-account of-his Conduct Re-
proaches to make. In-the Course of-the
Conversation between both laid the

88

THE PRACnCAL LXKOUIST.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

procured him the honour of pre(iching
before the king. Here also he had his
joke. He gave out his text in these
words, ^^ James the First and Sixth,
* Waver not,* " which of course every-
body preset saw to be a stroke at the
indecisive character of the monarch.
Javnes, eqwaUy quicksighted, exclaimed,
" He is ai me already,** But he was,
upon the whole, so well pleased with
the sermon and the man that he ap-
pointed hvm one of his chaplains. He
afterwards went to Oxford amd preached
a faretoell sermon on the text, " Sleep
on, now, ami take your rest"

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

Preaclier so many Proofs of-his Acute-
ness and his Crenuineness off, that His
Grace's to-him the Honour procured,
before the King to preach. Also here
practised he his Wit. He chose to-
the Text : "James the First and the
Sixth, Waver not !" wherein of-natuial
Manner all Present a Side-stroke on
the fickle Character of-the King per-
ceived. James, who the Meaning
just as quickly understood, cried out :
" There has he me already." But he
was in-the Whole so very with tiie
Sermon and the Preacher pleased, that
he him to one of-his Chaplains ap-
pointed. Later went the-same to
Oxford and held a Parting-speech
over the Text : '' Sleep to and rest
thyself out."

EXEECISE XLV.

1 Serjeani Davy, who, Uke many
others, sometimes asked questions unth-
out ccUcuiating the probable or possible
emswer, wishing one day to display his
wit, said to a gentleman who appea/red
in the court of King*s Bench to give
baU in the sum of £3,000, " And
pray, sir, how do you make out that
you are worth £3,000 ? " The gentle-
mcm stated the pa/rticula/rs of his pro-
perty, up to £2,940. " That*s all very
good,** said the Serjeant, "but you
want £60 more to be worth £3,000."
" For that stum,** replied the gentleman,
in no way disconcerted, ** I have a
note of hand of one Mr, Serjeant
Dany, and I hope he will have the
honesty soon to settle it,** The laughter
that this reply excited, extended even to
the bench. The Serjeant looked con-
fused, and Lord Mansfield observed in
his uaual urbane Ume^ ** Well, brother

1 The Seijeant Davy, who like
many Others sometimes Questions
put, without the probable or possible
Answer to weigh, would of-one Day
his Wit shine let and said to a Gentle-
man, who in-the Law-court of King's
Bench appeared was, in-order for a Sum
of 3,000 Pound Bail to give : " Tell You
to-me do, how will You prove, that You
3,000 Pound in-the Fortune possess 1"
The Grentleman detailed his Property
till to-the Amount of 2,940 Pound.
" All right good," said the Seijeant,
"but You require still sixty Pound, in-
order 3,000 Pound to possess." " For
the Sum" replied that-one uo-ways
daunted, " hold i a Bill of one oertain
Mr. Serjeant Davy in Hands and hope^
that the-same honourable enough be
will, him soon to pay." The Laughter,
which this Answer caused, seized even
the Judge. The Sojeant looked per^

ENGLISH Ain> AHOLIOIBBD OBRMAK BXEBCISE8.

89

BirOLISH BXERCISB.

/ t^Unk toe may accept the

Do you believe in predestina-

eaid a Mississippi captain to
hinistic clergyman on board.
%inly.** '' And do you also be-
^ what is to be will be?" '' Cer-
" « Well, I am glad to hear it."
ff" ** Becatise I intend to pass
oat ahead in fifteen mimttes, if
s any vvrttie in pifie knots and
valves; so don*t be alarmed, for

boilers are not to burst, they
'" Mere the divine began to
vneasy, and was beginning to

when the captain said, *'/
/ you believed in predestination,
at what is to be wiU be?" << So
but I prefer being a Uttle nearer
'^ when it takes place."

▲NOLIdSSD GERMAN.

plexed out, and Lord Mansfield said
in his usual, polite Tone, ''Well,
Brother Davy, i think, we can the
Bail well accept"

2 "Believe You on Predestination)'*
asked a Mississippi-Captain a Oal-
vinistic 01ei^g3rman on Board of-his
Ship. " Certainly." " And beUeve You
also, that that, what happen shall,
happen Willi"— "Certainly. '* "Good,
i am glad, that to hear."— "Why?"
— "Because i intend, that Ship there
before us in fifteen Minutes to over-
reach, if firm Fine-wood and Safety-
valves any Worth hava Disquiet You
yourself therefore not; for if the Boilers
not burst shall, so will they it also
not." Here caught the Divine on, a
disquiet Mien to-assume and away-to-
move, when the Captain said : " I
thought, You believed on Predestina-
tion and that, what happen shall,
happen will]" " That do i also, but i
draw before (prefer), to-the Afber-part
somewhat nearer to be, if it happen
should.

EXEECISE XLVI.

%emistocles, having conceived the
of supplanting the Lacede-
pw, and of taking the govemr
of Greece out of their hands in
k> put it into those of the Athe-

kept his eye and his thoughts
lily faced upon this great project ;
B he was not very nice or scrur

in the choice of his measures,
>er tended totoards the a>ccom-
ig of the end he had in view, he
upon as just and la/wful. On
in da/y, then, he declared, in a
9embly of the people, that lie had
important design to propose, but
e could not communicate it to
pie, because its success required

1 Themistocles, who the Plan de-
signed had, the Lacedemonians to
supplant and to-them the Government
of-Greece to snatch-away, in-order her
to-the Athenians towards-to-tum, held
Eye and Mind constantly on this great
Project turned, and as he in the Choice
of-his Measures just not very r^;ard-
ful or conscientious was, so saw he
All for just and lawful on, what to-the
great Aim, that he in-the Eye had,
nearer led could. So declared he
then of-one Day in a general People's-
assembly, that he a very important
Proposal to make have, that he the-
same however not openly reveal can,
because the Success only through the

90

TIIB PAACnCAL UKOUIST.

ENGU8H EXEBC18E.

t?uU it should be carried on with the
greatest secrecy ; he therefore desired
that they slundd appoint a person to
whom he might explain himself upon
the matter in question. Aristides was
unanimotislg fixed upon by the whole
assembly f who referred themselves en-
tirely to his opinion of the affair^ so
great a confidence had they in his
probity and prudence, Themistocles,
tJierefore, having taken him asidcy told
him that the design he had conceived
was to bum the fleet belonging to the
rest of the Grecian states, which then
lay in a neighbouring port; and by
this means Athens would certainly
become mistress of aU Greece. Aris-
tides, hereupon, returned to the assem-
bly, and only declared to them that
indeed notliing could be more advan-
tageous to the comnwnweaith than the
project of TJiemistodes ; but thai, cU
tlte same time, nothitig in the world
could be more unjust, AU the people
unayiimously ordained that Themis-
todes filumld entirely desist from his
prqjr:t.

AKGUdSED OBBMAV.

deepest Secret-keeping secure become
can ; therefore wish he, that one Some-
one choose may, to-whom he the
Subject fully discover can. The whole
Assembly choee one-roicedly Aristides,
in whose Uprightness and Ability one
a so great Confidence placed, that
one oneself in this Affisdr quite on his
View relied. Themistocles took him
then by Side and said to-him, the
Plan, which he designed, be, the Fleets
which to-the remaining Greece belong
and in a neighbouring EJAven lay, to
bum; thereby would Athens un-
doubtedly the Ruler of whole Greece
become. Here-upon turned Aristides
into the Assembly back and dedaied
only, that nothing of greater Advan-
tage for the Commonwealth be can,
than the Plan of-the Themistocles, at-
the-same-time however also nothing
in the World more-unjust All People
determined one-voicedly Themistocles
shall from his Intention quite off-
stand.-

EXEKCISE XLVU.

1 Avidius Cassius, having revolted
from the Emperor Marcus Aurelius
and attempted to seize the govern-
ment, ' the Empress Fausthui, in
a letter which she wrote to her husband,
pressed him to purstie the accomplices
of Cassius with t/is utmost severity.
But the Emperor, listening only to tihe
impulse of his oum good nature, re-
turned her the following answer : " /
have read your letter, my dear Faus-
thva, wherein you advise me to treat
the accomplices of Cassius with Vie
utmost severity, which you think they
well deserve. This I look upon as a

1 When Avidius Cassius himself
against the Emperor Marcus Aureus
revolted and the Attempt made had,
the €k)vemment on himself to snatch,
urged the Empress Faustina in a
Writing at her Husband on the ut-
most Severity against the Co-conspira-
tors of-the Caasius. The Emperor
however, who only to-the Stirrings
of-his own Good-naturedness Hearing
gave, sent to-her Following to-the An-
swer : " 1 have, my dear Faustina, Thy
Writing read, in which Thou to-me
advisest, the Companions of-the Cassius
with the utmost Severity to toeat^

EKOLtSn AND A2rOLTOt8£I) OEBKAN BXX&0I8S8.

91

SraUSH BXERCI8C.

pledge of the love you hear to your
husband and children; buty give me
leave^ my dear FauaUna, to spare
the children of Casnue, his son-in-
law and his wifey and to write to the
senate in their behalf Nothing can •
mare recommend a Roman emperor
to the esteem of the world than clemency.
This placed Coesofr among the gods ;
this consecrated Augusttis ; this pro-
cured to your father the title of Pints'*
Some of his friends openly blaming
his clemency y and taking the liberty to
tell him that Cassius would not have
been so generous had fortune proved
favourable to htm, the Emperor imme-
diately repliedy '' We have not lived
nor served the gods so illy as to think
thai they could favour Cassius.^*
He added, that the mi^ortunes of
some of his predecessors were entirely
owing to their own iU-conduct and
crtielty, and that no good prince had
ever been overcome or slain by an
usurper.

AirOLIClSED GERMAir.

which they after Thy Opinion merit
That see i as a Pledge of-the Loye
at, which Thou for Thy Husband and
for Thy Children harbourest; per-
mit to-me however, my dear Faustina,
the Children of-the Cassius, his Son-
in-law and his Wife to si)are and my-
self for them at-the Senate to inter-
pose. Nothing can a roman Emperor
in the Estimation of-the World higher
place than Mercy. She has the Csesar
among the Gods raised, has the
Name Augustus sanctified, has to-Thy
Father the Sir-name of-the Pius pro-
cured." Some of his Friends blamed
him openly because of-his Mildness
and took it to-themselves out, to-him
to say, that Cassius not so generous
been be would, if the Fate him fa-
voured had. The Emperor however,
replied to-them at-once : " We have
not so badly lived and have not so
faithlessly to-the Gods served, that they
Cassius had favour should." The
Misfortune of-someof-his Predecessors,
added he thereto, be quite and alto-
gether a Consequence of-their bad
Conduct and of-their Cruelties been,
and no good Prince be ever by a
Throne-robber overcome or slain be-
come.

EXERCISE XLVIII.

The Spanish historians relate a
memorable instance of Iwnour and
regard to truth, A Spanish cavalier
in a sudden quarrel, slew a Moorish
gentleman and fed. His pursuers
soon lost sight of him, for he h(yi
unperceived thrown himself over a
garden wall. The owner, a Moor,
happening to be in his garden, teas
addressed by the Spaniard on his
knees, who acquainted him with his

The Spanish History-writers tell a
remarkable Case of Honour and
Truthfidness. A Spanish Cavalier
slew in a sudden Quarrel a Moorish
Nobleman and seized the Flight.
His Pursuers lost him soon out-of the
Eyes ; for he was unnoticed over a
Garden- wall jumped. As the Owner,
a Moor, accidentally in the Garden
was, fell the Spaniaixl before him on
the Knees, told him, what happened,

92

earn and implared eoneealmenL " Bal
this,*' said the Moor, giving kim half
a peach ; " ytm note know thai y<m ma^
cttnfide in my proieetionJ' He then
lochsd him up in his garden aparlr
meni, telling him thai, so socn as ii
teas night, he uxmld provide far his
escape to a place of greater safelg.
The Moor then went into his house,
where he had just sealed himself, when
a great crowd came to his gate, bearing
the corpse of his son, who had just
been JdUed by a Spaniard He soon
ascertained that the fatal deed had
been done by the very person then in
hU power. He did not mention U to
any one, but at the appointed time
retired to his garden, ae if to grieve
alone, giving orders that no one should
follow him. Seeing the Spaniard, he
said, ** Christian, the person you have
killed is my son ; his body is now in
my house. Ton ought to suffer, but
you have eaten with me, and I have
given you my word, which must not
be broken" He then led him to his
stables, amd having mounted him on
one of kis fleetest horses, said : " Fly
far, while the night can cover you ;
you will be safe in the morning ; you
are indeed guilty of my sorCs Hood ;
but God is just and good, and I thank
him that 7 a/m innocent of yours, and
that my faith given is preserved "

and implored him 00, him to hide.
'' Eat thiAy" asid the Moor mud gftTe
to-him a hilf Peach. *^' Thoa knowert
now, thai Thoa Thjidf on m j Ph>-
tection relj canst.'' Therei^Mm shut
he him into his CSarden-room in and
said to-him, as«ocm it Evening were^
would he ior his Escape on-to a safer
Place care. Thereupon went the Moor
into his Dwelling, and scaroelj had he
himself seated, so appeared a great
Heap People before his €rate with the
Corpse of-his Son, who so even by a
Spaniard killed become. He con-
vinced himself soon, that the nnhappjr
Deed by just the-same Man committed
become wasi whom he in his Power
had. He betrayed it towards Nobody,
but at-the fixed Time drew he himself
into the Garden back and gave Order,
that to-him Nobody follow should, as
if he himself there undisturbed to-his
Grief to leave wish. When he the
Spaniard perceived, said he : " Ejiow,
oh Christian, he, whom Thou slain
hast^ is my Son ; his Corpse is in my
House. Thou sbouldst that-for suffer,
but Thou hast with me eaten, i have
to-Thee my Word given, and that
dare not broken become." Then led
he him into the Stable, seated him
on one of-his quickest Horses and
said : " Fly fiur from here, so long the
Night Thee hide can, and on-the
Morning wilt Thou in Safety be.
Truly, Thou hast the Blood of-my
Son upon Thee, but God is good and
just, and i thank to-Him, that i in-
nocent am ou Thy Blood and that i
my given V/ord kept hava"

EXEKCISE XLIX.

1 There must be moments in the 1 In each Human-being's Life must

li/e of every man, when he honestly asks it Moments give, where he himself

XirOLIflH AHD ANOLIOISBD OXBICAIT EXKSCISE8.

93

nrOLISH XXKBCISS.

hinudf whdher his rule of eonduot
and his moHves/ar action^ are such as
he is satisfied are right, Happy is he
who ifUerrogates himself in time to
abandon thai which he cannot honestly
approve. Cofrdinal Wolsey, at the
last, saidy ** Had I been as diligent to
serve my God as I have been to please
my king^ he would not have forsaken
me now in my old age"

2 While the colleagues of Constan-
Hus, the Soman Emperor^ were perse-
euiing the Christians with fire and
sword, he, for a short time, pretended
to persecute them also ; he declared to
such o£io9rs of his household and go-
vernors of provinces as were professing
Christians, that he left it to their choice
either to sacrifice to the Gods, and by
that means preserve themselves in their
employments^ or to forfeit their places
and his favour by canlinuing steady
in their religion. When they had cM
declared, the Emperor opened his real
sentiments, reproached in the most
bitter terms those who had renounced
their religion, highly extolled the virtus
and constancy of such as had despised
the wealth and vanities of this world,
dismissed the former, saying ^^that
those who had betrayed their God
would not scruple to betray their
prince;" and retaining the Uuter, he
trusted them with the guard of his per-
son and the whole m€inagement of
public affairs, as persons on whose
fidelity he could rely, and in whom he
fnight place entire cor^fidence.

AirOLICISKD GERMAN.

ainoerelj examines, whether his Con-
duct and the Grounds for his Actions
to-his Conviction after right are.
Hail to-him, who himself to-the right
Time examines and that up-gives,
what he himself not approve can.
The Cardinal Wolsey said before his
End : ** Had i to-my God even so zea-
lously served, as to-my King, so would
he me now in my Old-age not aban-
doned have."

2 Whilst the Co-Emperors of-tbe
Constantius the Christians with Fire
and Sword persecuted, placed he him«
self a Time long, as persecute he them
likewise and declared to-his Court-
o£5cers and Governors, that he to-
those among them, who themselves
to-the Christendom confessed, free
Choice leave, to-the €k)ds to sacrifice
and to-themselves thereby their Offices
to secure, or by firm Continuance in
their Belief Office and imperial Favour
to forfeit. When All their Declara-
tions off-given had, unveiled the Em-
peror his true Sentiment, blamed in
the hardest Expressions those, who to-
their Faith renounced had and praised
very the Virtue and Constancy of-
those, who the Treasures and Yanities
of-this World despised, dismissed
those, whilst he said, that those, who
their Gk>d betrayed, no Ofi^-stand (hesi-
tation) take would, their Prince to
betray ; these however kept he in his
Service, formed his Body-guard out-of
them and entrusted to-them the whole
Leading of-public Affairs on, as to-
Men, upon whose Faithfulness he
reckon could and upon whom he full
Confidence place might.

EXERCISE L.

1 When Socrates was told thai the 1 When one to-the Socrates an-

Aihemans had condemned him to die, nounced, that the Athenians him to-

94

THE PRACnCAI. LINQUI8T.

ENGLISH EXERCISE.

ke repUedy without the least emotiony
**And nature them.'* ApoUodoruSj one
of his friends and disciples, having
expressed his grief /or his dying inno-
cent, ** What" replied he with a smile,
** uxndd you have me die guilty / "

" / am going," said he, addressing
himself to his judges unth a noble tran-
qreilUty, " to suffer death by your order,
to which TuUure had condemned me
from the first moment of my birth ;
but my (Mceusers wiU suffer no less from
infamy and injustice by the decrees of
truth.*' When the deadly potion was
brought him, he drank it off unth an
amazing fortitude aiid a serenity of
aspect not to be expressed. TiU then,
hds friends, with great violence to them-
selves, had refrained from tears ; biU
after he had drunk the poison, they
were no longer their own masters, but
wept abundantly. ApoUodorus, who
had been in tears for some time, began
then to lament unth such excessive
grief, as pierced the hearts of all that
were present. Socrates alone remained
unmoved, and even reproved his friends,
though with his usual mildness and
good nature. " What are you doing ? "
said he to them. ** I wonder at you.
What has become of your virtue f Was
it not for this I sent away the ujomen
that they might not faU into these
weaknesses f I have always heard say
that we ought to die peaceably, and
blessing the gods. Be at ease, I beg
you, and show more constancy and
resolution."

ANGLICISED GERMAN.

the Death condemned had, answered
he, without the least £motion : *' Has
the Nature them not likewise con-
demned)" Apollodorus, one of bis
Friends and Disciples, pressed his
Grief thereover out, that he innocent
die. " How," replied he smilingly,
''wouldst thou rather, that i guilty
died?" <a shall," said he with
noble Calmness to his Judges, " upon
your Command the Death suffer, to
which of-course the Nature me from-
the Moment of-my Birth on con-
demned has ; mj Accusers however
will after the Decrees of-the Truth
not less from Infumy and Injustice to
suffer hava" When one to-him the
Death-cup brought, emptied he him
with astonishing Firmness and an in-
expressible Cheerfulness out. Till then
had themselves his Friends with great
Exertion of-the Tears refrained; when
he however the Poison drunk had,
were they not more of-their Feelings
powerful, but wept aloud. ApoUo-
dorus, who already a Time long in
Tears there-stood, caught now with
such Excess of-the Grief to lament
on, that it the Hearts of-all Present
through-pierced. Socrates alone re-
mained unmoved and blamed even,
although with wonted Gentleness
and Good-naturedness, his Friends.
" What make youl" said he to them.
" I am astonished over you. What is
out-of your Virtue become 1 Have i
not therefore the Women away-sent^
that they not to-this Weakness fall
should? I have always say hear,
that one in Peace die must and in-
the Praise of-the Gods. I pray you,
be calm and show more Firmness and
Resolution."

THB AirOLiaiBKD ▲NSODOTBfl. 95

TAI AND SHERIK.

Bbfobs the divine Prophet his Fatherland with the Light of-the Faith
illumined, were the Arabs Idolaters. They worshipped a good and an evil God
and celebrated to-each specially one Day in the Week. The one Day became
for lucky held, and who on him before the King appeared, to-him became his
Request without Limitation granted. Whoever but the Imprudence com-
mitted, on the unlucky Day before the Throne of-the King to come, he became
without Delay to-the evil Gtod to-the Sacrifice brought.

So was the Custom of-the Land, when under the Keign of-the King
Naam a rich Arab of-the Desert, with Name Tai, through Spoliation and all-
kinds Misfortune in sudi Poverty got, that he already since two Days no Food
more for his Children had. On once reminded he himself of-the Liberality
of-the Eling Naam, who no Needy-one without Gift from himself let ; he
made himself up, kissed his Wife and his Children, promised in some Hours
with Provisions again by them to be and drew in great Haste of- his Way.

Filled from his Misery and from the Hope of-a near Help, ran Tai
anxiously forth, until he before the Throne of-the King appeared, without
even only with One Thought there-at to think, that to-day the Day of-the
evil God be can. But scarcely had him Naam perceived, so turned he his
Face frt)m him and exclaimed : '* Unhappy -one ! what hast thou done ? Why
must thou on a so sad Day before my Face come) Thou art of-the Death."

This Speech passed like a Lightning through Tai's Soul and reminded
him on the cruel Sacrificial-law. He threw himself to-the King to Feet and
implored him on, his Death only yet some Hours off-to-pusL " My Wife and
my Children have two Days not eaten," spoke he, " they will of-a miserable
Death die, if i to-them not hastily some Proviuions back-bring. Give to-me
Bome Food, and let me them yet once see, in-order for ever Leave from them
to take. Thou art too just, than that thou the Innocent with the Criminal
ruin shouldst. I swear to- thee by all, what holy is, before Under-going of-the
Bun again here to be ; then speak the Death's-sentence over me out, and i
shall me to-him without Murmiu* under-throw."

The King became through this Address moved and spoke : *' Unlucky
Man ! The Folk demands thee to-the Sacrifice and will in Fury get, if i theo
escape let. I have Compassion with thee ; but i can to-thee the Bequest
under no other Condition grant, than if thou a Surety placest, who himself
instead of-thee to-the Sacrifice offers, in Case thou thy Promise broke. Thou
pitiest me ; but it is the hard Law of-my Land."

Tai was strange, and No-one knew him. He saw with melancholy Look
on All, who around the Throne stood ; but none ventured it, himself upon the
Word of-a Stranger to rely and for his Fidelity Surety to be. Tai despaired
already, as he near at-the Throne a Man observed, who him with noble Compas.
sion on-looked. " And thou," addressed him Tai with Tears in the Eyes on,
'* thou, out-of whose Face a great Soul shines, couldst even thou the Prayer of-
an unlucky Man and Father refuse 1 I nwear to-thee by the Gods and Men,
that i this Evening before Sun-undergoing again here be shall."

96 TBS PRACTICAL LUfGUIBT.

Sherik — eo was-called the Noble-one, who a Vizier and at-the-samfr-time
Favourite of-the King was — ^had a Heart, which on the given Word of-fidthful
People believed. He turned himself to-the King and said : " I wID Surety
for Tai become." The King waa-terrified, for also he feared, tilie Stranger
will not Word keep. He looked the Vizier significantly on ; but Sherik
remained bv his Promise, and Tai hastened with Food to his Wife and to hb
Children.

Mean-while passed the fixed Time ; the Sun inclined hen^lf to her Under-
going, and Tai was yet not there. The Folk demanded with Uproar its Sacri-
fice, and Sherik became bound to-the Altar led. He sbeipped there-to, without
himself to complain ; all solemn Preparations were completed, and the Priest
drew already the stony Sacrificial-knife, as itself suddenly in the Distance aCiy
raised. Tai self was the Crying-one, who out-of Breath, quite with Sweat and
Dust covered, u)K>n the Pkdn hither-hastened and himself throng the amaied
Folk threw. He fell Sherik to Feet, loosed his Bands, raised him up, and
clasped him in his Arms. Long pressed he him silently on his Heart and qpoke
at last : " Great-minded Sherik, how soon might-have thee my Delay killed !
Thanked be it to-the Gods, that i to right Time came, thee to sava I die con-
tented, for i know, thou wilt thyself of-my poor Wife and of-my helpless little-
ones pity." Sherik kissed him and wept : " I will their Father and Friend be
and my Property with them share." So stood they still there, as the Folk a
loud Triumph-shout raised and of-its cruel Sacrifice fuUy forgot ; the King and
all Noble-ones of-his Court were moved. " Never have i of-your Equal seen,
exclaimed Naam. " Thou, Tai, art a Model of-the Fidelity ; and thou, Sherik,
the most-great-minded of-the Men." He looked after the Over-priest, who
already on the high Threshold of the Altar stepped was and to the Folk speak
would. " Ye Faithful-ones,^' cried he, " Sherik and Tai have through their
Virtues the Wrath of-the Crod appeased, who no bloody Sacrifices loon
demands. From to-day forward Sacrifice we Honey and Milk, to-the Token,
that the Eling's Throne to-his Subjects on every Day joyful and propitioas be
must."

So spoke the Over-priest, and the Folk gave to-him through a great Joj-
shout Applause. The King thanked to-him with friendly Gresture ; he ove^
heaped the poor honest Tai with Benefits and won the magnanimous Sherik
from now forward for so-much-the dearer.

THE ▲NOUCISSD AITSCDOTES. 97

A MORNING OUT-OF-THE BETHOVEN'S LIFE.

The breaking Daylightstruggled yet with the passing-awaj Obscurity.
Two Candles lighted-up a spacious Room. ITie Inhabitant of-it had even — it
waa the sixth Early-hour — the Couch left and sat already at a Desk and
worked. The Arrangement of-the Room waa citizen-like nice, but not costly.
A Piano, on which a Violin and a Viola lay, was without Doubt the dearest
Piece of-the whole Furniture. Whithersoever the Eye itself turned, hit it on
Disorder : the Room was yet not arranged ; Books and Manuscripts were
here and there disorderly piled-up ; the Working-one sat between Piles of
Papers was-reading carefully in a voluminous Manuscript and made his
Corrections — he seemed just the last Hand on a Work to put — He wore a
grey House-coat, a Middle-thing Ifetween Sleeping-coat and Dressing-gown, on
his Feet a Pair Felt-shoes, and round the Neck a carelessly tied Cloth. The
Body was little and stout, the Frame strong, the Muscles sinewy. The though
large Head became by a Forest of-bushy, of-black-grey Hairs, whose neglected
State to-him a wildish Look gave, visibly still enlarged. The Face, smooth
and beardless, was as with a Furnish of Red and Brown covered ; one noticed,
that it in later Time continually to-the free Air and to-the Sun-beams exposed
been was. Underneath the broad, high Front showed itself somewhat hid a
Pair of-little brown Eyes, a broad Nose, in-retum a goodly formed Mouth
with an extremely lovely Smile. The Chin with its both-sides shell-like
Deepening lent to-the Physiognomy a kind Expression, which even gloomy
Temper and mistrustful Brooding, yes even a Breaking-out-of-anger not
quite to wipe-away was-able. This Man, to-the Age according on the Middle
of-the Forty touching, was Ludwig van Beethoven.

Whilst inside the Master on one of-his gigantic Creations the last File
put, sat in-the Ante-chamber his Servant, a true studious Soul, also al-ready on
the Work and stitched with a Zeal and an Enthusiasm upon-it on, as if it
were, a Dress for the Eternity to make. Now raised himself Beethoven,
pAssed with the flat Hand over the Forehead and called : " Coffee !" The
Servant came in, and the Master, by him assisted, began himself the
Preparation of-the Break&st. Whilst the Ser\^nt Water and Milk to-the
Fire put, sat Beethoven at-the Table and counted from a tin Box sixty
roasted Beans out, which he in the Coffee-mill poured. ** So," said he, " now
canst Thou the Coffee make ; have Attention, that no Berry out jumps !" The
Servant nodded and cried : " Already good, Your Grace !"

In this Moment erected itself Beethoven's Figure straight up, he seemed
for several Inches taller become and gained an imposing Appearance ; the
little Eyes stepped in unusual Size out and rolled, the Star after above turned,
in-the Circle round, over his Forehead passed it like a Stormy-cloud, and one
noticed on the Majesty of-the Appearance, that in this Moment the Spirit one
of-his powerful lightening-of-thoughts into the mortal Frame descended had.
Without himself to move, remained Beethoven a While in this inspired
Temper ; then moved he himself mechanically to-the Desk and drew standing
a-few Bars with those short hurrying Lines, which one sooner for Scratches

I 2

98 THB PRACTICAL LINaxnST.

than for Notes hold might, which however to-certain insignificant Men
resembled, who in-the Heart a Paradise of Sentiments and in-the Head a
World of Ideas hide.

In-the-meantime was the Day entirely appeared, the Candles became
extinguished, the Curtains back -drawn, and Beethoven made himself again on
the Work, To-tlie Example of-the Master followed the Servant. Soon
reigned in the Quarter the former Quietness, inside followed Note upon Note,
outside Stitch upon Stitch.

A While later left the Master again the Work and called: "Fresh
Water ! " The Servant hastened with an immense Can to-the Well, and
as he back-came, found he the Master already in-the deepest Morning-dress at-
the Wash-basin, and now found one of-the most peculiar Scenes place.

Beethoven began the Contents of-one Little-wash-can for (after) the
other over the Hands and the down-bent Head to pour. To-that murmured
he first softly, then became-he louder and always louder, till he at -last (and
that was his Song) loud to howl began, with- which his Eyes rolled and his
Inspiration with each Can increased. Without on his wetted Condition
to heed, repaired he himself to-the Writing-table, wrote hurriedly some Ideas
and went then to-the Basin back, in-order the Washing from New to begin,
to-which he if-possible still moi*e-fiightfully sang.

During this Scene stood the Servant aside and glanced earnestly at-it,
and moved no Feature ; for, had he it done, it would-be for his Situation done
been. He saw, how the Basin overflooded, how his Master over and over
in-the Water stood, how the Floor quite over-swamped was, and he disturbed
now the wet Inspiration even so little as before the dry, he respected this
" Hour of-the deepest Meditation " of-his Master. But the to-day Washing-
exercise should however not quite without Disturbance over pass.

Beethoven stood still always at-the Basin, when the Door open-flew, and
a tall, robust Man in-rushed. It was the Landlord, who under him lived.
" Sir von Beethoven," roared he with a Voice, which on the Trumpet of
Jericho reminded, " now have i it enough !"

Beethoven stared him, with a terrible Look on and said bluntly, dryly, as
if he in his Life no Drop Of- water seen had : ** I yet not 1" Thereupon poured
he again a Can full over the Hands.

"Sir von Beethoven!" cried the Landlord further, "i have it to-You
already thrice said, that i my House not ruin let. The Water soaks
already through the Floor and penetrates into my Room !"

" That is not possible ! "

" Go You down and convince You yourself self ! "

" The confounded Architects ! " growled Beethoven, and seized to-the
Horror of-the Man again the Water-can.

" Sir von Beethoven ! I request You earnestly. Your Wash to-stop."

" Does me grief, i can without this turkish Usage not live.**

" Then will You so good be, my House to quit"

" Must it immediately be 1 "

" I will to-You give-notice."

THE ANOLI0I8BD AKECD0TE8. 99

" Do You what You will, but leave You me in Quiet ! "

" I haye immediately Scruple carried, You into-the House to take ; for i
have already heard, You stop in no House long to-live."

" That is true," replied the Master with Humour, and i must to- You
sincerely confess, if i House-possessor (Landlord) were, would i me myself in
my House not suffer."

This candid Confession brought the indignant Landlord to-the Laugh; and
Beethoven poured himself now the last Can over the Head. That-one looked
him puzzled on and said : '* I comprehend not, how to- You this Washing
Pleasure make can ! "

The Master looked him melancholy on and replied : '* My most-high-
esteemed Landlord, You comprehend very many-a-thin{( not, what to-me
Pleasure makes, so as You on-the-other-hand very Much not imderstand, what
me painfully touches or until into-the deepest Life wounds. Kow have You
the Goodness and leave You me alone. I must work ! "

The Landlord was polite enough, the Lodger to salute, and went growling
from there.

^' To-day is-it already again -out with the Work 1 " said Beethoven to his
Servant, " bring now at-least the Boom in Order ! "

EXTRACT FROM HEINE'S REISEBILDERN.

[TTiia being the most difficult should be studied the last]

The Elector John William shall a brave Gentleman been be, and very art-
loving, and self very clever. He founded the Picture-gallery in Diisseldorf,
and on the there Observatory shows one still an exceedingly artificial Insertion-
cup (conjuring cup) of Wood, which he self in his Free-hours — he had of-them
daily four and twenty — carved had.

At-that-time were the Princes yet no worried People as now, and the
Crown was to them on-the Head fast grown, and at Night drew they yet a
Sleep-cap thereover, and slept calmly, and calmly to their Feet slept the Folks,
and if these of-the Morning woke, so said they : " good Morning, Father ! " — and
those answered : " good Morning, dear Children ! '* But it became suddenly
otherwise ; as we of-one Morning at Diisseldorf awoke, and ** good Morning,
Father ! " say would, there was the Father out-set, and in the whole Town was
nothing than blunt Oppressiveness, it was overall a Kind Funeral-mood, and the
People slunk silently after the Market, and read the long paj)er Placard on the
Door of-the Council-house. It was a dull Weather, and the thin Tailor Kilian
stood nevertheless in his Nanquin-jacket, which he otherwise only in-the
House wore, and the blue-woollen Stockings hung to-him down, that the naked
Little-legs sadly forth peeped, and his small Lips quivered, whilst he the affixed
Placard before himself on-muttered. An old palatinate Pensioner read some-
what louder and at many-a Word dripped to-him a clear Tear into the white,
honest Moustache. I stood aside to-him and cried with, and asked him : why
we cried 1 And there answered he: ''The Elector lets himself thank." And

V^^^^

100 THE PRACTICAL LmOUIST.

then read he again, and at the Words : " for the proven Subjects-fidelity,"
" and unbind Ye of-Your Duties," there wept he still stronger. — It is wonderful
on-to-see, when so an old Man, with faded Uniform and scared Soldier-face,
suddenly so strongly weeps. Whilst we read, became also the electoral Arms
from-the Counsel-house down-taken, everything shaped itself so oppressively
desolate, it was, as if one a Sundarkness (Eclipse) expected, the Gentlemen
Counsellors went so dismissedly and slowly about, even the allpowerful Street-
governor looked out, as if he nothing more to command had, and stood there
so peaceably-indifferent, although the mad Alouisius himself again on one Jjeg
placed and with foolish Grimace the Names of-the french Generals off prattled,
whilst the tipsy crooked Gumpertz himself in the Gutter about rolled and
" ^a-ira, ^a-ira ! " sang.

I however went after House, and cried and wailed, " the Elector lets
himself thank." My Mother had her dear Trouble, i knew, what i knew, and let
to-me nothing out talk, i went crying to Bed, and in the Night dreamt to-me,
the World have an End — the beautiful Flowergardens and green Meadows
became like Carpets from-the Ground uptaken and together-rolled, the Streets-
governor climbed on a high Ladder and took the Sun from-the Heaven down,
the Tailof Kilian stood thereby and spoke to him self: " I must after House go
and myself prettily dress, for i am dead, and shall still to-day buried become."
And it became always darker, scantily glittered above some Stars and also
these fell down like yellow Leaves in-the Autumn, gradually vanished the
Human-beings, i poor Child wandered nervously about, stood finally before the
Willow-hedge of-a desolate Peasant-court (Farm) and saw there a Man, who
with the Spade the Earth up-dug, and aside to-him an ugly spiteful Woman,
that something like an off-cut Human-head in the apron held, and that was
the Moon, and she put him anxiously carefully into the open Hole— and
behind to-me stood the palatinate Pensioner and sobbed and spelled : '* The
Elector lets himself thank."

Wlien i awoke, shone the Sun again as usual through the Window, on
the Street went the Drum, when i into our Dwelling-room (Parlour) stepped,
and to-my Father, who in-the white Powder-mantle sat, a good Morning bade,
heard i, how the light-footed Hair-dresser to-him during the Hairdressing hair-
small (minutely) narrated : that to-day on the Counsel-hoiwe to-the new Grand-
duke Joachim homage-done became, and that this of the best Family be, and
the Sister of the Emperor Napoleon to-the Wife got, and also really much
Demeanour possessed, and his beautiful black Hair in Ciurls wear, and soon his
Entrance hold and surely to-all Women please must.

Meanwhile went the Drumming, outside on the Street always on, and i
stepped before the House-door and looked-at the inmarching french Troupes,
the joyful People of-the Glory, that singing and sounding the World through-
marched, the serene serious Grenadier-faces the Bear-caps, the three-coloured
Cockades, the flashing Bayonets, the Voltigeurs full Merriment and Point
d'honneur, and the almighty tall, silver embroidered Drum-Major, who his
Stick with the gilded Knob till to the first Floor throw could and his Eyes
even to the second Story, — where likewise beautiful Girls at-the Window sat

THE AKOltCISSD ANBCDOTBB. 101

I rejoiced myself, that we Quarterings got, — my Mother rejoiced herself not —
and i hastened after the Market-place ; there looked it quite otherwise out ; it
was, as if the World new painted become, a new Coat-of-Arms hung at-the
Counsel-house, the Iron-railing at its Balcony was with embroidered Velvet-
coYerings OYerhuDg, french Grenadiers stood Sentinel, the old Gentlemen
Counsellers had new Faces onput and wore their Sunday-coats, and looked
each-other at on french and spake *'bon jour,'' out-of all Windows looked
Ladies, inquisitiye Citizens and glittering Soldiers filled the Place, and i to-
gether-with other Boys, we climbed on the big Elector's-horse, and looked
thereof down into the motley Market-crowd.

Neighbours-Fitter and the long Kurz had at this Occasion nearly the
Neck broken, and that were good been, for the One run-away afterwards to-hia
Parents, went under the Soldiers (enlisted), deserted, and became in Mayence
deadshot; the Other howeyer made later-on geographical Investigations in
foreign Pockets, became therefore working Member of-a public Spinning-
institution, tore the iron Bonds, which him on this and on the Fatherland
fettered, came successfully over the Water, and died in London through an
all-too-tight Cravat, which itself by itself contracted, when him a royal Official
the Board under the Legs away-tore.

The long Kurz said to us, that to-day no School be, on-account of-the
Homage. We must long wait, till this loose-let became. At last filled itself
the Balcony of-the Counsel-house with variegated Gentlemen, Standai*ds and
Trumpets, and the Mr. Burgomaster, in his celebrated red Coat held a Speech,
which itself somewhat into the Length drew, as India-Kubber, or as a worsted
Sleepcap, into which one a Stone thrown — only not the Stone of-the Wise
(Philosopher's Stone) — ^and many Phrases could i quite distinctly understand,
e.g., that one us happy make will — and at-the last Word became the Trumpets
blown, and the Flags swung, and the Drums beaten, and Viva shouted — and
whilst i self Viva called, held i myself firmly on the old Elector. And that did
Need, for to-me became really giddy, i believed already, the People stood on the
Heads, because itself the World round-turned, the ElectorVHead with the
Alonge-wig nodded, and whispered: "Hold fast on me!" — and only through
the Cannonade, that now on the Kampart loose-went, sobered i myself, and
climbed from-the Elector's-horse slowly again down.

When i after House went, saw i again, how the mad Alouisius on one Leg
danced, whilst he the Names of-the french Generals rattled, and how himself
the crtK)ked Gumpertz tipsy in the Gutter about rolled and "9a-ira, ^a-ira"
roared, and to my Mother said i : " One will us happy make, and therefore is
to-day no School."

102 THE PRACTICAL LIKOUIST.

GRISELDIS.

In Piedmont, at-the Foot of-a high Mountain, lies a stately Domain,
which blooming Towns and many fine Villages in itself contains. The first
Margrave, to-whom this Country-possession as-property belonged, was-named
Walther. He was a Man fine of Figure, honest of Manners, young of Years,
richly gifted with Intellect But all his Inclination was so very to-the
Hunting and to-the Birdcatching attached, that he the Other thereover forgot
and himself of-the Government of-his Country entirely cleared. So had he
also no desire to-the Marrying, not as if a Vow him detained had, but the
praised Liberty and the Love to-the independent Life and to-the self-govern-
ment let him on no matrimonial Union think. K therefore good Friends to
him of his Wedding talked, so used he i-suppose to reply : " I may my Liberty
not sell and not a Wife to-the Co-r^ent accept. As long i single am, do i,
what i will ; if i however married am, so must i many-times do, what my
Wife wilL Do i this not, so have i a disagreeable Wife and at-the-same-time
DLsjpute and Quarrel in-the House ! "

The Subjects displeased this Proceeding of-their Master ; they would-have
it much too volimtarily seen, if their Master a happy Marriage entered and
Heirs of-his Estates left had. The Principal-people of-the Country deliberated
therefore, how they the Affair begin and their Master to-the Marrying induce
could. Therefore appeared they of one Day altogether before the Mai^grave,
and the Principal amongst them talked him with following Words on :

" Gracious Sir and Margrave ! The Amiability of-Your Grace gives us the
Courage, freely out to talk, what we in our Mind conceived have. We hope
not, that You such amiss take will, because your Goodness and Your paternal
Mind to-us All sufficiently known are. We regard ourselves happy, a so dear
Master to have and from him protected to become. We would ourselves
however still much happier consider, if we Your margravely Grace for ever
with us keep could. Now know we, that this not possible is. The next how-
ever would-be, if we to- Your connubial Heir in Love serve and obedient be
might. Our Master is in-truth now still young of Years and strong in Strength ;
he knows however, that the after-coming Years this Strength consume will
Therefore is our obedient Prayer, that Your Grace condescend may, by a
Marriage Begard thereon to take, tliat You in desired Heirs continue-to-live
and one-day Your Country continue-to-govem. Gets our reasonable Demand
listened-to and to-us an Order graciously given, so will we a Lady for Your
Grace select, who in Descendants, Beauty and virtuous Manners to-our Master
the most-like be will."

Upon these Words kept the Count a Time-long silent and thought to-the
Proposition after. So difficult it him arrived ; so overpowered him nevertheless
at Last the Love to his Subjects and he determined himself, to-their Demand
to consent. So said he then to them : " My dear Friends ! Your humble Suppli-
cation, forces me, you to please and to do, what i never in-the Mind had have.
For i had to-myself always proposed, my Liberty entirely to keep, which in-
the Marriage perhaps with-difficulty may kept be ; now however submit i

THB A^OLTOISID ANEODOTEB. 103

myself freely to-the Will of-my SubjectH, that they know, that i them Ioyo
and that i as a Father to-them to-before-stand will. However thank i myself
for your Offer, me a Wife to select, who of-my Equal be shall. This Trouble will
i myself upon me take, and i trust here-in upon the Aid of-the All-highest,
who in His Hands the Happiness of-the Marriage laid has. He will to-me a
Wife send, who my Welfare and my Rest not hinder, and at-the-same-time to-
your Demand, the GrOYemment in my House secured to see, Satisfaction do
wilL One-thing however shall you to-me promise and keep : that you her,
whom i to my Wife select shall, as Countess and as your Mistress honour and
to- her subject be will. It shall also no-One amongst you be, who about my
Choice of-a Wife ever complain, but that-one, who my Wife become will, her
shall you, as were she the Daughter of-a roman Prince, honour and for your
commanding Mistress acknowledge."

Over this Reply of-the Count enjoyed themselves the assembled Subjects
highly and were quite willing to-the Demand of-their Master to assent They
promised therefore with a solemn Yow, to-the Wife, whom he choose would,
subject to be, and, of-what Sort she ever be might, in-the Least not against her
to complain. Thereupon departed they cheerfully from the Count and awaited
with Desire, what for a Lady he to his firide select would.

The Count however spent a-few Days in deep Reflection there-over away,
what for a Wife he take should. At-last determined he himself, no proud
Heiress, but a humble Girl to choose, who to-him in All please would. As
therefore a-few Weeks passed were and he himself in his Resolution fixed had,
then conmianded he to-his Chamberlain, all to the next-approaching Wedding
ready to make. Still knew Nobody, which Young-woman the Bride be
should, and the Count would it also to-Nobody communicate, so often he
there-about asked became.

Meanwhile became AU upon princely Manner prepared and many high
Guests became invited. The wedding Day approached close, without that
Any-one knew, from where the Bride come should. The Count prepared
golden Rings and Earrings, which he to-an other Girl, who to-his Bride in
Figure equal was, had measure let. As now the fixed Day arrived and the
invited Guests in great Number present were, so failed no-one more than the
margrave Brida There arose a great Surprise amongst all present, yes it
sprung-up even the Doubt, if it not with the whole Wedding only upon a
wanton Trick intended be. The Hour of-the Midday-meal was come ; Rooms
and Tables were adorned, the festive Dishes ready ; however became no Word
heard, which Young- lady for the Bride of-the Count declared was. At-last
saw themselves the Guests obliged, the Count to ask, why they then properly-
speaking to-the Marriage invited were. He however gave to-them to-the Reply,
they should without Troubles be ; the Bride be already on the Road ; all
might themselves ready make, to-her towards to go, and her with due Honours
to receive. So assembled themselves then all invited Gentlemen and Ladies
and betook themselves altogether to-the Castle out. Before them along rode
the Count with wedding Clothes dressed,^ beside to-him, rodp in festive Coaches
some Noble-ladies, who the Bridenlresses together-with all womanly Ornament

104

locked-np with theniBelves led. The wedding Prooenioii was upon this
Manner in the next TiUage oome, and No-cme knew, where-to he fnrther go
should. NerertheleaB spread itself a dark Bamoar amongst the Guests, that
here the Place be, where the Count himself his Bride sdeot would and, though
himself No-one imagine could, upon what Manner this h^^Mn should, so had
themselves nevertheless all peasant Girls of-the Village, to whom Uie Beport
likewise penetrated was, from Curiosity assembled and waited up(m the
romantic Bride-choice of-the Count-
Now lived in this Tillage, in which onlj few and merely poor Peasants
dwelt, a Man of-Name Janicula^ the pocnest amongst All, who an only
Daughter had, who GrriseXdis named-was ; so poor she was, so beautiful was she
<^ Figure, virtuous of Manners and wiUi many Gifls <^-the Nature adorned.
She guarded the few Sheep of-her Father, and speot the most Time upon
the Field away ; nevertheless cooked she all Meals for the House-companioDS,
and the half Night passed she all Time with spinning. To-her Paraits was
she in all Things Obedient and to-the Works of-the Devotion very attached
This peasant Giri had the Count in riding-by often with Kyes seen and her
Manners well observed. Already long carried he to her a sincere Inclination
in- the Heart, and was determined, himself with her to marry.

At the Time now, whilst the Wedding-guests in the Village came, was the
good Griseldis at-the Well been and hastened now just with her Can after Home,
in-order at-the-same-time with the other Girls to see, from- where then the
Bride come should. As she however to-her House i4>proached, stepped to-her the
Count towards and spoke to her : '' Griseldis, where is Thy Father ) " The Girl
bowed herself very deeply and spoke with greAt Bevorence : " He is at Home,
gracious Sir.'* '* Let him to me out-come," said the Count As this happened
was, took the Count the Peasant by the Hand, led him a little by Side and
spoke with clear Voice to him thus :

** I know, my dear Janicula, that Thou a pious and sincere Man art, and
that Thou to-me as to-Thy Master in all Things obedient be wilt : therefore
ask i Thee : wilt Thou to-me Thy Daughter Griseldis to-the Marriage give,
and me. Thy Master, as a Son-in-law have)" The good, old Man was*
struck over this Speech and knew not, what he it-about think or say
should. Only as him the Count to an Answer pressed, said he with
Trembling: '* Gracious Sir, i find for Fright no Answer; but as You my
Master are, so dare i nothing Other will, than what to- You agreeable is.
And so it then Your Earnest is, my poor Daughter to-the Marriage to take, so
am i much too humble, You therein to contradict." The Count replied:
" Good ! so let us two alone in Your House go. I must the Will of-Thy
Daughter know, and her over some Things question.'*

Thus remained all Wedding-guests outside in highest Surprise to-stand ;
the Count however went with the Father into the House, took the Daughter
by the Hand, and spoke : " Because it as-well to-Thy Father as to-me pleases,
that Thou my Wife be shalt, Griseldis, so hope i, it will to-Thee not displease,
me to-the Marriage to take." The disturbed Young-woman was-fnghtened, as
if the Heaven over her down-fell and the Earth turned itself with her. The

THE AKGLI0I8XD ANECDOTES. 105

Count however talked to-her with firiendly Words to : " Frighten Thyself not,
my dear Griseldis, for Thou art it, whom i before all Women of-the Earth
U> my Bride selected have; and if Thou therein agreest, so will i myself
still to-day with Thee marry." Griseldis bowed herself in Humility and
answered : " Gracious Sir ! i acknowledge myself indeed so of-great Honours
totally and entirely unworthy; nevertheless, if it Your earnest Will and
Your Heart's Meaning is, me poor Peasant-girl to Your Servant to-accept,
BO dare i myself to-my Master not oppose." Thereupon spoke the Count
with earnest Coimtenance : '' £re i Thyself then to-the Marriage take, ask i
Thee, Griseldis, if Thou with free-willing Heart ready be, to-me in All obedient
to be, in no Thing to-my Will to oppose ; so that Thou All, what i with Thee
do shall, without a sour Face and without a rough Word bear wilH" —
" Gracious Sir Count," replied the Young- woman, " if i the great Honour,
which to-me not belongs, have shall. Your Wife to be, so promise i, nothing
knowingly to do or to think, what against Your Heart were ; You will to-me
nothing do and nothing command, what i ill uptake, and should You me also
to-die order." These Words pleased the Count well and he spoke joyful : "It is
enough ! if Thou this do wilt, so demand i further nothing of Thee !"

Therewith took he her at the Hand, led her to-the House out and
showed her to-all Present ; spoke also thereto with loud Voice ; " This Young-
woman here is my Bride, this is Your gracious Lady, her honour, her love, and,
if You me worthy have, so have her still much more worthy." And now
commanded he to-the ordered Noble-ladies, that they the Maid very-soon of-
her peasant Clothes deprive, and her with splendid Bride-dresses adorn should,
that she to-her new Position according in the Count's House in-go could. The
Ladies took the Girl upon open Street among themselves and formed a close
Circle round her, so that no-one see could, what itself with her occurred.
There undressed they the Young-woman of-her peasantly Robes and adorned
her so finely, that one her hardly again recognise could. As she now so in all
Haste attired was, that she to-a Countess and not more to-a Peasant-girl
resembled, became she by the Ladies to-the Count led and as his worthy Bride
presented. The Coimt pulled the ready-held Wedding-ring out, put to-her
the-same on the Finger, and promised himself openly with her before all
People. Here-upon let be the Bride upon a snow-white Horse put and led her
with Honours and Joys after his countly Castle. The People ran troop-like
after and cried with joyful Voice : " It live Griseldis ! " whilst it at-the-same-
time to-the Young- woman Happiness and Hail to this unexpected Honour
wished. The Wedding was still on the-same Day with great Festivity upon
the Castle fulfilled and the Marriage in all Joys off-kept and there was No-one
who himself not over this rare Marriage upon-the Highest surprised but also
enjoyed had. Then it seemed, as had Gk>d this Marriage in-the Heaven
itself concluded, and to-the pious Griseldis so extraordinary Graoe-gifls
down-sent, that one believed, she be not in a Peasant-house, but at a
noble Court educated become, with so elegant Manners, with so much
Prudence and Intellect, with such Amiability showed she herself gifted,
therefore she then also by all highly honoured and beloved became. Yes,

irM

tJioaev wbo her frnm Toosh on koovi

ikMiawU de

i—dio Dov hmrcflj more

ima(pne. that ihe the pnt)r JaoKoIaV

E^nsJEcer wvl

AIm> firvd tlie Coaple in

soeii !»▼« and HannniLT. cfcas ao^me

the odier wisk

Ike last

Word offended.

and bock gwe to-dkeir Subjeisn t^

iaesc Exutpie

<rfi«ke V

irtue and of-the

PSety.

Before one Year to Eod foae wsa. bore CiiwkiiJt to tke^^heat Joj of-all
noUe Viialii ai^hit Count, o^^er ovu Faskcr. and ol^tke entire Countiy,

a verj fine GirL Onhr witk her Hvsfaaad kmirtf ' ■.fid a Ckange oocmred
to be^ He ikoved over tkia Birtk no partiesiar Jo^. ninck-niore an Annojmnce

and Diiiike, ao tkat it attamtd^ aa wnwhikn^y to-kxm a joen^ Son mndi dearer
been, tkan a Dai^kter. Nov ok a mtid iniip>d tke good CoanteaB^ tkat her

dH>wed; tkan ke iip4o-tki»-time
to do aeciBtcMBed wna; nerertkeleB mfticd ake tkis witk great Patience,

and app&d keneli; br dkmb&e FrifiwHinrw kis IGnd to win. Tke Count
kowever let kinweif tkerefar not mufw^ ; ke tkoi^^t latker bj kis Manner-of-

acting tke FaitkfoIneaB ofUt Wife vipcm tke iVoof to pvt. As tke Child
from the Motker-breast weaned was^ called ke Grijekfis akoe to kimwJf in his
Boom. Here dbo wed he kimaeifnowmjs friendh- against ker on, bat b^an with
earnest Words so to speak : ^ Tkoa knowest, o Grisddis^ in wkidi Posttion
Tkofi fi>rmerlT lired kast and upon wkidi V»«i**«' Tkoa in mj Hoose come
art. Now art Tkoa to-me indeed dear and ^reeakle ; bat m j noble Friends
bare a great Dislike on Tkee, and mj Sabfeds will To4kee^ as to-a poor Peasant-
giii,alsonoisabjecibe^parfcica]ariTasTboato-meaDaagkterbcNrnebas^ whilst
as-yoa-know all modi-more a Son wished kad. Yes eren if it a Son were, so
might thejto-bim as- well not sabject be, tkerefoe tkat ke bja common Peasant-
girl bom become-i& And becaose i fiun witk mj Friends and Subjects in
Peace live woold, so see i mjself obliged, modi-more to4keir as to-mj own
Opinion to follow, and tkat to do, wkat to-mj Natore qoite contrary is.
However woold i nothing withoot thy knowing ondertake, bot To-thee all
before reveaL At-the-same-time ask i Thee, if Tkoa still of-the«ame Opinion
be, as Thou from B^inning of-oor ^larriage on been art, when Thoo to^e
promisedat, nothing to do nor to think, what against my Will were, and
nothing HI up-to-take, what i to-thee command or with thee begin shoold."

One had to-think ought, also the most-firm Mind must itself about a so
unexpected Speech naturally upset. Griseldis howevw spoke with fearless
Words : " Thou art my gracious Master, and i with my little Daughter are in
Thy Power ; do therefore with us, as Thy Serfe what To-thee pleases. To-thee
can nothing please, what to-me displease may, for i hare nothing other
to will and fear nothing to loose than just Thee ; i hsTe Thee so deeply in my
Heart impressed, that Thou at no Time, also not by the Death, out <^-tiie-8ame
torn become canst Sooner will All occur, than that this my Mind could
altered becoma" Over this Answer became the Count inwardly so moved,
that his Heart in-the Body itself round-turned, and he himself of-the Tears
hardly defend could. Nevertheless remained he outwardly quite earnest, and
spoke to her with severe Words : " Whether To-thee this Reply from Heart

THB AKGUOISED ANSCDOTSS. 107

go, will itself soon show !" With this short Word went he away and let
himself nothing of his inward Pain notice. Immediately called he one of-his
most fidthful Servants, and turned himself on him with the Command : ''Go
there to-my Wife and ask of her the little Daughter. If she it To-thee not
willingly gives, so take it with Force out of-her Hands. Tell her without
Shy, i have commanded, that Thou it take shalt, that it away-carried and
killed gets. Therewith give exactly Attention, how herself the Mother
behaves, and repoiii to-me at^nce particularly, how she herself behaved have/'
The Servant was-frightened over this Order violently, and spoke with moved
Words : " Oh Sir, what has then the innocent Child done, that you it execute
will, or wherewith has its Mother herself sinned, that you her so heavily
grieve will ) Spare i-pray-you of-the innocent Lamb, and spill not the noble
Blood, which you yourself begotten have !" But the Count grew-angry and
told him with angry Words to-do, how he ordered. So went the Servant then
to-the Closet of-the Countess and spoke mournful to her : '' Gracious Lady ! i am
alas ! the Bearer of-a very bad Messaga Our Master must very angry over
you be, for he has to-me earnestly ordered. Your Child from You to take and
it to-the Executioner to carry, that it killed gets. I have indeed for You and
the poor Little-daughter prayed, but his Anger therewith only greater made.
Give to-me therefore your Child ! " Who had not expected, Griseldis will
over this cruel Order in loud Lamentation outbreak? She however did
exactly the Contrary, and proved in this hard Moment the ovematural Power
of-her Mind. Therefore spoke she to-the Servant quite unfirightened : '' The
little Creature is our Master's, do he therewith, what to-him agreeable is ; take
it away and carry it to-him to ; i will myself to-his Command not in-the Least
oppose." Hereupon took she her dear Little-daughter out of-the Cradle, looked
it a While kindly on, kissed it quite heartily, marked it with the Sign of-the holy
Cross, and gave it then to-the Servant with friendly Countenance and without a
Tear to shed. The Servant himself could himself of-the Crying not prevent and
caught on (began), the innocent Child so painfully to commiserate, that at-last to-
the firm Mother the Heart itself soft became. '' Carry the dear Little-angel only
hastily away," spoke she ; " i recommend it with Body and Soul to-the highest
God, he may according to-his Will thereover dispose." So dismissed himself
the Servant and carried the Child to his Father, to-whom he exactly related,
how willingly Griseldis her Child away-given ; therefore himself the Count
not little astonished and by himself self acknowledge must that his Wife still
much more-virtuous be, than he it himself believed had.

Nevertheless would he not off-leave, her Obedience upon the Proof to put
and in the undertaken Work to-proceed. He had namely noways in-the Mind,
to-the Child a B[arm to-do, much more would he the-same elsewhere secretly
educate let. He had a Sister at Bologna in Italy, who with a there-living
Count married and to-her Brother heartily attached was. To-her thought
he the Child to send, that she it to-him in the Quietness according-to-its-
position educate-may ; therefore ordered he the-same smoothly to-envelop, well
in a Cradle to-keep, and by even that Servant, to whom he it to- rob
commanded had, to-hii Sister to-carry. To this End wrote he on her a

108 THB FBACnOAL LDTOUIST.

Letter, in which the entire Occurrenoe of-the Things minutely explained
and she for Education of-the Child friendly requested became, with subjob
Entreaty, that she the noble Young-lady according to-its countly P(
educate and instruct, at-the-same-time however all Care employ should,
Nobody should-learn, ta-which Parents the Child belong. The Countess
the Child of-her Brother with best Will out-of-the Servant's Arms, and re]
To-that-one by this-one, how she all possible Care employ will, that the Toi
lady upon-the Most-carefiil educated, and its Parentage secret kept beooi
And what she by-writing promised, that put she truly into-the Work : becai
she behaved herself towajxl the Child not otherwise, than if she its Mother]
were.

Meanwhile could Oriseldis not learn, where her dear little Daughter
away come, because except the Servant Nobody Knowledge thereof had ; she
believed therefore nothing Else, than that the innocent Child killed become bft
So unspeakably her this harmed, so let she still her inward Heart-ache
outwardly entirely not perceive, she showed against her Master all times a
friendly Face, and showed him so true Love, as if she entirely notJiing
Adverse from him experienced had, so that himself the Coiint not enough
wonder could, how it possible be, that she the Pain for her only bom Child
so suppress can, that to-her also no Sigh over the inflicted Wrong escape.
He caught on (commenced) her Virtue the longer, the higher to esteem, and
her the longer the more to love.

Meanwhile passed-away four Years, during which the Count and his
Wife in conjugal Love continually remained, and of-the away-taken Child
never Mention done became^ There became the Countess again by God
blessed and bore an extraordinary fine Son, whereover not only the Parents
of the Child but also all their Friends and Subjects themselves highly
enjoyed and this happy Occurrenoe with a Feast celebrated. Particularly
enjoyed himself the good old Janicula and his dear Daughter Griseldis; both
doubted not, that the Count this-one now with continual Affection love will-
It occurred however just the Contrary, and the pious Countess came in greater
Misery than before.

\ThMfiMA is complete in the German.]

PAET ra.

GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARIES.

OKAHMATICAL COUICENTARIES. Ill

PART III.

GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARIES.

It is of the utmost importance that the student, when studying a lan-
piage, and particularly when contrasting one language with another, should
onstantly bear in mind three things.

I. Each language has a general method — more or less peculiar to itself—
»f arranging and combining words, here termed the Idiom.

II. In every language we meet with phrases and sentences which do not
conform to this idiom, and which are here termed Eccentric.

III. It is the tendency of every language to abbreviate or shoiiien those
ixpressions which are of the most frequent recurrence by omitting a word
►r Words which are understood from the context — termed Elupse.

Idiomatic sentences can be explained upon the grammatical principles
ontained in the rules of Sjmtax, whereas eccentric expressions cannot ;
nd, in order to explain elliptical expressions, the words omitted must first
»e supplied.

When, therefore, it is desired to contrast a sentence in one language with
ts equivalent in another, e.g., an English with a German sentence, the student
Qust first determine whether the EnglLih Ls idiomatic, i.€., constructed as
Unglish sentences ordinarily are; eccentric, i.e., deviating from the ordinary
Qode of constructing an English sentence ; or elliptical, i.e., constructed as
English sentences ordinarily are, but having some word omitted which is too
►bvious to need expression in English.

If it is Idiomatic the difficulty of translation is at its lowest point. If it
3 elliptical, the ellipse must first be supplied before translation is attempted,
f it is eccentric, it cannot be translated in the strict sense of the term, but
ts equivalent must be found.

It is therefore obvious that an idea may be expressed either by —

1st An English Idiom, which may be / ^ \ -a^ ! .

f _ ; , , r * German < Eccentric, or

translated or rendered by ... I f Fir

2nd. An English Ellipse „ „ „ ditto.

3rd. „ Eccentric „ „ „ ditto.

The deduction from these observations is, that it is essential to keep the
eading rules of English grammar prominently before the mind.

The proper introduction to the commentaries appears to be the statement
f the leading rules of English grammar, placing by the side of each the

112 THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

corresponding German rule, so that the memory may be refreshed as to the
English rule, and be able readily to contrast the one with the other.

The following thirty-two English rules, with but slight alterations, have
been taken from Lennie's English Grammar.

THE LEADING RULES OF ENGLISH SYNTAX CONTRASTED
WITH THE CORRESPONDING GERMAN RULES.

1. Eng. A verb must agree with its nominatiye in number and person : as,

thou readest ; he reads ; we read.
Ger, The same. Du liesest or liest ; er liest ; wir lesen.

2. Eng. An active verb governs the objective case : as, we love him ; he

loves us.
Ger, An active verb governs either one or two cases. When it governs
one case this is generally the accusative The following verbs
govern two accusatives, nennen and heissen, to call; lehren,
to teach ; schelten and schimpfen, to scold or chide ; taufen, to
baptize. See Exercise v. 1, p. 121.

rThe following govern the genitive : gedenken, to remember;
bedurfen, to warUj require ; ermangeln, to be without ; barren,
to wait for ; lachen, to laugh ai ; spotten, to mock, o&c.

The following govern the dative J^danken, to thank; glauben, to
/ believe ; sagen, to «oy ; folgen, to /oUow ; erlauben, to allow

I dienen, to serve ; antworten, to answer ; gehorchen, to obey
gefallen, to please ; missfallen, to displease ; drohen, to threaten
begegnen, to mset ; trauen, to trust ; misstrauen, to distrust
gleichen, to resemble ; gleichkommen, to equal ; helfen, to help
rathen, to advise; widei'stehen, to resist; widersprechen, to
contradict ; passen, to Jit or suit ; wohlthun, to do good.

3. Eng. One verb governs another in the infinitive mood : as, forget not to
do good.

To, the sign of the infinitive, is not used after the verbs bid, dare,
need, make, see, hear, feel, let, perceive, behold, observe, have,
and know.
Ger. The same.

The preposition zu is not used before infinitives governed by the
verbs konnen, to be able ; mogen, to be allowed, may ; soUen, to
be obliged, shall; diirfen, to be allowed, dare; miisaen, to be
obliged, must ; woUen, to be tcilling ; laasen, to let ; machen, to
m^ike ; sehen, to see, behold; horen, to hear; fUhlen, to fed;
lehren, to teach; lemen, to leam.
4. Eng. Two or more singular nominatives coupled with and require a
verb and pronoun in the plural : as, James and John are good
boys ; for they are busy.

Two or more singular nominatives separated by or or nor require

ORAXMATICAL COSnCENTARIES. 113

a verb and pronoun in the singular : as James or John is the
first
Ger. The same. Jakob und Johann sind gute Knaben, denn sie sind
fleissig. Jakob oder Johann ist der Erste. The first person is
more important than the second, and the second than the third.
When, therefore, the subjects are of different persons, the verb
must be in the plural, and in the person of the most important
mentioned ; e.g., Er und ich (wir) sind zufrieden, — lie and
I (we) are contented.

5. £ng. The verb to be should have the same, case after it that it has

before it : as, I am he.
Ger, The same. Ich bin es.

6. £ng. The past participle is used after the verbs have and be : as, I have

written a letter ; he was chosen.
Ger. The past participle is used after the auxiliaries haben, sein,* and
werden : as, Ich habe einen Brief geschrieben, — / have a letter
vyriUen ; Er war gewahlt, — He v>as cJwsen (completed) ; Er wurde
gewahlt, — He was {being) chosen.
When the present participle of an active verb is used in English
after the verb to be, to express the continued suffering of an
action, it is translated by the passive voice : as, Das Haus wird
gebaut, — The house is building,

7. Eng, When the infinitive mood, or a part of a sentence, is the nomi-

native to a verb, the verb should be in the third person singular ;
as. To err is human, to forgive is divine.
Ger, The same.

The infinitive in this case is not preceded by zu : as, Irren ist
menschlich, vergebon ist christlich (christianlike) ; Sein oder
nicht sein das ist die Frage, — To be or not to he, t/iat is the
question.

8. Eng. In the use of verbs and words that in point of time relate to each

other, the order of time must be observed : for example. He
studies hard that he might have a well-informed mind, should
be, that he may have, &c.
Ger. The same. Er studirt fieissig, um griindliche Kenntnisse zu
erlangen, — He studies industriously, in-order toell-grotmded
knowledge to obtain. When, however, the action or suffering
is still continuing, the English perfect is translated by the
present tense ; e.g., Ich kenne jene Familie seit mehr als zwanzig
Jahren, und sie haben mich, fortwahrend (continually) mit ihrer
Freundschaft beehrt, — / have known (/ Jctiow) thai family
more than twenty yea/rs, a/nd they have continued to honour me
with their friendship all that time,
9. Eng. Sentences that imply contingency and futurity require the sub-
junctive mood ; as, If he be alone, give him the letter.
When contingency and futurity are not both implied, the

Ill

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

iudicative ought to be used ; a8, If he speaks as he thinks, he
mav safelv be trusted.
Ger. Sentences that imj)ly contingency or supposition require the sub-
junctive mood ; as, Wenn er allein ware, wiirde ich ihn fragen, —
Ifh^ were alone I would ask hinh.
When, however, the verb is in the present or perfect tense, wenn
requires the indicative mood ; as, Wenn er allein ist, geben
Sie ihm das Buch, — If he be alo^ie, give him t?ie book,
10. Eng. Copulative conjunctions couple the same moods and tenses of
verbs ; as, Do good and seek peace.
Conjunctions couple the same cases of nouns and pronouns; aa,
He and I ai-e happy.
Ger. The same; e.g., Thue Recht und scheue Niemand,— Z>o right and
fear no 7tia7i ; Er und ich sind gl'ucklich, — He amd I are happy.

^ I Certain conjunctions requiie certain other correspondent con-

Ger, /

junctions ; thus

Neither requires Nor, e.g. Neither he nor hia brother was in.

Weder

Though

Obschon

Whether

Ob

>»

»>

>»

»>

> »

Noch

Yet

>»

Or

Oder

Weder er noch sein Bruder war

da.
Though he is poor, yet he is

respectable.
Dennoch „ Obschon er arm ist, ist er den-

noch ehrlich.
Whether he will do it or not I

cannot tell.
Ob er will oder nicht, kann ich

uicht sagen.
Either she or her sister must go.
Ent weder sie oder ihre Sch wester

muss gehen.
Mine is as good as yours.
Meines ist ebenso gut als Ihres.
As thy diligence so shall thy

success be.
Wie die Arbeit, so der Lohn.
As the work so the wages. —

Proverb,
He is not so wise as his brother.
Er ist nicht so klug als sein

Bruder.
I am so weak that I cannot walk.
Ich bin so schwach, daas ich

nicht gehen kann.
And see page 50.
12. Eng, \ When two nouns signifying the same thing are contained in the
and I same phrase, they agree in case, and are said to be in apposition ;
Ger. ) e.g., Cicero, der Bedner, or Der Redner C cero, — Cicero the orator.

Either

Or

Entweder „

Oder

As

As

Ebenso „

Als

As

So

Wie

»

So

»

>»

>»

>»

if

»>

>»

ft

So

ff

As

So

ft

Als

So

»>

That

So

««

Dass

»>

>>

>>

»>

QRAlfMATICAL COMMRNTARIEA. 115

13. £ng. ^ When two nouus in the same phrase signifying different things)

Ofnd L are made dependent the one upon the other, in order unitedly

Oer, \ to express a single idea, that which is used adjectively must be

placed in German after the other, and must be in. the genitive

case ; e,g,^ My friend's book, — Das Buck meines Freundes.

The expression of the genitive by 's, called the Saxon genitive, is

only permitted in German in the case of proper names, and in

poetical expressions.

1 4. £fuf. When a noun of multitude conveys unity of idea, the verb and

pronoun should be singular ; as, The class was large.
Ger. The same ; e.g.. Die Klasse war gross.

15. Brig. When a noun of multitude convejrs plurality of idea, the verb and

pronoun should be plural; as, The people of Great Britain
enjoy privileges of which they ought to be proud.
Ger, The same; «.flr., Die Leute (better Einwohner) Grossbritannien's
haben Privilegien, auf die sie stolz sein sollten.

16. Eiig. When the present participle is used as a noun, it requires an

article before it and of after it ; as. Your voice is drowned by
the rushing of the waters. The sea rose with the rising of the
wind.
Ger, The English present participle used as a noun, with an ai-ticle
before it and of after it, is translated by a substantive or by a
subordinate clause ; e.g.. Your voice is drowned by the rush-
ing of the waters, — Ihre Stiinme wird von dem Rauachen des
Wassers ilhertdnt ; The sea rose with tbe rising of the wind, —
Die See stieg, ah sich der Wind erJioh.

17. Eng, When singular nominatives of different persons are separated by

OR or NOR, the verb agrees with the person next it ; as. Either
you or I am in fault ; I, or you, or he, is the author of it.
Ger, The same ; e,g,y Entweder Sie oder ich bin schuld daran ; Ich oder
Sie oder er Lst der Urheber.

18. Eng, A singular and a plural nominative, separated by or or nor, require

a verb in the plural ; as. Neither the captain nor the sailors
were saved.
6'cr. The same; e.g,^ Weder der Capitain noch die Matrosen wurdcn
gerettet.

19. Eng, Pronouns agree in gender, number, and person, with the nouns for

which they stand ; as, John has lost his book ; Every tree is
known by its fruit.
Ger, A pronoun used adjectively agrees in gender, number, and case with
the noun it qualifies, which usually stands immediately after it ;
e,g,, Johann hat sein Buch und seine Feder verloren, — John has
lost his hook and his pen,

20. Eng, The relative agrf>cs with its antecedent in gender, number, and

person ; as. The boy who reads ; The book which was lost.
Ger, The same ; e,g.<, Der Knabe, welcher licst ; Das Bucli, wekhes (or
das) verloren war.

116 THE PRACTICAL UNQUIST.

When the antecedent is the first or second person of a personal
pronoun, it must be repeated after the relative ; e.g., Du, der du
liesest, — Thou who reddest,

21. Eng. When the relative is preceded by two antecedents of different per-

sons, it and the verb generally agree in person with the latter ;
as, You are the boy that was first yesterday.
Ger. The same ; e,g., Du bist der Kuabe, der gestem der Erste war.

22. Eng. It is improper to use both a noun and its pronoun as a nominative

to the same verb ; as, John he is come home — (omit he).
Ger, The same ; e,g., Johann ist nach Hause gekommen.

23. Eng. A pronoun after than, or as, either agrees with a verb, or is

governed by a verb or proposition understood : as, He is wiser
than I (am) ; She loved him more than (she loved) me.
Ger, The same ; e.g.^ Er is kluger als ich (bin) ; Sie liebt ihn mehr, als
(sie) mich (liebt).

24. Eng. 1 The distributive pronouns jeder, each ; jeder, every ; einer von
and > beiden, either ; keiner von beiden, neit/ier ; agree with nouns
Ger, J and verbs in the singular number only ; e.g.y Jeder seiner

Briider ist in einer giinstigen Lage, — Each of his brothers is in a

favourable situation ; Jeder ist fiir sich selbst verantwortlich, —

Every nian is accountable for himself ; Einer von beiden ist

gut genug, — Either of them is good erunigh.

When two persons or things are contrasted, jener, e, es, tliatj

refers to the first mentioned, and dieser, diese, dieses, this^ to the

last ; e,g,, Die Tugend und das Laster stehen sich wie Licht

und Finstemiss eut^egen; jene veredelt das Gemiith, dieses

emiedrigt es, — Virtue and vice are as opposite to each other as

light and darkness ; that ennobles the mind, this debases it,

2(), Eng. ^ It is improper to place a clause of a sentence between a possessive

and y case and the word which usually follows it ; e.g., Dieses sind

Ger, J David's, des Konigs, Priesters und Propheten des Judischen

Yolkes, Psalmen ; should be : Dieses sind die Psalmen David's,

des Konigs, Priesters und Propheten des Judischen Volkes, —

These are David's psalms, tJie king, priest, and prophet of the

Jewish people,

27. Eng, The comparative degree and the pronoun " other,'* require "than"

after them, and " such " requires "as : '* as, Greater than I ; No
other than he ; Such as do well.
Ger. The comparative degree and the pronoun " ander," otiier, require
" als," t/ian, after them ; " as " after " such " is translated by the
relative pronoun ; e.g., Grosser als ich, — Greater than I ; Kein
anderer als er, — No other than he ; Diejenigen ^or solche), welche
sich gut stehen, — Such as do wdl,

28. Eng. Prepositions govern the objective case ; as, To whom much is given,

of him much shall be required.
Ger. See page 48.

ORAMMATIGAL 00MHEHTA&IB8. 117

The prepositions "of" and "to" are usually expressed by the

genitive and dative cases.
The following words take the genitive : Anklagen, to accitse of;

sich riihmen, to boast of ; Verminderung, diminution of;

Beobachtung, observance of; Heilighaltung or Feier, observance

q/* (sabbath); Werth, worthy of
The following take the dative : Anpassen, to adapt to ; Angenehm,

ageeable to ; Abgeneigt, averse to ; GemiisSy conformable to ;

C^treu, true to; Yerleihen, to bestow upon; Aufwarten, to

toait upon,

29. Before names of places.

Nach, to, is used after a verb of motion ; e.g., Wir gingen nach

Spanien, — We went to Spain.
ZvL, €U or in ia used —

(1) After the verb sein, to be; e.g., Ich war zu Leith, — /
teas at Leith.

(2) Before the names of large towns.

In^ used before the names of countries, towns, and villages.

30. Eng. J^'Two negatives in the same sentence are improper ; e.g., Ich kann

and > es iiicht keineswegs erlauben (omit nicht), — I can by no means
Ger, ; allow it.

31. Eng. '\ Adverbs are for the most part placed before adjectives after verbs

and > active or neuter, and between the auxiliary and the verb ; e.g.,
Ger. J Er ist sehr aufmerksam, — He is very attentive ; Sie fiihrt sich

gut auf und ist sehr geachtet, — Sltje beluives well and is viuch

esteemed.
No adverb is placed before the finite verb, e.g., Der Fiirst schlaft

selten so fest als der Bauer, — 77*6 2^rince seldom sleeps so

soundly as the peasant.

32. Ung. Adjectives should not be used as adverbs, nor adverbs as adjec-

tives ; as, Bemarkable well, for remarkably weW.
Ger, Adjectives are used as adverbs without any change of form, but
not adverbs as adjectives ; e.g., Ausserordentlich wohl, — Jiemurk-
ahly well. But for Deine ofte Unpasslichkeit, say, Deiue
hiiufige Unpasslichkeit, — Thy freqivent indittposition.
33. Custom has determined the prepositions appropriate to tlie following
words and phrases : —

abhangig von dependent upon

sich untei-scheiden von . . .1 ,. _ ^
1.1 > dtjfcrfroni '

abweichen von j -^ -^

freisprechen von to a>cquU of

abweichen von to dissent from

Ausnahme von excepti4yn from

frei von free from

unabhangig von indppendent of

voll von fuUtf replete with

t

o

TOE PKACnCAL LINOUier.

to ™m,/ro.,
abAorrenee of
regard to

abschweifen von . . .

Achtung vor ....
sich verlasBen auf .
begierig a«f. ....

beatehcn auf to intitt up(m

in Bezug auf in re/eretux to

vorrufen bei to eaU upon

umtauachen gegen to ehange/or

Vorurtheil gegeti pr^udice against

Nachaicht mit compliance with

bewandert mit or iii eonvertaril with

beschiiftigt init engaged in or viith

verneheD mit to provide wilh

versohnen mit to reconcile to

T«rheirathen mit (or dative) . . to viarry to

Aehnlichkeit mit reteinblamx to

getJidtet werden mit to die by

sterbeo an to die of

OeiKlimack an iagtefor

gewiihnen an to aectat&m to "-

erinnern an to remind of

ilenken an to think ofV

lachen iiber to laugh at

rich freueu iiber to r^oice at

Froh iiber glad of

bringen za to reduce to

bringen unter to reduce under

gemacht I

verfertigt f »"" ^^ ^"^ . . . m<^e o/

Nutzen ziehen aua to profit by

verschieben auf lo pOBlpone to or tUl ,

sich betriigen in tohe ditappoinfed m'V

Entmuthignng fiir ditcoumgemenl to

Erfahren in expert in or at

Fallea unter to faU under

34. The following acaJe shows the order in which the words usually stand
in principal sentences : —

|1

11

o's

•3 .

If

•3

•<

S.-

=1

1

2

3

4

5

G

7

8

GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARIES. 119

EXERCISE I.
77a6 nuiYther refers to the serUeiice.

1. "Milk." All Grerman substantives are written with a capital initial.

2. " Das, die.'* The article agrees with the noun in gender, number, and
case. See page 15.

4. " Essen.'* Infinitives and past participles are placed at the end of the
sentence except when the sentence begins with a relative or a conjunction.
The conjunctions und, oder, aber, allein, sondem, and denn, are excepted.

5. " Ich." The personal pronouns, Sie, you, excepted, are not written with
a capital unless at the beginning of a sentence. In royal speeches, however,
Ich and Wir take the capital, and some authors also write Du and Ihr with a
capital.

5 (6). " Kaffee," see compared Bules, II.

6 "Wollen." The English shall in asking a question is rendered in
German by wollen, unll, whenever the act or answer depends upon the volition
of the person interrogated. Vide pp. 27, 28.

6 (6). " You and I *' is rendered by wir beide, we both.
7. Whenever it is obvious that the whole is not intended, the word
"some," is to be omitted.

11. When the English "it" implies a part only, it is rendered by
" davon " thereof.

15. "Etwas," aomeihing or anything. The English anything at all, or
mything with stress laid upon it, is " irgend etwas,'* any anything, or any
something,

EXERCISE II.

5 and 8. The English auxiliary " have," when used elliptically, is mostly
rendered by the verb which expresses the actual fact, thus in the sentence

* Will anybody have fish?" t.e., to eat, the auxiliary is omitted in German,
md the direct question asked, " Will any one fish eatT* and when the verb

* wollen" (p. 27) is used, both the auxiliary "have** and the verb may be
}mitted, thus, " Will Jemand Fisch]**— ITi/^ any aneJUh?

12. "A. Bottle Beer.** See p. 11, " Most words, Ac.'*

15. There are two forms of the second person plural, viz., Ihr and Sie;
^ie is used in polite, as distinguished from familiar, conversation.

(6). " Essen Sie.** The imperative in the second person plural requires in
3olite conversation the addition of the personal pronoun.

(c). " Doch.'* When the imperative is used as an entreaty, the expletive
loch, signifying do, pray, is added. See doch, Ex. vL 16, page 121.

16. "Mochten.** 1st p. pi., imp., subj. of mogen (p. 30).

Mbgen means also to like. The imperfect subjunctive has in all verbs the
)ower of the 1st conditional, / should, and the pluperfect subjunctive that of
ihe 2nd conditional, / should have.

20. Das and dieses may be used indifferently.

120 THE PRACTICAL UKOUIST.

EXERCISE III.

2 (a). The article is of much more frequent uae in Grerman than in
Englitih. It may be said generally that it is omitted in German only when
the substantive is used in a partitive sensa The article is used before the
genitive or dative to point out distinctly the particular case; e.g.y Er zieht
Bier der Milch vor, — He draws Bter to-the Milk be/ore, i.e., He pr^er$ b^er to
milk,

(6). The infinitives of all German verbs may be used as substantives ; and
when so employed they are of the neuter gender, and are written with a
capital initial.

(c). " Das Essen," the eating^ may be translated dinner or supper, accord-
ing to the time of day.

5 and 12. "Ist Salat genug," "1st Obst da." In principal sentences in
Crerman the adverb is never placed before the subject or the finite verb,
except when used emphatically.

** There is " and " there are " are translated by es giebt, it gives, with the
subject in the accusative when the fact of general existence is intended ; eg.,
Es giebt einen Gott, — There is a God ; and by es ist, it is, or es sind, it are,
dej)ending upon the number of the word following, with the addition of da,
thfire^ when it is intended to indicate that something is ready prepared or
may be had, and in this latter case the " es " is omitted in the interroga-
tive form.

6. Ich wiU, / will, is in German considei*ed too imperative ; hence the
substituted expression " ich bitte," — / beg or pray /or,

1 0. Um is used instead of fiir, in conjunction with bitten, to pray or btg ;
rufen, to cry for ; auhalten, to sue for ; spielen, to play for ; fragen, to ask;
bekummem, to care, and a few others ; e.g,, Bekiimmem Sie sich nicht um
mich, — Caa-e you yourself, not for me, i.e., DonU care for me.

12. Zum (zu dem), — to tJte. When the word "for" expresses the purpose
it is rendered by zu, which governs the dative, and not by fur.

13. In sentences beginning with an adverb, or any word other than the
subject, such as "there it is," "here we are," "yesterday it rained," the
subject and finite verb are inverted in German ; e.g., "there is it," " here are
we," " yesterday rained it."

14. Kein, keine, kein, — no, is employed when followed by a substantive,
and keiner, keine, keines or keins, — none, where there is no substantive fol-
lowing.

EXERCISE IV.

6. Da, — there, is omitted when the locality' is otherwise expressed.

10. "Did." The imperfect must be rendered in German by the perfect
whenever the act is complete and nothing remtiius to be done.

11. « Any more " is rendered by noch mehr, yet or still vuyre, or by noch
y€t or still som^ or any.

GRAMMATICAL OOMMENTABIES. 121

EXEB€ISB V.

1. When an active verb governs two cases, the one of the person and the
other of the thing, the person is put in the dative and the thing in the accusa-
tive. See, however, Compared Rules, II.

2. In the sentence, " Shall I bring you some pork ] '* " you " is dative and
" pork " accusative. When the dative stands before the accusative, " to," the
sign of the dative, is often omitted in English, but must be expressed in German
by inflexion, nor can it be omitted in English when the accusative is placed
before the dative ; e,g.. Shall I bring some pork to you 7

4. " What," as an interrogative or relative, preceding a substantive to which
it refers, is translated by " was fiir," — what for,

4 and 5. "For" is translated by "fiir" only when referring to persons:
when it signifies "at " or "to" it is rendered by " zu," — to; and by denn,— /c^,
when it is used as a conjunction.

9. "What?" used elliptically for "What do you say," or " mean ? " is
rendered by " Wie 1" Wie meinen Sie 1 — How mean ymi ?

11. German sentences commence with the subject unless it is desired to lay
stress upon any particular word, in which case that word may precede the
subject. See Exercise iii. 13.

13. " Take" in English signifies both to appropriate and to carry, in the
former sense it is translated by nehmen, in the latter by tragen.

EXERCISE VI.

1. When from the context it is clear that the future is intended the pre-
sent tense is frequently used in Crerman instead of the future.

2. " For,"— denn^ is commonly omitted in German when simply used in
English as a slight causative conjunction.

3. With the verbs " thun," — to do, and " sagen," — to say,^* so " is translated
by " das " or " es," at pleasure.

8. "Near," when not used in a figurative sense, must be rendered by
" nahe beL"

13. In answers to questions, the English elliptical form cannot be em-
ployed ; the affirmative or negative must therefore be used, or the complete
sentence be repeated ; thus, You can or cannot speak to me.

16. "Doch" signifies (1) yet. (2) Pray, when following an imperative ;
e.g.y Sagen Sie mir doch, wer jener Herr ist, — Say You to-me, pray, who thai
Gentleman is, (3) Hope, in interrogative sentences ; e.g., Sie sind doch wohl 1 —
You are, i-Jwpe, well? (4) It is an expletive and equivalent to indeed, to be
SURE, &c (5) An affirmation, but only after negative questions ; e.g., Haben
Sie keinen Wein 1 Doch, — Have you no vnne ? Yes, I have, &c.

16 and 18. In relative clauses the finite verb is placed at the end of the
clause.

20. In English interrogative sentences to which an affirmative answer is
expected, the auxiliary is repeated. In German, " nicht wahr," — ^wt true, is
used.

122 THE PHACnCAL LIXOUIST.

EXERCISE VIL

1. " Es ist mir lieb," — I am glad, or I like (it). As to ware (imp. sub.),
see Ex. iL 16, note.

4 (a). Whenever the English word "shall" indicates merely the future, it
must be rendered by werden, wilL See pages 27 and 28, notes.

(6). The object is more frequently repeated in Grerman than in En^ish.
The word ** es," it, is not however absolutely necessary.

9. The genitive of Jemand and Niemand is formed by adding es to the
nominative. The dative and accusative either remain unaltered or take em
to form the dative and en in the accusative.

8 (a). Ware, imp. sub. The present and imp. sub. are used indifferently
in German, except as mentioned in iL 16.

(6). The subjunctive is used when the substance, but not the exact word-^,
of another are quoted.

10. When the word " say" is used with emphasis, a stronger verb than
sagen must be employed ; e.g., behaupten, versichem.

EXERCISE VIII.

3 (a). Verbs expressing a change of place or condition form the perf.,
plup., 2nd fut., and 2ud cond. by aid of the auxiliary sein instead of haben.
(6). " Before " iu this sense is rendered by schon einmaL

5 (o). " You," — Ihnen, may be expressed or not.

(6). Ich danke (Ihnen) is used in the case of refusaL Sie sind sehr
freundlich, — You are very kind; or Wenn ich bitten darf^ — J/I ask may^ to
express the acceptance of the offer.

(c). Von,— i<j/*, is used when part only is intended.

8. Auch, — also, here signifies even.

11. " For** is not translated when implied by the verb; e.g., to ask for,
verlangen ; to look for, ttucJien.

13. He, she, it, and they, in the phrases he is, she is, it is, they are, are
respectively rendered by " es*' when followed by a substantive or pronoun
which defines it, and by er, sie, es, sie, when followed by an adjective which
defines it.

14. Diese von jenen, — these from those, would be equally good German.

EXERCISE IX.

2. " Tell," — to order, is translated by befehleii.

4. "Do." The use of the equivalents luachou and thun can only be
acquired by noticing the individual cases where they are employed.

6. "That he come will.** All conjunctions, except tliose mentioned at
the foot of page 33, when commencing a sentence throw the verb to the end.

11. " Du ** (the second person singular) is only used in addressing intimate
friends and servants.

GRAMMATICAL COMMEIH* ARIES. 123

12. The dative genei*ally precedes the accusative.

12 and 13. Eins with a capital signifies "one thing ;" eines or eins with a
small letter refers to a neuter noun previously mentioned.

19. " Gern " is not absolutely necessary, though commonly thus used.

EXERCISE X.

5. " Auf." See " Prepositions that govern the dative and accusative,"
page 48.

16. See vi. 13, and compare this and sentence 16.

17. "Kecht" and "sehr" are synonymous in this sense, but recht also
signifies right, correct.

19. The "If* in this English sentence is idiomatic, and does not make
the sentence conditional ; it is therefore omitted in German.

DIALOGUE.

2. " Das," — thcUy is used for emphasis.

4 (a). Tell and say are both rendered by sagen.

(6). The English phrases, " where to put it," " what to do," &c., are
rendered by "whereto she it put should ; " " What I, &c., do should."

(c). As the pronoun is required in the second clause, it is omitted in the
first to avoid tautology.

(cQ. "Heard," when the past participle of either of the verbs horen,
woUen, sollen, konnen, mogen, diirfen, miissen, and lassen is preceded by an
infinitive, the past participle adopts the form of an infinitive, thus : horen, —
to hea/r, is here used for gehbrt, — heard,

9. May, should. See " sollen," page 28,

10. " Think " is rendered by glauben, — to believe, or by denken, — to reflect,
according to the sense in which it is used. " Tell," — to repeat, is wiedersagen.

10 and 20. Alles, — ^all, everything, may be written with or without a
capital.

12. Were or would be.

13. Jemand kommt, — some one comes, or es kommt Jemand, may be used
indifferently. If the verb is placed before the substantive, it must be preceded
by es. It is common in German to remove the subject from the commence-
ment to a later part of the sentence, in which case its place must be indicated
by the indefinite es, — it,

15. Einmal, — once, just, is an expletive in frequent use.

15 and 16. Einer, — either or one ; keiner, — neither or none,

17(a). Sagten, imp. sub., compare ii 16. The form of the imperfect
subjunctive having " e " before the personal terminations, e,g,, sagEten, is
not in common use, though found in most of the leading grammars, and in
the Scriptures.

(6). Wollen, vide page 27, note 2.

18. Selbst, — self or yourself.

124 THE P&ACnCAL UXGUIST.

19 (a). "Here/" — hier, and ''well/' — wohl^ in such aentenoe^ an
pleiives.
(by " This,'' in EInglish, means this much or so muclu
(c). Noch, — still, is added to increase the force.
(d). Aber, — btU, however.

(e). Das werde ich nicht sagen, — tluU shall i not aay^ mig^t eqnaflf I
be used with das behalte ich fiir mich.

20. ''Hatten." The compound conjunction ala ob gorema the nV
junctive.

EXERCISE XI.

la. When the relative pronoun referring to a thing, and not to a p»8Qi^
is preceded by a preposition in English, it must be rendered in Overman lij
the use of a compound adverb, such as woraus, worin, wobei, woran.

(6). '' Machen kann.*' In subordinate clauses the finite verb is removed to
the end.

4. "The yours." See disjunctive pronouns, p. 20.

7. " Anzunahen." In separable compounds the preposition " zn," when
required, is placed between the particle and the infinitive.

13 (a). Eeflbctive Verbs.

Sich schamen, — to be ashamed.
Pres, Ind. Ich schame mich. Svhj. Ich schame mich.

Du — est dich.
Er — et sich.
Wir — en uns.
Ihr — et euch.
Sie — en sich.
Ich schiimete mich.
Ich habe mich geschamt.
Ich hatte mich geschamt.
\8t Fut. Ich werde mich schamen. Ich werde mich schamen.

2nd FvJt. Ich werde mich geschamt haben. Ich werde mich geschamt haben.
\st Conditional. Ich wiirde mich schamen.
2nd „ Ich wUrde mich geschamt haben.

Imp, Schame dich.

Inf. Pres, Sich schamen. In/, Perf, Sich geschamt haben. Inf, FtU,
Sich schamen werden.
Part, Sich schamend.

13 (6). The English "do," as a component of another verb, has no
equivalent in other languages.

(c). In the expressions " do not stand, sit, lie, ^.," the Crerman avoids
the intransitive form of the imperative, and substitutes for it a transitive re-
flective verb.

(rf). "Durfen.'' See page 30.

Du — st dich.

Er t sich.

VVii' — en uns.

Ihr — t euch.

Sie — en sich.

Imperf,

Ich schamte mich.

Per/,

Ich habe mich geschamt.

Phip,

Ich hatte mich geschamt.

GRAMMATICAL 00MMSIYTABIE8. 125

17. " Bekommen." The verb "to have," — haben, is more limited in its
ification than in English.

18. Kleiden, — dre88, waschen, — tocuh, rasiren — sha/ve, and several other
jmilar verbs which are neuter in English are reflective in German.

18. Ankleiden, separable. See page 33, note.

EXERCISE XII.

1. In principal sentences or clauses an adverb must never be placed
between the subject and the verb.

2. " StilL" Adverbs of time, and substantives used as such, often precede
the object when stress is laid on the latter. See Compared Rule XXXIV.

6. The indefinite English " do " must be rendered by the verb for which it
in fact stands.

7. " Sie haben." In sentences which are rather exclamatory than interro-
gative, the subject is placed before the verb.

9 (a). " Here," in the sense of hither, must be rendered by hierher.

(6). The two words " can " and " not " are never contracted into cannot in
Grerman, and the negative portion, nicht, must be placed immediately before
the word negatived.

14. The active foi*m of expression is more &voured in Grerman than the
passive.

EXERCISE XIII.

3. Welchen, — " some" or " any," when referring to a substantive pre-
viously mentioned, is translated by welcher, e, es, page 20.

6. After a disjunctive conjunction the pronoun is repeated.

11. Wovon or woraus,

13. "Sagen Sie selbst." Selbst, — self or yourself , The verb sagen being
transitive, it is evident that the speaker must tell to me or say to me, there-
fore it is considered superfluous to use the word mir in Carman.

(6) In the reflective pronouns, myself, thyself, himself, Ac,, the first com-
ponent is not expressed in German when manifest from the context ; thus,
Sagen Sie mir selbst is used instead of Sagen Sie mir Sie selbst. Therefore
Sagen Sie selbst is, in fact, a contraction of Sagen Sie mir Sie selbst. ^

EXERCISE XIV.

4. '* Suchen Sie mir." This mir is called the dative commodi, and is of
frequent occurrence in Grerman, where the act expressed by the verb is for
the benefit of the subject.

6. Eine solche or solch eine.

13. *' Mit," — withy is rarely used to imply proximity between things, but is,
in this sense, confined to persons.

126 THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

EXERCISE XV.

2. The conjunction " that," — dcuts^ is of much more frequent use in German
than in English.

3. "Muss ich." When the subordinate clause precedes the principal
clause, the subject and finite verb of the latter are transposed.

9. Eine Brille (singular), — A pair of spectacles.
11 (o). "To have to," — miissen. See page 29.

(6) " Machen " is very rarely used in the sense of make, "to compel."
14. When a pronoun or article refers to two or more nouns in the
singular it must be repeated before each in German.

EXERCISE XVI.

8. " To be right " and " to be wrong " are translated respectively by Recht
haben and Unrecht haben.

EXERCISE XVII.

2. "Not anything" is nichts; not anybody, Niemand.

3. " Brothers and sisters " may also be expressed by Geschwister.

6. " Much " or " very much," before a past participle, is sehr.

7. "In Verlegenheiten " or " in einer Verlegenheit."

8 (a). Er hat ganz Recht — he is quite correct,

(6) Versichem, — to assure some one of something, with the dative of the
person and the accusative of the thing, Jemandem etwas versichem.

9. " So " is translated by das or es, with the verbs sagen and glauben.

10. Yo\\—fuUof

EXERCISE XVIII.

1. "So " in conditional sentences like this, may be omitted.

2. Meinen, — to m>ean, signifies " to be of opinion," not " to intend."

4. Sprechen is construed with mit, and not with zu.

6 (a). Verstehen signifies " to comprehend," not " to hear."
(6). With verbs and adjectives expressing an affection of the mind, the
English "at" is translated by "uber."

8. Das heisst or das ist.

10. Mich. Seexi 13(a).

11. Einmal is here an expletive.

EXERCISE XIX.

(8). "An," — "To write to some one," is translated by "an Jetnand
Bchreiben."

(b). The English "for his opinion" is elliptical.

9 (a). "Ought to have," with the past participle of a verb, is translated by the

OBAHMATICAL COMMENTARIES. 127

pluperfect subjunctive of the verb sollen with the infinitive of the verb em-
ployed.

(b). Sollen for gesollt. See Dialogue, 4(rf), p. 123.

10. On or about, in a figurative sense, is rendered by iiber, which then
governs the accusative.

EXERCISE XX.

1. Einschlagen is used in conjunction with Weg.

2. Angenehmste. See page 17, "There are," etc.

3. " Gehe." The progressive form, " am going," is rendered by the simple
form of the verb, t.e., "go."

4 (a). " On my, thy, his, &c., way " is rendered by unterwegs.

(6). Bei with the dative is equivalent to "at" followed by a substantive in
the Saxon genitive, e.^., at John's . . .

(c). Um, — -/or or in order to.

6. Wartet auf mich, — waits /or me, in the sense of stopping for ; wartet mir
auf, or bedient mich, or dient mir, in the sense of serving.

1 2 (a). " That is " is rendered by " das ist " or " das sind," according as that
which follows is singular or plural.

(6). " In all," the totals must be rendered by das Ganze, and not by alles.

16. " Lange " must be referred to the time^ and not to the person, in
German.

ANECDOTE (Monkey).

Line 3, wurde, — was being,

4. Jammem, — to Urnient, or winseln — to tohine, are synonymous : th«
fonner is more frequently applied to himian beings ; the latter to dogs.

4. Nahe, — neamesa, vicinity.

4. Verblieb. See page 51, Ver, (5).

5. Seinem. The second object in this sentence is an infinitive clause.

11. Unter, — under or amoTig.

11. Hatten dulden wollen, plup. subj., with the infinitive dulden.

(a). The German observes the sequence of tenses more strictly than the
English.

(6). The act of the monkeys was prior to the belief as to it : the act,
therefore, of the monkeys is in the pluperfect' hatten wollen.

(c). The belief not being an ascertained fact requires the subjunctive.

EXERCISE XXI.

1. Guten, accusative, because the verbal phrase Ich wiinsche Ihnen is
understood.

4. " Ihr Herr Vater." When speaking to another of his relations, the
word indicating the relation is, as a matter of politeness, preceded by Herr,
Frau, or Fraulein, as the case may be.

Ihrem Herm Bruder. See Ex. xxv. 12, p. 129.

12. "Und," when followed by a finite verb; "zu," if followed by an
infinitive in German.

L

128 THE PRACTICAL USQTJl&T,

13 (a). The German Es thut mir leid must be followed by a subordinate
clause introduced by dass, — that,

(b). Das8, — that, conjunction, das, — the^ neuter article, or das, — that,
pronoun.

EXERCISE XX 11.

11. " That understands itself." The reflective may be used in the sense
of the passive voice. "That understands itself" therefore means "that is
understood of itself," i.«., by itself.

12. "What a** is expressed either by "welcher, e, es," without the
article, or by " was fiir " with the article.

14. SoUen. See page 28, note.

15. "Know what to." When the verb "to know" is followed by a
relative with an infinitive, the relative and infinitive must be changed into a
subordinate clause.

17. Meinen or sagen.

EXERCISE XXIII.

3. "A good appetite." The indefinite article, when followed by a sub-
stantive that is susceptible of degree, is not translated in German.

7. " Etwas Neues." When etwas, — something or anything^ and nichts, —
nothing y are followed by an adjective, the latter takes the form of the neuter
gender, and is written with a capital initial.

10 (a). " Her,'* — ago, may be omitted, though it is generally used.

(b), " Lange." Lang, — long ; lange, — long time, because Zeit, — time, fem.,
is understood.

(c). Dass, — thaty or during which.

12 (a). Home, t.e., towards home, nach Hause; at home, zu Hause.
See 15.

(6). Mit gehen or mitgehen, when used by the speaker intimating with
himself; the pronoun "mir" is usually omitted.

17. Zuriick kommt or zuruokkommt. The present tense is used in Grerman
for the future when it is obvious that the future is intended.

18 (a). Zu with the dative signifies " to go to some one, or to his house,"
Ac. ; nach, — after, with the dative, " to go to a place specified : " e.g., Er geht
nach Koln, — He is going to Cologne,

(b). The present tense must be used in Grerman when the action com-
menced still continues.

EXERCISE XXIV.

7. Mein Herr, — Sir, Meine Herren, — Gentlemen, as an address; Herren
when not address.

10. Nennen, to name.

1 1 . Heissen, to call and to be called,

13. Hal ten, to hold, when used concerning the mind, signifies to under-
stand, believe, think, or take.

GRAMMATICAL COMMElfTAKn?«. 129

EXERCISE XXV.

9. Vorziehen, — draw be/ore (prefer), separable. See page 33, note.

12. Herm. Heir is declined like the 2nd declension, but drops the **e"
in the singular.

1 3. Helfen, — to help, ia used only in the sense of rendering assistance.

1 4. Am liebsten, — on tJie dearest. The adverb gem, in the expression gem
haben, — to like, has lieber in the comparative and am liebsten in the superlative;
thus, gem haben, — to like, lieber haben, — to like better, am liebsten haben, — to
like best,

1 7. " Alles was," — all what or all that ; alles, — all; nichts, — nothing ; etwas,
— something; vieles, — much; wenig, — Utile, and a few others, are followed by
was, — whcU, instead of das, — that,

20. " Ist's," ist es.

21. The English word "mind" is variously used. The exclamation,
Mind ! is rendered by " geben sie Acht "; never mind by " das thut (or macht)
nichts ;" mind your own business by " das geht Ihnen nichts an."

24 (a). " Man," — one, has an indefinite meaning, signifying some person or
persons which the speaker cannot or will not mention. It also signifies people
in general.

(b), Ueber or iiber, — over or across,

25. Or "Den wievielsten haben wir heutel"

26 (a). Womit, — wherewith or with what; wie, — how, would mean, "in
what manner."

(6). Dessen, — oftJtat or of it. See demonstrative Der, page 21.

ANECDOTE.

Line 1. " Nach dem," &c. Adverbs and adverbial phrases of time must
not be placed between the subject and the finite verb in principal clauses.
2. " Hinterliesa" Lassen is not used in the sense of leaving behind.
8. Campanerin. See "in" (2), page 52.

8. In Bezug auf, — in reference to,

9. Diese, — this o7ie. As the German pronoun points out the gender, the
addition of the word Dame, — ladt/, is not required.

" The Lady," &c,, may also be translated Diese, die sehr reich und nicht
weniger prunksuchtig war. PrunksUchtig,— ;/(WMi of show. Most English
phrases involving tho expression " fond of " are translated by a compound
word, the second component being suchtig, e,g,, fond of eating, essuchtig;
fond of play, spielsuchtig ; fond of amusement, vergniigungustichtig.

11. "Cornelia, &c,, said, &c" Lengthy clauses intervening between the
subject and the verb must be carefully avoided in German.

1 2. Dies, contraction of dieses, this. In the phrases, " it is," " they are," " this
is,""these are,"**thatis,""those are," "which isr"whichare]"when followed by
a noun, the pronoun stands in the neuter gender and in the singular number in
each case, without regard to the gender or number of the noun which follows.

a

*i,. LhA. — CmT 'jr r««dL TLe reuKTsre tj r u n ma. f^Bisc 9e ^ff^rawi in

r

[TLSE XXTL

J V Tjmt I'ivs^ ^jnzi^axirm 'A *" Let i». ke^r if Lmmb Ss Kisb Sk. kt.

^'.ie>r «Ljr,- ^' dj d»f!:jk«t dirr -*t de:::ikt adb." - wir decks t^^' -On- denkt

A<i« <*-&•?« '^ '/jfnM/f .

t\ <a^. *^ Ia xa'A,** *.-?„ ^ bi . . . not musdei.' k readend br diooai, to

2> '« - hw-Mit; — U/g*ih!T ^rHk: mit,— icitt-

/(',. J^*:uuA*fU, Uj t/J^, is r>ii]j QBcd in the aoqnisitiTe sense; Brhaffrti. lo gd^
tarry ^ *^ Irarur/^,

EXERCISE XXTIL

I « WuA«U^ iiup. nvkh, ^Awiaben, — io knatc, is goTenied bj the oompoand con-
juttcty/ti ** uU ob^; it in indifierent whether the imperfect or present sabjonc-

i, fvriiluJiM; UMaic}tffn^ to reason.

0, lA-.ruXfiu, ii/ip jwb.

1 1 ^«), '*Hiilf III*; ** iif rendewd by " the half;" der, die, das halbe.

(6j. '* Zugebnu^ht '^ for ''zogebracht haben." In saboidinate clauses the
auxiliitfy may lie ornitUrL

<<;). •* Could liave don*-.** ** Could have," when followed by the past participle
of aijy \XTb, ij« traiiiikted by the plup. subj. of the verb konnen with the infini-
tive of that verb.

12. The English verb "sit" imports two things, viz., to remain, and to
sit while remaining. B<ith of these must be expressed in Grerman. Thus
likewise ** stand here till," ^., is translated by bleiben Sie hier stehen ; *' lie
here till,** Ac, — bleil>en Kie liegen ; " remain here,'* Ac, — bleiben Sie hier.

1 i. H(f eU^n, — M^j juJilj just now, is the German substitute for the power con-
tained i;i the English progressive form of the verb.

1 6. An, — at, to, in the tense of going after or for a thing, not following ;.
nach, — w/^JT, i.e., following.

1 7 (a). Zumachen, to shut,

(b). Vm brennt, there is afire.

22. " Much," when expressing d^ree, "sehr,-** when expressing quantity,
"vieL"

ORAMHATIOAL 00MMENTARIE8. 131

EXERCISE XXVIII.

1. Mir Bcheint, — to me seems^ for " mir scheint es" which is equivalent to
" es scheint mir."

1 (a). The conjunction '* that " may, as is the case here, be omitted ; but
when it is so omitted the latter clause assumes the form of a principal clause,
e,g.y " Mir scheint, dass Sie des Arbeitens nie miide werden," or ** Mir scheint,
Sie werden des Arbeitens nie miide."

2. Mangel an, — want on, German substantives that are derived from verbs
which take certain prepositions with them, retain this preposition in the sub-
stantive form.

4. "Uebrig behalten." When the English past participle "left" implies
remaining, the adverb Ubrig is required in German ; e.g.^ He has left me
nothing, — £r hat mir iiichta ilhrig gelassen; 1 have nothing left, — Ich habe
nichts iibrig hehilten. " Left " in the former example is active, in the latter
passive, hence the corresponding verb.

5. Sie sind zu dem Schlusse gekommen, — They are to the concltisum come,
means that they have by reasoning or argument arrived at a given conclusion,
not that they have resolved as is intended in the exercise.

1 4. Zu gebrauchen, — to vse, or to he used, therefore nicht zu gebrauchen,- of
no tise. Every German infinitive may be used in an active or passive sense,
e.g., Zimmer zu vermiethen, — Rooms to let or to he let.

15. " Are been," perfect, page 23.

16. "Brauchen," — to want, is, with few exceptions, restricted to human
beings.

EXERCISE XXIX.

1. " Wurde," — was, hecame. The auxiliary verb werden is used when the
action was incomplete at the time referred to, e.g., what was being said ?

EXERCISE XXX.

1. **To belong" (possession), gehoren, with the dative; to belong (apper-
tain), angehbren, with the dative ; to belong (form part of), gehbren zu.

2. " Der Weise." Weise is the adjective weise, — ivise, used as a substantive.
The article der indicates the gender, and therefore renders the addition of
the word Mann unnecessary. The definite article not only defines but
generalises.

2 (h). Nichts als, — nothing hut,

3. Durchaus, — throughout ; durchaus nicht, — hy no means,

6. " Most,'* when used emphatically, but not as the superlative, is rendered
by "hochst."

9. When "he who" is equivalent to "whosoever," it is translated by
" wer."

10. "I should like to go." "To like to," followed by an infinitive, is

132 THE PBACnCAL LINaUIST.

expressed by the finite verb followed by gem, — gladly or wiUingly ; e.g.^ I like
to work, — Ich arbeite gem.

15. " To be," with a past participle, is translated by werden when gene-
rality is expressed ; e.^., The rigging is made of rope, t.6, rigging is usually
made of rope.

16. "Nor" is expressed by auch nicht, — also not, when not preceded by
weder, — neither.

EXERCISE XXXI.

1. Die Zahl, or Anzahl, — the number, might be used, but is not so expressive
as Der Reichthum, — the richness.

2. Mass or Maass.

3 (a). " Bewegen," — to move, means to set in motion.

(b). "To leave alone," when applied to a person, is translated by "gehen
lassen," or " in Buhe lassen ;" when applied to things, by " davou bleiben."

4. Sind Sie geboren, — are you bom. Second person plural of the perfect
indicative. This example shows the difference between the English and
German perfect.

7. Abends, or des Abends, — in the evening ; diesen Abend, — this evening ;
gestem Abend, — la>st evening.

8. Sometimes .... at others 1 i. i i. i

, . ^manchmai .... manchmal.

At one time ... at the other j

10 (a). Am meisten. See page 13, " The word * am,* " Ac.

(6). Tadeln (ace.), tofindfauJU with.

12. " Quantity Flour." See page 11, " Most words," Ac.

15 (a). Arbeiten or studiren.

{h). "Fiir mich." The omission of these two words, which express a
desire for the benefit of the speaker, would give to the sentence the significa-
tion of " Is it possible or conceivable that I can be alone, &c."

EXERCISE XXXII.

4. "Ausser sich," — out ofhersdfj or beside her self.

10. Anfangen, — to begin, — a separable verb ; the second component of
which is fangen, — to caich.

12. Deren, — of them ot their.

13. "A" before "hundred" is not translated in German.
15 (a). Arten Pastiuaken or Arten von Pastinakcn.

(6). Verschieden, — different, may be used or not.

EXERCISE XXXIII.

1. Anwenden, — to employ, derived from wenden, — to turn.

4. Weihrauch streuen, — Incense to strew, — a figurative expression for " to
flatter."

5. Unangenehmes. Every adjective may be iised as an absti*act noun. It

GRAMMATICAL COMMENTARIEA. 133

Is then neuter; e.g.^ unangenehm, — unpleaitarU; Unangenehmes,— an ui^
pUasavU thing or unpleaaarU things.

6 (a). Entbehrt die Mittel or der Mittel.

(6). Wie sie, — as th^ or such as.

8. Abstechen, — to take off^ from stecben, — to sting.

9. Lass, Ac., or, Gebrauche die Peitscbe nicbt zii viel.

EXERCISE XXXIV.

1. " Etwas an Jemandem tadeln," — tofindfavU with.
4. '* Zu/' in this place, indicates the purpose.
7. Mitten, in the sense of amidst, requires the preposition " in.**
9 (a). " Mehr** is required to confine the sense to the occasion.
(6). " As to** must be expressed by the phrase, was . . . anbetri£ft or
anbelangt.

EXERCISE XXXVI.

1 . " Without abusing it.*' " Without,** with a present participle, is always
translated by ohne . . . zu, followed by the infinitive.

EXERCISE XXXVIII.

1 . '^ Paar,'* with a capital, means a couple ; *^ paar,** without a capital, /eio
or a few.

2. Sich schamen, — to he ashamed ; er wiirde sich geschamt haben (second
conditional), — he VHndd have been ashamed.

EXERCISE XL.

"When,** when referring to a previous substantive implying time, is
translated by wo.

1 {b). Angrifikr:. The sign "=*' signifies that the second component of
the word to which it is attached is omitted, it being the same as in the word
following, in this instance, kriege, — tears.

LOlTDOir: B. K. BUB* AVD CO., PBUTYBBB, WIVB OWICB COVBT, B.C.

f

THE

PEACTICAL LINGUIST;

BSINO A 8YST1EM BASED ENTIRELY UPON

Itatttral |prinripks

OF

LEAllNING TO SPEAK, READ, AND WHITE

THE

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

BY

DAVID NASMITH, LL.B., F.S.S.,

OF THE MIDDLE TEMPLE, BARR18TBK-AT-LAW,

Aimoi or
TBB CBXONOMKTKICAt. CHART OF THE BIATOKT OF Bh'CLAND.

VOL. II.

LONDON:
DAVID NUTT, 270, STRAND.

1870. M 'J-I

f

THE

PEACTICAL LINGUIST;

BSINQ A SYSTIEM BASED ENTIRELY UPON

Itatttral |prinriples

OF

LEARNLXG TO SPEAK, READ, AND WHITE

THE

GERMAN LANGUAGE.

BY

DAVID NASMITH, LL.B., F.S.S.,

OF THE MIDDLE TEMPLE, BABEISTBB-AT-LAW,

▲UTMOS OV

TBB CBEONOMETRICAL CHART OF THE HISTORY OF ENGLAND.

VOL. II

LONDON:
DAVID NUTT, 270, STRAND.

1870.

AU righU mwved. VA'^S ^

'A-

. R

PUBLIC LiEI^ArvY

155083A

ASrr T-, LrN"->' AN':

TiLUkK rvLNDAli^N.--

A 10-^4 L

CONTENTS.

PAET IV.

Trb Guocan Exbbcisbs . . . . . . ', 7

Thb Gbbman AiriGDOTsa ; 31

PARTY.

Thb Pbrmanbnt Vogabulabt . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . 69

Tkb Auxiliabt Yocabulaubb . . . . . . 93

PART lY.

GERMAN EXERCISES AND ANECDOTES.

THE EXERCISES.

OEBHAN EXESCISIS AND ANBODOTES.

PART IV.

GERMAN EXERCISES AND ANECDOTES.

THE EXERCISES.

For the explancUion of Grammatical PecuUarUiea^ see Commentaries,

AUFGABE I.

1 Brod und Milch. 2 Das Fleisch und die Sauce. 3 Etwas (Ein wenig)
Branntwein und Wasser. 4 Ich werde Butterbrod esseiL 5 Er und ich
woUen Kafiee trinken. 6 WoUen wir beide Kaffee trinken? 7 Sie hat
Schinken gegessen. 8 Er will Bier trinken. 9 Will Jemand Kaffee trinken t
10 Wir wollen Kase essen. 11 Ich habe davon gegessen. 12 Habe ich
es gegessen) 13 Jemand hat es gegessen. 14 Ich habe etwas gegessen.
15 Hat er irgend etwas gegessen t 16 Wir essen zuweilen. 17 Sie trinken
iJberalL

A UFGABE II.

1 Wir sind durstig. 2 Sind Sie hungrigl Nein. 3 Ist Jemand
hungrigf 4 Ich bin gesattigt 5 WoUen Sie friihstiicken ? Ja, und wir
wollen Coteletten. 6 Da ist die Schiissel. 7 Haben Sie eine Taase (und
Untertasse) ? 8 Will Jemand Fisch essen t 9 loh nehme eine Cotelette
und Bier. 10 Sie wollen Kuchen und Chocolate. 11 Er hat sein
Friihstiick gehabt. 12 Wollen Sie eine Flasche Biert Nein. 13 Haben
Sie keinen Senf ? 14 Hier ist ein Stuhl. 15 Sie sind hungrig, essen Sie
doch. 16 Wir sind durstig und mochten trinken. 17 Sie haben gegessen
and sind gesattigt. 18 Sie haben getrunken und soUten gesattigt sein.
19 Hier sind die Lichter. 20 Ist das Wein? 21 Da ist die Rechmmg.

AUFGABE III

1 Sind Sie nicht hungrig? Wir sind Alle hungrig und durstig.
2 Das Essen ist auf dem Tische. 3 Ich habe diesen Flatz. 4 Haben Sie
Bra ten und Zwiebeln oder kaltes Fleisch imd Salat ? 5 Ist Salat genug da
fur Alle? 6 Essen Sie Fett? Nein, ich bitte um etwas Sauce. 7 Wir
haben keine Servietten. 8 Hier sind Eier. 9 Haben Sie das Sal^fass?
10 Wir bitten um etwas Pastete. 11 Es ist kein Pfeffer da. 12 Ist Obat
da zum Desert? 13 Das ist es. Dort steht es. 14 Haben Sie keins mehr?
Nein, aber ich mochte etwas Torte essen.

8 THE PRACTICAL LINQUI8T.

AUFGABE IV.

1 Darf er Obst haben ? 2 Hier ist die Weinkarte, welchen Wein wollen
Sie 1 3 Wer ist das ? 4 Wesseii Messer ist das 1 5 Dieses Glas war auf
dem Tische. 6 Ist Wildpret auf dem Tische 1 7 Es steht neben Ihnen.
8 Fiir wen haben Sie diesen Thee gekocht? 9 Ich habe ihn fiir Sie gekocht
10 Wo haben Sie ihn gekocht? 11 Haben Sie noch mehr Loffell 12 Ist
«ine Untertasse da ? 13 Soil ich fur Sie Alle machen 1 14 Haben Sie Thee
getrunken ? Ja, wir haben Thee getrunken. Nein, wir haben keinen Thee
getrunken. 15 Ist Jemand hungrig oder durstigf Nein.

AUFGABE V.

1 Bringen Sie mir Hammelfleiach und das Oel. 2 Soil ich Ihnen
Schweinefleisch bringen ? 3 Gefliigel ist nicht mehr da. 4 Was fiir Gem use
werden wir zum Nachtessen haben ? 5 Er Lst durstig, denn er hat gesalzenee
Fleisch zum Friihstiick gegessen. 6 Wollen Sie etwas mageres EAlbfleisch)
7 Die Ziindholzer lagen auf Ihrem Tische. Lagen sie da 1 8 Wollen
Sie es an den Tisch bringen 1 9 Wie 1 10 Trinken Sie den Thee ohne
Zucker 1 11 Thee trinke ich mit Zucker, aber nicht Kaffee. 12 Wohin soil
ich dies tragen? 13 Tragen Sie es in den SpeisesaaL 14 Dies ist zu vieL
15 Mein Stuhl steht neben dem Tische. 16 Dort stehen Stiihle. 17 Das
Essen ist aufgetragen.

AUFGABE YI.

1 Wie bekommen wir etwas zu essen 1 (Wie machen wir's mit unserm
Mittagessen ?) 2 Sie konnen hier zu Mittag eesen; wir haben Fleisch,
Fische, Obst und Wein. 3 Kann ich das thun ? 4 Er sagt mir, sie waren
da gewesen. 5 Ich sage Ihnen, sie wai'en nicht da. 6 Was kann ich Ihnen
gebeni 7 Was kann ich fiir Sie thun 1 8 Ich sass nahe bei ihr am Tische
und Sie auch. 9 Spricht er mit ihrl 10 Das ist ihr Tisch. 11 Wo ist ert
Er ist zu Hause (er ist in seinem Zimmer). 12 Was haben wir mit Hmen
zu thuni 13 Kann ich mit Ihnen sprechen? Ja? 14 Was haben wir zu
thun? 15 Sollte er nicht hier seinf 16 Sagen Sie mir doch, was das istf
17 Ich kann es Ihnen nicht sagen. 18 Wollen Sie mir sagen, was das ist?
19 Becht gem, aber ich kann nicht. 20 Sie konnen doch sprechen, nicht
wahr ? Nein ich kann nicht sprechen.

AUFGABE VII.

1 Es ware mir lieb, wenn Sie dieses thun woUten. 2 Ich mochte es
ihun, aber ich kann nicht. 3 Gtenug, Sie wollen nicht. 4 Sie werden aehen,
dass ich es nicht kann. 5 Sagen Sie mir, ist Jemand hier ? Ja, hier ist
Jemand. 6 Wer ist es ? 7 Was sagen Sie ? 8 Haben Sie mich nicht gefragt,
wer hier ware ? 9 Ja, ich sagte : ich sehe Niemanden hier, denn hier ist

OERMA17 EXERCISES.

Niemand. 10 Ich behaupte, dass Jemand hier ist. 11 Wie kunnen Sie das
sagen ] 12 Trinken Sie ein Glas Wein vor Tisch ? (WoUen Sie ein Glaschen
Wein, ehe wir zu Tisch e gehen 1)

AUFGABE VIII.

1 Sie aind sehr gutig, viel zu giitig. 2 Geh und sieh, wer das ist (Sehen
Sie doch, wer das ist). 3 Ich bin schon eininal gcgangen, aber Niemand
war da. 4 Soil ich Ihnen anderen Wein geben? 5 Ich danke, geben Sie
mir von dem namlichen. 6 Das ist nicht derselbe Wein. 7 Frobiren Sie
ihn doch (Kosten Sie ihn). 8 Wenn ich auch eine Flasche roll tranke, so
kunnte ich nicht sagen, ob es derselbe Wein ist oder nicht. 9 Lassen Sie
mich sehen, ob ich es kann. 10 Dieser Wein ist nicht sohlecht. 11 loh
sage nicht, dass er schlecht ist, aber ich sage, es ist nicht donelbe, und wir
haben denselben (namlichen) Wein verlangt. 12 Diese Weine aind nioht
die rechten (conveniren nicht). 13 Wanim nicht? Es sind nicht die,
die wir bestellt haben. 14 Niemand kann sie von den andem unterscheiden.
15 Sagen Sie Heber, Sie kiinnen es nicht.

AUFGABE IX.

1 Warum haben Sie das gethan ] 2 Weil Sie es mir befohlen haben.
3 Wie geht es Ihneu 1 4 Wie machen Sie das ? 5 Komm und sieh diesen.
6 Glauben Sie, dass er kommen wird 1 7 Wo haben Sie das gefunden ? 8 Sei
still! 9 Ich bin noch hungi'ig. 10 Ich wollte, er ware still (ruhig). 11 Du
hist (Sie sind) immer hungrig oder durstig. 12 Geben Sie Jedem Eins.
13 Jeder kann eines nehmen. 14 Lieben Sie mich? 15 Nein, ich kann
nicht. 16 Wann will er das thun? 17 Ich kaun es nicht sagen. 18 Wo
konnen wir es finden? 19 Sie m.Ichten gem (wollen) wissen, wo man Sie
finden kann. 20 Sol (Wirklich !) 21 Warum? 22 Ich weiss es nicht.
23 Soil ich es ihnen sagen ? 24 Was soil ich von Ihnen denken ?

AUFGABE X.

1 Nun konnen Sie es thun. 2 Weiss er das ? 3 Sie sind zu jung.

4 Dann bin ich es auch. 5 Lege die Servietten auf den Tisch. 6 Stelle die

StUhle an den Tisch. 7 Sie, er und sie konnen auch kommen. 8 Wollen

Sie mir das Esszimmer zeigen ? 9 Sie konnen entweder dieses oder jenes haben.

10 Sie wollen weder dieses noch jenes haben. 11 Was hiire ich? 12 Sie

haben nichts gehiirt. 13 Sie wissen das Gegentheil. 14 Nun weiss ich es,

weil Sie ee sagen. 15 Das ist genug. 16 Glauben Sie? 17 Das ist recht

gut. 18 Sie sprechen zu viel. 19 Ich spreche zu viel, und Sie spreoheii

nicht genug.

Dialog.

1 Haben Sie mein Messer gesehen ?

2 Nein, das babe ich nicht, aber ich kann Ihnen m^^n, wo es ist.

10 THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

3 Wie kunnen Sie mir sagen, wo es ist, wenn Sie es nicht gesehen haben ?

4 Weil ich ihn habe sagen horen, wohin sie es legen sollte.

5 Hat sie gesagt, wohin sie es gelegt hat ?

6 Allerdings, und daher weiss ich, wo es ist

7 Nun denn, so sagen Sie es mir.

8 Recht gem, wenn Sie ihr nicht sagen wollen, dass ich es Ihnen gesagt

habe.

9 Recht gem, wenn Sie es so wUnschen ; aber wanim darf ich es nicht?

10 Weil man nichts mehr inmeiner Gregenwart reden wird, wenn man glaubt,

dass ich alles wiedersage.

1 1 Sie kiinnen es mir zeigen, ohne ein Wort zu sagen.

12 Das ware ganz dasselbe.

13 Es kommt Jemand !

1 4 Wer ist es ?

15 Ich weiss es nicht, lassen Sie einmal sehen, ich glaube nicht. dass es Eincr

von ihnen ist.

16 Granz Recht, es ist keiner von ihnen.

17 Ich wollte Sie sagten mir, wo es ist.

18 Nein, das kann ich nicht ; Sie miissen es selbst suchen.

19 So viel darf ich Ihnen wohl sagen, es ist im Esszimmer, auch noch, dass

es nahe bei dem Tische ist, ob aber darauf oder nicht, das behalte ich
fiir mich.

20 Ich werde es doch finden, wenn Sie es mir auch nicht sagen wollen und

werde den Andern sagen, was ich von Ihnen gehort habe, und das ist
grade sa schlecht, als ob Sie mir Alles gesagt hatten.

21 Nun da ich Sie kenne, werde ich Ihnen nichts wieder sagen.

AUFGABE XI.

1 Haben Sie etwas, woraus ich eine Schiirze machen kann ? 2 Ich habe
nichts ab das. 3 Was ist das ? 4 Ich habe mehr fiir meinen Hut gegeben,
als Sie fiir den Ihrigen. 5 Wirklich] 6 Wollen Sie diesen Knopf an
mein Hemd nahen ? 7 Ja, wenn Sie mir etwas geben wollen, ihn
anzunahen. 8 Ihr Mantel hat keine Leiste. 9 Das kunnte ich Ihnen auch
gesagt haben. 10 Einen Augenblick ! welche Broche wiinschen Sie?
II Irgend eine. 12 Sind meine Stiefel zum Ausgehen gut genug?
13 Stellen Sie sich nicht dahin, das diirfen Sie nicht. 14 Was wollen Sie
mir fiir mein Armband geben? 15 Ich muss mehr haben. 16 Wie
viel wollen Sie? (Was wiinschen Sie?) 17 Das werden Sie nicht von mir
bekommen. 18 Kleiden Sie sich zum Essen an? 19 Nein, wir kleiden una
aus. 20 WaB sagen Sie ?

AUFGABE XIL
1 Wir iragen nie Stumpfbiinder. 2 Niemand tragt noch Crinolinen.

GERMAN EXERCISES. 11

3 Ihr Bock soUte nicht abgetragen sein. 4 Es ist keine Schnalle an
diesem Halsband. 5 Warum tragen Sie ein Netz? 6 Weil fast Alle es
tragen. 7 Was fiir eine grosse Kette Sie habeu? 8 Was sagen Sie zu
meinem Frack? 9 Kommen Sie hierher, ich kann ihn nicht recht sehen.
10 Sie werden in Ihrem Kragen versinken. 11 Wie so? Ist er zu gross ?
12 Er ist beinahe gross genug fiir zwei. 13 Nun kcinnen Sie gehen.
14 Man kann Sie nie finden, wenn man Sie braucht. 15 Also braucht
man mich nie, wenn man mich finden kann.

AUFGABE XIII.

1 Dieses Kleid ist ein wenig zu gut. 2 Kann etwas zu gut sein ?
3 Ich brauche Flannell, wollen Sie mir welchen zeigen ] 4 Ich habe nie einen
Schlafirock getragen. 5 Diese Unterhosen und Nachthemden sind gut genug.
6 Wir haben Band genug, aber wir brauchen Taschentiicher. 7 Von dieaen
kann ich keine brauchen. 8 Sind Ihnen diese recht? 9 Lassen Sie mich
noch einige sehen, ich will es Ihnen dann sagen. 10 Wenige Kaufleute konnen
Ihnen so viele, und keiner kann Ihnen mehr vorlegen, als wir. 1 1 Wovon
sind diese Ohiringe gemacht? 12 Ich kann nie meine Manschetten finden,
wenn ich sie bi*auche. 13 Sagen Sie selbst, ob ich nicht weniger Bediirfnisse
habe, als Sie ?

AUFGABE XIV.

1 Ich habe einen Hut nothig. 2 Dieser passt mir nicht. 3 Vielleicht
passt dieser. 4 Nein, bitte, suchen Sie mir einen etwas grosseren. 5 Dieser
ist zu gross ; wenn er ein wenig kleiner ware, so wurde er passen. 6 Haben
Sie je eine solche Kopfbedeckung gesehen wie diese ? 7 Was sagen Sie zu
dieser Jacke 1 8 Sie ist zu lang ; ich mag sie nicht leiden. 9 Sind Taschen
darin ? 10 Meine Sachen sind unter den Ihrigen ; kann ich sie herausnehmeni
11 Ist diese Unterjacke nicht von Flannell? 12 Was haben Sie mit meinen
Gummischuhen gemacht ? 13 Ich habe sie zu Ihrem Muffgelegt. 14 Brauchen
Sie ein Halstuch? 15 Nein; aber ich habe Handschuhe sehr nothig.
16 Wollen Sie sich diese Schntirbrust ansehen? 17 O ja, bitte.

AUFGABE XV.

1 Wollen Sie so gefallig sein, mir meine Schuhe und meinen U^berrock zu
bringen ? 2 Ist es wahr, dass er ein gutes Leben fiihrt ? 3 Obgleich ich ihn
nicht leiden mag, muss ich doch sagen, dass das wahr ist. 4 Das wird sich
zeigen. 5 Wie viel Uhr ist es ? 6 Konnen Sie mir eine Schnur finden ? 7 Ich
wiU es versuchen, aber ich bezweifle es. 8 Es ist doch zu arg, mir meine
Hemden ohne Knopfe zuriickzuschicken. 9 Wie viel kostet diese Brille?
10 Das ist zu viel ; denn ich habe auch eine Uhr nothig, und werde nicht genug
haben, wenn ich so viel dafiir gebe. 1 1 Wollen Sie mir meinen Ring Buriick

12 THE PRACTICAL UNOUIST.

geben, oder werde ich Sie dasni zwingen miiHsen ? 12 Ihr Unterrock ist in
lang fur Ihr Kloid. 13 Wird dieter Ring fiir Ibreu Shawl paaaeut
1 4 GeVien Sie inir meiiie HoAe iind ineiue Weste.

AUFGABE XVI.

1 Haben Sie viel Geld ? 2 Wir habeii mehr, als wir braiichen ; jedoch ist
68 l>ei»er, zu Wei zu lial>eu hU zu wenig. 3 Ich hoffe, wir werden es
hinreichend finden ; aber, iinter uuh gesagt, ieh glaube es nicht. 4 Was fiir
schi'me PantofTeln Sie haben ! 5 Ja ; Sie wlssen, wer sie gemacht hat, nicht
wahr ? 6 Wenn Sie gegen inich siud, wenle ich es nicht wieder versuchen.
7 Nun denn, was sagen Sie dazu? 8 Sie lial>en ganz Recht, das ist main
Regenschirm. 9 Habe icli nicht immer Recht? 10 Wollen Sie Socken oder
Striinipfe tragen ? 11 Was soil ich mit Schuhen ohne Schnurriemen thun ?

12 Nach meinem Greschmack hat sie zu viel Sammt an ihrem Kleide.

13 Sie haben zu viele Manschettenknopfe. 14 Ist es nicht gut, Hoffiiung zu
haben Y 15 Allerdings.

AUFGABE XVII.
1 Was wird Ihr (Herr) Vater sagen ? 2 Er wird nichts sagen, aber meine
Mutter wird vielleicht etwas sagen, wenn sie es sieht. 3 Wie viele Briider
und Schwestem haben Sie ? 4 Wir hal>en zwei Briider und drei Sch western.
5 Mein Onkel will nicht glauben, dass Sie mir Erlaubniss gcgeben haben,
meine Tante zu besuchen. 6 Ich danke, ich bin Ihnen sehr verbundeu.
7 Ich bin uberzeugt, mein Neffe ist in Verlegenheiten. 8 Beunruhigen Sie
fiioh nicht ; es geht ihm ganz gut. Ihre Nichte versichert es mir. 9 Das
glaubt sie, aber sie weiss es nicht gewiss. 10 Meine Tochter ist voll Hoffnung.
11 Sol (WirkHchI) 12 Mein Solin hat viele Bedurfnisse.

AUFGABE XVIII.

1 Ich will Ihnen sagen, wenn Sie Ihr Versprechen nicht haiten, so wird
Niemand Ihnen glauben. 2 Gut, ich habe immer die Absicht, es zu thun.
3 Was fehlt Ihnen jetzt 1 4 Seine Liebste will nicht mit ihm sprechen, das
ist Alles. 5 Waruni nicht ? G Ich hiJrc, sie hat einen anderen Liebhaber,
und ich bin sehr froh dariiber, denn ich mag sie nicht leideu. 7 Glauben
Sie, (buss Grossvater und Grossmutter kommen werden? 8 Das ist mehr
als wahrscheinlich. Ich kann sagen, ich glaube es gewiss, das heiast, wenn
sie konuen. 9 Ich vei-stehe Sie recht gut, mein Freund; Sie wollen es
meinem Vormunde sagen. Ganz gut, aber es ist nicht notliig, da mein
Curator es weiss, und das ist genug. 10 Ich zorwerfo mich nie mit meiner
Magd ; deaswegen ruft sie. 1 1 Denken Sie sich einmaJ, ich habe fiinf
MiindeL

AUFGABE XIX.
1 Wie viele Oonunis haiten Sie? 2 Ungefahr zwanzig. 3 Ich bin

OKRaiAN EXiSBOIBCS. 13

neunzehn und mein Schwager ist achtjsehn Jahre alt. 4 Was sagen Sie
dazu? 5 loh weisa niohts davon, ich bokiimmere inich uicht urn andere
Leute. 6 Meiu Hei*r ut einer von elf Prinzipaleii. 7 Ihr Herr hat zwulf
Biener, nicht wahr? 8 Habeu Sie an Ihren AsBocie geschrieben und ihn
um seine Meinung ge^gt ? 9 Ich bitte um Verzeihnng, ich habe ihm nicht
geschiieben, aber ich hatte es liingst thun sollen. 10 Haben Sie die Ncjuigkeit
iiber meiuen neuen Associe gehurt? 11 Ihr Schwiegervater Iiat mir ctwas
daron gesagt, aber ioh glaitbe es nicht. 1 2 Es ist ganz wahr, denn mein
Schwager hat es gesehen. 13 Was fiir Buolier lesen Sie]

AUFGABE XX.

1 Welchen Weg sollen wir einschlagen t 2 Dies ist der angenehmste*
3 Ich gehe zuruck, wollen Sie niit mir kommen oder nicht ? 4 Wir wollen
unterwegs bei Ihrem Vater vorsprechen, um seine Antwort zii holen.
5 Bleil>en Sie hier, bis wir kommen. G Das kann ich nicht, denn Jemand
wartet auf mich, und desshalb kann ich nicht bleiben. 7 Sollen wir jetzt
gehen 1 8 Noch nicht. 9 Was fiir eino Antwort soil ich ihm geben 1
10 Sagen Sie, was Sie wollen. 11 Ist es das er.ste, zweite oder dritte ?
12 Ich brauche ein und zwanzig von diesen und vier und vierzig von jenen,
das Bind fdnf und sechszig im Ganzeu. 13 Was bedeutet alles dieses 1
14 Ich will es Ihnen nachher sagen. 15 Elonnen Sie warten, bis ich gehe,
oder mlissen Sie jetzt gehen 1 16 Ich kann warten, wenn es nicht lange
wiihrt ; Sie machen zu lange, Sie sagten, Sie wiirden nicht lange machen.

Anecdote.
KUufheit ein^ Affen»

Der Bediente eines Arztes, welcher eine Zeit lang in Indien lebte, nahm
einen jungen Affen von seiner Mutter und brachte ihn in sein Zelt, wo er
Borgfiiltig gepflegt wurde ; aber die Mutter war iiber den Verlust Dires
Jungen so untrostlich, dass sie jammemd in der Niihe des Zeltes verblieb.

Der Arzt befahl daher seinem Diener, das Junge seiner Mutter zurUck-
zugeben ; dicser that es, und die Mutter nahm es mit sich hinweg. Aber nur
wenige Tage nachher brachte sie ihr Junges wieder und legte es in das Zelt,
ging wieder hinaus und starb.

Man entdeckte nachher, dass sie liber und iiber zerkratzt war, und
glaubte, dass die iibrigen Affen, als sie mit ihrem Jungen zuriickkehi'te, sie
nicht mehr uuter sich hatten dulden wollen.

AUFGABE XXI.

1 Quten Morgen, Guten Abend, Gute Nacht. 2 Wie befinden Sie sich
heute 1 3 Ich befinde mich sehr wohl. 4 Wie befindet sich Ihr Herr Vater 1
5 Er befindet sich nicht sehr wohl. 6 Das thut mir sehr leid. 7 Hoflfentlich.
8 Ich muss gehen. Auf Wiedersehn. 9 Empfehlen Sie mich Ihrem Herm
Bruder. 10 Gbiissen Sie Ihre Familie von mir. 11 Mit Ihrer Erlaubniss.

14 TUB PRACTICAL LINOtllBT.

1'2 WuUoii Sio iliu Qiite babes imd. . . . WoUeu Sis so gut §em
iinil. . . . leli bill lliiien aebr verbunden. Ich danke Ibnen. 18 E*
tliiit inir li-iil, (liuw ich Ihiien xo Wele Muhe mache. 14 Bitte. 15 8ie nnd
Mthr KUti|{. IG Icli vvmchere Sie, daHB. . . . Ich bhte am Veneiliniig.
17 iJitU).

AUFGABE XXII.
1 Icb vcrninwho Ilinrn. Unas ... 2 Wie ! 3 Was tneinen Sie !
4 h-h mijto Ihiu'ti JH, ft Ich Mge nein. 6 Ich vrass oicht, waa Sie meineo
(rvi^oi wolleii). 7 Ut t'H guwiati, dass ... 1 8 Olanben Sie eal
V lull bill dcMcuui ^'wisti (diivou tibeneugt). 10 Wirklich ! Ist ee mbglicbt
1 1 NatUrlich 1 l><u> vvratcht Mcb von selbet 12 Welcfae Schande ! Schade I
13 Boiuu Sit) ruhig 1 Ich bin nicht in guter Laune (Ich bin nicht gut
gulauiit). 14 li'h l>iu sehr froh dariiber. Was aoU man thnn ] 15 Ich
vruiwi iiioht, wan ich thuu soil. 16 Meine Meinung ist, dass. . . .
17 Wai muiiieu Sin dtixu I

AUFGABE XXIII.
1 Lasiien Sie uns daa ihnn. 2 Ich bitte urn Teneibnng. 3 loh habe
guteii ApiKitit 4 Was wolW Sie Msen? 9 Ich habe mit vielem Appetite
(ku Mittag) gi^cBwn. 6 Wullen Sie ein Qlas Wein trinl^en) 7 Oibt en

etwim Keaeat 8 Ich habe nichts gehiirt. 9 Wie wissen Sie daal 10 Wie
lango ixt M her, daas er Ihnen nicht geschrieben hat I 11 Wohin gehen
Sio ) 12 Ich gehe uach Uause. Wolles Sie mit gehen? 13 Welchen Weg
wollcii wir nehnien 1 14 Welchen Sie vollen. Wie ee Ihnen geTallig iit.
(Wiu Sie wollun). 15 Iiit Heir 6. cu Hauaet 16 Er ist auegegangen.
1 7 Wiaaon Sio, wanu er zuriick konmit ) 1 8 £r geht zu Ihnen.

AUFGABE XXIV.
1 Ich uiuchte mit Ihneu sprechen. 2 Was ist's ] 3 Was steht cu (Ihren)
DioiiHtuul 4 Kiireu Siet Verstehen Sie micht S Wanun antworten
Sie niir uichtl 6 S|irechei) Sie kein Deutsch 1 7 Selur wenig, meiit Herr.
8 Wcr hat Ihnen das geaagtl 9 Was wollen Sie ngeni 10 Wie nennen
Sioihul 11 Daa heiaat . . . , 12 Wie alt aiiid Siet 13 Ich hielt Sie fur Slter.
14 Wio viel Uhr ist es I 15 Ea ist Ein Uhr. Es ist lehn Minuten vor
twt'i. Ea ist oiu und iwanzig Minaten nach dreL 1 C Was fur Wetter habeii
wirt 17 Es ist schlechlea, triibes, schouea, neblig*, r^jnichtes, rauhes
Wettor.

AUFGABE XXV.
klopft (Efl klopft). Geh und sieh, wer da isL Geh und offne
2 Bitte, setzen Sie stch. Gieb f^u (Madam). . . einen
4 Wessbalb sind Sie so eilig I 5 Ich

UEttMAN EXEAClSEfl. 15

habe viel zu thun. 6 Haben Sie gefriihstuckt '? 7 Noch nicht 8 Tiinken
Sie Thee oder Kaffee? 9 Ich ziehe den Kaffee vor. 10 Wann (Urn welche
Zeit) esfien wir heute zuMittag] 11 Erwarteu Sie Gesellschaft 1 12 Ich
erwarte Herm B, 13 Was soil ich Ihnen vorlegen 1 14 Welches StUck
haben Sie am liebsten ? 15 Meine Herreu, bedienen Sie sich. 16 Darf ich
Ihnen G^miise geben 1 17 Hast Du alles gebracht, was zum Thee gehort 1
(Hast Du das Theegeschirr hereingebtacht ]) 18 Warte eiu wenig. 19 Ganz
recht. 2P So ist's gut (Das geniigt). 21 Das macht nichts (schadet nichts).
Horen Siel 22 Erwahnen Sie's nicht. 23 Wo kaufen Sie esl 24 Man
verkauft es iiber dem Wege. 25 Der wievielste ist heute 1 26 Womit ent-
schuldigte er sich, als Sie ihn dessen beschuldigten ? 27 Beabsichtigen Sie,
ihn gerichtlich zu belangen 1 (Haben Sie vor, ihn gerichtlich zu belangen ?)

Anecdote.
Miitterliebe.

Cornelia, die Mutter der Gracchen, widmete sich nach dem Tode ihres
Gatten, der sie mit zwolf Kindem hinterUess, einzig und allein der Pflege
ihrer Familie. • Von den zwolfen erreichten nur drei das ein und zwanzigste
Jahr : eine Tochter Sempronia, welche sie dem zweiten Scipio Africanus
vermahlte, und zwei Sohne, Tiberius und Cajus, die eine so sorgfaltige
Erziehung erhielten, da;^ sie nach der Meinung Aller, die sie kannten,
derselben ihl« Tugenden verdankten.

Sehr schou ist die Antwort, die sie einer Campanerin in Bezug auf ihre
Kinder gab. Diese, die grossen Beichthum und nicht weniger Pmnkliebe
besasfl, breitete alle ihre Juwelen vor ihr aus und wunschte dann, die ihrigen
zu sehen. Bel der Zuriickkunft ihrer Sohne, welche grade aus waren, sagte
Cornelia zu der Campanerin : '* Dies sind meine Juwelen und das einzige
Gkschmeide, das ich bewundere."

AUFGABE XXVI.

1 "Welches sind Ibre Bedingungen ] 2 Unter welchen Bedingungen
wollen Sie es thun ? 3 Sie sollten nicht so verstimmt sein. 4 Was kann
ich dafiir? 5 Wie weich (sanft) dieses Thier mch anfuhlt. 6 Ja ee ist
so weich wie Seide. 7 Sind Sie allein 1 8 Dieser Vogel bildet meine
ganze (einzige) Gesellschaft. 9 Sie gehen zu rasch. 10 Gehen Sie nicht so
schnell. 11 Hier ist ein Geschenk fiir Sie. 12 Waren Sie zugegen, als sie
es sagten? 13 Erlauben Sie, dass ich Ihnen meine Schwester vorstelle.
14 Gewiss, Sie irren sich. 15 Das haben wir uns immer gedacht. 16 Wollen
Sie mit mir kommen. 17 Woliin sollen wir sie stelleni 18 An diese Wand.
19 Wie langsam Sie sind! 20 Meinen Sie 9 21 Ich arbeite viel schneller
als Sie. 22 Man wird heute Abend im Ballsaale tanzen ; folglich werde ich
in meinem Schlafzimmer bleiben. 23 Bis heute habe ich nie einen Lufbballon
gesehen ; er sieht ganz wie eine Kugel aus. 24 Dient das Gebiss nicht dazu,
das Thier langsamcr gehen zu lassen ? 25 Wozu dient diese Rinde 1 26 Ich
kenne den Nutzen dei'selben nicht. 27 Solche Sachen verstehe ich nicht.

16 THB PRACTICAL LIKOU18T.

28 Kbnnen Sie Behen, ob jene Bcirke einen Anker fiilirt oder mcht)

29 Wollen Sie die Schubkarre vom Ufer wegnehmen iind sie sammt der
Axt in's HauB schaffenl 30 Was halten Sie vom Schaclispiell 31 Das
werde ich Ihnen in einer andem Aufgabe sagen.

AUFGABE XXVII.

1 Es Bcbeint mir (ea kommt mir vor), al8 ob Sie nicht wussten, waa
Sie wollen (Mir scheint, Sie wissen nicht, was Sie wollen). 2 Der Schein triigt
3 Aus welchein Qrunde thaten Sie das? 4 Er niacht sehr richtige SchliuBe.
6 Ich woUte, Sie lernten logisch denken. 6 K*^ ist weit leichter, zu tadeln,
als es besser zu machen. 7 Sind das nicht schone Gegenstandef 8 Wir
alle spielen gem, obgleich der Eine auf diese, der Andere auf jene Weiae
spielt. 9 Man wird das iiie zugeben, wenn Sie nicht selir gute Griinde dafur
geben konnen. 10 Erlauben Sie niir, Ihnen zu sagen, dass es auf diese Wei»
unmoglich ist. (Erlauben Sie, dass ich Ihnen sage, so lasst es sich nicht than.)
1 1 In der halben Zeit, die Sie dariiber zugebracht, hatten Sie es schon thnn
konnen, wenn Sie es richtig angefangen hatten. 12 Bleiben Sie hier sitsen,
bis ich wieder komme. 13 Legedich nieder. (Le^en Sie sich.) 14 Was fiir
ein schones Boot geht da so eben under die Briicke ! 15 Wie garstig, eine
Wanze auf einem Kissen im Spcisesaal zu finden ! 16 Der Ochse dort gdbtan
die Gerste in der Scheune. 17 Macht das Thor zu, auf dem Felde brennt es.
18 Haben Sie je solch einen Ast gesehen ? 19 Wovon, glauben Sie, ist diese
Kajiite gemacht? 20 Aus Ziegelsteinen ? 21 Wer hat je von einer
gemauerten Kajiite gehort ? 22 Alle Thiere bediirfen des Zugels^<aber keines
so sehr, wie der Mensch.

AUFGABE XXVIII.

1 Mir scheint, Sie werden des Arbeitens nie miide. 2 Sie haben Becht,
NiohtB ermiidet mehr, als der Mangel an Beschafbigung. 3 Wir haben
einen ruhigen Abend verlebt. 4 loh habe all mein Geld verloren ; ich habe
nichts ubrig behalten. 5 Sie haben sich entschlossen, heute von hier
wegzugehen ; das ist die Folge Ihres Bathes. 6 Ich bin andrer Meinung.
(Ich stimme nicht mit Ihnen Uberein.) 7 Der Unterschied besteht darin,
dass ich Reoht habo, und Sie nicht. 8 Darf ich die Summe auf Sie ziehent

9 I(>h Weiss nicht, ob ich den Wechsel acceptiren kann, wenn Sie es thnn.

10 Sie geben sich fiir mehr aus, ab Sie sind. 11 (trade das habe loh. eben
gesagt; war es nicht sehr ungerecht, es zuthuni 12 Das kann ich nicht
annehmen, denn Sie sind immer gerecht. 13 BoUen ^vir in einer Droschke
zur City-Kirchc fahren, o<ier ziehen Sie uosere eigone Ka^ielle vor ! 14 XJnser
Pferd ist weder fiir unsero Karre noch fiir die Kutsche zu gebrauchen ; denn
es hat sein Hufeisen verloren. 15 Sind Sie je in dem Chisthofe nahe beim
Kanale gewesen 1 16 Jene Hecke sollte mehr Gebiisch haben. 17 Was
beabsichtigen Sie mit diesem Gras zu thun? 18 Sehen Sie einmal die

GERMAN EXERCISES. 17

Wolken an, ich glaube, wir werden R^^en haben. 19 1st es Ihnen nie in
den Sinn gekommen, dass unsere Zimmerdecken viel hiibscher aussehen
wiirden, wenn sie hoher wiircn t

AUFGABE XXIX.

1 Sie horchten in der HofTnung, zu hiiren, was gesproclien wurde. 2 Selten
horen Horcher viel Gutes iiber sich selbst. (" Der Horcher an der Wand hort
seine eigne Schand.") 3 Es thut mir leid, Ihren Kummer so schwer zii finden.
4 Niemand ist so schwach wie der, der nicht Nein sagen kann, wonn er es
auf der Zunge hat. 5 Stark, starker, am starksten ist nur das Umgekehrte
Tou schwach, schwacher, am schwachsten. 6 Niemand kann in AUem
ausgezeiehnet sein. 7 Er ist ein grosser Kenner von dergleichen. 8 Nur
mit der Zeit und nur dnrch Ausdauer kann man zu Auszeichnung gehmgen.
9 £ine Stunde vor uns scheint lang, eiiie hinter uns scheint nur ein Augenblick ;
wir erwarten yiel von dereinen und finden nur wenig in derandem. 10 Wir
gUuben uns im Stande, zu beurtheilen, ob dies oder jenes uns zusage oder
nicht, aber es ist moglich, dass das Urtheil Anderer viel richtiger ist.
1 1 Weder Trottoir noch £<infa8sung findet sich vor dem Opemhause. 1 2 Wozu
ist der Graben um das Denkmal) 13 Sie diirfen kein Getreide in den
Keller bringen, es ist dort so feucht. 14 Mich daucht, er ist auf Lehm gebaut.

15 'Rin Mann ist im Hofe mit Ihrem Reisesacke ; soil ich ihn hereinrufen 1

16 Das Fallen der Blatter (des Laubes) sollte uns an die Yerganglichkeit des
Menschen erinnem ; beide kommen von der Erde und miissen dahin
zuriickkehren. 17 Die Kuh ist eins der niitzlichsten Thiere. 18 Man
konnte die Dampfmaschine das Thor nennen^ welches aus der alten Zeit in
die neue fiihrt.

AUFGABE XXX.

1 Die Jugend hat ihre Geniisse (ihre Freuden) ebenso gut, wie das Alter ;
jene gehoren der Hoffiiung, diese den Betrachtungen an. 2 Der Weise
verachtet nichts als verschuldete Mangelhafbigkeit. 3 Es giebt manche
Fragen, die sich durchaus nicht leicht entscheiden lassen. 4 Jeder muss seine
Handlungsweise unter den Verhiiltnissen bewundert haben. 6 Der Fall
eines Ungerechten wird am wenigsten bemitleidet. 6 Es ist hochst ungereclit,
die Handlungen eines Menschen zu beurtheileu, ohne die Umstande in
emste Erwsigung zu ziehen. 7 Ich werde meine Massregeln damach trelTen.

8 Wer seine Gedanken verbirgt, verbirgt manchmal seine Unwissenheit.

9 Wer einen bestimmten Plan hat, hat eine bestimmte Beschlifbigung und
fiihlt daher nie Mangel an Beschaftigung. 10 Ich ginge gem auf das
Verdeck, aber es ist zu nebelicht 11 Wissen Sie, wie viele Docks es in
London giebt? 12 Ich vermuthe der Ausdruck "ganzgut" bedeutet, daan
Alles in guter Ordnung ist. 13 Jener Bauemhof ist ein schones Gut.
14 Wanim sollten gute Menschen mit Schafen verglichen werden und
flchlechte mit Biicken, da doch das eine Thier nicht schlechter ist als das

B

THE PKACnCAL LraOUIST.

Ar.-krrfr? Ua^ L$t ganz richtig; aber man muss bedefnken, das es eine
M^tApfier b*t, and man muss uicht vergeaaen, daaa ein figiiriicher AnadriM^
ticLt ••■'Jrtlich verstanden werden darf. 15 Das Takelwerk wird to«
?f trick *-rj ^f-macht, aber wovon ist das Steuemider verfertigtl 16 Ei"
>If:TL<-}i ohnf KfrrmtnLsse ist wie ein Haus ohne Dach, ihm selber von kemem
Nutzen und auch Andem nicht.

AUFGABE XXXI.

1 Der Reichthum unserer Ideen hangt von der Mannigfidtigkeit tmserer
Kcnntni.*iAe aK 2 Niemand verliert iLidureh, dass er voiles Maas und Gewicht
giebt. 3 Jemand hat nieuie Sachen in Unordnung gebracht ; ich wollte, man
blie>>e rbi von. 4 Wo sind 8ie geboren ? 5 Sind Sie von Sinnen I 6 Kommen
8ie und fwtzen Sie sich neben mich. 7 Womit beschaftigen Sie sich gewohn-
lich doA Abends ? 8 Ich liebe die Lcctiire ebcn so sehr als Yergniigniigen nnd
b?"ilie daher manchmal zu Hause nnd gehe manchmal an& 9 Was halten Sie
von den Gnindsatzen Ihres Principals t 10 Was ich am meisten an xmsenn
Chef zu tadeln habe, ist, dass er wenig Kopf hat. II Was macht der Mann
im Walde mit einer Lampef 12 Was fur eine Menge Mehl ist anf dem
Miihlboden ! 13 Da Lst eine l^Iaus nnter dem Stroh auf der Plattform.
14 Ich weisses gewLss. (Ich bin davon iiberzeugt) 15 Es ist unmoglich, in
der Bibliothek zu arbeiten ; man spricht (plaudert) da zu viel ; kann ich im
Wohnzimmer ftir mich allein seint 16 Was Ziehen Sie fiir eine weite Reise
vor, ein Segelschiff oder ein Dampfechiff? 17 Das ist schwer zu sagen, jedes
hat seine Vorziige ; jedoch im Cknzcn genommen, glaube ich, gebiihrt der Yorzug
dem Dami)n)ootc. 18 Man kann sich kaum etwas Angenehmeres denkcD,
als Abends nel>en einem Springbninnen zu sitzen. 19 Sie sagen, Flohe und
Mause konnen von keinem Nutzen sein ; das mag sein ; aber meine Meinung
ist, dass diesel1)en mehr, als wir denken, zur Reinlichkeit unser selbst und
unserer Wohnungen beitragen, indem sie uns zur Sorgfalt zwingen.

AUFGABE XXXII.

1 Man scliien ziemlich geneigt, es zu begiinstigen. 2 Mag aein, dass er
sehr Icidet, aber doch gewiss nicht mehr, als er h&tte erwarten konnoL
3 Wir konnen uns beinahe an Alles gewohnen. 4 Sie ist ganz ausser sich ;
sic muss sich fassen. Buhe wird ihr am meisten wohlthun. 5 Zum klar^
Yerstandniss einer Sache gehort eine klare Auseinandersetziing, nnd das
Umgckelirte ist eben so wahr. 6 Der morgige Tag ist Etwas^ nm das der
Weise sich nicht bckiimmert, und auf den er nichts verachiebt^ das heate
gethan werden kann. 7 Es scheint mir, als ob Ihre Jahre Ihren Neigongen
weit voraus sind. 8 Blumen und Fliegen erscheinen zu gleicher Zeit ; so geht
es im Lcbcn. 9 Giebt es nicht mehr grosse Schraubendampfer mit zwei
Schloten aLs mit einem ? 10 Wollen Sie mir den Ge£eJlen thun, das Fenster
zuzumachen 1 Es fangt an, zu hageln. 11 Gut gehaltene Kiespfiide erhohen

GERMAN EXERCISES. 19

sehr die Schonheit eineH Oartens. 12 Es ist kaum moglich. den Werth der
Eisenhahnen fiir ein Yolk, oder deren Werthlosigkeit fiir die Actionare zu
liberHchatsen. 1 3 Man sagt, Batten ieben hundert Jahre ; ist das moglich 1
14 Die Weizengarbe bringt dem Dorfe mehr wahrcs Vergnligen, als das
Theater der Stadt. 15 Wissen Sic, wie vielc Arten PastiQaken es giebt, und
▼elche man fUr die beste halt? 16 Von alien Wurzeln ist die am schwie-
rigsten za erlangende die sogenannte Wurzel alles XJebels— das Creld.

AUFGABE XXXIII.

1 "Wende deine Zeit niitzlich an" hat eine Bedeutung, wenn wir fiir
unsere Arbeit bezahlt werden ; aber wir soUten wolil bedenkeii, dass die
Bezahlung unserer Arbeit nicht bloas m (Jeld bestcht. 2 Konnten wir immer
das Ende Yoraussehen, so wUrden wir oft gar nicht anfangen. 3 Als ich Sie
das letzte Mai bat, mir etwas Geld zu Icihen, sagten Sie, cs ware Ihr Letztes.
Jetzt sagen Sie wieder dasselbe. Wie viel " Letztes " haben Sie denn eigentlich 1
4 Die Menschen miethen sich allerlei. £inige miethen sich Andere, nm
sich Weihrauch streuen zu lasscn. 5 Ein gutcs Gcdachtniss ist nicht immer
ein Segen, z. R (zum Beispiel) die Erinnerung an Unangenehmes und
besonders an die Fehler Anderer. 6 Keiner, der gesimde Beine hat, entbchrt
die Mittel, sich eben so hohe Greniisse zu verschafTen, wie sie dem Beichsten
zaganglich sind. 7 Alle Sterblichen sind dem Missgcschicke unterworfen.
Aber das grosste XJngliick, wie man glaubt, ist : daa Ungliick nicht in rechter
Weise ertragen zu konnen. 8 Nimm eine Hcugabel und stich etwas Heu
vom Heuschober ab. 9 Lass deine Peitsche in Buhe, wenn du bergan fahrst.

10 Das Pferd hat irgend etwas am Hufe; es kann nicht recht aufbreten.
£s wird gewias noch fallen, und wenn es f allt, wird es die Deichsel zcrbrechen.

11 Welche Nachlassigkeit, den Spaten auf der Treppe liegen zu lasscn; es
konnte Jemand dariiber ge&llen sein und sich verletzt habcn. 12 Ich glaube,
mehr Menschen besuchen blTentliche Yemiigungsplatze, um gcsehen zu wcrdcn
als um selber zu sehen ; denn so Wenige pflegen aufzustehen, um das herrlichste
aller Schauspiele, — den Sonnenaufgang zu sehen.

AUFGABE XXXIV.
1 Man soUte denken, dass diejenigen, welche immer etwas an der Gesell-
schaft zu tadeln haben, ganz vergessen, dass sie selber einen Theil davon bilden.
(Diejenigen, welche immer etwas an der Gesellschaft zu tadeln fiuden, miissen
ganz vergessen, etc.) 2 Trotz Allem, was man iiber den Werth des Geldes
sagen hort, und der wirklich gross ist, sollte doch Weisheit unbedingt das
Hauptziel unsers Lebens scin. 3 Welcher Gegenstand, dcnkcn Sie, ist
gewohnlich den Damen am angenehmsten ? Ein guter Heirathsantrag. 4 Der
Hauptvortheil, die Wissenschaft zur Freimdin zu haben, besteht darin, dass
man immer etwas Neues in ihr entdecken kann. 5 So lange du noch iment-
schlossen bist, schicke deinen Brief nicht ab. 6 Sie werden Iliren Weg gut
sehen konnen ; denn es ist heller Mondschein ; der Mond ist zeitig aufg^;angcn.

b2

20 THE PRACTICAL LDTGUIST.

7 Ich bin schr gem auf einem Berge, mitten in einem Oewitter. 8 Der
Omnibus kommt sehr spat (bleibt sehr lange aus). 9 Wir werden nicht mehr
durch den Park kommen kiinnen ; denn der Nebel f angt au, zu steigen, und
wir werden unsern Weg verliuren ; was die Marschen anbetrifft, die aind voll
Schlamm und kleinen Pfiitzen. 10 Der Affe ist mit dem Hafer auf den Mast
geklettert. 11 Da wir nun offenbar einen binreicbenden Wortervorrath
baben, um etwas mebr scbreiben zu konnen, ais bisber versucbt worden ist,
so gedenken wir, die Ubrigen fuufzebn Aufgaben zu kurzen Skizzen zu
verwenden, die, wie wir boffen, niitzlicben StofT zu Stjliibungen ao wohl, als
zum weiteren Nacbdenkcn darbieten werden.

AUFGABE XXXV.
1 Ursacbe und Wirkung sollten nut einander betrachtet werden ; denn die
eine kann man obne die andere nicbt versteben. 2 Die Folge deines Betragens
wird sein, dass du dir alle deine Freunde entfremdest. 3 Wie oft nebmen wir
bin und geniessen, obne einen einzigen Gedanken an den grossen XJrbeber
aller Dinge, dem wir Alles verdanken. 4 Als icb nocb ein Elnabe war, dachte
icb wie ein Knabe, redete wie ein Knabe und bandelte wie ein Knabe ; da ich
nun ein Mann geworden bin, sollte icb denken, reden and handeln wie eui
Mann. 6 Niemand kann leben, obne sicb Feinde zu erwerbcn. Aber grade das
giebt ibm Gelegenbeit, sie in Freunde zu verwandeln. 6 Wenn wir nnzufiriedoi
mit unserem Loose (Gescbicke) sind und um una ber blicken, ao werden wir
Yiele seben, die viel scblimmer daran sind iind werden darin einen Qnind
(eine Ursacbe) zur Dankbarkeit finden. 7 Yerlasse niemab einen Froand in
der Notb. 8 Der brennende Sand, der scbneebedeckte Pfiul, der gestimte
Himmel, der scbaiunende, wie der sanft gleitende FlnBS, alle klinnen das
Menscbenberz in gleicber Weise erfreuen. 9. Wie viel ist dieser Battel and
dieser Zugel wertb? 10 Sie sind Direr Beacbtang anwurdig. 11 Ein
mutbiges Pferd bedarf keiner Sporen. 12 Warte bier einen Augenblick : ich
will zu dem Wegweiser laufen und seben, was daran gescbrieben steht. 13
Es giebt kaum einen scboneren Anblick, als den des Regenbogens. 14
Wenn wir alles, was wir Qutes reden und tbun, auf die eine Seite einer Tafel
scbrieben und alle unsere Mangel auf die andere, so saben wir das Reaaltat
wobl lieber gar nicbt an. 15 Grander Samen von irgend einer Gktttong
wird Frucbt bringen, wenn er ordentlicb geaaet worden ist. Wenn da also
gate Friicbte begebrst^ sae guten Samen.

AUFGABE XXXVI.

1 Es ist nicbt scbwer, zu begreifen, dass Freibeit nur denen zogestanden
werden sollte und dass nur diejenigen ibrer recbt geniessen konnen, die sie
zu benutzen versteben, obne sie zu missbraucben. 2 Es ist ein Irrtham, zu
glauben, dass die, welcbe bestandig nacb sogenannt«m Vergniigen streben,
wirklicben Gtenuss baben; denn wabre Freude ist von jenem Fiieden der
Seele unzertrennbar, den nur der Massige kennt. 3 Wenn man Jemanden

OBRMAN EZEBCISE8.

irren sieht, so ist es nicht immer weise, niit ihm dariiber zu rechten ; denn, zum
Beispiel, einen Thoren von seiner Thorheit zu iiberzeugen ist Zeitverlust,
falls man nicht etwa dafur bezahlt wird. 4 Dadurch, dass man einen Stein
in einen tiefen Brunnen wirft, kann man seine Tiefe messen. 5 Sturme
dienen dazu, die Luft zu reinigen. 6 Wenn du Lust hast, mit mir in das
Waarenlager zu gehen, so will ich dir den Unterschied zwischen Weizen
und diesem Unkraut zeigen. 7 Der Stamm dieses Baumes hat bei dem
dewitter sehr geHtten (ist beschadigt worden). 8 Wir, die wir an Eisenbahnen
gewohnt sind, haben Miihe, zu begreifen, wie die Menschen in fniheren
Zeiten noch so viel verrichten konnten. 9 Ich weiss nicht, welcher Ansicht
Sie sein mogen ; aber ich denke, dass ein Mensch der ein Pferd oder einen
Hund besitzen kann, ohne sich um dcssen BedUrfiiLise zu bekiimmem, auch
in der Freundschaft von keinem besonderen Werthe ist. 10 Ich bin gauz
Ihrer Meinung. Aber was sagen Sie von einem, der nicht einmal so viel
Sorge um seine Dienstboten tragt, wie um seinen Hund ?

AUFGABE XXXVII.

1 Obgleich das Wort " Larm " irged ein Geriiusch bedeutet, so wird es
doch besonders von den Tiinen gebraucht, welche dem Sprechenden un-
angenehm sind. Es bezeichnet daher mehr zeitweiligen Geschmack, als
irgend etwas Positives ; denn dieselbe Person wird zu verschiedenen Zeiten
dieselben Tone bald " Musik," bald " Larm " nennen. 2 Der Werth der
Reinlichkeit kann nicht zu hoch angeschlagen und nicht zu dringend
empfohlen werden. Schmutz ist fur Leib und Scele verderblich. Wie kann
man einen reinen Sinn in einem unreinen Korper erwarten ? 3 Daheim !
Es giebt doch keinen Ort, der ihm gleichkommt \md keinen, aus dem sich
nicht ein *' Daheim ** machen liesse ; es giebt nichts, was es ersetzen konnte.
Der Arme ist darin gliicklicher, als der Keiche in seinem prachtigen Hause ;
wenn es ihm keines bietet. 4 Die Pflicht allein sollte den Menschen zwingeu,
seine Handlungsweise so zu andem, dass er das thue, was er bislier unterlassen,
und das unterlasse, was er zu thun pflegt. Wir haben Pflichten gegen uns
selbst und gegen Andere, und es wird selten oder nie geschehen, dass beide
unvereinbar sind. So lange aber die Pflicht nicht unser Vergnugen ist, werden
wir weder gegen uns selber noch gegen Andere unsere Pflicht thun. 5 Wir
Alle lieben den Rulim, oder sollten ihn doch lieben, das lieisst : Ehre, Lob,
Ruf ; diese Liebe nothigt uns zu Anstrengungen. Aber da es leicht mbgHch
ist, ihn in falschen Hichtungen zu suchen, oder aus unwurdigen Handen zu
empfangen, so sollten wir Sorge tragen, nur das zu untemehmen, was uns
selber nutzlich sein muss und Andem nlitzlich sein kann, denn daduix^h sichern
wir uns selber Gutes, und verletzen Niemanden.

AUFGABE XXXVIII.

1 Ein Brief! Hofihimg, Freude, Gliick, Angst, Kummer, Ruin sind alle
in dem kleinen Reprasentanten des Abwesenden enthalten. Wenig ahnet

/

22 THE ^ACnCAL USGCiSfT.

der Brieftrager (Briefbote, Postbote) wie viel Vergniigen Qnd Scfamen or
taglich vertheilt ; wie ^edcfagiiltig ist oft der Absender gegen den Schmen,
den er verarsacht, oder gegen die Frende, die er durch ein paar Worte
macht, die ihn uichts kosten. 2 Ein Vater sollte immer sein Kind als
fiein eignes kiinftiges Selb^t betrachten und sollte daher Soige tragen, ee zu
befafaigen, dass es seine eigne Existenz fortsetzen kunne, nnd niemab Hand-
longen begehe, deren er edch geschamt haben wurde. Zu diesem Ende
sollte er sein Kind za seinem Gefahrt^i nnd Yertrauten machen und soUte
ea lehren, 8r> zu denken, wie er selbat denkt. 3 Der ist nnser Freond, der
iniiigen Antheil an unserm Wohleigehen nimmt, der aidi iiber Allea firent^ was
uns wolilthut, und der AUea hasst, was uns schaden konnte, einerlei, ob das
Gute oder Bijse in unsselber i^ oder ^-on Andem auageht Daher ist
deijenige nicht unser Freund, der unsere Fehler iibersieht^ oder der zugiebt,
daw ein Anderer uns zu unaerem Schaden willfahrig ist, was auch immer
seine Absicht sein moge. 4 Die Tugend ist ein oft missventandener BegiifiEl
£r ^ird gewolinlich von der Handlungsweise gebraucht, die man billigt. £s
darf dalier nicht Wunder nehmen, dass oft grade Entgegengesetztes mit demsel-
ben Worte bezcichnet wird, und in der Tliat finden wir, dass das, was heute
Tugend genannt ^drd, nicht nothwendigerweise auch moi^n Tugend ist;
denu Tugend ist das, was grade zur Zeit und unter den Umstanden das
meiifte Gute im weitesten Umfiuige hervorruft oder doch bervorzurufen
beabsichtigt war.

AUFGABE XXXIX.
1 "Einen Augenblick" — " warte einen Augenblick" — "ich werde es bo-
gl ich thun" — " es wird keinen Augenblick Zeit kosten" — siiid Alles Auadrucke,
uin Aufschub zu verlangen, oder es sind Zeitschatzungen, welche andeuten,
dawi da8 Eine von geringerer Wichtigkeit ist^ ala das Andere. Ist die
Bchatzung richtig, so ist auch der Ausdruck zulassig ; denn AJles hat dock
nur einen verhaltnissmassigen Werth und sollte demgemass betrachtet werden.
2 Hieh dort die Kiihe, die unter den majestatischen Baumen Schutz suchen 1
WoH fur ein lieblicher Anbliek ! Was ist es anders, als ein Gestandniss
von Schwache und Abhangigkeit von fremdem Schutze t So flieht das Kind
voni Fremden zur Mutter, der Jlingling in Bediangnissen zum Vater, das
auffttreWndc Genie zur Unterstutzung der Grossen, und wir Alle zu Gott ;
denn was wir audi sein mogen, es giebt Machte, denen wir ohne Beistand nicht
widerstohen kiinnen. 3 Vergessen. — Nur wenige Menschen vergeaseny was
sie wirklich im Gedachtniss behalten wollen, falls sie nicht etwa zu viel
auf oin Mai untemehmen. Es giebt verschiedene Grade der GedachtnisskiafL
Es ist weder nothwendig, noch moglich, sich Alles mit gleicher Kraft
eiiizupragen. Das, was uns grassen Schmorz oder grosse Freude mafiht^ wird
Ht'lt<;n vergessen. Der Gnmd hiervon ist, dass es, mit oder gegen unsem
Wilhjn, flir den Augenblick unsere Seele ganz beherrscht i Klugheit
veriichtet mehr, als Macht. Ohne sie verschwendet der Starke viel Krafl,
auf die er sich zu selir verlasst. Mit ihr spart der Schwachere seine Krafbe f iir
den recliten Ziitpunkt auf und verlasst sich nicht darau^ wenn er anderweitig

GERMAN EXERCISES. 23

Hiilfe finden kaim. Der grade Weg ist nicht immer der kiiraeste. Der
yeratandige Schiffer halt sich von der Stromimg fern, wenn er stromaufwarts
zn rudem hat.

AUFGABE XL.

1 Es giebt zweierlei Arten Kriege; AngrifFs= und Vertheidigungskriege.
Der Krieg ist unter alien Umstanden ein grosses Ungliick ; denn er bringt
viel Elend iiber Alle, die damit zu thun haben. Es giebt aber Zeiten, wo ep
untemommen werden muss, um grossere Uebel abzuwehi-en. Ist er aber
eine Nothwendigkeit geworden, so soUte er mit dem griissten Nacbdrucke
und mit aller ELlugheit betrieben werden, und glorreich ist der Tod
derjenigen, welche in der Vertheidigung des Rechtes sterben. Das beste
Schutzmittel gegen den Kri^ und seine Schrecken ist die Bereitscliaft, ilin
zu ontemehmeu, sobald es nothig ist, so wie der Kuf, dass, einmal dazu
gezwungen, man ihn, nicht lebend ohne Sieg aufgeben wird. 2 Das Feuer
gehort zu jenen Dingen, deren Werth als Diener oder deren Gefahrlichkeit
als Herren man kaum zu hoch anschlagen kann. Wenn aber diese Gefahrlich-
keit sich in einer Feuei-sbrunst in so entsetzlicher Grbsse zeigt, so diirfen wir
danim doch nicht aunelimen, dass sie wirklich grosser sei, als andere weniger
in die Augen fallende Uebel wie, zum Beispiel, schlechto Gewohnheiten, die
nur wenig beachtet werden, bis sie unersetzlichen Schaden angerichtet
haben. 3 Ordnungsliebe sollte zur Gewohnheit herangebildet werden. Ein
ordnungsliebender Mensch weiss immer eine Sache zu linden ; denn f iir jedes
hat er einen Platz und legt es natiirlich dahin. Dasselbe Princip wendet er
auch auf sein Inneres an ; denn auch sein Wissen behandelt er wie die anderen
G^enstande, und diese geistige Ordnung zeigt sich in der Klarheit und
Folgerichtigkeit seiner Sprache; er kann sich dalier leicht vei'standlicli machen.
Es ist eine Freude, mit einem solchen Manne zu verkehren ; wahrend der
Unordentliche uns mit seiner Verwirrung und seinen endlosen Wiederholungen
langweilt.

AUFGABE XLI.

1 Ein Malcr, der zum Arzte umgesattelt hatte, wui-de gefragt, wanim er
seine Profession aufgegeben habe. " Aus dem Gninde," sagte er, " wcil meiue
friihei*e Beschiiftigung meine Irrthlimer zu deutlich rerrieth ; ich habe nun eine
andere gewahlt, in welcher sie begraben werden." 2 Wahrend der Siidsee-
manie eriifinete eine Gesellschafb ein Bureau in Change Alley, um Unterzeich-
nnngen zum Betrage einer Million fUr einen Zweck entgegenzunehmen, der
erst nach Zeichnung jener Summe bekannt gemacht werden sollte. Das
Publicum stromte hcrbei und zahlte fiinf Shillinge auf je fiinfzig Pfund der
Unterzeichnung. Auf diese Weise war eine grosse Summe zusammen
gebracht, als in einer Anzeige bekannt gemacht wiirde, dass die Unterzeichner
ihre deponirten Gelder zuriick haben konnten, da die Directoren nur beah-
siohtigt hatten, zu sehen, wie viele Nurren sich an einem Tage zusammen-
faringen lieasen. 3 Dr. Pease, Decan von Ely, wohnte einmal dner

24 THE PRACTICAL LUTQUIST.

Mahlzeit bei, als gerade am Schlusse derselben die Unterlialtung racb auf die
ausserordentlich grosse Sterblichkeit unter den Advocaten wandte: "Wir
habeu," sagte einer der Herren, '^nicht weniger als sechs aiiagezeiclmete
Anwalte in eben so vielen Monaten verloren/' Der Decan, der sehr
schwerhorig war, erhob sich, als sein Freund eben diese Bemerktmg gemacht
hatte iind sprach das Dankgebet : '^ Fiir diese, wie fur alle anderen Segnimgen,
mache uns auMchtig dankbar, o Herr !"

AUFGABE XLII.

1 Einer von den Giinstlingen Heinrich's, Prinzen von Wales, nachmals
Heinrich des Fiinften, war irgend eines Vergehens wegen vor Gericht gestellt
und trotz alles Einflusses, den er zu seinen Gunsten verwenden konnte,
verurtheilt worden. Der Prinz wnrde iiber den Ansgang des Prozesses so
aufgebracht, dass er den Richter schhig. Dieser, William Gascoign mit
Namen, gab sofort Befebl, den Prinzen zu verhaften, und der junge Heinrich^
der unterdess eingesehen hatte, welche TJnbill er den Gesetzen seines Landes
zugef ugt, liess sich ruhig von den Beamten ins G^fangniss abf Hhren. Sobald
der Konig Heinrich der Vierte davon benachrichtigt war, rief er in fineudigem
Jubel aus : ^* Heil dem Konige, der Richter hat, muthig genug, das Qeseiz
aufrecht zu erhalten, und dreimal Heil, wenn er einen Sohn besitzt, der sich
solch einer Ziichtigung unterwirft." 2 Richard, der Erste, wurde bei einem
Angriffe auf die Burg Chalons in die Schulter geschossen. Als nun die
Burg gefallen war, und Richard sein Ende herannahen fiihlte, Hess er Bertram
von Gourdon, denselben, von dem er verwundet worden war, vor sich
kommen. Als der Konig ihn erblickte, sagte er: "Was habe ich dir
gethan, das den Tod von deiner Hand verdiente?" Bertram erwiederte :
"Meinen Vater und zwei von meinen Briidem hast du mit eigener Hand
erschlagen, und mich wolltest du gleichfalls todten (mir stelltest du gleichfalls
nach dem Leben.) Jetzt magst du deine Rache an mir kiihlen ; denn fireudig
ertrage ich jede Marter, der du mich unterwerfen kannst, seit ich ilberzeugt
bin, dass ich die Welt von einem Tyrannen befreit habe." Diese kuhne
Antwort ergriff Richard so sehr, dass er Befehl gab, den €re£suagenen mit
einem Geschenke von hundert Shillingen in Freiheit zu setzen.

AUFGABE XLIII.

1 ** (Bitte,) Darf ich fragen, Herr Opie, womit Sie Ihre Farben mischenl "
redete ein Student den grossen Maler an. " Mit Gehim," war die Antwort,
und das war rechb. Yiel Belehrung mochte eben uicht darin li^^en, aber es
geniigte, den Fragenden anzuregen. Mancher andere KUnstler wiirde auf
eine solche Frage eine ausfiihrliche Antwort in Bezug auf die mechanische
CompoHition dieser und jener Farben, auf das Verhaltnisa, auf die Art dts
Reibens gegeben habcn; oder^ er hatte ihm vielleicht das Auftragen der-
selben gezeigt. Aber selbst dies wiirde ihn im entscheidenden Augen*
blicke im Stich gelassen haben. Opie ging lieber sofort an den Kem der

GERMAir EXKRCTSra. 25

Sache: "Mit C^him." 2 Ettj war zum Lehrer der Studenten an der
Koniglichen Academie emannt. Einer kam zu ihm und fragte : " Wie mnss
ich dies machen 1 '' " Yersuchen Sie selbst ! ^' Ein Anderer fragte : " Was
bedeiitet dieses, Herr Etty 1" ^' Sehen Sie nur hin \" ^'Aber das habe ich schon
gethan." ** Sehen Sie noch einmal hin !" Und sie versuchteny und sie sahen
hin und sahen noch einmal hin und sahen und vollbrachten, was sie nie zu
Tollbringen im Stande gewesen waren, ware das " Wie " oder das " Was"

ihnen erklart, oder f iir sie ausgefiihrt worden In dem einen Falle

waren Erkennen und Ausfuhren unmittelbar, genau, lebhafi und sicher, in
dem andem mittelbar, schwach und sofort nach der Auffassung wieder ver-
flogen. Sehen is passiv und macht hochstens Noten. Hinsehen ist freiwillig ;
es iflt der Mensch im Hause, der ans Fenster tritt.

AUFGABE XLIY.

1 Zur Zeit Jakobs des Ersten wahlte ein junger Qeistlicher, der aufgefordert
war, vor dem Vicekanzler und den Vorstehem der Oxforder Colleen zu pre-
digen, den Text '^Konnet ihr denn nicht eine Stunde mit mir wachen)"
Da der Yioekanzler sehr schlafrig war und ganz ausser Stande, es zu verbergen,
so wiederholte der Prediger seinen Text sehr nachdrUcklich am Schlusse
jed^ Abtheilung seiner Predigt. Jedesmal erwachte der arme Vicekanzler,
und dies wiederholte sich so oft, dass alle Anwesenden zuletzt den Scherz
deutlich verstehen konnten. Der Vicekanzler wurde Uber die Stoning, die ihm
widerfuhr ynd uber daB, dadurch veranlasste, Gerede so au%ebracht, dass er
sich beim Erzbischofe von Canterbury beklagte, und dieser Uess sofort den
jungen €(eistlichen kommen, um ihm wegen seines Betragens Vorwiirfe zu
machen. Im Laufe der Unterredung zwischen beiden legte jedoch der Pre-
diger so viele Proben seines Scharfsinns und seiner Gediegenheit ab, dass Seine
Gnaden ihm die Ehre verschaffben, vor dem Konige zu predigen. Auch hier
iibte er seinen Witz. Er wahlte zum Texte : '^ Jakob der Erste Tind der
Sechste, schwanke nicht!'' worin naturUcher Weise alle Anwesenden einen
Seitenhieb auf den wankelmUthigen Character des Konigs erblickten (erkann-
ten). Jakob, der den Sinn eben so schnell verstand, rief aus: "Da hat
er mich schon." Aber er war im G^zen so sehr mit der Predigt und dem
Prediger zufrieden, dass er ihn zu einem seiner Kapellane emannte. Spater
ging derselbe nach Oxford und hielt eine Abschiedsrede iiber den Text :
" Schlafe zu und ruhe dich aus V

AUFGABE XLV.

1 Der Rechtsgelehrte Davy, der wie mancher Andere zuweilen Fragen
Btellte, ohne die wahrscheinliche oder mdgliche Antwort zu erwagen, wollte
eines Tages seinen Witz leuchten lassen und sagte zu einem Herrn, der im
Gerichtshofe von King's Bench erschienen war, um f Ur eine Summe von 3000
Pfund Biirgschafk zu Icisten : " Sagen Sie mir doch, wie woUen Sie beweisen,

22 TUE PHACTIC^L LIXOUlaT.

<l«r Brieftr^-r (Bi-iefbot*, Postbotc) wie viel Vci^iigen uiid Schtnen er
ta;{Iicb vertlioilt ; wiu gluicligiiltig iHt oft der Alweuiler gegpn ik-u SclimeR,
lieii PI- vei-urn;M.lit. odcr g(.'gcn die Fivtido, die it thii-cli ein I»uir Worto
iiiocht, dii! iliii iiieliU kostou. 2 Kin Vnhir Holltv ii[im(T win Kind ab
Mi-iu L'itpU's kUtil'ti^v i^llmt U'ti'iic'liU'ii iiud Kulltu daher Soi^ ti'!«;i^n, £» zu
bi'fiiliigcn, diisH i-u sciiiv eigne Exiijlcni; furt^ctaoB kiinne, iind nituuU Hand-
hiiiffun ln.'gi.>lie, dei-en er uch gewliaiiit Imlien wiiiilc, Zu dit^xeiu Ende
BoUto er wiu Kiud zu seiiiiim Uefulu-teii und VertmuteQ luacheii uud sollte
ett lelkreii, m> zu di'iikcii, wic er aiAlyst deukt. 3 Der ist uuser Freund, der
iuuigfu Aiithoil an tinscrm Wolilcrgvliun uimmt, der uicli iiber AlJes &vut, was
iins wukltliut, uud dur Allen lioxut, vha una Msliodett k(iunt«, einerlei, oli das
Uute Oiler iliiue in tinitsclbot' ut, oder von Aiidem uusgclit. Dalier ist
deijeuige iiiclit iinser Frcimd, der uUKero Fehlor ulwrHieht, odtir der zugiebt,
diuw ein Anderer una zu unsen'm Schudcti willliLlirig ist, was aucb immer
seine Alisiclit Hrin mii^re. i Die Tugend ist ein iift niissrerstoudcner Begiiff.
Er wird gcwiibidicli run der IIandliingHfv<.-isc gebiiiuclit, die mna billigt. Ea
dart' dalier niclit Wunder nthinen, duK» nit graile Eiitgegeng(wetzt«s mit deouwl-
k-n Worto btzeidiiK't wird, und in der Tlmt tindL-n wir, tbws dnw, whs hcuto
Tugenil geniuiut winl, uii;ht notliwendigiTWcise aueli luurgeu Tugcjid ist;
dfuii Tugcnd ist dati, wiui gmde zur Zoit und uuter dun Uutatuiiden das
iiieiMte Gute iii) weitvatt-n Umfaugii hurvomift oder duoL liervonmrufen
bcubsiulitigt witr.

ADFGABE XXXIX.
1 "Einen AugenWick" — "wart«cinen Augenlilick" — "icli werdo w »-
g!> ichtliun" — "eswird kcincn Angcnblick Zeit koston" — suid Allen Ausdriicke,
U!!! Aufschub zu verlangen, od«r ts aind ZoitschUtningen, welche audeatan,
doss das Eiuc von geringtrer Wichtigkeit int, als diui Andere. Ist die
Seliiitzuug liclitig, ho ist auch der Ansdnick sulauaig ; denn Allcs h&t docli
nur einen verlililtnisamiinigen Werth uud soUte demgemiiss betrachtet werden.
3 Si«h dort die Xiilie, die uuter den majestatischen Baumen Schutz suchen I
Wnfl fiir ein licbliclier Anblick ! Was ist ea aoders, tin can Qestiindiiiai
von Scbwiicbe und Ablungigkcit Ton &eindem Bcliutze 1 So fliebt das Kind
voni FromdcQ lur Hutt«r, der Jiingling in BediiingnisBeii lum Vatcr, das
au&trebende Qeuie mr Untentiiteuiig der Groasen, und wir All« ta Gott ;
denn was wir luusk aaa ntigen, ea ^ebt ajtobie, denen wir obne Beistand nioht
wideratohen. kSnnra. S Twgiswiii — "Snr wenige Uenscben viiiginiwiii, was
toB wiAlidt im OedKohbiM bdialtan wollm, &lli ne nicht etwk in vid
aof vittMaliUtUnnduaen. £a ;^ul>t ventcliicilciKi ('(rndo der Gt'diiclitnissknift
Ea ist wodor nothwf-ttdig. nocb niii^licb, nicli Allen mit glaicher Kraft
eiiiwi|jri^'U. Dim, wag uns gnissea Scbiuora odor growe Fi-eude mncbt, wird
selten vorgtawm. Dur Gniii<! LK-n-nn ixt, diuw «», mit odw gegpa uneem
Willni, fiir ilrrj .\(i;^Liililii.k uiiMii' Si^Ju gauz beberrsi'lit. 4 Klitghoit
Vtri'ioLtut uii'li; . .! "::■•■ ■ ■ li . I \ '.-^'i-MGhwfniiut der Starke viel Krufl,
luiTdio or aicb .LK iii, : -i;:. i ^jv.rtdM-Schwiichere seine Krafte fiir

Ana racfaton ZKit{-\xuki tui uoil Torlaoot sioli rticbt daxuuf, wgui er uiderweitig

GERMAN BXEKCISE8.

HuJfe tinden kann. Der gniile Wcg ixt iiiclit iuimur der kiii-sK'sto. Uer
TrrstiiiMlige Schiller liiilt tach vuii dct Stninmiig (vm, wutm lt struiuuiifwiirbi
nirudem hat.

AUFCAIJE XL.
1 Es giebtiwriwlw Ai-tc-ii Krii--i; : Aiigrill«= mi.l Vi-nli.iilij.imK'-l-H.Ti.-.
Dm- Kripg ist luiUr alkii UiiiHtJiinliii ciii fjnws.M I ' iij,'lii.k ; iliiiii i-i' liriii;;t
trifl Elend iilier Alio, Aio (Limit xu tliiiii KeiIiuii. Ex jiwin- iihir Zi-it<-ii, w<> • r
uutemommcu wcrdeii uhish, uiu gi-iixscre L'<^li<>l iilj/uwi-lni'ii. Isl it ulx'r
eiue Ifothweniligkuit gc-wui-Jeii, so suUtc v.r niit ili-iii f.'riw.iUii Niuli<Ii-ii(ki'
uuil luit aller KhigWit Iftm-buii wunlwi, iiml glnin^itli int <U:i' 'l'"'l
di^cnigeo, welcho in dor Veilhuiiligiiiig di^ Itcclitirs «tfvlii'ii. Diis ln'.->U'
Schutzmittel gcgen den Krit^ uiid wiiiit: Sclii-uokt'ii iKt ilii- iJiTi-it-'i'liiirt, ilxt
lu unternehmeii, trabalil ed aiithig iitt, mi wic dvv liul', iluxri, ciiiitiul diizii
geiwnngen, uiaii ihn, uiclit lubeiid uluie Hiog uiirjji'Iieii wii-d. 2 l^ii^ Koiier
gebiirt zu jencn Diiigen, di-rcn Wurth nU Dieiwr .Kitii- dmu C.fiilirlK'lik.it
abi Herrc'ii culii kaum zu liocli niuuLIugcii k:inii. Wciiii ulicr dirsf UcrulD'liL'li-
keit flich in cinti- Fuuei'ijbruuiit in no uiitsctxlicliiT t.ivi.iiMO Ki-i^ ku iliirl'vn wir
dariiiu doch uicht uutiuliiuen, duKa mii: wirklii'k ghKwi-r si'i, uls atitK'n' u'i'iii;;i>r
indieAugen fbdleiide Ueltcl wie, mim ItuiHijiul, wldoclitc <Jrwi.liiLlnitiii, dio
Dur -wenig beaclitft wt'nlini, l>i^ oiu iinurHotzlicliun Suliink'ii iiiigi'i'ii'liti't
haben. 3 OTdniiiigMlielia eollte zur Ucwuludifit bi'niiigcbililvt wi'i'di'n. Kin
ordnungsliebeuder ^It;iii>ch weiHH iniinor rino RiioliK zii fiiicKii ; <1>:il)i fiif jiJi-n
hat er einen Platz und lugt ch iiiiturlich didiiii. D:ihhi'IIh< i'riiii'i|> wi-iidit cr
tuch auf Bcin Iimcrcs uti ; dcnnaiich Kciti Wiwwn bi'liuudclL or wic dio aiiUfi'i'u
Gq^enatfinde, und dtose gt-ijitigi; Ordimng /ligt nich iti dor Klarlioit und
Folgericlitigkeit seintir Siimcho; er kaini Hiuli didior loiebt voi-sliindlioli iiiin:lioiL
El ist dne Froudc, mit einum Hulohvn Maniic xii vorkoliroii ; wiilnvml di-r
VnordenUidie ous mit uciucr Vurwirruug und Hoinon ondloHcti \Viodtn'L<.>ln)i;^i'ii
Ungiralt.

AUFGABE XLI.

1 Ein Mttltrr, der xam Arzt*; umgt^tiittnlt Iiattc, wniilo gi^frsigt, wiirmn er

rniam ViotoM oa au%ogeben habc. " Aum ik'm Umndo," wigto i^r, " woil int'iiio

Hhwe Beachaftigiiug nieine Irrthiinwr itu doutliili vonintli ; ioh biilu' mm oinu

9 gVwMhlt, in wolcher iiio bcgralx'n werdon." 3 Wiilmnd dnr Siidxw.

• cine GeaeUscliBft cin Biircaii in Oliaugo \l\fv U t rxiii-li-

r Million fur eincm Zircok tyt^y r n I -n, di-r

er Siinimo bokaniit gomacht ^e In h< II Dm

S TiPrtwi und zahlte f[iuf BUillingc ai f j t T „ 1 1 ud <Iit

Aiif diese Weine war cine gWMne S e 2 Hiiiimion

nor Aiueige bekannt gemaclit wurdu, buta I o 1 1 tt> ichnKr

> d^Kmtrtm Uol'lir mriick kabcn kiinnten, da ilio Diroottiron niir Ix-ab

llitjgt tuilteii, xu wlien, wie viele Nurrcn blcU an ointini Tiigo xmciniuiou'

3 Dr. Peane, Decan von Ely, wolmte eiunial dncr

24 THE PRACTICAL UKQUIST.

Mahlzeit bei, als gerade am Schlusse derselben die Unterhaltung racb auf die
ausserordentlich grosse Sterblichkeit unter den Advocaten wandte: **Wir
haben," sagte einer der Herren, " nicht weniger als sechs auagezeiclmete
Anwalte in eben so vielen Monaten verloren/* Der Decan, der sehr
schwerhorig war, erhob sich, als sein Freund eben diese Bemerkung gemacht
hatte imd sprach das Dankgebet : '^ Fiir diese, wie fur alle anderen Segniingen,
mache uns aufrichtig dankbar, o Herr !"

AUFGABE XLIL

1 Einer von den Giinstlingen Heinrich's, Prinzen von Wales, nachmab
Heinrich des Fiinften, war irgend eines Vergehens wegen vor Gericht gestellt
und trotz alles Einflusses, den er zu seinen Gunsten verwenden konnte,
verurtheilt worden. Der Prinz wnrde iiber den Ansgang des Prozesses so
aufgebracht, dass er den Richter schlug. Dieser, William Gascoign mit
Namen, gab sofort Befehl, den Prinzen zu verhaften, und der junge Heinrich,
der unterdess eingesehen hatte, welche Unbill er den Gesetzen seines Landes
zugefilgt, liess sich ruhig von den Beamten ins C^angniss abf iihren. Sobald
der Konig Heinrich der Vierte davon benachrichtigt war, rief er in fineudigem
Jubel aus : '^ Heil dem Konige, der Kichter hat, muthig genug, das Gesetz
aufrecht zu erhalten, und dreimal Heil, wenn er einen Sohn besitzt, der sich
solch einer Ziichtigung unterwirft." 2 Richard, der Erste, wurde bei einem
Angriffe auf die Burg Chalons in die Schulter geschossen. Als nun die
Burg gefallen war, und Richard sein Ende herannahen fuhlte, Hess er Bertram
von Gourdon, denselben, von dem er verwundet worden war, vor sich
koiumen. Als der Konig ihn erblickte, sagte er : " Was habe ich dir
gethan, das den Tod von deiner Hand verdientel" Bertram erwiederte :
" Meinen Vater und zwei von meinen Briidem hast du mit eigener Hand
erschlagen, und mich wolltest du gleichfalls todten (mir stelltest du gleichfalls
nach dem Leben.) Jetzt magst du deine Rache an mir kuhlen ; denn fireudig
ertrage ich jede Marter, der du mich unterwerfen kannst, seit ich ilberzeugt
bin, dass ich die Welt von einem Tyrannen befreit habe." Diese kiihne
Antwort ergiiff Richard so sehr, dass er Befehl gab, den Grefeuigenen mit
einem Geschenke von hundert Shillingen in Freiheit zu setzen.

AUFGABE XLin.

1 ** (Bitte,) Darf ich fragen, Herr Opie, womit Sie Ihre Farben mischeni "
redete ein Student den grossen Maler an. " Mit Gehim," war die Antwort,
und das war recht. Viel Belehrung mochte eben nicht darin li^;en, aber es
geniigte, den Fragenden anzuregen. Mancher andere Kunstler wiirde auf
eine solche Frage eine ausfiihrliche Antwort in Bezug auf die mechanische
CompoHition dieser und jener Farben, auf das Yerhaltniss, auf die Art dm
Reibens gegeben haben; oder^ er hatte ihm vielleicht das Auftragen detr-
selben gezeigt. Aber selbst dies wiirde ihn im entscheidenden Auge^-
blicke im Stich gelassen haben. Opie ging lieber sofort an den Kern deir

GERMAir KxmiciBra. 25

Sftche: ''Mit C^him." 2 Ettj war zum Lehrer der Studenten an der
Eoniglichen Academie emannt. Einer kam zu ihm und fragte : " Wie mnaa
ich dieii machen ) " " Yersuchen Sie selbst ! ** Ein Anderer firagte : '^ Was
bedentet dieees, Herr Etty V " Sehen Sie nur hin V* ''Aber das habe ich schon
geihan." '* Sehen Sie noch einnuJ hin 1" Und sie versudhteny irnd sie sahen
hin and sahen noch einmal hin und sahen und vollbrachten, was sie nie zu
vollbringen im Stande gewesen waren, ware das ''Wie" oder das ''Was"

ihneo erklart, oder f Ur sie ausgefiihrt worden In dem einen Falle

waren EriLennen und AusfUhren umnittelbar, genau, lebhafi und sicher, in
dem andem mittelbar, schwach und sofort nach der Auffassung wieder ver-
flogen. Sehen is passiv und macht hochstens Noten. Hinsehen ist freiwillig ;
es ist der Mensch im Hause, der ans Fenster tritt.

AUFGABE XLIY.

1 Zur Zeit Jakobs des Ersten wahlte ein junger Qeistlicher, der aufgefordert
Ty Yor dem Vioekanzler und den Yorstehem der Oxf order Colleen zu pre-
digen, den Text "Konnet ihr denn nicht eine Stunde mit mir wachen)"
Da der Yioekanzler sehr schliifrig war und ganz ausser Stande, es zu verbergen,
80 wiederholte der Prediger seinen Text sehr nachdrUcklich am Schlusse
jed^ Abtheilung seiner Predigt. Jedesmal erwachte der arme Yicekanzler,
and dies wiederholte sich so oft, dass alle Anwesenden zuletzt den Scherz
deutlich verstehen konnten. Der Yicekanzler wurde iiber die Stoning, die ihm
widerfuhr vnd iiber daB, dadurch veranlasste, Gerede so au%ebracht, dass er
sich beim Erzbischofe von Canterbury beklagte, und dieser liess sofort den
jungen Qeistlichen kommen, um ihm wegen seines Betragens Yorwiirfe zu
machen. Im Laufe der Unterredung zwischen beiden legte jedoch der Pre-
diger so viele Proben seines Schar&inns und seiner Gedi^enheit ab, dass Seine
Onaden ihm die Ehre verschaffben, vor dem Konige zu predigen. Auch hier
iibte er seinen Witz. £r wahlte zum Texte : " Jakob der Erste und der
Sechste, schwanke nioht!" worin natiirlicher Weise alle Anwesenden einen
Seitenhieb auf den wankelmiithigen Character des Konigs erblickten (erkann-
ten). Jakob, der den Sinn eben so schnell verstand, rief aus : " Da hat
er mich schon." Aber er war im Ganzen so sehr mit der Predigt und dem
Prediger zufrieden, dass er ihn zu einem seiner Kapellane emannte. Spater
ging derselbe nach Oxford und hielt eine Abschiedsrede iiber den Text :
" Schlafe zu und ruhe dich aus !"

AUFGABE XLY.

1 Der Rechtsgelehrte Davy, der wie mancher Andere zuweilen Fragen
stellte, ohne die wahrscheinliche oder m^gliche Antwort zu erwagen, wollte
eines Tages seinen Witz leuchten lassen imd sagte zu einem Hcrm, der im
Gerichtshofe von King's Bench erschienen war, um f iir eine Summe von 3000
Pfund Biirgschafb zu Icistcn : " Sagen Sie mir doch, wie woUen Sie beweisen.

38 THX fBACnCAIt LUII1UI8T.

Sob 3000 Pfond im Yanndgeii bestzenf'' Der Herr detaillirie bob
Tcrmq^Bn bis sum Betnge Ton 2,940 Pfund. *^ Alias recht gut/' sagte
der BechtngeJehite, ^ aber Sie bediirfeii nock sedunag Pfimd, mn 3000 Pfimd
fli hmntittn " ^Fiir den Being," enriederte jener keinesw^s verbliifEt,
'^ hmite ich einen Wechsel tod einem gewinen Herm Bechtsgelehrten Dk9J
m Handen imd hofife, daas denelbe ehrenhaft genng sein wird, ihn bald za
besahlen." Das Gelacktery das diese Antwort Temxsaohtey ergriff sogar den
Biehter. Der Rechtagelehrte sah Terbliifft ans, and Lord Mansfield sagte
in aesnem gewohnlichen, hoflklien Tone : ^* Nun, Bmder Davy, ich denke, wir
konnen den Borgen wohl annehmen." 8 ^ Glanben Sie an Yorherbestim-
mnng''? fimgte ein Missdasippi-Capitin einen Galyinistischen G^istliclien sn
Bord seines Schiffes. '' Allerdinga.'' ** Und glanben Sie auch, daas das^ was
geschehen soil, geschehen wirdl** — "Allerdinga" "Gut, ich bin fix)h, das
za horcn." — "Warum?" — "Weil ich vorhabe, jenes SchijOT da vor uns in
riin^hn Minuten zu uberfliigeln, wenn festes Fichtenholz und Sicherheit»-
rentile irgend Werth haben. Beunruhigen Sie sich also nicht ; denn wenn
die Keand n^t springen sollen, so werden sie es auch nicht.'' Hier fing
der GeistUdie an, eine unruhige Miene anzunehmen und wegzurticken, als der
Capitan sagte : " Ich dachte, Sie glaubten an Y orherbestimmung und dasss,
was geschehen soil, geschehen wird % " " Das thue ich auch, aber ich ziehe vor,
dem fiintertheile etwas naher zu sein^ wenn es geschehen sollte."

AUFGABE XLYI.

1 Themistocles, welcher den Plan entworfen hatte, die Lacedamonier zu
▼erdrangen und ihnen die Herrschaft Griechenlands zu entreissen, um sie den
Athenem zuzuwenden, hielt Auge und Sinn bestandig auf diesen grossen Entwurf
gerichtet, und da er in der Wahl seiner Maassr^ln eben nicht sehr rUckaichts-
voU oder gewissenhaft war, so sah er Alles f iir gerecht und gesetzmassig an,
was dem grossen Ziele, das er im Auge hatte, naher fuhren konnte. So
erklarte er denn eines Tages in einer allgemeinen Yolksversammlung, dass
er einen sehr wichtigen Yorschlag zu machen habe, dass er denselben abcr
nicht offentlich enthiillen konne, weil der Erfolg nur durch die tie&te
Geheimh^tung gesichert werden kSnne ; daher wunsche er, dass man Jemanden
erwahlen moge, dem er den Gegenstand vollig entdecken konne. Die ganze
Yersammlung wahlte einstimmig Aristides, in dessen RechtschafTenheit und
Klugheit man ein so grosses Yertrauen setzte, dass man sich in dieser
Angelegenbeib ganz auf seine Ansicht verliess. Themistocles nahm ihn dann
bei Seite und sagte ihm, der Plan, den er entworfen, sei, die Flotte, die dem
ubrigen Griechenland augehure und in einem benachbarten Hafen liege, zu
verbrennen ; dadurch wiirde Athen unzweifelhaib die Beherrscherin von ganz
Griechenland werden. Hierauf kehrte Anstides in die Yersammlimg
zurlick und erklarte nur, dass nichts von griisserem Yortheile fiir das
Gemeinwohl sein konne, als der Plan des Themistocles, zugleich aber auch
nichts in der Welt ungerechter. Alles Yolk bescliloss einstimmig, Themistocles
solle von seinem Yorhaben ganzlich abstehen.

OXBXAK BXKBCI8ES. 27

AtJFGABE XLVIL

1 Als Ayidius Oassius sich gegea den Kaiser Marcus Aurelius emport
ond den Yersuch gemacht hatte, die Kegierung an sich zu reisaen, drang die
Kaiserin Pausdna in einem Schreiben an ihren Gemahl auf die ausserste
Strenge gegen die Mitverschworenen des Cassius. Der ELaiser aber, der
nur den Kegungen seiner eignen Qntmiitliigkeit Crehor gab, sandte ihr
Folgendes zor Antwort : " Ich habe, meine liebe Faustina^ Dein Schreiben
gelesen, in welchem Du mir anrathst, die Gefahrten des .Caasins mit der
anssersten Strenge zu behandebi, die sie nach Deiner Meinung verdienen.
Das sehe ich als ein F&nd der Liebe an, die Du fUr Deinen Gremahl
und f iir Deine Kinder hegst ; erlaube mir jedoch, meine liebe Faustina, die
Kinder des Cassius, seinen Schwi^rsohn und seine Frau zu verschonen und
mkh. fur sle beim Senate zu yerwenden. Nichts kann einen romischen
Kaiser in der Aohtung der Welt hoher stellen als Barmherzigkeit. Sie hat den
Caesar unter die Ootter erhoben, hat den Namen Augustus geheiligt, hat
Deinem Yater den Beinamen des Frommen verschafft." Einige von seinen
Freunden tadelten ihn offen wegen seiner liitilde und nahmen es sich heraus,
ihm zu sagen, dass Gassius nicht so grossmuthig gewesen sein wiirde, wenn
das Schicksal ihn begUnstigt hatte. Der Kaiser aber erwiederte ihnen sofort :
^ Wir haben nicht so bose gelebt und haben nicht so treulos den Gottern
gedient^ dass sie Gassius batten begunstigen sollen." Das Missgeschick
einiger seiner Yorganger, setzte er hinzu, sei ganz und gar eine Folge ihrer
schlechten Auffuhrung und ihrer Grausamkeiten gewesen, und kein guter
Fiirst sei jemals von einem Thronrauber besi^ oder ersohlagen worden.

ATJFGABE XLVIH.

Die Spanischen Geschichtschreiber erzahlen einen merkwiirdigen Fall
Ton Ehrgefiihl und Wahrheitsliebe. Ein Spanisher Cavalier erschlug in einem
plutzlichen Streite einen Maurischen Edelmann und ergriS die FluchK
Seine Yerfolger yerloren ihn bald aus den Augen ; denn er war imbemerkt
iiber eine Gartenmauer gesprungen. Da der Eigenthiimer, ein Maiu*e, zufullig
in dem Garten war, iiel der Spanier vor ihm auf die Knie, erzahlte ihm, was
vorgefallen, imd flehte ihn an, ihn zu verbergen. " Iss dieses,'* sagte der
Maure und gab ihm einen halben Pfirsich. *^ Du weisst nun, dass Du Dich auf
meinen Schutz verlassen kannst." Darauf schloss er ihn in uein Garten-
zimmer ein und sagte ihm, sobald es Abend wUre, wUrde er f iir sein £2nt-
kommen an einen sicherem Ort sorgen. Darauf ging der Maure in seine
Wohnung, und kaum hatte er nch gesetzt, so ersdiien ein grosser Haufe
Menschen Yor seinem Thore mit der Leiche seines Sohnes, der so eben von
einem Spanier getddtet worden. Er Uberzeugte sich bald, dass die imgluckliche
That von eben demselben Manne veriibt worden war, den er in seiner
G^walt hatte. Er verrieth es/ gegen Niemanden, aber zur festgesetzten
Zeit zog er sich in den Garten zuiiick und gab Befehl, dass ihm Niemand folgen
Bollte, als ob er sicli dort ungestort seinem Schmerze zu uberlassen wiinsche.

28 THE PRACTICAL LIKOUI8T.

Als er den Spanier erblickte, sagte er: ^'Wiase, o Christy der, den Du
erschlagen hast, ist mein Sohn; seine Leiche ist in meinem Hanse. Du
solltest daf iir biissen, aber Du hast mit mir gegessen, ich habe Dir mein Wort
gegeben, und das darf nicht gebrochen werden." Dann fUhrte er ihn in
den Stall, setzte ihn auf eins seiner schnellsten Pferde nnd sagte : '^ Flielie
weit von hier, so lange die Nacht Dich verbergen kann, und am Moigen wiret
Du in Sicherheit sein. Wahrlich, Du hast das Blut meines Sohnes tad
Dir, aber Gott ist gut und gerecht, und ich danke Ihm, dass ich unschuldig
bin an Deinem Bktte und dass ich mein gegebnes Wort gehalten habe."

AUFGABE XLIX.

1 In jedes Menschen Leben muss es Augenblicke geben, wo er sich
aufrichtig priift, ob sein Betragen und die Griinde f iir seine ELandlungen seinar
Ueberzeugung nach recht sind. Heil dem, der sich zur rechten Zeit pruft
und das au%iebt, was er selber nicht billigen kaim. Der Kardinal Wolsey
sagte Yor seinem Ende : ^' Hatte ich meinem Gotte eben so eifrig gedient^ wie
meinem Konige, so wiirde er mich nun in meinem Greisenalter nicht
verlassen haben." 2 Wahrend die Mitkaiser des Constantius die Christen mit
Feuer imd Schwert verfolgten, stellte er sich eine Zeit lang^ als verfolge er
sie ebenMls und erklarte seinen Hofbeamten und Statthaltem, dass er
denjenigen unter ihnen, welche sich zum Christenthume bekennten, freie Wahl
lasse, den Gk)ttem zu opfem und sich dadurch ihre Aemter zu sichem, oder durch
festes Beharren in ihrem Glauben Amt und kaiserliche Gunst zu verwirken.
Als Alle ihre Erklarungen abgegeben hatten, enthiillte der Kaiser seine
wahre Gesinnung, tadelte in den hartesten Ausdriicken diejenigen, welche
ihrem Glauben entsagt hatten und pries sehr die Tugend und Bestandigkeit
derer, welche die Schatze und Eitelkeiten dieser Welt verachtet, entliess
jene, indem er sagte, dass die, die ihren Gott verrathen, keinen Anstand
nehmen wiirden^ ihren Fiirsten zu verrathen ; diese aber behielt er in seinem
Dienste, bildete seine Leibwache aus ihnen und vertraute ihnen die ganze
Leitimg offentlicher Angelegenheiten an, als Menschen, auf deren Treue er
rechnen konnte und auf die er voiles Yertrauen setzen durfte.

AUFGABE L.

1 Als man dem Socrates ankiindigte, dass die Athener ihn zum Tode
verurtheilt hatten, antwortete er, ohne die geriugste Bewegung : " Hat die
Natursie nicht ebenfalls verurtheiltl" Apollodorus, einer von seinen Freunden
und Schiilem, driickte seinen Schmerz dariiber aus, dass er unschuldig sterbe.
" Wie," erwiederte er lachelnd, "woUtest du lieber, dass ich schuldig stiirber*
" Ich soil," sagte er mit edler Ruhe zu seinen Eichtem, " auf euem Befehl den
Tod erleiden, zu dem doch die Natur mich voni Augenblicke meiner Greburt
an verurtheilt hat; meine Anklager aber werden nach den Beschliissen der
Wahrheit nicht weniger von Schande und Ungerechtigkeit zu leid^i haben."

OEBMAH EXERCI8B8. 29

Ah man ihm den Todesbecher brachie, leerte er ilin mit erstaunliclier
Fesidgkeit iind einer unbeschreiblichen Heiterkeit au& Bis dahin batten
sich seine Freunde mit grosser Anstrengung der Tbranen enthalten ; als er
aber das Gift getninken hatte, waren sie nicht mebr ibrer G^f lible macbtigy
sondem weinten laut. Apollodorus, der scbon eine Zeit lang in Tbranen
dagestanden, fing nun mit solcbem Uebermasse des Sebmerzes zu webklagen
an, dass es die Herzen aller Anwesenden dorcbdrang. Socrates allein blieb
mibew^ nnd tadelte sogar, obgleicb mit gewobnter Milde und QutmUtbig-
keity seine Freunde. '^Was macbt ibr)" sagte er zu ibnen. ^'Icb bin
yerwundert iiber eucb. Was ist aus eurer Tugend gewordeni Habe icb
nicbt darum die Weiber fortgescbickt, damit sie nicbt dieser Scbwacbe
anbeimfiJlen solltenf Icb babe immer sagen boren, dass man in Frieden
flterben miisse und im Lobe der Gotter. Icb bitte eucb, seid rubig und zeigt
mebr Festigkeit und Entseblossenbeit.''

16 THB PRACTICAL UMGUI8T.

28 Konnen Sie Hehen, ob jene Barke einen Anker fiilirt oder nichtl

29 Wollen Sie die Scliubkarre vom Ufer wegnehmen und sie sammt der
Axt in's HauB Bchafien) 30 Was halten Sie vom Schachspiel? 31 Daa
werde ich Dmen in einer andem Aufgabe sagen.

AUFGABE XXVII.

1 Es scheint mir (es kommt mir vor), al8 ob Sie nicbt wUssten, was
Sie wollen (Mir scheint, Sie wissen nicht, was Sie wollen). 2 Der Schein trugt.
3 Ans welchem Gruude thaten Sie das? 4 Er macbt sehr richtige Schlusse.
6 Ich woUte, Sie lemten logisch dcnken. 6 Es ist weit leichter, zu tadeln,
als es besser zu machen. 7 Sind das nicht schone Gegenstande? 8 Wir
alle spielen gem, obgleich der Eine aiif diese, der Andere auf jene Weise
spielt. 9 Man wird das nie zugeben, wenn Sie nicht sehr gute Griinde dafur
geben konnen. 10 Erlauben Sie mir, Ihiien zu sagen, dass es auf diese Weise-
unmoglich ist. (Erlauben Sie, dass ich Ihnen sage, so lasst es sich nicht thtm.)
1 1 In der halben Zeit, die Sie dariiber zugebracht, batten Sie es schon thun
konnen, wenn Sie es richtig angefangen batten. 12 Bleiben Sie bier sitzen,
bis ich wieder komme. 13 Legedich nieder. (Legen Sie sich.) 14 Was fiir
ein schones Boot geht da so eben under die Briicke ! 15 Wie garstig, eine
Wanze auf einem Kissen im Speisesaal zu finden ! 16 Der Ochse dort gdit an
die Gerste in der Scheune. 17 Macht das Thor zu, auf dem Felde brennt es.
18 Haben Sie je solch einen Ast gesehen ? 19 Wovon, glauben Sie, ist diese
KajUte gemachtl 20 Aus Ziegelsteinen ? 21 Wer hat je von einer
gemauerten Kajiite gehort] 22 Alle Thiere bediirfen des Zugels,^.aber keines
80 sehr, wie der Mensch. y

AUFGABE XXVIII.

1 Mir scheint, Sie werden des Arbeitens nie miide. 2 Sie haben Recht,
NichtB ermiidet mehr, als der Mangel an Beschaftigung. 3 Wir haben
einen ruhigen Abend verlebt 4 loh habe all mein Geld verloren ; ich babe
nichts iibng behalten. 5 Sie haben sich entschlossen, heute von hiei*
wegzugehen ; das ist die Folge Ihres Bathes. 6 Ich bin andrer Meinung.
(Ich stimme nicht mit Ihnen uberein.) 7 Der IJnterschied besteht darin,
dass ich Reoht habe, und Sie nicht. 8 Darf ich die Summe auf Sie ziehen I

9 Ich Weiss nicht, ob ich den Wechsel acceptiren kann, wenn Sie es thun.

10 Sie geben sich fiir mehr aus, als Sie sind. 11 Cirade das habe ich eben
gesagt ; war es nicht sehr ungerecht, es zu thun ? 12 Das kann ich nicht
annehmen, denn Sie sind immer gerecht. 13 Bollen vnr in einer Droachke
zur City-Kirche fahren, oder ziehen Sie unsereeigene Kapelle vorl 14 Unser
Pferd ist weder fiir unsere Karre noch fiir die Kutscbe zu gebrauchen i denn
es hat sein Hufeisen verloren. 15 Sind Sie je in dem Cksthofe nahe beim
Kanale gewesenl 16 Jene Hecke sollte mehr Gebiisch haben. 17 Was
beabsichtigen Sie mit diesem Gras zu thun? 18 Sehen Sie einmal die

\

\

Wolken an, ich glaube, wir werden Regcn haben. 19 1st es Ibnen nie in
den Sinn gekommen, dass unaere Zimmerdecken viel hiibscher aussehen
wiirden, wenn sie hoher waren T

AUFGABE XXIX.

1 Sie horchten in der Hoffnung, zu hSren, was gesprochen wurde. 2 Selten
horen Horcher viel Gutes Uber sich selbst. (" Der Horcher an der Wand hort
seine eigne Schand.") 3 Es thut mir leid, Ihren Rummer so schwer zii finden.
4 Niemand ist so schwach wie der, der nicht Nein sagen kann, wcnn er es
anf der Zunge hat. 5 Stark, starker, am starksten ist nur das Umgekehrte
Yon schwach, schwacher, am schwachsten. 6 Niemand kann in AUem
aui^ezeichnet sein. 7 £r ist ein grosser Kenner von dergleichen. 8 Nor
mit der Zeit und nur dnrch Auadauer kann man zu Auszeichnung gelangen.
9 Eine Stunde vor uns scheint lang, eine hinter uns scheint nur ein Augenblick ;
wir erwarten viel von dereinen undfinden nur wenig in derandem. 10 Wir
glauben una im' Stande, zu beurtheilen, ob dies oder jenes uns zusage oder
nicht, aber es ist moglich, dass das TJrtheil Anderer viel richtiger ist.
1 1 Weder Trottoir noch Einfassung findet sich vor dom 0])emhause. 1 2 Wozu
ist der Graben um das Denkmall 13 Sie diirfen kein Getreide in den
Keller bringen, es ist dort so feucht. 14 Mich daucht, er ist auf Lehm gebaut.

15 Ein Mann ist im Hofe mit Ihrem Reisesacke ; soil ich ihn hereinrufen 1

16 Das Fallen der Blatter (des Laubes) soUte uns an die Yerganglichkeit des
Menflchen erinnem; beide kommen von der Erde und mUssen dahin
zoriickkehren. 17 Die Kuh ist eins der niitzlichsten Thiere. 18 Man
konnte die Dampfmaschine das Thor nennen, welches aus der alten Zeit in
die. neue fiihrt.

AUFGABE XXX.

1 Die Jugend hat ihre Geniisse (ihre Freudcn) ebenso gut, wie das Alter ;
jene gehoren der Hofinung, diese den Betrachtungen an. 2 Der Weise
verachtet nichts als verschuldete Mangelhaftigkeit. 3 Es giebt manche
Fragen, die sich durchaus nicht leicht entscheiden lassen. 4 Jcder muss seine
Handlungsweise unter den Verhiiltnissen bewundert haben. 5 Der Fall
^es XJngerechten wird am wenigsten bemitleidet. 6 Es ist hochst ungerecht,
die Handlungen eines Menschen zu beurtheilen, ohne die Umstande in
emste Erwagung zu ziehen. 7 Ich werde meine Massregeln damach treffen.

8 Wer seine Gedanken verbirgt, verbirgt manchmal seine Unwissenheit.

9 Wer einen bestimmten Plan hat, hat eine bestimmte Beschiiftigung und
fiihlt daher nie Mangel an Beschafbigung. 10 Ich ginge gem auf das
Verdeck, aber es ist zu nebelicht. 11 Wissen Sie, wie viele Docks es in
London giebt ? 12 Ich vermuthe der Ausdruck **ganzgiit" bedeutet, dass
Alles in guter Ordnung ist. 13 Jener Bauemhof ist ein schones Gut.
14 Wanim sollten gute Menschen mit Schafen verglichen werden und
idilechte mit Bocken, da doch das eine Thier nicht schlechter ist als das

B

\

GSRVAN EXERCISES. 17 ^

\

THE PRACTICAL UKOUIST.

andere? Das ist ganz richtig; aber man miiss bedenken, dasB es eine
Metapher i^t, iind man muss nicht vergessen, daas ein figiirlicher Ansdrudt 4
nicht wortlich verstanden werden darf. 15 Das Takelwerk wird ym
Stricken gemacht, aber wo von ist das Steuemider verfertigtl 16 E'
Mensch ohne Kenntnisse ist wie ein Haus ohne Dach, ihm selber von keineL
Nutzen und auch Andem nicht.

AUFGABE XXXI.

1 Der Eeichthum imserer Ideen hangt von der Mannig&ltigkeit onserer
Kenntnisse ab. 2 Niemand verUert dadurch, dass er voiles Mass und Gewicht
giebt 3 Jemand hat meine Sachen in Unordnung gebracht ; ich wollte, man
bliebe davon. 4 Wo sind Sie geboren ? 5 Sind Sie von Sinnen ? 6 Kommen
Sie und setzen Sie sich neben mich. 7 Womit beschaftigen Sie sich gewohn-
lich des Abends ? 8 Ich Uebe die Lectiire eben so sehr als Yergniigongen und
Mdbe daher manchmal zu Hause und gehe manchmal aus. 9 Was halten Sie
von den Grundsatzen Ihres Principals t 10 Was ich am meisten an nnserm
Chef zu tadeln habe, ist, dass er wenig Kopf hat. II Was macht der Mann
im Walde mit einer Lampet 12 Was fur eine Menge Mehl ist auf dem
Milhlboden ! 13 Da ist eine Maus unter dem Stroh auf der Plattform.
14 Ich weiss es gewiss. (Ich bin davon iiberzeugt) 15 Es ist unmoglich, in
der Bibliothek zu arbeiten ; man spricht (plaudert) da zu viel ; kann ich im
Wohnzimmer fiir mich allein seint 16 Was ziehen Sie fiir eine weite Beiso
vor, ein Segelschiff oder ein Damp&chiff ? 17 Das ist schwer zu sagen, jedes
hat seine Vorziige ; jedoch im Ganzen genommen, glaube ich, gebiihrt der Vorang
dem Dampfboote. 18 Man kann sich kaum etwas Angenehmeres denkeo,
als Abends nebcn einem Springbrunnen zu sitzen. 19 Sie sagen, Flohe und
Manse konnen von keinem Nutzen sein ; das mag sein ; aber meine Meinung
ist, dass dieselben mehr, als wir denken, zur Keinlichkeit unser selbst und
unserer Wohnungen beitragen, indem sie uns zur Sorgfalt zwingen.

AUFGABE XXXII.

1 Man schien ziemlich geneigt, es zu begiinstigen. 2 Mag sein, dass er
sehr leidet, aber doch gewiss nicht mehr, als er h&tte erwarten konnm.
3 Wir konnen uns beinahe an AUes gewohnen. 4 Sie ist ganz ausser sich;
sic muss sich fassen. Buhe wird ihr am meisten wohlthun. 5 Zum klaren
Verstandniss ciner Sache gehort eine klare Auseinandersetzung, und das
Umgekelirte ist eben so wahr. 6 Der morgige Tag ist Etwas, uin. das der
Weise sich nicht bekiimmert, und auf den er nichts verschiebt^ das hente
gethan werden kann. 7 Es scheint mir, als ob Ihre Jahre Ihren Neigungen
weit voraus sind. 8 Blumcn und Fliegen erscheinen zu gleicher Zeit j so geht
es im Leben. 9 Giebt es nicht mehr grosse Schraubendampfer mit zwei
Schloten aLs mit einem 1 10 WoUen Sie mir den Ge£eJlen thun, daa Fenster
zuzumachen ? Es fangt an, zu hageln. 1 1 Gut gehaltene Kieep&de erhohen

OBRKAN EXERCISES. 19

sehr die Schonheit eines Gartens. 1 2 Es ist kaum moglich. den Werth der
Sisenbahnen fiir ein Volk, oder deren Werthlosigkeit fiir die Actionare zu
iiberachatzen. 13 Man sagt, Katten leben himdert Jahre ; ist das moglich 1
14 Die Weizengarbe bringt dem Dorfe mehr wahres Vergniigen, als das
Theater der Stadt. 15 Wissen Sie, wie viele Arten Pastinaken es giebt, und
welche man fur die beste halt? 16 Yon alien Wurzeln ist die am schwic-
rigsten zu erlangende die sogenannte Wurzel alles Uebels— das Geld.

AUFGABE XXXIII.

1 "Wende deine Zeit niitzlich an" hat eine Bedeutimg, wenn wir fiir
misere Arbeit bezahlt werden; aber wir sollten wohl bedenken, dass die
Bezahlung unserer Arbeit nicht bloss in Geld besteht. 2 Konnten wir immer
das Ende voraussehen, so wiirden wir ofl gar nicht anfangcn. 3 Als ich Sie
das letzte Mai bat, mir etwas G^ld zu leihen, sagten Sie, es ware Ihr Letztes.
Jetzt sagen Sie wieder dasselbe. Wie viel " Letztes " haben Sie denn eigentlich 1
4 Die MenAchen, miethen sich allerlei. Einige miethen sich Andere, um
sick Weihrauch streuen zu lassen. 5 Ein gutes Gediichtniss ist nicht immer
ein Segen, z. B. (zum Beispiel) die Erinnerung an TJnangenehmes und
besonders an die Fehler Anderer. 6 Keiner, der gesunde Beine hat, entbehrt
die Mittel, sich eben so hohe Creniisse zu verschafien, wie sie dem Reichsten
zu^nglich sind. 7 AJle Sterblichen sind dem Missgeschicke unterworfen.
Aber das grosste Ungliick, wie man glaubt, ist : das Ungliick nicht in rechter
Weise ertragen zu konnen, 8 Nimm eine Heugabel nnd stich etwas Heu
Tom Heuschober ab. 9 Lass deine Peitsche in Kuhe, wenn du bergan fahrst.

10 Das Pferd hat irgend etwas am Hufe; es kann nicht recht auftreten.
Eb wird gewiss noch fedlen, und wenn es f allt, wird es die Deichsel zerbrecheu.

11 Welche Nachlassigkeit, den Spaten auf der Treppe Uegen zu lassen; es
konnte Jemand dariiber ge&Ilen sein und sich verletzt haben. 12 Ich glaube,
mehr Menschen besuchen offentliche Yemiigungsplatze, um gesehen zu werden
als nm selber zu sehen ; denn so Wenige pflegen aufzustehen, um das herrlichste
aller Schauspiele, — den Sonnenaufgang zu sehen.

AUFGABE XXXIV.

1 Man sollte denken, dass diejenigen, welche immer etwas an der Gesell-
achaft zu tadeln haben, ganz vergessen, daas sie selber einen Theil davon bilden.
(Diejenigen, welche immer etwas an der GeseUschaft zu tadeln finden, miissen
ganz vergessen, etc.) 2 Trotz Allem, was man ilber den Werth des Geldes
sagen hort^ und der wirklich gross ist, soUte doch Weisheit unbediagt das
Hauptziel unsers Lebens sein. 3 Welcher Gegenstand, denken Sie, ist
gewohnlich den Damen am angenehmsten 1 Ein guter Heirathsantrag. 4 Der
Hauptvortheil, die Wissenschaft zur Freundin zu haben, besteht darin, dass
man immer etwas Neues in ihr entdecken kann. 5 So langc du nocli iment-
schlossen bist, schicke deinen Brief nicht ab. 6 Sie werden Ihren Weg gut
9ehen konnen ; denn es ist heller Mondschein ; der Mond ist zeitig aufgegangcn.

b2

20 THE PRACTICAL LIHOUIST.

7 Ich bin sclir gem auf einem Berge, mitten in einem Gtewitter. 8 Der
Omnibus kommt sehi* spat (bleibt sehr lange aus). 9 Wir werden nicht mehr
durch den Park kommen kiinncn ; denn der Nebel f angt an, zu steigen, nnd
wir werden nnsern Weg verlieren ; was die Marschen anbetriffl, die sind voll
Schlamm und kleinen Ffdtzen. 10 Der Affe ist mit dem Hafer auf den Mast
geklettert. 11 Da wir nun offenbar cinen liinreichenden Wortervorrath
haben, um etwas mehr schreiben zu kbimen, ais bisher versucht worden ist^
so gcdenken wir, die iibrigen fiinfzehn Aufgaben zu kurzen Skizzen zu
verwenden, die, wie wir hoffeD, nutzlichen Stoff zu StyliLbungen so wohl, als
zum weiteren Nachdcnken darbieten werden.

AUFGABE XXXV.
1 Ursache und Wirkung sollten mit einander betrachtet werden ; denn die
eine kann man ohne die andere nicht verstehen. 2 Die Folge deines Betragens
wird sein, dass du dir alle deine Freunde entfremdest. 3 Wie oft nehmen wir
liin und geniessen, ohne einen einzigen Gedanken an den grossen Urheber
aller Dinge, dem wir Alles verdanken. 4 Als ich noch ein Knabe war, dachte
ich wie ein Knabe, redete wie ein Knabe und handelte wie ein Knabe ; da ich
nun ein Mann geworden bin, sollte ich denken, reden und handeln wie ein
Mann. 6 Niemand kann leben, ohne sich Feinde zu erwerben. Aber grade das
giebt ihm Grelegenheit, sie in Freunde zu verwandeln. 6 Wenn wir nnzufrieden
mit unserem Loose (Geschicke) sind und um uns her blicken, so werden wir
Yiele sehen, die viel schlimmer daran sind und werden daiin einen Qrund
(eine Ursache) zur Dankbarkeit finden. 7 Yerlasse niemals einen Freond in
der Noth. 8 Der brennende Sand, der schneebedeckte P&dy der gestinite
Himmel, der schaumende, wie der sanft gleitende Fltuss, alle kSnnen das
Menschenherz in gleicher Weise erfreuen. 9. Wie viel ist dieser Sattel und
dieser Ziigel worth 1 10 Sie sind Ihrer Beachtung unwiirdig. 11 Ein
muthiges Pferd bedarf keiner Sporen. 12 Warte hier einen Augenblick : ich
will zu dem Wegweiser laufen und sehen, was daran geschrieben steht. 13
Es giebt kaum einen schoneren Anblick, als den des Begcnbogens. 14
Wenn wir alles, was wir Gutes reden und thun, auf die eine Seite einer Tafel
schrieben und alle unsere Mangel auf die andere, so sahen wir daa Resultat
wohl lieber gar nicht an. 15 Gesunder Samen yon irgend einer Gattimg
wird Frucht bringcn, wenn er ordentlich gesaet worden ist Wenn da also
gute Friichte begehrst, sae guten Samen.

AUFGABE XXXVI.

1 Es ist nicht schwer, zu begreifen, dass Freiheit nur denen zugestanden
werden sollte und dass nur diejenigen ihrer recht geniessen konnen, die sie
zu benutzen verstehen, ohne sie zu missbrauchen. 2 Es ist ein Irrthum, zu
glauben, dass die, welche best'andig nach sogenannt^m Yergnugen streben,
wirklichen Genuss haben; denn wahre Freude ist von jenem Frieden der
Seele unzertrennbar, den nur der Massige kennt. 3 Wenn man Jemanden

OKRMAN BZERCISS8. 21

irren aiehty so ist ee nicht immer weise, mit ihm (ianiber zu rechten ; denn, zum
Beispiel, emen Thoren von seiner Thorheit zu iiberzeugen ist Zeitverlust,
fiiUs man nicht etwa dafiir bezahlt wird. 4 Dadurch, dass man einen Stein
in einen tiefen Bnmnen wirfb, kann man seine Tiefe messen. 5 Stiirme
dienen dazu, die Luft zu reinigen. 6 Wenn du Lust hast, mit mir in das
Waarenlager zu gehen, so will ich dir deu Unterschied zwischen Weizen
und diesem Unkraut zeigen. 7 Der Stamm dieses Baumes hat bei dem
Gewitter sehr gelitten (ist beschadigt worden). 8 Wir, die wir an Eisenbahnen
gewohnt gind, haben Miihe, zu begreifen, wie die Menscben in friiheren
Zeiten noch so viel verrichten konnten. 9 Ich weiss nicht^ welcher Ansicht
Sie sein mogen ; aber ich denke, dass ein Mensch der ein Pferd oder einen
Hund besitzen kann, ohne sich um dessen BediirfnLsse zu bekiimmem, auch
in der Freundschafb von keinem besonderen Werthe ist. 10 Ich bin ganz
Ihrer Meinung. Aber was sagen Sie von einem, der nicht einmal so viel
Sorge um seine Dienstboten tragt, wie um seinen Hund 1

AUFGABE XXXVII.

1 Obgleich das Wort " Larm " irged ein Geriiusch bcdeutet, so wird es
doch beeonders von den TiJnen gebraucht, welclie dem Sprechenden xm-
angenehm sind. Es bezeichnet daher mehr zcitweiligen Gesohinack, als
irgend etwas Positives ; denn dieselbe Person wird zu verschiedenen Zeiten
dieselben Tone bald " Musik," bald ** Lai-m " nennen. 2 Der Werth der
Reinlichkeit kann nicht zu hoch angeschlagen und nicht zu dringend
empfohlen werden. Schmutz ist fiir Leib und Socle verderblich. Wie kann
man einen reinen Sinn in einem unreinen Korper erwarten ? 3 Daheim !
Es giebt doch keinen Ort, der ihm gleichkommt und keinen, aus dem sich
nicht ein *' Daheim " machen liesse ; es giebt nichts, was es ersetzcn kbnnte.
Der Arme ist darin glucklicher, als der Beiche in seinem prachtigen Hause ;
wenn es ihm keines bietet. 4 Die Pflicht allein sollte den Meuschen zwingen,
seine Handlungsweise so zu andem, dass er das tliue, was er bisher unterlassen,
mid das unterlasse, was er zu thun pBegt. Wir habcn Pflichten gegcu ims
selbst und gegen Andere, und es wird selten oder nie geschehen, dass beide
nnvereinbar sind. So lange aber die Pflicht nicht unser Vergniigen ist, werden
wir weder gegen uns selber noch gegen Andere unsere Pflicht thun. 5 Wir
Alle lieben den Ruhm, oder sollten ihn doch lieben, das heisst : Ehre, Lob,
Ruf ; diese liebe niithigt uns zu Anstrengungcn. Aber da es leicht moglich
ist^ ihn in falschen Richtungen zu sucheu, oder aus unwurdigen Handen zu
empfangen, so sollten wir Sorge tragen, nur das zu untemehmen, was uns
selber niitzlich sein muss und Andem nUtzlich sein kann, denn dadurch sichern
wir una selber Gutes, und verletzen Niemanden.

AUFGABE XXXVIII.

1 Ein Brief! Hofihung, Freude, Glllck, Angst, Kumraer, Ruin sind alle
in dem kleinen Reprasentanten des Abwesenden enthalten. Wenig ahnet

22 THE PBACnCAL LIHOUIST.

der Brieftrager (Briefbote, Postbote) wie viel Vergniigen und Sdimen er
taglich vertheilt ; wie gleichgiiltig ist ofb der Absender g^en den Sidimen,
den er verursacht, oder gegen die Frende, die er durch ein paar Worte
macht, die ilin nichts kosten. 2 Ein Vater sollfce immer sein Kind ak
sein eigues kiinftiges Selbst betrachten und sollte daher Soi^ tragen, es zu
bef ahigen, dass es seine eigne Existenz fortsetzen kiinne, und niemals Hand-
luugen begehe, deren er sich geschamt haben wiirde. Zu diesem Ende
sollte er sein Kind zu seinem Gefahrten und Yertrauten machen und sdlte
es lehren, so zu denken, wie er selbst denkt. 3 Der iat xmiser Freund, der
innigen Antheil an unserm Wohlergehen nimmt, der sich uber AlleB fireut^ was
uns wohlthut, und der Alles hasst, was uns schaden konnte, einerlei, ob das
Gute oder Bose in unsselber ist, oder von Andem ausgeht. Daher ist
deijenige nicht unser Freund, der unsere Fehler ubersieht, oder der zugiebt,
dass ein Anderer uns zu unserem Schaden willTahrig ist, was auch immer
seine Absicht sein moge. 4 Die Tugend ist ein oft missverstandener Begriff.
Er wird gewohnlich von der Handlunguwcise gebraucht, die man billigt. Es
darf daher nicht Wunder nehmen, dass oft gi"ude Entgegengesetztes mit demsel-
ben Worte bezeichnet wird, und in der Tliat finden wir, dass daa, was heute
Tugend genaimt wird, nicht nothwendigerweise auch morgen Tugend ist;
deun Tugend ist das, was grade zur Zeit und unter den Umstimden das
meiste Gute im weitesten Umfange hervorruft oder doch hervorzurufen
beabsichtigt war.

AUFGABE XXXIX.
1 "Einen Augenblick" — " warte einen Augenblick" — "ich werde es 80-
gl( ich thun" — " es wird keineu Augenblick Zeit kosten" — sind Alles Auadriicke,
um Aufschub zu verlangen, o<ler es sind Zeitschatzungen, welche andeuten,
da«8 das Eine von geringerer Wiclitigkeit ist^ als das Andere. Ist die
Scliatzung richtig, so ist auch der Ausdruck zulassig ; denn Alles hat doch
nur einen verhaltnissmassigen Werth und sollte demgemass betrachtet warden.
2 Sieh dort die Kiihe, die unter den majestatischen Baumen Schutz suchen !
WoH f iir ein lieblicher Anblick ! Was ist es anders, als ein G^estandniss
von Schwache und Abhangigkeit von fremdem Schutze t So flieht das Kind
vom Fremden zur Mutter, der Jiingling in Bedrangnissen zum Vater, das
aufetrebende Genie zur XJnterstiitzung der Grossen, und wir Alle zu €k)tt ;
denn was wir auch sein mogen, es giebt Machte, denen wir ohne Beistand nicht
widerstohen konnen. 3 Vergessen. — Nur wenige Menschen vergessen, was
sie wirklich im Gedachtniss behalten wollen, falls sLe nicht etwa zu viel
auf ein Mai untemehmen. Es giebt verschiedene Grade der Gedachtnisskraft.
Es ist weder nothwendig, noch moglich, sich Alles mit gleicher Kraft
einzupragen. Das, was uns grossen Schmerz oder grosse Freude macht, wird
selten vergessen. Der Gnind hiervon ist, dass es, mit oder gegen unsem
Willen, fur den Augenblick unsere Seele ganz beherrscht 4 Klugheit
verrichtet mehr, als Macht. Ohne sie verschwendet der Starke viel Kraft,
auf die er sich zu sclu* verlasat Mit ihr spart der Schwiichere seine Krafte fur
den reel 1 ten Zeitpunkt auf und verlasst sich nicht darau^ wenn er anderweitig

GERHAK EXERCISES. 23

Hiilfe £nden kann. Der grade W^ ist nicht immer der kiinseste. Der
Teratiindige Schiffer halt sich von der Stromung fern, wenn er stromaufwarts
ra rudem hat.

AUFGABE XL.

1 Es giebt zweierlei Arten Kriege: Angriffss und Vertheidigungskriege.
Der Krieg ist unter alleu Umstanden ein grosses Uiigliick ; denu er bringt
viel Elend iiber Alle, die damit zu tliim haben. Es giebt aber Zeiten, wo ep
untemommen werden muss, um grossere Uebel abzuwehi*en. Ist er aber
eine Nothwendigkeit geworden, so sollte er mit dem grossten Nacbdrucke
und mit aller Klugheit betrieben werden, und glorreich ist der Tod
deijenigen, welche in der Vertlieidigimg des Bechtes sterben. Das beste
Schutzmittel gegen den Kri^ und seine Schrecken ist die Bereitschafb, ilm
zu untemehmen, sobald es nothig ist, so wie der Kuf, dass, einmal dazu
gezwungen, man ihn, nicht lebend ohne Sieg aufgeben wiixL 2 Das Feuer
gehort zu jenen Dingen, deren Werth als Diener oder deren Gefahrlichkeit
als Herren man kaum zu hoch anschlagen kann. Wenn aber diese Gefahrlich-
keit sich in einer Feuersbrunst in so entsetzlicher Grosse zeigt, so diirfen wir
darum doch nicht annehmen, dass sie wirklich grosser sei, als andcre weniger
in die Augen fallende Uebel wie, zum Beispiel, schlechte Gewohnheiten, die
nur wenig beachtet werden, bis sie unersetzlichen Schaden angerichtet
haben. 3 Ordnungsliebe sollte zur Gewohnheit herangebildet werden. Ein
ordnungsliebender Mensch weiss immer eine Sache zu finden ; denn f iir jedes
hat er einen Platz und legt es naturUch dahin. Dasselbe Princij) wendet er
auch auf sein Inneres an ; denn auch sein Wissen behandelt er wie die anderen
Cregenstande, und diese geistige Ordnung zeigt sich in der Klarheit und
Folgerichtigkeit seiner Sprache; er kann sich daher leicht verstandlich machen.
Es ist eine Freude, mit einem solchen Manne zu verkehren ; wahrcnd der
Unordentliche una mit seiner Verwirrung und seinen endlosen Wiederholungen
langweilt.

AUFGABE XLI.

1 Ein Maler, der zum Arzte umgesattelt hatte, wuixle gefragt, wanim er
seine Profession aufgcgeben habe. " Aus dem Gninde," sagte er, " well meiiie
fiiihei^e Beschiiftigung meine Irrthiimer zu deutlich yerrieth ; ich habe nun eine
andere gewahlt, in welcher sie bograben werden." 2 Wahrcnd der Siidsee.
manie eroffnete eine Gesellschaft ein Bureau in Change Alley, um Unterzeich-
mmgen zum Betrage einer Million fUr einen Zweck entgegenzunehmen, der
erst nach Zeichnuug jener Summe bckannt gemacht werden sollte. Das
Publicum strumte herbei und zalilte fiinf Shillinge auf je funfzig Pfund der
Unterzeichnung. Auf diese Weise war eine grosse Summe zusammen
gebraoht, ab in einer Anzeige bekannt gemacht wurdc, dass die Unterzeichner
ihre deponirten Gelder zuriick haben konnten, da die Directoren nur beal>-
siphtigt hatten, zu sehen, wie viele Narren sich an cinem Tage zusammen
fatingen liessen. 3 Dr. Pease, Decan von Ely, wohnte einmaJ oiner

/

24 THE PRACTICAL LINOUIST.

Mahlzeit bei, als gerade am Schlusse derselben die Unterhaltuiig mch auf die
ausserordentlich grosse Sterblichkeit iinter den AdvocatMi wandte: "Wir
haben," sagte einer der Herren, " nicht weniger als sechs aiisgezeicbnete
Anwalte in eben so vielen Monaten verloren." Der Decan, der aehr
Bchwerhorig war, erhob sich, als sein Freund eben diese Bemerkung gemacht
hatte und sprach das Dankgebet: *' Fiir diese, wie fiir alle anderen Segnungen,
mache uns aufrichtig dankbar, o Herr !"

AUFGABE XLII.

1 Einer von den Gunstlingen Heinrich's, Prinzen von Wales, nachmalg
Heinrich des Fiinften, war irgend eines Vergehens wegen vor Qericht gestellt
and trotz alles Einflnsses, den er zu seinen Gunsten verwenden konnte,
verurtheilt worden. Der Prinz wurde Uber den Ausgang des Prozesses so
anfgebracbt, dass er den Kichter schlug. Dieser, William Gascoign mit
Namen, gab sofort Befehl, den Prinzen zu verhaflen, nnd der junge Heinrich,
der unterdess eingesehen hatte, welche XJnbill er den C^esetzen seines Landes
zugef ugt, liess sich ruhig von den Beamten ins Gefangniss abf iihjren. Sobald
der Konig Heinrich der Vierte davon benachrichtigt war, rief er in freudigem
Jubel aus : " Heil dem Konige, der Kichter hat, muthig genug, das Gesetz
aufrecht zu erhaltcn, und dreimal Heil, wenn er einen Sohn besitzt, der sich
solch einer Ziichtigung unterwirft." 2 Richard, der Erste, wurde bei einem
Angriffe auf die Burg Chalons in die Schulter geschossen. Als nun die
Burg gefallen war, und Richard sein Ende herannahen fiihlte, Hess er Bertram
von Gourdon, denselben, von dera er verwundet worden war, vor sich
koiumen. Als der Konig ihn erblickte, sagte er: "Was habe ich dir
gethan, das den Tod von deiner Hand verdiente?" Bertram erwiederte :
" Meinen Vater und zwei von meinen Briidem hast du mit eigener Hand
erschlagen, und mich wolltest du gleichfaUs todten (mir stelltest du gleichfaUs
nach dem Leben.) Jetzt magst du deine Rache an mir klihlen ; denn fireudig
ertrage ich jede Marter, der du mich imterwerfen kannst, seit ich ilberzeugt
bin, dass ich die Welt von einem Tyrannen befreit habe." Diese kiihne
Antwort ergiifT Ricliard so sehr, dass er Befehl gab, den Ge&ngeneu mit
einem Geschenke von hundert Shillingen in Freiheit zu setzen.

AUFGABE XLin.

1 " (Bitte,) Darf ich fragen, Herr Opie, womit Sie Ihre Farben mischen? "
redete ein Student den grossen Maler an. " Mit Gehim," war die Antwort,
und das war recht. Yiel Belehrung mochte eben nicht darin liegen, aber es
genugte, den Fragenden anzuregen. Mancher andere Kiinstler wiirde a|if
eine solche Frage eine ausfiihrliche Antwort in Bezug auf die mechanis(^e
Componition dieser und jener Farben, auf das Yerhaltniss, auf die Art des
Reibens gegeben haben; oder^ er hatte ihm vielleicht das Auftragen d<
selbcn gezeigt. Aber selbst dies wiirde ihn im entscheidenden Augei
blicke im Stich gelassen haben. Opie ging lieber sofort an den £em d(

OBRMAN lEXICRCIBWa. 2&

Sache: '*Mit G^hiriL" 2 Etty War zam Lehrer der Studenten an dear
Koniglichen Academie emannt. Einer kam zu ihm und fragte : " Wie mass
ich dies machen ? " " Yersuchen Sie selbst 1 '' Ein Anderer firagte : " Was
bedentet dieses, Herr Etty)'* ** Sehen Sie nur bin !" ^'Aber das habe icb schon
gethan." " Seben Sie nocb einmal bin I" Und sie versucbten, und sie saben
bin und saben nocb einmal bin und saben und vollbracbten, was sie nie zu
Yollbringen im Stande gewesen waren, wiire das ''Wie" oder das ''Was"

ibnen erklart, oder f iir sie ausgefiibrt worden In dem einen Falle

waren Erkennen und Ausfubren unxnittelbar, genau, lebbafb und sicber, in
dem andem mittelbar, scbwach imd sofort nacb der Auffassung wieder ver-
flogen. Seben is passiv und macbt bocbstens Noten. Hinseben ist fireiwillig ;
es ist der Menscb im Hause, der ans Fenster tritt.

AUFGABE XLIY.

1 Zur Zeit Jakobs des Ersten wablte ein junger Qeistlicber, der aufgeforderfe
war, vor dem Vicekanzler und den Yorstebem der Oxforder Collegien zu pre-
digen, den Text " Konnet ibr denn nicbt eine Stimde mit mir wacben 1 "
Da der Vicekanzler sebr scblafrig war und ganz ausser Stande, es zu verbergen,
so wiederholte der Prediger seinen Text sebr nacbdriicklicb am Scblusse
jeder Abtbeilung seiner Predigt. Jedesmal erwacbte der arme Vicekanzler,
und dies wiederbolte sicb so oft, dass alle Anwesenden zuletzt den Scberz
deutUcb versteben konnten. Der Vicekanzler wurde Uber die Stoning, die ihm
widerfubr ynd iiber das, dadurcb veranlasste, Grerede so au^ebracbt, dass er
sicb beim Erzbiscbofe von Canterbury beklagte, und dieser liess sofort den
jungen Geistlicben kommen, lun ibm wegen seines Betragens Vorwiirfe zu
macben. Im Laufe der Unterredung zwischen beiden legte jedocb der Pre-
diger so viele Proben seines Scbarfsinns und seiner Qedi^nbeit ab, dass Seine
Gnaden ibm die Ebre yerscbafften, vor dem Konige zu predigen« Aucb bier
iibte er seinen Witz. £r wahlte zum Texte : " Jakob der Erste und der
Secbste, scbwanke niohtT' worin natiirlicber Weise alle Anwesenden einen
Seitenbieb auf den wankelmiitbigen Cbaracter des Konigs erblickten (erkann-
ten). Jakob, der den Sinn eben so scbnell verstand, nef aus: "Da bat
er micb schon." Aber er war im Ganzen so sebr mit der Predigt und dem
Prediger zufrieden, dass er ibn zu einem seiner Kapellane emannte. Spater
ging derselbe nacb Oxford imd hielt eine Abscbiedsrede Uber den Text :
" Scblafe zu und rube dich aus !''

AUFGABE XLV.

1 Der Recbtsgelebrte Davy, der wie mancber Anders zuweilen Fragen
stellte, obne die wabrscheinliche oder moglicbe Antwort zu erwagen, wollte
eines Tages seinen Witz leuchten lassen und sagte zu einem Herm, der im
Gerichtshofe von King's Bench erschienen war, um fiir eine Summe von 3000
Pfiind Biirgscbaft; zu Icisten : " Sagen Sie mir doch, wie wollen Sie beweisen,

i

26 THE PRA.CTICAL LINQUI8T.

dass Sie 3000 Pfund im Venndgen besitzen?" Der Herr detaillirie sein
Yermogen bis znm Betrage von 2,940 Pfund. ''Alles recht gut/' sagte
der Becht^elehrte, <' aber Sie bediirfen noch sechssdg Pfund, um 3000 Pfund
zu beaitzen." "Fiir den Betrag," erwiederte jener keineswegs verbliifil,
'' halte ich einen Wechsel Ton einem gewissen Herm Bechtsgelehrten Davy
in Handen und hoffe, dass derselbe ehrenhaft genug sein wild, ibn bald zu
bezahlen." Das Gelachter^ das diese Antwort verursaobte, ergriff sogar den
Eichter. Der Hechtsgelehrte sah verbluifb aus, und Lord Mansfield sagte
in seinem gewbhnlichen, hoflichen Tone : " Nun, Bruder Davy, ich denke, wir
konnen den Biirgen wohl annehmen." 2 '* Glauben Sie an Yorherbestim-
mimg'^) fragte ein MiBaissippi-Capit&i einen Calviuistischen Qeistlichen an
Bord seines Schififes. ** Allerdings." " Und glauben Sie auch, dass das, was
geschehen soil, geschehen wird?" — "Allerdings." "Gut, ich bin froh, das
zu hbren." — "Warum?" — "Weil ich vorhabe, jenes Schiff da vor uns in
f unfzehn Minuten zu Uberfliigeln, wenn festes Fichtenholz und Sicherheits-
ventile irgend Werth haben. Beunruhigen Sie sich also nicht ; denn wenn
die Kessel nicht springen sollen, so werden sie es auch nicht." Hier fing
der Geistliche an, eine unruhige Miene anzunehmen und wegzuriicken, als der
Capitan sagte : " Ich dachte, Sie glaubten an Yorherbestimmung und dass,
was geschehen soil, geschehen wird t " " Das thue ich auch, aber ich ziehe vor,
dem Hintertheile etwaa naher zu sein, wenn es geschehen sollte."

AUFGABE XLYI.

1 Themistocles, welcher den Plan entworfen hatte, die Lacedamonier zu
verdrangen und ihnen die Herrschaft Griechenlands zu entreissen, um sie den
Athenem zuzuwenden,hielt Auge und Sinn bestandig auf diesen grossenEntwurf
gerichtet, und da er in der Wahl seiner Maassregeln eben nicht sehr rucksichts-
voll Oder gewiasenhafb war, so sah er Alles fiir gerecht und gesetzmassig an,
Was dem grossen Ziele, das er im Auge hatte, naher fuhren konnte. So
erklarte er denn eines Tages in einer allgemeinen Yolksversammlung, dass
er einen sehr wichtigen Yorschlag zu machen habe, dass er denselben aber
nicht offentlich enthullen kbnne, weil der Erfolg nur durch die tie&te
Geheimhaltung gesichert werden kQnne ; daher wiinsche er, dass man Jemanden
erwahlen mbge, dem er den Gegenstand vbllig entdecken konne. Die ganze
Yersammlung w^hlte einstimmig Aristides, in dessen Kechtschaifenheit und
Klugheit man ein so grosses Yertrauen setzte, dass man sich in dieser
Angelegenheit ganz auf seine Ansicht verliess. Themistocles nahm ihn dann
bei Seite und sagte ihm, der Plan, den er entworfen, sei, die Flotte, die dem
ubrigen Griechenland angehiire und in einem benachbarten Hafen liege, zu
verbrennen ; dadurch wUrde Athen unzweifelhait die Beherrscherin von ganz
Griechenland werden. Hierauf kehrte Aristides in die Yersammlung
zuriick und erklarte nur, dass nichts von gruaserem Yortheile fiir das
Gemeinwohl sein kbnne, als der Plan des Themistocles, zugleich aber auch
nichts in der Welt ungerechter. Alles Yolk beschloss einstimmig, Themistocles
solle von seinem Yorhaben ganzlich abstehen.

GERXAN BXE&CISE8. 27

ATJFGABE XLVIL

1 Als Ayiditis Oassius sich gegen den Kaiser. Marcus Aurelius emport
and den Yeimich gemacht hatte, die Begienmg an sich zu reissen, drang die
Kaiserin Pausdna in einem Schreiben an ihren Gremahl auf die ausserste
Strenge gegen die Mitverschworenen des Cassiua Der Kaiser aber, der
iiiir den Itegungen seiner eignen Qutmiitliigkeit Gehor gab, sandte ihr
Folgendes zur Antwort : " Ich babe, meine liebe Faustina, Dein Schreiben
gelesen, in welchem Du mir anrathst, die C^ahrten des .Cassius mit der
aussersten Strenge zu behandeln, die sie nach Deiner Meinung verdienen.
Das sehe ich als ein P£aiid der Uebe an, die Du fiir Deinen Gemahl
and fiir Deine Kinder hegst ; erlaube mir jedoch, meine liebe Faustina, die
Kinder des Cassius, seinen Schwiegersohn und seine Frau zu verschonen und
midi fiir sle beim Senate zu verwenden. Niohts kann einen romischen
Kaiser in der Achtung der Welt hoher stellen als Barmhendgkeit. Sie hat den
Caesar unter die Getter erhoben, hat den Namen Augustus geheiligt, hat
Deinem Yater den Beinamen des Frommen verschafft." Einige von seinen
Freunden tadelten ihn offen wegen seiner Milde und nahmen es sich heraus,
ihm zu sagen, dass Cassius nicht so grossmiithig gewesen sein wiird^, wenH
das Schicksal ihn begiinstigt hatte. Der Kaiser aber erwiederte ihnen sofort :
" Wir haben nicht so bose gelebt und haben nicht so treulos den Gottem
gedient^ dass sie Cassius batten begiinstigen soUen." Das Missgeschick
einiger seiner Yorganger, setzte er hinzu, sei ganz und gar eine Folge ihrer
schlechten Auffuhrung und ihrer Grausamkeiten gewesen, und kein guter
Fiirst sei jemaJs von einem Thronrauber besiegt oder ersohlagen worden.

AUFGABE XLYIII.

Die Spanischen Geschichtschreiber erzahlen einen merkwlirdigen Fall
von Ehrgefiihl und Wahrheitsliebe. Ein Spanisher Cavalier erschlug in einem
plotzlichen Streite einen Maurischen Edelmann und ergriff die Flucht.
Seine Yerfolger verloren ihn bald aus den Augen ; denn er war unbemerkt
iiber eine Gartenmauer gesprungen. Da der Eigenthiimer, ein Mam'e, zufallig
in dem Garten war, iiel der Spanier Yor ihm auf die Knie, erzahlte ihm, was
vorgefallen, und flehte ihn an, ihn zu verbergen. " Iss dieses," sagte der
Maure und gab ihm einen haJben PfirsicL " Du weisst nun, dass Du Dich auf
meinen Schutz yerlassen kannst." Darauf schloss er ihn in sein Garten-
zimmer ein und sagte ihni^ sobald es Abend w&re, wiirde er fiir sein Ent-
kommen an einen sicherem Ort sorgen* Darauf ging der Maure in seine
Wohnung, und kaum hatte er skh gesetzt, so erschien ein grosser Haufe
Menschen yor seinem Thore mit der Leiche seines Sohnes, der so eben von
einem Spanier getodtet worden. Er uberzeugte sich bald, dass die ungliickliche
That von eben demselben Manne veriibt worden war, den er in seiner
C^walt hatte. Er verrieth es/ gegen Niemanden, aber zur festgesetzten
Zeit zog er sich in den Garten zuruck und gab Befehl, dass ihm Niemand folgen
BoUte, als ob er sicli dort ungestort seinem Schmerze zu iiberlassen wunsche.

38 TBE PRACTICAL LOroUIST.

Als er den Spanier erblickte, ngte er: ''WiaBe, o Christy der, den Du
erachlagen hast, ist mein Sohn; seine Leiche ist in meinem SLanse. Du
soUtest dafiir biissen, aber Da hast mit mir gegessen, ich habe Dir mein Wort
g^eben, und das darf nicht gebrochen werden." Dann fiihrte er ihn in
den Stall, setzte ihn auf eins seiner schnellsten Pferde nnd sagte : ^ Fliehe
weit Ton hier, so lange die Nacht Dich verbeigen kann, nnd am Moigen wirst
Da in Sicherheit sein. Wahrlich, Da hast das Bhit meines Sohnes auf
Dir, aber Gott ist gut und gerecht, and ich danke Ihm, dass ich onsdmldig
bin an Deinem l^te und dass ich mein g^ebnes Wort gehalten habe."

ATJFGABE XLTX.

1 In jedes Menschen Leben muss es Augenblicke geben, wo er sich
aufrichtig priift, ob sein Betragen und die Griinde f iir seine Handlungen seiner
Ueberzeugung nach recht sind. Heil dem, der aich zur rechten Zeit priift
und das au%iebt, was er selber nicht billigen kann. Der Kanlinal Wolsej
sagte Yor seinem Ende : '^ Hatte ich meinem Gotte eben so eifrig gedient^ wie
meinem Konige, so wiirde er mich nun in meinem Greisenalter nicht
verlassen haben." 2 Wahrend die Mitkaiser des Constantius die Christen mit
Feuer und Schwert verfolgten, stellte er sich eine Zeit lang^ als verfo^ er
sie ebenfiGklls und erklarte seinen Hofbeamten und Statthaltem, dass er
denjenigen imter ihnen, welche sich zum Christenthume bekennten, freie Wahl
lasse, den GK)ttem zu opfem und sich dadurch ihre Aemter zu sichem, oder durch
festes Beharren in ihrem Glauben Amt und kaiserliche Gunst zu verwirken.
Als Alle ihre Erklarungen abgegeben batten, enthiillte der Kaiser seine
wahre Gesinnung, tadelte in den hartesten AusdrUcken diejenigen, welche
ihrem Glauben entsagt batten und pries sehr die Tugend und Bestandigkeit
derer, welche die Schatze imd Eitelkeiten dieser Welt yerachtet, entliess
jene, indem er sagte, dass die, die ihren €k>tt verrathen, keinen Anstand
nehmen wiirden, ihren Fiirsten zu verrathen ; diese aber behielt er in seinem
Dienste, bildete seine Leibwache aus ihnen und vertraute ihnen die ganze
Leitimg offentlicher Angel^enheiten an, als Menschen, auf deren Treue er
rechnen konnte und auf die er voiles Yertrauen setzen durfbe.

AUFGABE L.

1 Als man dem Socrates ankiindigte, dass die Athener ihn zum Tode
verurtheilt batten, antwortete er, ohne die geringste Bew^ung : ** Hat die
Natur sie nicht ebenfalls verurtheilt) '' ApoUodorus, einer von seinen Freunden
und Schiilem, drlickte seinen Schmerz dariiber aus, dass er unschuldig sterbe.
" Wie," erwiederte er lachelnd, "wolltest du lieber, dass ich schuldig sturbel"
" Ich soil," sagte er mit edler Buhe zu seinen Hichtem, " auf euem Befehl den
Tod erleiden, zu dem doch die Natur mich vom Augenblicke meiner G^burt
an verurtheilt hat; meine Anklager aber werden nach den Beschliissen der
Wahrheit nicht weniger von Schande und Ungerechtigkeit zu leiden haben."

GBRMAN EXVRCI8B& 29

man ihm den Todesbecher brachte, leerte er ihn mit ergtaunlicher
agkeit imd einer unbeschreiblichen Heiterkeit ana Bis dahin batten

seine Freunde mit grosser Anstrengung der Tbranen enthalten ; als er
* das Gift getrunken hatte, waren sie nicbt mebr ibrer Geftible macbtig,
lem weinten laut. ApoUodorus, der scbon eine Zeit lang in Tbranen
»tanden, fing nun mit solcbem Uebermasse des Sebmerzes zu irebkbigen
dass es die Herzen aller Anwesenden dnrcbdiang. Socrates allein blieb
ewegt und tadelte sogar, obgleiob mit gewobnter Milde und GutmUtbig-
y seine Freunde. ''Was macbt ibr)" sagte er zu ibnen. ''Icb bin
mndert Uber eucb. Was ist aus eurer Tugend gewordenf Habe icb
it darum die Weiber fortgescbickt, damit sie nicbt dieser Scbwache
eim&Ilen soUten? Icb babe immer sagen boren, dass man in Frieden
ben miisse und im Lobe der €K)tter. Icb bitte eucb, seid rubig und zeigt
\r Festigkeit und Entscblouenbeit.''

I

THE ANECDOTES.

GERMAN ANECDOTES. 33

6^ bet gottlic^ fprop^t fein 93ater(anb mit bem Std^t bed ©(aubend
erfeui^tde, tpaten bte S(tabec ©o^enbiener. 6te t)vrc^rtcn einen guten unb
etncn (ofen ®ott unb fctctten iebem befonbcrd eincn Xa^ in bet SBod^. !Dcr
etne Sag tt)urbe fuc glucflu^ ge^ten, unb mx an i§m tot bent jfontge erfc^ten,
bem tt)ucbe feine SUte o^ne @inf(^r&nfung gcn^a^rt. S93cr abet bte Un))or{t(^^
ttgfett beging, on bem unglucflic^en 3^age tH)r ben Zfjton bed i(onig6 ju fomtnen,
bet n)urbe o^ne 93ergug bem bofen ©otte jum ®u§nopfer gcbrac^t

(So tt>at bie @itte bed Sanbed, aid untcr bet Siegtcrung bad ffonigd 9Iaam
etn retc^er Slrabec Ht 2Bufle, mit 9lamen 3^ai, burc^ Setaubung unb aQerlei
Unglucf in folc^ Slnmtt^ geriet^, baf er fc^on feit }tt)ei S^agen fetiie Speife me^c
fur feine ff Inbcr ^e. Sluf einmal erinnerte cr fic^ ber greigebigf cit bed itonigd
^aam, bee f einen S)urfittgen o^ne ©cbe t)on {td(^ Kef ; er mac^te [id) auf, fupte
feine Srau unb feine if iiiber, t^erfprac^ in einigcn Stunben mit Sla^rungdmitteln
n)ieber bei i^nen }u fein unb jog in grof er @i(e feined 993eged.

(SrfuDt t>on feinem (Slenbe unb \>on ber <&offnung eincr na^en «&u(fe, licf
ZcA &ugfUi(^ fort, bid er ^cx bem S^^ron bed ifonigd erfd^ien, o^ue aud^ nur mit
(Sinem ©ebanfen baran gu benfen, baf ^eute ber Za^ bed bofen ©otted fein
Unne. Slber faum f^ttt i^n 92aam erbUcft, fo voaniU er fein ©eftd^t ))on i^m
unb rief : „Ung(ficnii^er I ts^ai f)a^ bu get^an ? SSarum muf tefl bu an einem
fo trourigen Sage t)or mein S[ngefid(^t f ommen ? !Du bifl bed Sobed/'

S)iefe Stebe ftt^r toie ein 91i^ burc^ Sai'd @ce(e unb erinnerte i^n an bad
graufame Dpfergefe^. @r koarf fic^ bem ffonige ju Suf en unb flc^te i^n an,
feinen Sob nur noc^ einige @tunben auf}ufd^iebcn. ,,3Rcine Srau unb meine
i^inber f^altn jtoei Sage nid^t gegeffen/' fprad^ er, „ fte mxitn eincd Haglic^en
Sobed flerben, n)enn id^ i^nen nic^t ei(ig einige Sebendmittcl jurucfbringe. ©ib
mir ettt^ad ©peife, unb laf mic^ {te noc^ einmal fc^en, um auf immcr Slbfd^icb
)9on i^nen ju ne^men. S)u bifl gu gerec^t, al^ baf bu ben Unfc^ulbigen mit bem
SJerbrec^er ))erberben foQtefl. 3(^ fc^toore bir bet SlDem, tva^ ^cilig ifl, ))or
Untergang ber Sonne n^ieber ^ter }u fein ; bann fpric^ bad Sobedurt^eil ibcr
mic^ aud, unb id^ tt^erbe mic^ i^m obne ^Dlurren untertoerfen/'

3)er itonig tourbe burc^ biefe Slnrcbe geru^rt unb fpradb ; „ ttnglucHid^er
JRann I ^a& 93oIf t)er(angt bid^ jum Dpfer unb toirb in SQut^ gerat^en, toenn
l^ bidb entflie^en laffe. 3(^ ^abc ^itleiben mit bir ; aber ic^ fann bir bie Sitte
unter feiner anbern 93ebingung getoa^rcn, aid u^cnn bu einen Surgen fleQefi,
ber ^df flott beiner jum Dpfer erbietet, im gall bu bcine 3ufage bradfjefi. 2)u
bauerft mic^ ; aber ed ift bad §arte ©cfe^ meined Saubed/'

Sai wax fremb, uub Stiemanb fauute i^n. (Sr fa^ mit n>e^mut^igem SHcf

•34 GERMAN AXECD0TB3.

auf 9Qe, tic urn ten Zbion funten: aicx Uinct UHigte ed, ftd^ attf bad SSoit
cine? grcmtling^ ;u rcrlaifcn unt fur (cine Xrcue Surge ju fcin. Xai m*
gwcifclte f*cn, a\^ er nabe am Jbrcn etncn *i9Idiui bcmcrfte, bet i^n mit cMcm
WitUit anfab. ^Unb hiT rc^rte ibn Zai mit I^rancn in ben STugen an,
^ hi, au^ teffen Sfngencbt eine gre^e ^eete leucbtet, tinnttft mi!fy bu bie Sitte
f ine^ unglucflicbcn ^Yannc^ unb $atrr^ abfcUiigen ? 3(^ fc^n>ore bir bei ben
@ottcm unb ^cnhben, ta^ icb biefen 91bcnb txnr €onnenuntergang toubtt fjut
fein vrerbe."

Scberif — fo bieg ber Gble, ber ein Sejier unb )ugrei(^ SiebHng bed iKnIgd
WMr — batte ein ^en, bad an bad gegebene ®crt treuer SRenfd^n glaubte. @r
n>anbte ni jum ffonig unb fagte : „ 3cb »iU Surge fur ZcA tt>erben." 3)«r
ficnig erf*tiif# benn aui nr befunttete, ber SremMtng xotxbt niS)t ®ort
balten. Qx fab ben SSejicr bebeutenb an ; aber Stberif bfieb bei feiner Sulagit,
unb Zai elite mit 3p:ife ;u feiner ^au unb w fetnen JNnbem.

3nbeffen t>erflcf bie bejKmmte ^tit; bie Sonne neigte ftc^ gu t^rem ttnter^
gang, itnb Zed n>ar no^ nicbt bo. 2)ad Solf t>er(angte mit Ungeftilm fein
Subncpfer, unb Sc^if tt>urbe gebunben jum Slltare gefu^. @r trot ^inju,
obnefic^ ju beflagen; aUe feierlic^ 3w*«rriningen nniren t>oHenbet, unb t^x
^riefler jucfte fcbon bad flcincme Cpfermeffer, aid fic^ plb^Uif in ber Jeme ein
©cfcbrei erbcb. Zai felbftn>ar ber [Rufenbe, ber auperSIt^em, ganj mit ©d^weif
unb Staub bebecft, auf ber ^ne berbetetlte unb ftc^ burc^ bad flauntnbe Sol!
fWrjte. Gr fiel Sc^if ju Supen, lefete feine Sanbe, ric^ete i^ auf unb fc^Icf
i^n in feine SIrme. Sange brucfte er i^n fcbn>eigenb an fein <^er3 unb ffftai)
enblic^: ,, ©rofmut^iger Sc^crif, wie balb ^e bitb mein 35gem getobtet!
©ebanft fei ed ben ® otter n, ta^ icb ju rec^^er 3eit fam, bic^ gu retten. 3(^ flerJe
gufrieben, benn i^ n>cif , bu nnrfl bic^ meined armen SSeibed unb meiner ^ulf^
Iffen JMeinen erbarmen." €<^crif fupte if)n unb tt>einte : „ 3c^ will i^ Satcr
unb $reunb fein unb meine <^abe mit i^nen t^ten.^ €o flanben fie noSf ba,
al^ bad Self ein (auted 3ubc(gefcbrci er^ob unb feined graufamen Opferd t>i)&ig
vergaf ; ber 5f onig unb alte gble feined ^ofed nwren geru^rt. „ 9tk f^att i(^
eured ©leid^n gefelkn,*' rief Slaam. „ 2)u, Zai, bifi ein 9Rufler ber S^reue ; xmb
bu, ©c^erif, ber grc^mutbigfle ber 9Kenf(^>en." (Sx blirfte na^ bem Dbetpriefler,
ber fc^n auf bie be^ ©c^trelle bed aitard getreten nwr unb gu bem S3offe reben
iDoUte. ,f 3^r ® ISubigen," rief er, „ @c^rif unb S^ai ^aben burc^ i^ Sugenben
ben ^cm bed @otted t>erf5^nt, ber feine btutigen Opfer me^ forbert. Son
l^e an opfem tvir ^onig unb ^MIc^, gum S^^cn^ ^^5 ^ 5fonigd Zffcm
frttten Untett^anen an jebem 3;age erfreulic^ nnb ^ilbringenb fein muffc.''

So fi>rad& ber Dberpriefier, unb bad Solf gab i^m burd^ ein grof ed ^reubem
|^(^ Seifall. !I>er Aonig banfte i^m mit freunblid^^ @eberbe ; er uber^&uftc
bm armen, reblid^n Xai mit SBo^U^ten unb gett>ann ben grof milt^igen ^Hfttit
tmi mm an um fo lieber.

OEBMAN ANECDOTES. 35

(Sin SKorgcn aud Sect^otjcti'd Scbcn.

S)ad anbred^cnbc %a%t^lii)t fam))fte nodb nttt bet [d^iDinbenben !DunTeIf|c{t.
3tt)ei iterjcn crleudb^ctcn tin gcraumfgcd 3iin>n«t. 5)cr SBewo^ner beffelben
^tc eben — ed tear bic fcc^te gru^flimbc — bad Sacjcr \>crlaffcn unb fap bereitd
an eincm 5PuIte unb arbeitcte. 2)ic ©inrid^tung bc6 3innnetd war burgerlid^
l^iibfc^, aber ni^t lofJbar. ®n gortcpfano, auf bcm cine SSiofinc unb eine
SSioIa laflcn, toax o^nc 3tt>cifel bad t^ucrfJe 6tucf bed ganjen SImeublemcntd.
SBo^in ba^ 2luge ftc^ ttanbte, traf ed auf Unorbnung : bad 3intmer n>ar nod^
nid^t oufgerfiumt ; Sud^r unb 3)lanufcripte n>aren ^ier unb bort orbnungdlod
oufgefd^id^tet ; ber Slrbeitenbe faf gttifc^n ©tOf en t)on ^apieren, (ad forgfaltig
in dnem umfangreid^en 9Ranufcript unb maci)tt feine Serbefferungen, — er fd^ien
eben bie lefcte ^anb an ein SBet! ju (egen.

@r trug einen grauen ^^audrodf, ein SJlittelbing jtt)ifc^en ©d^Iafrotf unb
Sapottt, an bm gu^en ein $aar giljfc^u^e unb urn ben ^atd ein nad^Iaffig
gcfniipfled Zui), 2)er Siixpa tt>ax Hein unb gebrungen, ber itnod^cnbau jiarf ,
bie SRudfuIotur fraftig. 2)er o^ncbem gro^c ffopf tt)urbe burc^ einen 2BaIb
P^pifl^^f fd^ttjarjgraucr ^aare, beren t)ernac^(a^igtcr 3nfianb i^m ein
t)ertt)ilberted JBfudfet^en gab, fc^einbar noc^ t)ergr6^ert. 2)ad Slntli^, glatt unb
barttod, toax toie mit einem girnif t>on diotf) unb Sraun uberjogen: man
erfannte, baf ed in le^terer S'^it an^altenb ber freien 8uft unb ben ©onnem
^a^len audgefefct gett>e[cn toax. Unter ber brciten, ^o^en Stirne geigte jidji
ettoad t)erflecft ein $aar Heiner brauner Sugen, eine breite 9la[e, bagcgen ein
gut gcformter Wlunb mit einem uberaud liebreic^en Sad^eln. ^ct^ JHnn mit
feiner beiberfeitigen mufc^elartigen SSertiefung "otxlkf) ber ^^v^fiognomic einen
gutigen Siudbrucf , ben feibft finfiere iaum unb mi^trauifc^d Sruten, ja fogar
ein 3otnaudbrudO nid^t ganj ju ^erwifd^en t)ermod^te. 2)iefer Wann, bem Slltet
nac^ an bie aRitte ber SJierjig jireifenb, war Subwig t>on a3eet^ot)en.

SBa^renb brinnen ber 9Reifier an eine feiner gigantifd^en ©d^opfungen bie
Icftte geile legte, faf im Sorjimmer fein 2)iener, eine treue fliei^ige ©eele, ami)
fd)on an Jber 2lrbeit unb fd;neiberte mit einem ©fer unb einer Segeifierung
barouf lod, aid ob ed galte, ein itleib fur bie @n)igfeit ju fd^affen. Se^t er^ob
ftc^ a3eet^ot)en, fu^r mit ber flad^en ^anb uber bie ©time unb rief : „ itaffee I"
2)er Sebiente fam ^crein, unb ber 9Rei^er, »(m i^m unterfiuftt, begann felbfi
bie Sereitung bed gru^^ucfd. SBa^renb ber 2)iener SBaffer unb aWilc^ gum
geuer fteQte, faf 93ect^ot>en am Z\\d)t unb }&^(te aud einer blec^emen
S3uc^^fe fed^jig gebrannte So^nen ^raud, bie er in bie itaffeemu^Ie fc^uttcte.
„ @o/' fagte er, „ je^t fannft 3)u ben itaffee madfien 5 ^ab' 2Ic^t, ba^ fein

v6 OEKUAN ANECDOTES.

ffom f|frau« fpringt!" — Dtr Ilfenet nirfte uitb ritf: „©(^ flirt, Cun

3n birfcm 9(ugent>(iifc ri^tetc fic^ SSm^ovend @ef)alt geta^ onf, n fc^
urn me^rere ^oUe grader fleworben unb geiixutn eln f uqwrrirenbed Mnfe^ ; bit
nrintn Slugen trotcn In ungmo^nlii^ @rb^t ifmor unb mlllm, ben Stmt
nad} obm getcanbt, im SFreife ^mim, uber feint €tirne jog eti wit cine 9Sttln<
ivolFf, unb man trfannte an ber fCRajeftat ba @rfc^tnung, baf fn bfefcm
3Iugent)(ide ber @etf) dnen fefner mac^tigtn ©ebanftnblitK in tie fierb(i(^ ^iSt
gefeiifl fytttt. Di)nt fti$ ju Tcgen, Uieb Seet^oDtn cine SQcile in birfn
begtifterten €Hminung; bann btwegle rr fi(^ met^anifc^ jum $idtt unii
jeittmete PtfKnb rinlge %aftt mil (enen fiirjm pui^tigen Jinltn, bfe man e^ ph
S5ciftri(^ nia fur^lotcn tjalt*" modjfe, bie a&rtgemlfftn unanfe^nli^nWenft(ifli
gli(^n, nKl($e Jm ^erjcn ein ^aiabied von ©tfu^Ien unb im Stop^t cEne SStU
»on ©ebonfen bergen.

Untetbeffen war bet Jag tMig angebrai^n, bie fferjen TOurben gelofijl, bit
Sor^ngc juriicfgeft^iagen, unb S3eet^o9en mac^ite fu^ raitbet an Me Sfrbcil.
3)em ©cifpiele be« .^errn folgte ber I)iener. 9alb ^eirft^te tn bem OaortlcK
bie frfl^re ©tlDe, innen folgte SRote auf S'lote, oufien ©lii^ auf ©tic^.

(Sine SHJeile fpStet Betlicfi ber SSei^er wiebet blc arbett unb rief: „gtif((i
@a|Tcr 1" !Der 3)tenet elite mit einem m&c^tigen Strait gum Srunnen, unb aM
er jurucffam, fanb er ben $errn bereltS im tiefften 9ttgllg^ am ^a\(f}btStn, unb
nun fanb tine ber eigent^umlit^^en @cenen ftatt.

Scet^ovcn bcgitnn ben 3nE^U eined SSafr^iFrflgleln^ urn ben anbem flber bit
$&nbe unb ben niebergebeugten ftopf ju f(^fltten. 2)abei murmelte er anfangtf
leife, bann wuibe er tauter unb immet lauttr, b\9 a enblld^ — unb ba0 wm fein
@efang— lout gu ^tcn anftng, wobei feine Sugen rDtlten unb feine
Segeiflerung mft jebcm j^ruge junatim. £)E|ne auf felnen bun^n&^rn 3iif^nb
gu a^ten, begab er jl{^ gum ©{^eibtlfc^ie, notirte fJii4)tlg einige ©ebanfen unb
fe^rte bann gum Seden gurucf, urn bie SBafc^ung von Steuem gu beginnen, wobei
er wemSgll^ no<^ fflr^terlic^r fang.

SBa^renb biefer ©cene panb ber Dlenec feit»att8 unb bllrfte em|i b'rein, unb
vergog (cine ^Sliene ; benn, ^tf er'S get^n, te xo&u urn feinen SlenR gef(^^n
genwfen. @r fa^, wie ba3 Beden uberpi[t£|cte, wie fein $ere uber unb fiber im
aQaffer ftmb, ffiie ber gugboben gang ubctfii^roemmt war, unb er florte {e^t bie naffe
Segeifierung tben fo »entg Wlc fru^ei bie tnxfene, er ac^ete biefe „ Stunbe ber
titfPen 9Rebitation " feineS §crm. Siber bie fjeutige SQSaft^bung foBte bo*
nidft gang o^ne (Stoning voriibcr ge^n.

SJfetboten panb no(6 immet am BeAn, ale bie I^re aufflog, unb ein
grower, robufier SRann ^ereinRiirjte. fSi roar ber ^nu«befieer, ber untet ii)m

OBBMAN AKBCDOTES. 37

too^nte. ,f»&err t)on S3cet^ot>cn/' brutttc er mit ciner ©timmc, bit an Wc
^ofoune y>ott 3eric^o mafirttt, „ jcftt f)aV ic^'6 gcnufl !"

9cft^ot>en fiiette i^n mit cincm furd^ter({c|fen SKdfe an unb fagte burr,
troden, old ob er in feinem Seben f einen Sropfen SSafferd gefe^en ^e : ;, 3(^
lux^ nic^t V S)arauf gof er iDieber einen ihug t>oD uber bie J^hnie.

„^ttt t)on Sect^ot)en!" fd^rie ber ^au^n todttx, „i^ ^abee«3^nen
bereitf breimol gefagt, baf iif mein ^aud nid^t ruiniren (affe. S)ad SBaffer
bringt bereitd burc^ btn 2)ie(boben unb rinnt in mdn Simmer 1''

i,!X>adifini(l^tmog(ic^l''

„ @)e^n @ie ^inab unb uberjeugen @ie {{d^ felb^ V

,r2)ie loerfluc^ten Saumeifter V brummte S3eet^o))en unb ergriff }um (Sntfe^en
M 9Ranned noc^mald ben SBafferfrug.

„^m t)on Seet^o))eni 3c^ erfud)e @te emfHic^, 3^re SBafc^ungen
einjufleDem''

n^vit mir leib, ic^ fann o^ne biefen tfirfifc^n Srauc^ nid^t leben.''

„ ^amt tDerben @ie fo gut fein, mein ^ava ju "ottlaf^tnJ'

i^SRuMflleid^fein?"

tf 3c^ tt)erbe 3ljnen funbigen.**

„ Zffun ®{e n)ad @ie n)oIIen, aber (affen @ie mic^ in Stu^e I"

n 3d^ f^V gleic^ Sebenfen getragen, ®ie in'd «&aud au ne^men ; benn id^
ffiiV fc^on %t\fiftt, ®ie bleiben in feinem <^aufe lang n)o^nen/^

;r !Dad i^ n)a^r/' t>erfe(te ber 3)leifler mit Saune, ,, unb ic^ muf 3^nen
oufric^tig befennen, mnn \6) ^audbeft^er n>&re, tuurbe ic^ mic^ fe(bfl in meinem
^aufe nic^t bulben.''

S>iefed nai))e Sefenntnif brad^te ben entrufleten ^oud^erm jum Sac^en, unb
93eet^(n)en gof ftc^ nun ben (e^en j^rug uber ben 5?opf. 3ener fa^ il^n t>erb(itf|fi
on unb fogte : ^ 3c^ begreife nidt;t, xoit 3^nen biefe SSafd^erei SSergnugen mad^n
lann!"

!Der SReif^er fa^ i^n n)e^mut^ig an unb em)ieberte : „ SRein ^od^ee^rtefler
$au6^err, @ie begreifen gar SJfanc^ed nic|)t, xoa^ mir SSergnugen mac^t, fo xoit
©ie anbererfeitd gar SSicted uid^t faffen, wad mic^ fd^merjlii^ beru^rt ober bid in'd
tieffie Seben t>em)unbet. 3e^t ^ben @ie bie ®ute unb laffen @ie xaxi) aUein,
ic^ muf arbeiten V

S>er t^aud^err n>ar ^oflic^ genug, ben !Diiet^mann gu gruf en, unb ging
fcrummenb t)on bannen.

„ t^eute ifi'd fc^on n)ieber aud mit ber Sirbeit V* fagte 3eet^o))en gu feinem
IDiener. „ Sring je^t tpenigflend bie @tube in Orbnung 1''

38 OBBMAN AKSCDOTES.

Sortfcftung au6 »&efnc'd Sleifcbilbcm.

3>cr ffurfurfi 3an SBil^cIm foU ein brat>cr ^crt flrtDefen frin, unb fe^t
funftlicbcnb, unb fetbfl fe^r gefc^irft. gr fiiftetc bic ©emar^e^flotterie in Duffck
borf, unb auf bem borttgen Obfcn)atoctum jeigt man noc^ cinen fiberou^ funfi^
U\i)tn @inf(^ac^te(ungdbcc|fcr t)on ^ol), bener felbft in fetnen Steiflunben —
er ^atte bcren t&glic^ t)ier unb innrnjig — gefc^nt^U fyA.

£ama(3 trarcn bie Surften nod) hint geplagte S<ute n)ie je^t, rnib bie j^rone
xtax itjntn am j^epfe fe^getoac^fen, unb bed Stated gogen fte nod^ eine
@c^lafmut)e baruber, unb fd;Itefen ru^ig, unb ru^tg ju ibren Suf m fcbliefen bie
QSoltcr, unb wenn bicfe bc6 iDiorgend ewac^ten, fo fagten fte : „ gutcn ^Rov^tn,
SSater !" — unb jeiie antwortcten : „ guten 9»orgen, liebe ftinber I'' Ubcr ed
tvurbe pIo^Uc^ anber^ ; al^ n>ir eincd 3Rorgcn^ ju SDuffclborf emjat^ten, unb
„ guten ^orgen, Siater !'' fagen tooUten, ba n>ar bcr SBoter abgereift, unb in bcr
ganjen 6tabt n^ac nic^td aid flum))fe ScfUmmung, ed n>ar ubcratl eine 9lrt
Scgrabnt^fiimmung, unb bie Scute fd^Ii^n fcbn>eigenb nacb bem "^SRcaftt, unb
(afcn ben (angen papieruen 3[rifc(,'(ag auf bet S^bure bed Slotb^aufed. @d n>ar
ein trubed SBettcr, unb bcr bunne ©db^eiber JMlian flanb bennocb in feincr
9{anquinja(fe, bie er fonft nur im «^au[e trug, unb bie blaumoQnen Strumpfe
bingen i^m f)ixab, baf bie notften Seincben bctrubt ^rt)orgu(ften, unb feine
fcbmalen Sippen bebtcn, n>abrenb er bad ongefc^Iagene $lacat t)or ftcb b^^niur^
meftc. (Sin alter pfoljifcber ^n^oaUbe la^ etn)ad lautcr unb bei manc^em SSBcrte
tv afelte i^m eine flare 2;^rane in ben tteipen, e^rlicben ©cbnauftbart. 3cb jianb
ncben ibm unb n>vinte mit, unb frug ibn: tvantm toir n>cinten? ttnb ba
antwortete er : „ ber if urfurfi laf t ficb bcbanlen." Unb bann lad er loieber, unb
bei ben 993orten „ fur bie ben>a^rte Untcrt^ancntreue '' „ unb entbinben @U(b
(Surer ^Pflicbten" ba ujcinte er nocb fiar!cr.— (Sd ifi ttunberlicb anjufc^n totm
fo ein alter "SHann, mit t>crb(id^ner Uniform unb t>ernarbtem @olbatengefubt,
ploftlidb fo ftarf tt>eint. SSSa^renb tt)ir lafen, n>urbe aucb bca^ furfurfilicbe 9Rcppen
t)om Stat^^aufe bcruntergenommen, aQcd gefialtete ficb fo bcdngfiigenb obe, ed
war, aid ob man eine ©onnenpnjiernip erwarte, bie ^crren 9latbd^errcn gingcn
fo abgebanft unb langfam um^er, fogar ber allgcwaltige @affent)ogt fab aud, aW
wenn er nic^td mef)r ju befcblen b^tte, unb fianb ba fo fricblicb^letcbgultig/
obglcicb bcr telle Sllouiftud ficb wieber auf ein Scin ficllte unb mit nanifcber
®rimmaffe bie 9lamen ber franjcftfcben ©enerale ^erfcbnatterte, tt>a^renb ber
bcfoffcne frumme ©umper^ ficb i<i ^^^ ®<>fT^ ^erumn>alite unb sa-ira, ^a-iral
fang.

3cb abcr ging nacb ^^aufe, unb weinte unb Hagte • „ ber ihirfurjl lapt ficb

GERMAN ANECDOTES. 39

WKwfen." SWelnc SWuttcr ^ottc i^e Hc6c 3totf), Of tpufte tt)ad Idfy ton^k, mb
Hef mix nid^td au^rcbcn, i^ ging njcinenb ju Sctte, unb in bcr ^ad)t tr&umtc
mit, Me SQBelt fyibt cin (Snbc — bic fc^oncn Sfumctifl&rten unb gruncn SBiefen
tDurben tule !£cpp{d(^ ))otn Soben mtfgenommen unb jufammengeroDt, bet
©affcm>oigt ftieg auf elnc ^o^e 8citer unb mf)m blc Sonne t)om »&lmmel ^erab,
bet ©d^neiber Silian flanb babel unb fptac^ ju jtc^ felber : „ i^ muf nac^ <§aufe
ge^tt unb mid^ l^ubfc^ anjie^n, benn i6) bin tobt, unb [oil nod^ ^eute begraben
werben" — unb ed tturbe immer bunKer, fpirtic^ fd^immerten oben elnige ©terne
unb aadf blefe fielen ^erab trie gelbe Slfittet im ^erbfle, aflma^Ilc^ t)erfc^tt)anben
bie SJteufd^ i6f armed jfinb inte &ngfHid^ um^r, fianb enbUc^ t)or btx
SBeibenl^dfe eined A)uflen Sauet^ofed unb fa^ bort einen 3Jtann, bcr mit bent
®))aten bie @rbe aufn)u^(te, unb neben ifjtn ein ^&plic^ f)&mif^ed 9Qeib, bad
etwod ttrfe einen abgefc^inittenen SWenfc^enFopf in ber ©d^iirje ^ielt, unb bad war
ber aJlonb, unb jie legte i^n Sngfilic^ forgfam in bie offne ©rube — unb t)intet
mhr flanb bet )>fa(3if^e 3n))alibe unb fd^Iud^jte unb bu^flabirte : „ bet jhtrfitrfl
loft fld^ bebanfen."

S[(d ic^ txxoadjk, fd^ien bie @onne n>iebet n>ie gen)5f)n(ic^ butd^ bad ^enfter,
auf bet @traf e ging bie S^rommel, aid ic^ in unfre SQo^nftube trat unb meinem
SSotet, ber im tteipen ^ubetmantel faf, einen gutcn SRorgen bot, ^otte ic^, wk
bet leic^tfiif ige Stifeut i^m tt>a^renb bed ^tijtrend ^aarflein erja^Ite : ba^ f^xxk
auf bem Stat^^aufe bem neuen @tof ^et}og 3oad;im ge^ulbigt n>etbe, unb baf
biefet t)on bet beflcn gamilie fei, unb bie ®c^tt)e|iet bed itaifetd Slapoleon jut
Stau befommen, unb aud^ n)irf lic^ t>iel SInfianb bejt^e, unb fein fdboned fd^noarjed
^aac in iodtn ttage, unb nad^fiend feinen (Sinjug ^Iten unb fic^et alien
gtauenjimmetn gefaHcn mufle. Untetbeffen ging bad ©etrommel, brau^en auf
bet @trape, immer fort^ unb ic^ trat t)or bie ^audt^ur unb befa^ bie
einmarfd^ierenben fronjofif^n iEruppen, bad freubige SSolf bed Slummed, bad
flngenb unb flingenb bie SBelt burc^jog, bie ^citcrn ernflen ©renabiergeflc^ter
bie SBirenmu^cn, bie breifarbigen itofarben, bie blinfenben SBajonette, bie
JBoItigeujd t)oII Sitfligfeit unb ^Point b'^onneur, unb bcr aflmfic^tig grofen,
filbetgejiicften lambouv^aRaior, bet [einen ©tod mit bem t)crgolbeten itnopf bid
an bie erfle Stage tverfen fonnte unb [eine Slugen fogar bid jur jwciten Stage—
\\)o ebenfalld [c^Bne Siabc^en am genfler [afcn. 3d^ freute mlc^, baf tt>it
Sinquartirung befamen — meine 9Jlutter [rente [i(f) nic^t— unb ic^ eilte nadf; bem
SRarftpIa^; ba \at) c^ ganj anberd audj edtt)ar, aid ob bie 2BeIt ncu angefhic^en
tt)orben, ein neued SBappen t)ing am JRatf)f)au[e, bad Slfcngcianber an bcffen
SBalcon Yoar mit gefiidtten ©ammetbeden uber^ftngt, [ranjofi[c^e ©renabiere fianben
©c^^ilbwad^e, bie altcn ^errcn 9lat^d^errcn f)atkn neue ©efic^ter angejogen unb
trugen i^re ©onntagdrorfe, unb [a^en fid{> an auf franjofi[c|f unb [prac^en bon

40 GXRMAN ANECDOTES.

jour, au6 alien genflem gudftcn 2)amcn, ncugierigc Surget^Icutc unb blanfe
©olbatcn fulltcn ben ^lai}, unb id) ncbfi anbcrn itnaben, voir Hettetten mtf bo*
grof e 5hirfurflcnvferb iinb fc^auten bat)on ^erab in ba6 bunte SRarftgewimmel.

?Rac^bar6^?Pittcr unb ber langc ffurj {fatten bel bicfer ®e(egen^eit beina^'
ben t&ate gebroc^en, unb bad ware gut gewcfen, benn ber 6ine entllcf na*^cr
feincn Sttern, ging unter bie ©olbaten, bcfertirte, unb n)urbe in ®^aing tobtge^
f^oflfen; ber Slnbere aber madfk fpSter^in gcagrrp^ifd)e Ujtterfud^ungen in
frembcn Slafd^en, wurbc bed^alb voixUnM 9RitgIleb einer offentfid^en ©jjinnan*
fiatt, jerrif bie elfernen Sanbe, bie i^n an biefe unb an ba^ SSaterlanb feffelten,
tarn glucflid^ uber bad SQaffer, unb fiarb in Sonbon burdb ^i"^ a((juenge Srat)attc;
bie {tci^ t)on felbfi }ugejogen, aid if)m ein foniglic^et Seamier bai^ Srett unter ben
Seinen ttegrif .

2)er tange Jhirj fagte und, baf ^eute f eine S^ule fei, ttegen ber .^ulbigung.
SBir muf ten lange n>arten, bid biefe todgelaflen n)urbe. Snblic^ fuUte fid; ber
Salcon bed SRat^^aufed mit bunten ^crren, ga^nen unb 3;rom>>eten, unb ber
t^err Surgermcifler, in feincm bcru^mten rotten dtod ^ielt eine JRebe, bie ^if
tttt>a^ in bie Sange jog, ttie ©ummi^Slaflicum, ober ttie eine geflricfte @^Iaf^
mu^e, in bie man einen ©tein gen>orfen — nur nic^^t ben ©tein ber SQBeifen — unb
manege SJebendarten fonnte id) ganj beutlic^ t>emet)men, j. S. baf man und
glurflid^ mac^fen tt)oHe — unb beim Icftten SBorte tturben bie S^rompeten geblafen,
unb bie ga^nen gefd^wenft, unb bie llrommel gcru^rt, unb 93it)at gerufcn — unb
njfi^renb id) felbcr SJiMt rief, ^ielt id) mid) fefi an bem atten Jhirfurfien. Unb
bad ii)at 9lot^, benn mir touxbt orbentUd^ fc^^winblidji, ic^ glaubte fc^on, bie imtt
fWaben auf ben itopfen, mil ^d) bie 2BeIt ^erumgebre^t, bad Jhirfurfienffaupt
mit ber Sllongeperucfe nicfte unb flufierte 5 „ ^alt fefi an mir !" — unb erfl bmd)
bad 5?anoniren, t>a& je^t auf bem 993a(Ie lodging, emud^terte ic^ mic^, unb ftieg
t)om Jhirfurflcnpferb (angfam n^icber ^erab.

Slid ic^ nac^ <^aud ging, fa^ ic^ tpieber, n)ie ber toKe SlCouiftud auf einem
Seine tanjte, wa^renb er bie 9lamen ber franjofifd^en ©enerole fc^^narrte, unb
toie ^id) ber frumme ®um))er^ bcfoffen in ber ®offe ^crumto&Ijte unb ^a-ira,
9a'ira bruUte, unb ju meiner Gutter fagte id) : man n)iU und glucflic^ mac^n
unb bed^alb ifl ^eute feine @d)u(e.

GEBXAN ANECDOTES. 41

3n ^kmoxA, am 9ufe eined f^fjtn Sergei, (iegt eine ^({d^ ^ttxf^%
torfd^ bU^enbe @tabte unb )){e(e fd^one 2)orfer in {{c^ begreift. 2)ct crfle
Slorfgraf, bem bitfe 8anbf(^aft eigcnt^umlid^ juge^ortc, ^ief SSoIt^. 6r toor
dii 9Xasm fd^n ^on ©efiolt, r^rbar ))on Sitten, jung ))on 3a^ren, reid^ begabt
mit Serponb. Slber oQe feine Keigung toot fo fe^t bet 3agb unb bem Sogel^
fonge jugefe^, baf ex bod Slnbere boruber ))ergaf unb fid) bet Stegierung feined
Sonbed g&nilic^ entfd^Iug. @o ^otte er au(^ feine Sufi jum «&e{rat^en, nic^t
aid ob eln ®elflbbe i^n abgel^alten ^tte, fonbern bie gepriefene $rei^it unb
bie iktt gum unab^ngigen Seben unb jur Selbfl^errfc^aft (iep i^n an feine
tXfdidft SBerbinbung benfen. 9Benn ba^r gute Sreunbe gu i^m ))on feincr
Serm&^lung fprad^en, fo )>flegte er n)o^( }U emiebem : „ 3d^ mag meine $rei^it
iiic^t t>erfaufeti uub nic^t ein SBeib jur SDtitregentin annc^men. @o (ange ic^
bbig bin, tl^ue id^, tpod ic^ tolU : n>enn ic^ abet t)er^eirat^et bin, fo muf ic^
tlebnold t^un, toad meine $rau toill. 3:^ue id) biefed nic^t, fo ^be ld> eine
loibemiQige 9rau unb jugleic^ 3anf unb ^aber im ^aufe 1" 2)ie Untergebenen
t)etbrof biefed SSerfa^ren i^red ^emi ; fie ^ten ed gar ju geme gefe^en, loenn
i^ ^err eine glucftic^e @^ eingegangen unb @rben feiner ©liter l^interlaffcn
ffitU. 2)ie Sorne^mfien ber ©raffc^aft berat^fc^Iagten ba^er, loie fte bie ®ad^
onflellen unb il^ren ^errn jum ^eirat^en t)erm5gen fonnten. !Deptoegen
erft^ienen fie eined Skiged indgefammt t)or bem ^Jtarfgrafen, unb ber SSornc^mfle
untcr i^ncn rebete i^n mit folgenben SBorten an :

„ @n&biger «&err unb ^arfgraf ! 2)ie ^reunblid^feit ^er ©naben gibt und
ben 9tut^ frei ^aud ju reben, toa^ toir in unferem @inne gefaf t ^aben. Sir
l^ffen nk^ baf 3^r fetched ubel aufne^men mxitt, mii @ure ©ute unb (Suer
t>&terli(^d ©emutl^ und 3U(en genugfam befannt finb. SSir fd^^a^en und glucflid^,
einen fo lieben ^erm ju ^aben unb t)on i^m befd^u^t ju toerbcn. Sir tourben
und ober noc^ xAd glucflic^er ad^ten, toenn tt>ii Sure marfgr&flic^e ©naben fflr
etoig bei und be^Iten fonnten. 9lun tt)iffm n)ir, baf bief nid^^t moglid^ ifi. 2)ad
Koc^fie aber ware, n>enn toir @urcm e^elid;en @rben in Siebe bienen unb unter^
t^nig fein burflen. Unfer «^cn ifl jtvar je^t noc^ jung t)on Sa^ren unb flarf
an ihaften ^ er meif aber, bap bie nac^f ommeuben 3a^re biefe jtraft oerje^ren
toerben. 3)ef megen ifi unfere untert^anige Sitte, bap @ure ©naben geru^en
mogen, burc^ eine 9icrma^(ung SBebac^t barauf ju ne^men, baf @ie in
ertounfc^ten Srben fortlebcn unb bereinft 3^r 8anb fortregicren. SBirb unfer
binigcd 93cge^ren cr^ort unb und ein Siuftrag gn&bigfi gegeben, fo tooUen toir

42

dn %tiaskin fur (Sua Qnabtn ou^fui^n, tad on Gkblitt, ©c^nl^tt imb
tugmtlu^ bitten unferem J^etm am afftdidf^ fern tDtrb.''

9uf fciqe ffiortc fc^wicg Der @raf cine Britlong fKB uirf) ta(^ bem Sor#
fc^Ia^e noiff. €o fc^tDcr ed t^n anfam, fo ubemonb i^ Mb am 6nbe bit iitit
jti fditcn Unutfymm mtb tt tnt^ifle^ {u^ t^em Segt^ )tt iDiU^slfen. @o
fptai) tt btnn ju tfinen : „ ^cine (teben Smmbe ! Sure tetnttl^tgr Sitte ttM^t^
mi(^, euc^ ^ ttHUfof^ren tmi) ju t^un, toad u^ tite tm Sinne gr^oit ^obe.
2)enn i(^ ^e mir oUejdt t>orgmommeti, mdne Sm^tt t>oUig )U bt^en,
bU im S^onbe n)o^ fc^mrlic^ mag er^en loerbtn ; mm abet untcnoerfe
id} mic^ fcdtoillig bem SSiUen mriner Untert^tun, bomil fie trfenncn, ba$ i(^
{te liebe unb ba^ idf old ein Safer i^nen t>or}u^e^n bege^ 3d)o<^ beboide
idf midf ffir eucr ancrbieten, mir dne ®ema^lin ju eriefen, bie mdned ®ld£bcn
fdn foil. 3)iefe 3Jiut)e will ic|f fclb^ auf mic|f nc^men, unb ic^ t^ertrauc IJierin
auf bie ^flife bed SlKer^&d^ften, ber in Seine «&anbe bod ®liuf bed (S^^nbed
gelegt ^at. Gr n>lrb mir ein SBeib jufufiren, wetted mrin ^eil unb meine
9tn^e nid)i ^inbem, unb augleic^ eurem 9i eriangen, bie Siegierung in mdnem
^aufe gefic^rt }U fef^en, ©enfige t^un wirb. 6ined abcr foUt i^r mir tjerfprec^
unb fiaUen: ba^ i^r biejenige, bie ic^ ju meinem (S^eu)eib auderiefen W^,
aid SKarfgrafin unb aid eure ^errin e^en unb i^r untert^ fdn woUtt &
foil auc^ Reiner unter euc^ fein, welc^r fiber meine SBBa^l eined SBeibed jemal6
flage, fonbcm biejenige, bie mcin (gf)egema^l toerben wirb, bie foUt i^r, (M
tt>are fie bie !Ioc^ter eined romifc^en gurjien, e^ren unb fur eure gebietenbe grau
^rfennen."

Ucber biefe 2lntn)ort bed ®rafen erfreuten fid^ bie t)erfammelten 3)iena
^od&Iic^; unb tt>arcn ganj bercitn>iUig, bem Sege^ren i^red ^mn ju willfa^ren
©ie t)erf>)ra(^en bcfwcgen mit einem fcierlidjien ©elubbe, ber grou^ bie et
tttohf^kn VDfirbe, untert^nig ju fein, unb, mlifcx 8Irt fie aud^ fein follte, im
©eringlien nid)t n>iber fie gu Hagen. 2)arauf f^ieben fie getrofl t)i)n bem
aJlarfgrafen unb erwartetcn mit SBcrlangen, tt)ad fur dne 3)ame er ju feinet
©raut em>S^Ien tturbe.

3)er ®raf aber braclfite einige 3;age in tiefem Slad^finnen baruber ^in, toed
ffir elne grau er ne^men follte. Qnblid) entfc^lop er fit^, kint fiolje ©rbin,
fonbern ein bcmutf)igcd 9Rabc^en ju erfiefcn, bad i^m in Slllcra wiUfa^ren tt)urbe.
8lld ba^cr einige S93od^en ^erfloffen waren unb er fic^ in feinem (Sntf^Iuffe fefb
gefc^t f)atU, ba bcfaf)l er feinem ^aud^ofmeifi:r, SlKed ju ber nad^ftfunftigen
^oc^jeit fcrtlg ju mac^cn. 9loc^ tt)uf te 9liemanb, tveld^e 3ungfrau bie Srout
fein foltte, unb ber ®raf tt)oUte ed auc^ 9iiemanb offenbaren, fo oft er barum
bcfragt njurbe.

3«j«)ifd(ien n>arb Sdled auf furftll^ ffieife tjorbereitet unb t)ide ^o^e ®4Pe

QERMAN ANECDOTES. 43

tourben gelobcn. !Der ^oc^ettlic^ Z% mf)it f^ttan, o^ne t)ap Semanb n)uf tc,
iwn manncn ble Stout fommen fo((te. £er ®raf ruflete golbene Stinge unb
Ol^renge^nge, bie er einem anbern ^abc^en, tt>d6)c feincr Sraut an 3Bud(ife
flleit^ tear, ^ttc anmcffcn laffen. 933ie nun ber bc^immte lag ^bcige!ommen
unb bie gelobenen ®afle in grof er SRenge gegenn>artig n^arcn, fo fe^Ite 9iiemanb
me^r M bie marfgr&flii^ 93raut. !£)a entf^anb eine gro^e SSemunbming unter
alien 2lnttcfenbcn, ja e^ emuc^ fogar ber ^mi^tl, ob ed nic^jt mit ber ganjen
^c^ltit nur auf einen mut^n>iQigen Sj^erj abgefc^cn [ei. !Die @tunbe bed
9Rittagdtna^led mar gefommen ; 3intmer unb Xi\d)c n^aren gegiert, bie fefUic^n
©peifen bereit ; bennod^ n>urbe fein SBort )>ernommen, mlifc^ 8r&u(ein fur bie
Sraut bed ®rafen erflart feL ^nU^t \af)m jtc^ bie ®4fle genot^igt, ben ®rafen
ju fragen, toaxnm fie bcnn eigcntlic^ jur <&oc^jeit gelaben feien. @r aber gab
i^nen jur 2lnttt>ort, fie foflten o^ue ©orgcn [ein j bie SBraut fei fc^on auf bem
ffiege 5 afle moc^^ten fidb M'8 mac^en, i^r entgcgcn ju gc^en unb jie mit gebu^
renbcn @^ren }u empfangen. @o fammclten {td^ benn aQe gelabenen ^errcn unb
grauen unb begaben \ii) indgefammt jum ®c^Ioj|e ^inaud. 93or i^ncn ^r ritt
ber ^arfgraf mit ^oc^jeitUc^en iticibem anget^an, neben if)m fu^ren in fefiUc^cn
SBagen einige Gbelfraucn, tt>dd)t bie Srautflciber nebft allem n>eiblic^en 3i^trat^
tjcrfc^loffen mit flc^ fu^rten. 3)er ^oc^geitlic^e Sefljug n>ar auf biefe SBeife in
bad nid^fle S)orf gcfommcn, unb 9iiemanb tt)u^te, n>o^in er UKiter ge^cn follte.
@(eic^n)o^( t)erbreitete fic^ ein bunHed ®eruc^t unter ben ®af}cn, bap ^ier ber
Ort fci, tt)o ber ®raf jic^ feine Sraut ertt)ft^len n>urbc, unb, obgleic^ ^ 9lie^
manb einbilben fonnte, auf mdc^e SBeife bief gefc!;e^en fo((te, fo fatten ^i^ boc^
alle Sauemmibd^en bed 3)orfed, ju mclc^en bie ©age gieidbfalld gebrungen war,
aud 9lcugierbe ))crfammeU unb ^arrten auf bie abcnteuerlic^e SBrautn)a^( bed
3Rarfgrafen-

9{un (ebte in biefem 2)orfe, in bem nur tvenige unb (auter arme 93auern
tpoljnten, ein 3Wann, ^lameiid 3anicula, ber armjie unter SlHcn, ber eine einjige
Soc^^ter fyittt, mldft ® r i f e I b i d t)u^ ; fo arm fie ttJar, fo fc^on tt>ar fie t)on
©eflalt, tugenbfam »on ©itten unb mit t)iclen ®abcn ber 9latur gcfc^miicft. Sie
^utete bie tvenigen ©c^jafc if)red SSatcrd, unb bradl^te bie meifte ^dt auf bem
gelbe JU ; bennoc^ to^k fie alle Spcifen fur bie ^au5gcnoffen, unb bie ^albe
^ad)t tjcrbrac^te fie alle ^dt mit Spiinivn. 3l}ien ©Itiru \r>ax[K in alien
2)ingen ge^orfam unb ben SBerfen Der 2lnbac(;t fefjr ergeben. 3)iefed SSauern^
mabc^en ^atte ber 9}{arfgraf im 9Jorub(rreiten t)ielmal mit Slugen gefe^en unb
i^re ©itten tt)ot)l beobad^tet. Sc^on lai^ge trug er ju i^r eine aufrid^tige Sieigung
im ^erjen, unb tt>ar eutfcl;loffen, fic^ mit i^r ju ^crma^len.

3u ber Sdt nun, ba bie .^od^jeit^gafie in bad •l)orf famen, roar bie gute
®rifelbid am Srunnen geroefen unb eilte je^t eben mit i^rem jhuge nac^ <^aud,

4\ OEBICAK ANECDOTES.

urn ga^ldd) mit ben anbern 9)f&bd^n ju fe^cn, toof^ benn Me Sraut fommen
follte. 9l(d fie abtx i^rem <&aufe na^te, trot i^r bet ®raf entgegen unb fprac^
ju i^r: ,,@rifelbi6, too ifl 2)ein JBater?" 5)ad Wibc^n neiflte ftc^ gar Hef
unb fpro^ mit grof er g^rerbietunfl : „(Stifl ju ^aufe, fln&biget ^err." „ ?af
if)n JU mir ^au6!ommen/' fagte ber ®raf. 2110 Me^ gefc^e^n toot, na^m bet
SRarfgraf ben Sauetn bet ber ^anb, fu^rte if)n ein tvenig bei ®eite unb fptac^
mil ^e((er €timme ju i^m alfo :

,,3c^ tt>eif, mein (ieber 3anicula, baf !Du e(n frommetr unb oufrid^Hger
^ann bifi, unb bap !Du mir a(d !Deinem ^erm in alien 2)ingen ge^orfam fein
tt)irjt : bef wegen frage ii^ 2)i(^ : SBitt^ 3)u mit 3)eine Sod^ter ©rifelbi^ jur
@^e gebcn, unb mic^, 2)einen «&erm, gu einem @ibam ^aben?'' IDer gute,
alte ^ann erfiarrte uber biefet Stebe unb tpuf te niSft, n>ad et barubcr benfeit
ober fagen foltte. @rfi ate i^n ber ®raf ju einet SlnhDort nJt^igte, ^pxadf er
mit 3ittem : „ ©nfibiget ^err, id& finbe oox ©d^recfen leine Slntwott ; dbn tt>eil
3^t mein ^ert fe^b, fo batf i^ nic^td Slnbeted n)o((en, ate toa^ @uc^ sefoKiA
ifi. Unb fo ed benn @uet @tnji 1% meine arme Soc^tet jut @l^e gu neljmen,
fo bin id^ okl gu geting, (Su(^ ^ierin gu ttiberf>>red^en/' 5)et ®taf ettoieberte :
„ ®ut ! fo lap und gttei allcin in @uer ^aud ge^en. 3c^ muf ben SBillen
S)einer iEoc^ter erFennen, unb fie uber einige 2)inge befragen."

©0 blieben alle ^^oc^geit^gSfie braupen in ^od)fier aSertounberung fle^n ;
ber @raf aber ging mit bem SJater in bad ^au6, na^m bie Soc^ter bei bet
^anb unb fj)rad^ : „ 2BeiI ed fottjo^l 3)einem 98ater al6 mir gefaltt, baf S)u
mein SBeib fein folleft, ®rifelbi0, fo ^offe ic^, ed mtbt 2)ir nid^t miffaUen/
mic^ gut 6^e gu nc^men." 2)ie t)erfi6r|e 3ungfrau erfd^rarf, aW wnn ber
^immel uber fie ^erabftele unb bie @rbe bre^tc ftd^ mit i^r. 2)er ®raf aber
fpracti i^r mit freunblid^en SBorten gu : „ gurd^te 2)ic^ nic^t, meine liebe ©rifelbid,
benn 2)u bifi e^, bie ic^ oox aflen SBeibem ber Srbe gu meinet Sraut
auderfo^ren f^abc ; unb mnn 2)u barein willigefl, fo tterbe ic^ mic^ nod^ ^ute
mit IDir^crmSfilcn." ©rifelbid neigte fic^ in 2)emut^ unb anttoortcte : ,,®n5biger
^err! id^ erfenne mic^ gtt)ar fo grower @^rcn gang unb gar untt)flrbig; glei^
too^i, njenn e6 (Suer cmfllid^er SQSille unb Surcd ^ergend 5Dlcinung ifl, mid^
armed SauemmSbd^en gu Surer !Dienerin angune^mcn, fo barf ic^ mic^ mcinem
^erren nid;t n^iberfefcen." 2)arauf fpradi) ber ®raf mit ernfler 3Riene : „ S^c
ic^ 2)ic^ benn gur @^e ne^me, fragc icb !Did^, ®rifclbid, ob 2)u mit freiwilligem
^ergen bcrcit feicfl, mir in Slllem ge^orfam gu fein, in feinem 3)inge meinem
fflSillen gu wiberfkeben ; fo bap 2)u Silled, tt>ad id^ mit 5)ir t^un werbe, o^ne
ein faured ®cfic^t unb o^ue ein ranged SBort tragen ttolkfl?" — „®nabiger
«&err ®raf/' erttjleberte bie Suugfrau, „ tt>enn idf) bie grope (St)xt, bie mir nic^t
gebuf)ret, ^aben foil, @ure ®cma^Iin gu fein, fo terfpred^ id), nic^td wiffentlic^

GEBMAN ANBCDOTBS. 45

ju t^uit obtx }U Oenfett, waA tDiber (Suetr ^tti tt)&rc ; 3^r totxitt mix nid;td
tSfun unb nid^td befe^Ieti, ttxid id^ ubel aufmfjtnt, nub foUtet 3^r mid^ auc^
Perben ^if en." JDicfe SBorte gcfielcn bem ®rafen tt)o^l unb cr fprad^ freubig :
„ di x^ genug ! mnn 2)u biefed t^un n)t((fi, fo bege^re id^ tuciter nid^^td »oii
a)ir !"

2>am{t na^m er fie an bet ;!^anb, f&^rte {{e gum ^aufe ^tnaue unb jeigte
fte alien 9nn)efenben; fprac^ auc^ boju mtt (auter @timme: „Siefe 3ungfrau
^iet {{} meine Sraut, biefc ifi @ure gnabige $rau; fte e^ret, {te (iebet, unb,
tooftxn 3^¥ midfi n)ert^ f^abt, fo ^abet fte noc^ t)iel me^r tt>ert^.'' Unb nun
befall er ben befleUten @be(frauen, baf {te bie ^{agb atebalb i^rer Sauemflciber
berauben, unb fit mit ^errUd^en 93rautgen)anben jieren foDten, ba$ {te i^retn
neuen Stanbe gem&|l in bed @rafen $aud einjie^en f onnte. !Die grauen na^mcn
ba9 SJtobd^n auf offenetr @trape untetr {tc^ unb fd^(o{fen einen bic^ten 5hreid urn
{te, fo baf 9ttemanb fe^n fonnte, n)ad {td^ mtt i^r begab. 2)a entfletbcten {te
bie Sungfrou i^rer b&urifc^en ftleiber unb }terten {te fo fc^on, ba^ man fte fautn
toteber erfennen fonnte. S(I6 fte nun fo in aUa (SiU aufgefd^mucft toax, ba^
{te einet @raftn unb nid^t me^r einet 93&urin glid^, n)urbe {ie oon beu ^rauen
bem @tafen jugefu^rt unb aid feine tourbige 93raut ))otge^eQt. 2)er ^arfgraf
}og ben betreitge^oUenen S^tauring ^ert)or, {lecfte t^r benfelben an ben finger,
unb t)erf))rac^ {tc^ offentKc^ mit i^r t)or aDem 93o(fe. ^ierauf jlie^ er bie Sraut
auf ein fdbnretoeif ed 5Pferb feften, unb fu^rte {te mit @^ren unb greubcn nac^
feinem grafiicven @d^Io{fe. !Dad 93olf (ief fd^aarenn>eife nad^ unb rief mit jubeln^
ber @timme : „ @d (ebe ®rife(bid !'' inbem ed aug(ei(^ ber 3ungfrau @lucf unb
i^eil }u biefer un))er^offten @^re A)unfd^te. 2)ie S^rauung tourbe nod^ an betm
felben 2;age mit grof er SeierU^feit auf btm @d^Io{fe ))oIl20gen unb bie «&od^jeit
in aDen Sreuben abge^alten, unb ba toar 9liemanb, ber ftd^ ni^t uber bicfe
feltene «&eirat^ auf 'd «g)6d^{Je loertounbert, aber au(S) erfreut ffittt 2)enn ed fc^ien,
aid l^te @ott biefe ^eirat^ im ^immel felb{} gefc^Io{fen, unb ber frommen
@rifelbid fo befonbere @nabengaben ^erabgefc^icft, baf man meinte, {te fei ni^t
in einem Souem^aufe, fonbern an einem abelic^n $of ergogen n^orben, mit fo
jierlid^en @itten, mit fo Diel ^lug^eit unb 93er(}anb, mit fold^er Sreunblicbfeit
jeigte fte {id^ U^abt ; ba^er fte benn aud) ))on alien ^oc^lic^ t)ere^rt unb gelicbt
tt)urbe. 3a, biejenigen, bie {te t)on 3ugenb auf gefannt fatten, lounten {tc^ jeftt
faum me^r ^ox^tUm, ba^ fte bed armen 3anicula'd S^od^ter n)ar. 9Iud^ lebte
bad dfjtpaax in folc^er Siebe unb @inigfeit, baf feined bad anbere mit bem
geringften SBort erjurnte, unb beibe gaben i^ren Untert^nen bad fd^onfte 93or^
bilb ber 3^ugenb unb ber Stommigfeit.

6§e ein 3a^r gu (Snbe gegangen war, gebar ©rifefbid jur ^6c^{len gteube

4f^

uB0c^ €1X1 <|ar fifione^ '^tiataiL 9st wot Sbbk Qfctecnt ^U^ fc^icii ctBC
9€uaBcncic( ^50t:^e;^nri^ fa ^dxL & tB9t&]fE afar iioe 9dtast taut ^ntbetUi^
^tcae, nktsuAt ana S^xbts^ rnm ggftrnqflffrn fb lofe^nftien, aid ttort
t6is em laii^cz E0611 ?ie{ &i!^er ^esoBdexi; i^ ehm Xoter Ibm moAe gtoor
lie ^ot i^fcircCr 1109 Ot f^ax wi wait wdK^ pi ^pos^ ^fspt fie efio&d, old n
ti^er fic fSict «^o6iir mzr; lociacft to ie Ikie} Kt i{ro#er @dmQ), imb
ttflii^iM fitp vvadi n^tFotlMt ^rfmrWi'tfgg jisxs Oontft fs IjearinBciL Dcr
@Tjr oiet (k9 J&i lolnmfe wUtt kM^es; cr <jKtate vidiiKfic lunfi firiae ^onN
bm«^iiKiMt Ke Xteoe ^dmt$ fSkiM of Kr ^?cf(e fs jhSai: SDd bod iKnb
vm ta Hbmaitwik meotat »ai; lemf cr ^djcfM^ ofkot p {c^ in {cm
Btsoner. ^^ jidbe ct icb tdadmt^ fwaoMkt ^eges fie on; fn^cm kegonn
«it cnnifianm Soften fe fit fpnd^ : ,, ^s vri^sji; t Ocq«IM^^ is loeb^^
6tintc Xtt fru^ (^e&it MktaJbam wdtt ^m Xv m mm^sm^ grfmanm
K^ 9I1111 fiifl Xv mr f»ar (art SBft arngtmOmy oicr anie oMigai ^nsn^
fiabcn ctxt giv^ 9li#fa(kii « Xii, mfr ■dot IfattatfeoKii iwBot Sh, dd
ritict anRcn Sosna, aad^ mdbi sntenMffoi fdn^poKd ta 1)v eir etae Z^tt
i^ictm ficAf wUitm tcdf oik tidmift cinm &ffm leedmfL |attta. 3a frf^
ivcim cd rill Sc^ toorcr fo uAiSjUn fit tl^ toomtc^ nc(t saienl^ frin; tontm
bj$ cr wn cincr ^d^UdfUn ^Smm gctccm uwctca. Ibil »c9 ic^ gcnte nit
mcincn ^Tcimbcii unlb ttnlcil^jiicii in Sncten Men wcttc; fo fc^ ic^ mi)
Qcnct^igt, vicbnc^ i^rm old ncincm cigcncn llit^rik jn fc(gcn^ nnft hi^jcirige
|tt t^mv UMd mdnn 9latur goni ;mmbct i^ 3cfaK^ »^c ii^ nic^ o^e
Xdn Scctmffcn mttcmcbiRcn, fbntcm Xir 9(Icd jniMr cfl^nKtrcn. 3>9fri<$
frogc Ufy Xidf, 06 Xtt nix^ bcffclbcn Sirntcd fdc^ ivte Xn tm Snfong tmfcid
S^c^M on gciDcfcn 1n% oB Xu mir lotxffpTodft^ nic^ p t!^ nix| ga
bcUtm, UHid toibcr mcincn SBiUcn ware, tmb itt(^ nbc( onfjanc^ci^ wo^ tc^
Xlr bcfc^Icn obct mit Xir beginncn nwrte.''

Stan ffottc mcincn feUcn, ouc^ bod aQcTftonb^c^ @cQiitt^ muffe ft(^
fiber cine fo um)cr^offtc 9tctc UKig cntfc^en. @rijc(b{d okr fproc^ mit nmr;
fc^rocfcnen SBortcn : „ Xit 6i^ mein gnabigcr ^crr, itnb i(& mit mcinem Hcincn
!£uc^tcrlcin ftnt) in Xcincr @cn>alt ; t^uc (c^gen mit un^ aid Xcincn Scibci^
flcnen, wo^ Xlr gefaltt. Xir lann nid^td gcfaltcn, wad mir miffollen mogc, benn
idff f)abt nic^td anbercd }u (cgc^ren iinb furcate nid}tB jn t)cr(icrcn old c6cn
Xii^; ic^ ^abc Xic^ fo ticf in mem ^^crj cingcbrudft, ba^'Dn ju fdncr 3cit, auc^
nic^t burc^ ben Jlob, a\a berafclbcn geriffcn wcrben lannfi. (Sfjct tt>irb 911M
flcfd^c^cn, al0 ba^ blcfcd mein ©cmut^ fonnte t>cranbert wcrbcn." Ucbcr bicfe
Slntwort njurbc ber @raf inncrlid) fo bcwcgt, baf fcin $crj im Seibc jtc^ urn*
tDcnbctc^ unb cr ftc^ ber 3:^rancn faum cm>c^rcn fonnte. Xcnnod^ blicb cr

GERMAN AinSCDOTES. 47

AuferUd^ gana ernfl, unb fprad^ gu i^r mit fhengen 9Qorten : „ Db !D{r Mefe
8nttt>ort t)on «g)crjcn gef^c, tt)irb flc^; balb jdgcn !" 9Rit Mcfem hitjcn SQBottc
ging cr t)at)on itnb (ief ftd) nid^td t)on feinem innern S^merje merfen. 2(Ifo6alb
bcricf er cinen fciner gctrcucflen 2)icner, unb n>enbctc flc^ an ifjn mit bem
Sefe^Ic: „®c^ ^in ju mciner Oema^Iin unb forbore r>cn i^r ba6 Heine Soclfiterlem.
fBitnn fie ed 2)tr nic^t gutn>iQig gibt, [o nimm ed mit @cu>a(t aud i^ren
t^anbcn. Sag' i^r o^ne ©ci^eu, i^ f)abt befof)len, ba^ 2)u ed netjmcn follcfi,
bamtt ed ^inn^eggctragen unb umgebrad^t mtbe. £abci gib genau Sld^tung,
ttjlc ftd) ble 9)iutter benimmt, unb beric^te mir fofort grunbli^, tt)ie fie fidji
angefieBt f)abt." 2)er 2)iener erfc^^ratf uber biefen Sefe^I f^f^i^ ^^b ft>rad^
mit bett)cglic^en S33orten : „ D ^err, tt)a6 ^at benn ba^ unfc^ulbige iKnb get^n,
baf i^r ed ^inric^ten ttoflet, ober momit tjat feine 9Rutter fic^ t^erfunbiget, baf
i^r fie fo former betruben ttjottet ? ©c^onet bodb ^^^ unfc^ulbigen 8amme6, unb
t>ergiefet nic^t bad eble Slut, bad i^r felb^ gejeugt f)aitl" 2Iber ber @raf
ergtimmte unb ^ief i^n mit jomigen SSorten ifjun, tok er befo{)(en. @o ging
ber 3)iener benn ju bem ©emac^e bcr ®rafin unb fprad^ traurig ju i^r: ,,@nabige
grau ! ic^ bin (elber ber Jlrager einer gar fc^lec^ten Sotfc^aft. Unfer ^err muf
fc^r erjumt uber Sucb fcin, benn er ^t mir ernfilidji bc^otjkn, @ucr Jtiiib
tton (S\i(fy JU ne^mcn unb ed gum ©c^^arfrid^ter ju tragen, bamit ed umgebrad^^t
werbe. Sdji ^abe jwar fur (Snd) unb bad arme Xod^tcrlein gebeten, aber feincn
3orn baburd^ nur gru^er gemad^t. @ebet mir barum Suer itinb I" 2Ber f)atk
nii)t erwartet, ©rifelbid tt)erbe uber biefen graufamen Sefe^l in lauten jammer
audbrec^n ? ©ie aber tfjat gerabe bad SBibcrfpiel, unb benjied in biefcm f(^tt>ercn
S(ugenb(i(fe bie ubernaturlic^e ©tarfe i^red ©emut^ed. 2)c^n>cgen fprad^ fte jum
2)iener ganj unerfd^rocfen : „ ^a^ Heine ©efc^opf ifi unfercd ^errn, mac^e er
bamit, \m^ i^m gefaOig i^ ; nimm ed ^in unb trag' ed i^m ju ; id^ xoiU mid^
feinem Sefe^l nic^t im ©eringften n>iberfcften." ^ierauf na^m jie i^r liebed
2;6(^>terlein aud ber 2Biege, fa^ ed eine SBeile freunblidb an, fufte ed redbt
^rgiglic^, bejeic^nete ed mit bem 3^^^;^^ bed ^eiligen ilreujed, unb gab ed bann
bem 2)iener mit freunblic^er ©ebarbe unb of)m eine 3^« jw t)ergic^en. 2)er
2)iener felbfi fonnte fid^ bed SBeinend nii^t ent^alten unb fing an bad unfc^ulbige
ifinb fo fc^merjlid^ ju beHagen, ba^ enblic^; ber ^anb^aften SKuttcr bad ^^erj
fclbfl tt>eid^ n>urbe. „ Zx%c bad liebe (Sngclein nur eilig ^intt)eg," fprad^ jie ;
,, ic^ befe^le ed mit 8eib unb ©cele bem ^fid^^cn ©ott, ber mag nad^ feinem
aOBiUen barubcr ^erfugen." Sllfo t)crabfc^icbetc fid^ ber 2)iener unb trug bad
itinb JU feinem ffiater, bem er genau erja^lte, tt)ie bereittt)iHig ©rifelbid i^r
iKnb ^ergegeben ; ba^er jid^ ber ©raf nid^t tt)enig t^ertDunberte unb bel jic^ [elbfl
belennen mupte, baf fein SBcib nod^ t)iel tugenbfamer fei, aid er ed felbfl
t>ermeint ^atte.

48

*Skimodf trcOtr ct nic^ onf^cmi, t^rni O.^^^cfiaa onf Me ^be ju ficKen
vnJb in ^tal tm^cncmmencn Safe fof^abcnt <Sr ffattt n&mlu^ feincdmcgd
in €time, tern Stinb rin Srib {ttjiifugcii, vidmdf€ nwOte a toffclk ont^tt^o
ffcbmlisff cqtcl^ taffen. @r (^ am SdfW^ jn Sobgna in ^(ditn, wli)t
nil rinm ^0ttigm @rafm t>fnna^(t unb il^fcn Sntto l^ic^ pgtt^ ttKtr.
3^ 9etac^ n tea Stinb )u f^^icftn, tof fte c6 i^ in tft <SHUe ^onbe^maf
rr^e : (c^gm l^ief tt baffelbf fanft rimDtcfebi, tocffl in rintr SBitge ^ocmofyctn,
unb htrc^ ebm jenm 3)icn(r, bem tr ed }u roubm bcfo^cn l^c, feiner ®<6n>fflfr
ipttragen. 3^ ^^m @n^ fd^eb tr an fie einen Srief, in tt>e((^ tor gon^e
Serlauf bet <Bad)€n m^fuffxliif erflart qhit, unb fie un @i}ie^Hng bed StinM
frninblic^ erfuc^ murbe, mit bdgefugter Silte; baf fie bod eb(e ^ftulein naij
feinem gr&flic^ Stanbe auf)te^n unb unterric^en, jugleic^ abet alien SN
antt)enben moc^te, baf 9Itemanb erfu^re; wtld^cn &tem bod ftinb juge^. 2)te
@raftn na^m bad ffinb i^ed Srubeie mil befiem 9SiI(en and bed !Dtenerd arm^n,
unb anttt>ortete 3enem burc^ biefen, tDie fie alien m^Itc^ ^leif annycnbcn
iDerbe, baf bod ^roulein aufd Sorgfoltiafie erjogen, unb feine 9lbhmft ge^im
gelKiUen toerbe. Unb ttxid fie fd^riftlic^ ))erfpnK^n, bad fe$te fie treuUcb in^
9Berf : benn fie wcf^itU fixif gegen bad 5Knb n\(Sft anbet^ aid toenn fie feine
leibtic^ Gutter tt)&re.

3nstt>ifc^ fonnte ©rifelbid nic^t etfa^ren, tt>o i^ liebed Xoc^terlein ^ru
gefommen, tt>eil aufer bem Wiener 9{ienianb jhtnbe bat)on ^e ; fie gloubte
bef n>egen nid^td Slnberd, aid baf bod unfc^ulbige JNnb getobtet tt)orben fel
@o unfftglic^ fie biefed fd^mctite, fo Itef fie ioif ifyc innered t^erjeleib &uperli(^
gar nld^t merfen, fie geigte gcgen i^ren ^crm allejeit ein fceunblit^ 2lngefic^t,
unb ertt)icd i^m fo trcue 8icbe, aid wenn fie gar nid^td SBibertwrtiged t>cn i^m
erfa^ren ^tte, fo baf fidji ber ®raf nlc^t genugfam t)em)unbem fonnte, n)ie ed
moglid^ fei, baf fie ben ©c^meti urn i^r eingeborened ^inb alfo nieberju^lten
t)erm6ge, baf i^r anc^ let n ©eufjer fiber bie jugefugte Unbilb entfc^lupfe. ©r fing
an i^rc Slugenb ie langer, fe ^o^er gu fc^ften, unb fie je linger je me^r ju lieben.

Unterbeffen t)ergingen t)ier 3a^re, tt>a^renb welc^ ber ®raf unb feine
©ema^lin in e^elic^er 2iebe befianbig t)er^arrten, unb bed entfu^rten iWnbcd
niemald 9Relbung get^an wurbe. 3)a warb bie ©rifin abermald t)on ®ott
gcfegnet unb gebar einen uberaud fc^onen €o^n, woruber nic^t nur bie eitem
bed itinbed fonbem audfi alte i^re ©efreunbte unb Untert^anen fid) ^Jc^litb
erfreuten unb biefed glutfllc^e ©relgnif mit einem gejie feierten. Sefonberd
freute fic^ ber gute alte 3anicuta unb feine Hebe a;oc^ter ©rifelbid ; beibe j»ei*
felten nic^t, baf ber ®raf biefe je^t mit beflanbigerer 9?eigung lieben tt)erbe. ©d
gefc^^ aber gerabe bad ©egent^eil, unb bie fromme @rafin geriet^ in grofercd
8lcb aid jut)or. 8Ild nSmlic^ bad ffinb awei 3a^re alt genjorben unb fc^on

OERBfAN ANECDOTES. 49

enttt>5^nt tt>ar, auc^ 3ebermann, xotx ed fa^, fiber fcinc ®i)bnt)cit cine
befonberc greubc ^e, ia txat ber ®raf, ber ba^ beflanbigc ©crnut^ feiner
®cma^Iin nod) miter auf bie ?Probe fefcen, unb fte noi^ fc^&rfcr in ber
®ebulb prufen n)onte, abermal ju i^r in bad dimmer, unb erjeigte ftc^ jtrar
biefimal ganj freunblid^ geflcn fie; juleftt aber fprac^ er mit betrubten
HBorten: ,,9Rein liebed SBeib, id) f)abt Qt^laiibt, tt)ir n>urben nun mit
Reuben bei einanber leben lonnen, unb unfere Untert^anen n>urben fic^
loegen bed neugeborncn ©o^ned ttullig tjergnugen. 8eiber aber fmb fte jeftt
ubier gufrieben aid jut)or; fie mac^en mir groje Unluft er^eben fic^ n>iber
mic^, unb fogen mir runb ^craud, fie mlUn ben @nfel bed SBauern 3anicula
nid^t jum «&erm ^aben, unb i^m nac^ meinem S^obe feinedmegd unter^
tDorfen fein. ©o not^igen fie mic^ badjenige ju tf^urtf xoa^ mir wiber mcin
^erj unb ©emut^ ifi. 2)enn tveil ic^;, fo Ianc\e bad 5tinb lebt, leine Stu^e
unb leinen gricben mit if)nen baben mxbc, fo muf ic^ bad unfc^ulbige
Slut ^inn)eg nc^men, unb ed ^cimlid) urn fein Seben bringen laffcn. 3c^
toollte ed 2)ir aber ivcoox anfai]en, bamit 5)i(^ nic^t nad^^er ber ©c^merj allju*
flarf flberfalle."

98on biefem Garten ©treict)e f)atk bad ^erj ber ®rafin tobtiic^ getroffen fein
follen. ®leic^tt)0^l aii^ertc fie nic^t bie geringfle Iraurigfeit, fonbern \pxad)
mit unerfd^rorfenem ©emut^e ju bem ©rafen alfo : „ 9Reln ^txx ! id^ ^abe ed
6ud) gefagt unb n>ieber^0(e ed, baf ic^ nidbtd Slnbered n^oKen ober nic^t n^oKen
fann, aid \va^ S^r, mein ^cxx, mir befe^len tterbet ; benn gleic^n)ie ic^ beim
Singe^en in @uren $al(aft meine fc^led^ten ^(eiber audgcjogen unb grafli^e
@en)anbe angelegt f)aht, a(fo Ijait id) and) meinen eigenen SSiKen unb alle
9leigungen abgelegt unb bie (Surigen angejogen. SBad ^tjx be^wegen mit mir
unb meinem ©o^nlein ju t^un gefonnen fcib, bad moget 3^r o^ne «&inbernif
frei t)oIlbringen, benn ic^; tterbe 6ud^ nicbt im ©eringfien tt)iberfprec^en."

2)er ©raf lonnte fic^j fiber biefe ungiaubtic^e ©tanbl^aftigfcit feiner ©ema^Iin
nid^t genugfam t)ertt)unbcrn, ^ermod^te auc^ aud Sctrfibnif feined ^erjend lein
weitered SBort ju i^r ju reben, fonbern ging ganj bewegt Don i^r ^inaud unb
t)ergof , aid er allein tt>ar, mllbiglic^ t)iel bittere 3&f)xtn. 2)amit gleid^tto^l bie
^o^e 3;ugenb feined S^egema^ld alien grauen jum Sorbilb an ben Sag fommen
mod^te, fu^r er fort, fein SSor^aben ind SBer! ju ric^ten. 5)er Diener ivarb
gerufen unb njieber jur ©rafin gef^icft, um abermald i^r bad itinb abjune^men,
!Dief mat aber ric^tete biefer Den Sefe^l mit t)iel leid^terem ^erjen aud, benn er
n)u^e ia, baj bem itinbe fein 8eib tt)iberfa^ren njerbe. @r ging t)inein jur
©rSfin unb fprac^ : „ ©nibige grau, i^r njerbet o^ne S^ti^^l fc^on toiffen^
worum id^ ju ©ud^ lomme ; ed ifl unferd ^errn SBille, ba^ bad junge »&enleln
^ingcri^^tet mxbc. 2)arum follt 3^r mir ed guttt>illig geben, bamit id) ed

60 GERMAN ANBCD0TB8.

bemjenigen uberliefere, kvelc^em id^ t)or fed^d 3a^ren oud^ bad Sr&ulein ubergeioi
l^be. 3c^ bitte @ud^ aber, 3^r mM (S\X(ff ^ieruber nic^t aOiufe^r t)fr{ioten,
unb mir felbfi mein Sege^ren nid^t loerbenfen, benn mein ^ert toixb genot^igir
biefe Unt^at gegen feined ^erjend 9leigung ju loerric^teni unb mir (iegt ob, ^|n
in SIDem treultc^ ju ge^orfamen.''

Die frommc ©rafin tDurbc ubct bicfe SBorte nic^t bcfHtrgt, fonbeta, o^e
tin SBort ju fpred()en, ttat fie ju bet SSSiege, na^m bod liebe @o^nIein in i^
SIrme, fa^ ed eine SSeile freunblic^ an, brucfte ed innig an i^r ^etj, fufte ed
kDieber^olt auf ben rotten ^JRunb unb bejeic^nete ed tali bem d^i^^t^ ^ ^iiigen
^eujed ; bann ubergab fte ed in bie ^&nbe bed 2)ienerd unb fagte : ,, 9limm
^in biefed unfc^ulbige liebe itinb, unb trage ed gu fcinem ffiater. 3c^ ^offe, fein
loSterlic^ed »&erj njerbe ftc^ uber baffelbe erbarmen unb er werbe loieOeidbt no^
9RitteI finben, e6 t)or bem 3^obc ju bctt>a^ren. itann aber bad ni^t fein, fo
opfere id^ auc^ biefen ®i)aii bem ^od^jien @ott, t)on bem i^ i^n aud ®naben
empfangen ^abe." Wit bctrubtcm ^erjen natjm ber 2)iener bad ffinb t)on i^r,
unb aid er bad 3inimcr t)crlaffen f)attt, png er an bitterli^ ju ttjeinen, unb fo
fam er njeinenb unb feufjenb ju feinem «&errn, unb erja^Ue iijm looH SWitleib
n>ie flarfmut^ig bie ©rSfin ftd^ bei Uebergabe i^red ffinbed betragen ^abe. 2)ct
®raf tjerno^m bicfcd mit grower Sertt)unberung, unb fonnte ed faum uber fein
^erj bringcn, feine ©ema^lin weiter ju betruben. !Dennod^, njeil er it)re S^ugent
funbbar ma^en tooUtc, tf)at er feinem <&er}en ®en)alt an ^ er fufte fein licbed
©o^nc^en t)olI t)aterlii^er Siebe, bann befall er bem 2)iener, ed n>o^l »ertt)a^rt
gu feiner <Bd)m\ta nad) Sologna ju tragen. Diefer fd^rieb er auf 'd SReue einen
freunbli^en 93ricf, in welc^m er i^r bie Urfad^e melbete, njarum er feiner grou
beibe j^inber abgenommen ^abe, unb bat fte bringenb, biefclbcn fo ju erjie^n,
tt>ie fld^ fur ©rafenfinber fc^irfe. ©eine ©d^ttjefter leiflete i^m auc^ treulic^ 5oIge;
iebod^ t)ern)unberte fte ftc^ oft im ©tillen, xo(^ n)O^I i^r Sruber mit ben ftinbem
toeiter t)orjune^men gebenfe. 2)er ®raf aber fprac^ jeftt nid^t felten mit fcinem
SSSeibe t)on i^ren jn)ei lieben j^inbern, bod^ fonnte er nic^t fot)ie( bamit enoirfen,
ba^ fte einen einjigen ©eufjer f)attt f)bxm (affen, ober auf i^rem Slngeftd^t einige
Setrubnip ftd^tbar gemorben n)are. SSSenn er anftng, bie unfd^ulbigen JKuber
jU bebauem, fo bebauerte fte biefelben mit i^m ; unb fo in 9[(lem : toit er ftd^
s^er^ielt, alfo t)er^ie(t fte ftd^ aud^.

3e me^r nun ber ®raf fte in alien !Dingen beflanbig erfanb, unb in ber
Z^ot inne toaxb, baf i^r SSSille mit bem feinigen loereiniget fei, befio me^r fom
t^n bie Segierbe an, fte mittx auf bie $robe ju fe^en, unb ftd^ fo gegen fte
}U geb&rben, bap fie ftd^ betruben muf te. 2)a^er ftng er an, ftc^ ouferlid^ fo
gegen fte )U erjeigen, aid ob er i^rer mube U)&re, unb aid ob ed i^n fe^r gereue,
bap er eine arme SBaurin ge^eirat^et ^abe ; unb bieg tbai er nidbt beimli(6.

k

OEBMAH ANECDOTES. 61

fonbmt fo offentlic^, ia$ Sebermann e6 kid^t abnc^mcn fonntc. ©o tjetbrcitete
fld^ ttnn balb ein uble^ ©criicl^ in ber ganjen SRarfgraffd^aft, aid tt>one bet
€fraf ftd^ t)on feinem SSeibe f^eiben unb eine SInbere ^citat^n, bie i^m an
@tanb itnb Steic^t^itmern gleid^ fei. Seim gemeinen SSoIf aber entflanb ein
grof cd 3Rurren ttoegcn bcr beibcn t)erIorcnen iWnbcr, mil 9liemanb ton^tt, n>o^in
fic gcfommen obcr tt>cr fie ^inweggefu^rt. 2)er meifle 8lrgtt)o^n fiel auf ben
®rafen felbft aW ob er bie itinber mit ®en)alt bet SRutter genommen fjattt,
tt>eil er fte nic^t ate re^tmaf ige @rben anerfennen moge. !Diefed ©eru^t fonnte
t)ot bet Oraftn nic^t t)erborgen bleiben 3 t)ielme^r ttjurbe i^r gcrabe auf Slnfiif^
tung bed ®rafen fcin ganjcd ©or^aben genau erja^It. @ie aber lie|i fic^ baburd^
gar nid^t irre mac^n, fonbern Hit SIDed mit grower @ebulb, inbem fie ed ber
giirfe^ung bed allmad^tigen ©otted empfa^I.

SBeil nun ailed !Dicfcd bie fromme ©rafin nid^t aud i^rer ^eiligen ®emut^d<f
ru^e aufjufioren t)crmod^tc, [0 fann bcr ®raf auf eine anbere SijI. @r Ile|i
audfprengen, aid wenn er einen ®efanbtcn nad) 3tom abjufd^icfen im ©inne
ffittc, unb bei bem ^ciligen 93ater felbfi an^alten lajfen tt>oIIte, baf i^m njegen
^oc^ttjid^tigcr Urfac^cn, unb urn bie ?lufregung feincr Untcrt^anen ju flillen,
geflattet tt)erben mod^te, fcine ie(jige Sf^frau ju entlaflfen unb jtanbedgema^ eine
SInbere ju ^eiratf|cn. !Diefe ©age ju bcforbern, fanbte er einen feiner t)orne^mften
2)iener aud : freilid^ nid^t nac^ Stom^ fonbern anberdtvo^in ; nac^bem aber biefer
ein SSiertcIia^r aud geitefen tt>ar, tarn er jurucf unb t)erbreitete allcr Orten bie
©age, aid u^enn burd^ itjn bie bege^rte !Difpenfation )U 9lom audgemirft n)orben
n>Are. ^ie$ murbe an^ balb im gan^en Sanbe rud^bar, unb t)erurfad^te ))ieled
®erebe bci gro^en ^erren unb gemeinen 2euten. 8Iu(^ ber frommen ®rifelDid
fam ed ju O^ren. 2)iefe feufjte jmar baruber an^ bem inner^en ®runb i^red
^erjend ; benno^ ergab fte fid^ aldbalb in ben SSillen ®otted unb befa(|I i^ih
i^r ganjed Slnliegen. 2)oc^ erwartete fte nic^t o^ne Slngfi, tt>ad ber SKarfgraf
fiber fte befc^Iiefien ttjurbe.

S5alb barauf bcrief ber ®raf bie loornefimfien ^opeute ju fic^, bett)irt^ete
fte ^errlid^, unb fe^te i^nen unter ber SRa^Ijeit bie ganje Slngelegen^eit aud
einanber, inbem er t)orgab, ba|i i^m t)on 9lom bie (grlaubni^ jugefommen fei,
feine ®ema^Iin fortjufc^icfen unb eine SInbere gu ^eirat^en ; er ^abe fte bcf tt)egen
rufen laffen, biefer SSerabfd^iebung beijuwo^nen unb fte mit i^rem Slnfe^n ju
befraftigen. 3)ie ^oc^abeligen ^erren ttjaren bamit tt>o^I jufrieben ; ba^er befall
ber ®raf einigen 2)ienern, feiner ®ema^lin folc^ anjufagen unb fie t)or bie
loerfammelten ^erren ju fu^reit 2)ie arme ®rifelbid tt>arb fiber biefe Wac^rid^t
tief betrfibt unb beflagte bei ftd^ felbfl i^r Unglucf mit ^erjlic^en ©eufjern.
Sfeufierlic^ aber lie^ fte fein ^tiifcn ber Sraurigfeit merfen, fonbern jeigte grof en
©tarfmut^ unb ein unt)erfiorted ®emut^. Slid fie nun in ben ©aal gefu^

52 OKRMAN ANECDOTEH.

njorben, unt) doU ©c^am^aftigfeit t)or fammtlid^cn ^txxcn fianb, ba tebete jte
ber ®raf 9Batt^cr auf folgcnbc SBcife an : „ 3)ieine licbc ©rifclbi^ ; Ic^ bin bte
f)ktjcx !Deiua treueit Siebe gegen mic^ tDO^I inne gemorben, unb f)aU !Dic^ old
meine tt)a^re ®emaf)Iin geliebt. 2)ennod^ gebietet mir eine befonbere ©ditching
©otted, biefe mcinc Sicbe t)on 3)ir abjutvenben, unb eincr 9(nbem gujufc^ren.
^aju not()igen mtc^ biefe meine Sreunbe unb Untert^anen, bief betoilligt mir
bcr ^^Jabft felbfi. ©ie tt)cHen, mil Du meine6 ©leid^en nid^t bift fo foU x6)
2)ic^ ^erabfi^icbcn unb an Dciner ©telle eine anbere mir ebenburtige ®ema^lin
an meine ©eite nef^men, bamit meine ®raffc^aft t)on rec^tma^igen @rben noc^
meincm Sobe befejfcn unb regiert tt)erben moge. 3^^ ^abe 3)ir bef n>egen folc^d
in ®egcnn)art biefer ^oc^abeligen <^erren anfagen kvollen, unb f)iermit funbige ic^
2)ir unfcre bid()er beftanbene 6^e auf. ©o foUfi !Du benn t)on biefer ©tunbe
an meinen marfgraflic^en Ȥof meibcn unb nid^t me^r mit 2)ir tt)egnet)men, att
2)u mir jugebrad^t tjaft."

2)iefe 2Borte n>aren ein 2)onnerfeiI, ber auc^ bad allerfiarffie SBeib ifitit
ju ®oben fd()iagcn follen. SBad meint i^r nun, baf bie gebulbige ®rifelbid auf
baS ffiorbringen bed ®rafen geantn>ortet unD n)ie fie fic^ au^crlic^; t)or ben ^o^n
Ȥcrren gejeigt ^abe? 3n i^rem Slntli^ n>urbe gar feine SSerftorung fiditbar;
fonbern fie fprad^ mit bemutf)igcn SBSorten alfo jU i^m : „ ®n&biger ^err ! iii)
^abe immer erfannt : baf jtt)ifd^en (Surer J^otjdt unb meiner Sliebrigfeit feine
93erg(eid^ung fiattfinben fonne, be^megen ^abe id^ mic^ nie fur @uer S^egemo^I,
fonbern immer nur fur Sure 2)ienerin i^a(bt^t Unb tt>iett)o^I 3^r mid^ in biefem
graflid^en «^aufe jU einer gitabigcn Srau eingefef^t ^abt, fo bejeuge id^ ed benno(^
"OCX ®ott, baf id^ aUejeit eine ^JRagb gcn>cfen bin. ^arum fage ic^ @ott unb
@uc^ !Danf fur bie grope S^re, bie mir in biefem «&aufe o^ne mein eigened
SSerblenfi toiberfa^ren ifi ; im Uebrigen bin ic^ bereit, mit ru^igem ^erjen in
bad arme <&aud meincd SSaterd jurucfjufe^ren unb ba meine fpaten S^age ^ingu^
bringen^ n)o id^ meine Sugenb t)erlebt ^abe. ®Ieid^n)o^( ac^te ic^ mi^ aid eine
glucffelige, e^rn)urbige SSittme, tt)ei( id^ gen>urbigt morben bin, eined fo ^o^en
®rafen (S^etoeib gu fein. Surer funftigen ®ema^Iin toill ic^ t)on »&erjen gerne
meinen $(a0 einraumen, unb ic^ tounfc^e, bap mein <&err mit berfelben in groperer
Sufrieben^cit lebe, aid er mit mir gelebt f)at SBenn 3^r mir aber befe^Iet,
bap id^ nid^t mef)r mit mir ^inaud ne^men foil, aid n>ad ic^ ^ergebrad^t ^be,
fo nef)me ic^ baraud leid^tlic^ ab, bap id^ nic^td mit mir tragen foK, al^ meine
Irene unb meine Slope, iffienn biep Suer gebieterifc^er SBille ifi, fo bin ic^
fcereit ju folgen unb 2llled, toad id^ tjaU, Suc^ ju t)interlajfen."

Woc^ fol(^em aOBorte jog jie in @egenn)art aller ber ^erren i^re Kfilic^en

Iber, elnd urn bad anbere, aud, beraubte fic^ aller Sierrat^en, unb be^ielt

bad Uijtt ©etoanb. Snblic^ jog fte auc^ i^ren S^rauring t)on t>tm gingerr

GERMAN ANECDOTES. 53

mb xti6)tt itjti bem ©rafeu juglddff mit alien anbem ffofibarfcitcn bar iinb
fprac^ : „ 9la(ft bin ici) au6 meined ©aterd ^aufe gegangcn, ic^ n>ill auc^ nacft
tt)feber ba^in gurudffe^ren. 3)a« alleln blttc i^, 3^r tt>olIet mlr bfefe6 leinenc
®ctt)anb gur Scbecfung be6 2eibe6, bcr @ure 5finber geboren f)at, uberlaffen,
bamlt iif in ©^rbarfeit t)on bannen jie^cn fonnc."

5)iefet Haglfc^c anblicf not^igte aUcn ©egennjSrtfgen 3;^ranen ab ; mtd^
bod ^artc ^crj bed ®rafen bett)egte er fo fe^r, oafi et t)or uberflie|ienben Jl^rinen
fetn aOBort mit i^r reben unb fie t)or SRitleib in fold^er 2lrmfellgfeit nlc^t anfe^en
fonnte. 3)enno(l^ ^ielt er fidf> mit @ett)att jururf, baf er i^r fein tt)eitere« ©r^
barmen aeigte, fonbern fte in fol^em Slufjug t)on ftdf> ge^en lief. SWe 2lntt>efenben
tounberten ftd^ fiber biefe ^art^rgigfeit, unb fd^alten ben ©rafen in i^rem Snnem
rincn S^rannen. 3Rit ber grau aber trugen fte gro|ie6 ©rbarmcn, unb fonnten
biefem ©c^aufpiele nic^t langer jufe^en, fonbern »erliepen bad ©c^Iop bed ©rafen
mit tt)einenben Slugen.

©0 ging ble avme ©rifelbid fafi ganj entfleibct, barfitf mit blof em «&aupte
)um ©(^lof t^or f)inaa6, unb aUc6 ©efinbe im ©c^lojfe folgte i^r traucrnb unb
tt)dnenb nac^ -y benn alien toot fie tt)cgen i^rer 2)cmut^ unb i^re6 tugenbfamen
SBefend tieb unb totttf), unb barum fonnten fie fief) nic^t getroftcn, baf fie eine fo
liebreid^e ^errin unb treue fianbedmutter t)criieren follten. Unb je^t fonnte bie
fianb^afte ©rifclbid, bie fic^ wegen i^re6 eigenen Unglurfed nie bctrubte, au6
3Ritleib mit ben 3^rigen fid^ bed aBeinen6 nid^t ent^alten. 3()r SSater unb atte
Slad^bam i^rcd 2)orfed tourben axi^ biefed (Sknb balb gewatjr, unb gingen il)r
tout flagenb entgegen. 2)er betrfibte 3anicula pel feiner Joctter um ben ^aW
unb fonnte t)or aOBeincn fein SBort mit iljr fpre^en ; fie aber, nac^bem fie i^ren
eigenen ^af^nn ©in^alt get^an, fagte ganj freunblic^ ju i^m : „ ®etrubet @uc^
bod^ nid^t fo fe^r um mein Unglucf, SSater ! SScrgeffet nid^t, bap bad Silled
nic^t o^ne ©otted befonbere ©d^irfung gcfc^e^en fein fann." 2)cr Sllte aber
fpra^ : „ ffiie foKte mein ^erj nic^t t)or 2eib gerfpringen, JEoc^ter, tt>enn id^
2)einen elenben Suftanb anfc^e unb mi^, baf 2)u o^ne I)eine ©d^ulb barein
gefommen bift ! D wie falfd^ ifi bie Siebe bed ©rafen, ber 2)i^ nur e^elid^en
toollte, um 2)ic^ ju bctrubcn ! Wlix f)at biefe ^eirat^ nie rec^t gefallenj immer
^abe id^ bad gefurd^tet, )xia^ id) itiit ju meincm tiefen ?eib erfa^ren muf.
3)ennod^, meine liebe Soc^ter, tt)ollen tt)ir und freuen, tt>eil tt)ir biefe grofe
j^anfung nid^t itegen uufered Uebetoer^altend, fonbern nur tt)egen unferer
Slrmut^ unb Sliebrigfeit erbulben mfiffcn !" ©o fu^rte ber alte SSater feine
t)erfiopene lod^tcr an ber ^anb feiner ©tro^ptte gu. !Dort offnete er einen
©c^ranf, mo bie Sauernfleiber, bie ©rifelbid am Sage i^rer SSerm&^lung

«'* GERMAN ANECDOTES.

auikKU^^cit b;inc, nocb ire^I rcnvobn lo^en ; tic\t na^m nr ^au6 unb beneitete
iVinc '^oittcr ^amir i^anj nait ibxtm redden 3tanbe.

I'^iun trcbntc O^rifelrid n?u*Dcr b^i ifjrcm 'f atcr in ®((ulb unb !X)emut9 ;
mi( fcincm '^L^ortc fKijte fic ubcr ten @rafen unb ibr eigened Ungliicf. !&e(
O^vat aber l\iiic fcin *3fli:btc5 ©cib binreictcnb gcpTuft unb fonntc i^re Slbtoe*
Kni'fit ui.tt KvK>T mrai](cn. (fr f^ticfte babcr aldbalb rinen !DieneT nai)
'i\'\c^\u\ ab mil Tcr l^ulrung an frinen Sd^vsL^vc, ta$ cd i^m gefdlcn mcgf,
cilcnb mil uincr c^tiriftcr ;u i^m nacb -il^icinont ju femmen unb i^m feine, bed
onateii. UiMi.le >iinber jiurucf xa bringen. 3n;iri((&fn Itef er bad @tt&i}t
\v^^lvllc^^. a!v* uvnn fcinc neue 3?ram fiten umenre^d wire, unb ed burc^Ucf
bu'u* ra»;e Tie »vin;c C^rancfraft, Tahct benn Sllled jut ncuen ^od)ic\i auf'd
tV'ic Ni\;iii iviiitc. lie *V^c.t;ciij|aue n?arm au* fcfcon gelaben unbeincn
Jat\ iiivov liV ^cr ci-wa^" t'li^ ©rafen aud 33cIo gna anfam, auf bem Sc^Iojfe
\v\^unm»:(

'.Mj^J Ui\i y.^'i.v *ll\:::.\r nine rrrije 5vrau, ©ri'VItid, aud i^rem 35orfe
hi*l»i» \iv♦^ al> ':; ^:r.i::^i::iA enMicncn, rcrcie cr fie alfo an: „@rifcltid!
\V,n, ^.',s m;.\' 'i^i.'.;:i :::.'r:;fn i.trn a:;fen:mt unb ba^ id) fofort mit ifit
»V»v;;,ii :v..;, \ n\;:, :\,..::a:r U:vM m.in *<Sau$ fc gut wie iJu; rcinige
ba;vi Pi.. I v' . .,• . i. :r -f :::...^" .-> c::?. u:ir t:vAic Hilc^. UM-? uotliig ijl, ^o^
0\\ ;» v.. ,\/.u\,.*o 0':.\.::-^ rn-iir.ic u.t rrr ifrem friibercn ®cmaf)l mi

\v\s\ V \^\\\ .\.. ';. .* ■::.,::: o :: •.:*:.: it Tii-V^ rerri.tren ; icfc ad)k ed flit
tnu i\»»^ .,\u vv^i; ^.^■* ..:• o..? .*.■..•:?.:::;:: r.in": ja, i"c lange icb Icbe, wertx
U\^ \\\M u .la./.'*, ». o,:,V ;:i r.:*:.::: r.r.n i.t frfcnne mid) ba;u »crvflid?tct,
\\\\\ r.; vu.»ii \*\^*:»...\\:,'i iv.,.::: :.; :.r ?,'':: out emrfanqen (labe." Sobalt)
\\\ r |i »\iiiM v\»;\." ';,• »i :;:: ■^.\:' •.: i-iiHf rai> ga::;e ScHcp ron obeii bid
unit n uUM; ra'> Va.u'i ;ii 't ir.u.t:; :.;' o-^-^.r au-S unb gebcrbete \{d) in SHlem

• ■ »

Villi anran 'XaduwitiaJic la:7.;if N- o-rat mix fciner grau unb mit bet
wimniirliiUn iieiicii ^^vaiii ajsiS i^o^vna an. unr i\a^f;^^af ©altbcr xitt ibnen
Hill alien »v^^bcnen o^aftcn leierli.t e::i^e:;fn. rie emvfingen einanber mit
j\io|ien )\veiiben ; ;>cbamann nnnn'.tie rer n;i:;-:i :?Ta!U ©lurf unb tg^eil. 3)iefe
WxW eiii tuAulein ron uNTaui^ vt^ner i^vna!! !:n> .^rcFcr Sitrfamfeit, abcr noc^
\\\m iun»\ von ;>ahren unb ^ar ;anem L^^liirer.^^au : benn fie war faum jwolf
%\W »^U ««^ l*i"i !iwm .§*eiraiben not riel jiu inng. Jnbejien, nKiI jie bem
Wwfeil \V^<1 fo mupre fic au* alien ©anen geMi:cn. unb wurbe »on i^nen aid
irlllf (MrafVnbraut gcpriefen unb gteba mil ^ro^er weftlitfeit in bad ©c^Iof
ffiMut unb wn alien ©ewobnem NTdbcn bcwillfommt. 3eber ©iener unb

W«flb muptcn Mnjutreten unb itrer funftigen ©ebleterin ©lurf unb ^eil
llfitcn. aScil benn ®rifelbid ncc^ in bem >&Wone nwr, fo fom and) fie ^rju,

OESMAN ANECDOTES. 55

kie (e^te unter Men, unb iDarf ftd^^ in ifftm SauemHeibem bemfit^ig auf bie
Stnitt, fuf te bet iSraut bie ^anb unb munfd^te i^t ga ifjxtt fdnftigen @^ ®Iu(f
uitb ®egen. 2)arauf fe^en fid^ fammtlic^e ®afie ju Sifd^e ; ©rifetbid abet
ttat in bie 9iei^ bet 3R&gbe jurucf unb toax emftg befd^ftigt mit 9(uftragen unb
9[ufn>arten.

gauge t)ertt>unberte (Id^ ber ®raf fiber bie unbegreifliic^ Demut^ unb ®ebulb
feiner ®ema^(in ; ba befc^lop er, intern @(enb ein @nbe ju mac^n unb fie na6>
Vfctx tangen SBetrubnifi looQig ju erfreuen. SSie jte nun gleic^ einer forglid^en
Vlart^a ^in unD ^et lief, tief er jte ^bei unb fprac^ ju i^r : ,, 98ad bflnfet ^Id),
©rifelbid, t)on meinet neuen ©taut ,• ifl fie fd^on unb e^rbar genug ?" — „ 3a
fceilic^/' ewieberte fte, „i^ meine, eine fdfionete unb fittfamcre f 6nne nic^t gefunben
tperben- Datum ttjunfc^e ic^ ©ud^ t)on »&etjen bie gtof te SBo^Ifa^tt, ^offe au^
bap ed bem Stiulein nid^t fo ube( etge^en foU, aid ed (Sutet et^en ©taut
etgangen ifi. 2)enn biefe toax gat gu bautifc^, bad gtSuIein abet ifl gat jatt
unb t)on eblem ®eMut. 2>a^et mitb fie feine ®efa^t laufen, jemald ^oon QnSf
t)etfiopen ju tt)etben."

3efet t)etmod^te b:t @taf fic^ nid^t Iftngetju ^alten unb fptac^: „ ©ie^
abet boc^ biefe meine ©taut aud^ xtci)t an, ®tifetbid, unb befinne ^id^, ob !Dii
jte nic^t Unm%" @tifelbid t^at i^te Slugen n^eit auf unb blicfte bad ^tauiein
lange an, vctmoc^te jebod^ nid^t, fld^ i^tet ju cntfinnen. I)a fptadff bet ®taf :
f, ©tifelbid, fennfl 5)u benn Deine 3^oc^?tet nic^t me^t, tt>cld^e !Du mit t)ot jtt)6lf
Sa^ten geboten ^afl ?" Uebet biefe 3tcbe etfiattte ® tifelbid unb tt>uf te nid^t,
n>ad fie baju benfen foHte. Unb aid fie lange in SBetwunbetung ba gefianben,
fptac^ bet @taftt)eltet: „SSReine ^ctjgeliebtc ©tifelbid! 5Rid^t tjetfiote !Did^ biefe
meine Stebe ; benn iene t)etmeinte ©taut ifl !Deine unb meine S^o^tet, unb biefer
iunge »§ett ifl 2)ein unb mein geliebtct ©of)n ; 2)u abet bifl meine einjige
audetn>a^(te unb geliebtefte ©ema^Iin, aupet weld^et ic^ feine anbcte je ge^abt
^abe, no(^ ju ^aben begc^te."

9}iit biefen 2Sotten ct^ub et fi^ t)om Sifd^e, fiel juetfl feinct ®tlfelbid
unb bann feinen beib.n itlnbetn urn ben »§ald unb Kipte ein jebed untet »ielen
3a^tcn. ©tifelbid abet tt>atb t)on innetet SBonne t)on i^ten ©innen loetlaffen.
Slid fie tt)iebct ju fic^ felbfl gcfommcn Mi>ax, ficl fie juetfl i^tet Siod^tet, ^ctnad^
intern ©o^nc^en urn ben »&ald unb fptad^ untet gteubent^tSnen : „ 9iun toiU
idf gctne fletben, fcit id^ meine gcliebten ffinbet roicbet lebenbig gefe^en ! ®ci»
benebeit fci bie gottlid^e ®nabe, bie mit eud^, bie ic^ l&ngfl fut tobt ben)einet,
gefunb et^atten unb jeftt tt)iebet in gto^Iicbfeit jugefu^tt f)at." SB&^tenb fte
^d^ fo mit bem Umfangen i^tet ffinbct etiufligte, ^atte bet ®taf i^te beflen
®ett>anbe ^etbeibtingen laffen. 2)ie gbelftaucn umtingten fte »iebet, n>ie einfl
in intern 5)otfe, betaubten fie bet ©auetnfleibet unb jietten fte auf 'd ^ettlic^fle*

56 GERMAN ANECDOTE&

«3o trot fif, n>te tm% aud bem i^mfe t^ox, mtt unt>em)e(fter (S<^on^tt
gef(^miuft, unb n)urbe ))on ben Srauen bem ©rafen jugefu^rt. ^te ^od^Ug&fie
ftanJttn um biefe beiben Return, bet @raf SQalt^er abet ^ielt feine (Scmafjlin an
bet JQant> unb fptad^ loot aUen 9(ntDefenben feictlid^ a(fo : ,, ^eine geliebtefle
@tife(bi6 ! ic^ bejeuge ^iet ))ot ®ott nnb aQen ©egeniDattigen, baf ba6, n>ad
k^ mil @ud^ iDOtgenommen, nid^t au6 bofem SSiUen gefd^ie^en ifl, fonbetn aud
gutet Steinung, um @ute gtope ©ebulb ju etptoben unb Sute fjotfcn Xugenbeit
bet SBett funbbat ju mac^en. 9lnn abet ^abe id) an (Su^ mcf)x Stommigfeit
befunben, aid id^ mit ein3ubtlben n>agte ; ja idfy glaube, baf im ganjen Sanbe
(Sated ®(eid^cn nid^t gcfiinben tDetben fonne. 2)atum miQ id^ duif ^infott nic(;t
me^t auf bie $tobe fieQen, loieUne^t toiU \6) ^oon nun an @uet tteuet ®attt,
ia (Suet bemut^iget !Dienet bleiben. (Sute (ieben j^inbet, n>e{c^e ic^ eine S^itlan^
t)on 6ud^ genommen ^abe, fleUe ic^ (Sui) f)Xix n>o^(et}ogen n>iebet }u, bamit
3^t 6ud^ i^tet t)oIIfommen etfteuen mjget. SBell abet SWed ju einem JQoiff
jeitfcfle beteitet \% bege^te ic^, mid^ auf d 9leue mit ducSf ju "ocxmhfjltn unb
butd^ bad Sanb einet etolgen Siebe ju loetfnu^jfen." ^letmit fiedEte et i^t ben
Xtauting n>iebet an ben ginget unb gelobte i^t auf d Sleue e^elidffe Steue.
Det ?priefiet fptad^ ben ©egen ubet bad 5Paat, alle 8Intt)efenben tounfd^ten if^nen
®Iu(f unb njaten noc^ fto^Iid^ct aid auf bet etfien ^^ix^jeit !Det ®taf lief auc^
ben 93atet bet 5Reut)etma^tten, ben alten Sanicufa, aud feinem !Dotfe ^olen, unb
i^n aid feinen wett^en ©d^tt)iegett)atet mit Kftlid^en iMeibetn jieten unb t)on
©tunbe an in feinem gtaflid^en ©c^iloffe n>o^nen ; et jog i^n an bie Xafel unb
e^tte i^n n)ie einen leiblidben SSatct. 2)ie S^od^tct, bie i^m ©tifelbid geboten
^e, ^itat^ete einen angefe^encn ©tafen ; et felbfi lebte mit feinet ©ema^Iin
in gtof et Siebe unb ©inigfeit nod^ »iele Sa^te unb ^intetlief feinem ©o^n bod
ganje @tbe ))on fiattlid(;en @utetn unb <^ettfc^aften.

PAET V.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULARY,

AND THE

AUXILIARY VOCABULARIES.

ABBREVIATIONS.

a. = adjectiye.

ad. ss adverb.

c. =: conj unction.

L p. = indefinite pf onoun.

i. n. = „ numeral

imp. = impersonal verb.

p. 20 = page 20.

p. = pronoun.

pt =fe preposition.

pr. p. = present participle.

p. p. = past participle.

a = substantive.

(s.) s separable (verb).

V. s= verb.

a £ 3 a. = sub., fern., 3rd dec., (a) plural.

V. a. & n. ir. =: verb active and neuter, irregular.

V. a. s. =: verb active, separable.

* = substantive declined like an adjective.

t = plural in Leute.

J = like Wille, page 9.

(a) (o) (u) s the vowel is not modified in the plural

THK rERUAMENT VOCABULAKT, ETC.

59

PART V.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULARY,

AND THE

AUXILIARY VOCABULARIES.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULARY.

For parts of speech that are treated of in the accidence the student is
referred to the page where thej are to be found, and it must be understood
that as the first appearance of the word in anj of its forms is taken as the
index to its numerical value, it will not be noticed when it recurs under any
other form.

As it is an advantage for the sake of comparison, and but little additional
trouble, to learn all the grammatical expressions of the same idea at the
same time, they are at once given upon the first appearance of the idea :
thus the word love suggests the substantive, the verb, and the adjective.

Again as it is the idea rather than the word that is sought, it is to be
remarked that the German equivalent frequently necessitates the transposition
of words, or gives to a word a somewhat different numerical value from that
ascertained for it by the system pursued in this work ; whenever this is the
case the word is at once shifted These two remarks explain the reason why
the sections of the Permanent Vocabulary, as they now stand, do not contain
equal numbers of words.

The words should be carefully committed to memory before the exercise
founded upon them is attempted. All the other words contained in the
exeixsises will be found in their appropriate Auxiliary Vocabulary.

VOCABULARY OF EXERCISES.

L

(md

und, c

the

page 6.

somewhat

something

- etwas, p. 21.

some

some fpLJ

einige, p.

— one

Jemand, p.

— times

zuweilen, ad.

»»

manchmal, ad

somewhere

irgendwo, ad.

a little

ein wenig.

very little,

(any some-

irgend etwas.

thing)

I

page 20.

to be

sein, p. 23.

to become

werden, p. 26.

to have

haben, p. 22.

any

irgend, ad.

— thing

irgend etwas.

— where

irgendwo, ad.

n

ttberall (every-

where), ad.

— one

(irgend) Jemand, p.

eaJt

essen, v. a. & n. ir.

drink

trinken, v. a. & n. ir.

60

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

ADDITIONAL WORDS NECESSITATED

BT THE GERMAN CONSTRUCTION.

a

p. 6.

therewith

damit, ad.

lUOe
small

I klein, a.

— on

daran, ad.
darauf^ ad.

both

beide, p.

— to

dazu, ad.

there

da, ad.

— from

davon, ad.

»

dort, ad.

— /ore

dafur, ad.

,, (thither) dahin, ad.

— under

darunter, ad.

thereof

da von, ad.

— over

dariiber, ad.

-by

r dabei, ad.
1 dadurch, ad.

•

— (ifter
unll

dariiach, ad.

woUen, V. n. ir., p. 27.

— in

darm or darein,

ad.

„ (desire)

wiiiischen, v. a.

— at

dabei, ad.

»

Testament, s. n. 4 a.

99

daran, ad.

99

Wille, 8. m. 1, p. 9.

II.

no

nein, ad.

wHUngly

gem, ad.

99

kein, p., p. 13.

of

von, pr.

none

keiner, e, as, p.,

P-

21.

here

hier, ad.

no one

Niemand, p. & Keiner.

— in

hierin, ad.

not

nicht, ad.

-by

hierbei, ad.

nowhere

nirgends, ad.

— on

hierauf, ad.

yes

ja, ad.

-of

hiervon, ad.

his

p., p. 20.

this

p., p. 13.

take

nehmen, v. a. ir.

do

to do

thun, V. a. ir.

pray

• doch, c. & ad

„ (make)

machen, v. a.

indeed

III.

aa

aller, e, es, a. or p.

place (pui)

stellen, v. a.

on

an, pr.

„ (sea£)

setzen, v. a.

up

> auf, pr.

99 (%)

or

l^en, V. a.
oder, a

place

Ort, 8. m. 4 b.

f<yr

fur, pr.

}9

Stelle, 8. f. 3 b.

»

um, pr. & ad.

9>

Lage, s. f. 3 b.

9>

denn, c

99

Platz, 3 m. 4 a.

mu/^h

viel, p.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULARY, ETC.

61

me

aber, c.

genug, a. & ad.
hinreichend, a. <fe ad.

beg (pray)
stand

bitten, v. a. ir.
stehen, v. n. ir.

IV.

mbgen, v. n. ir., p.

30.

ichereto

wohin, ad.

pages 20, 21.

— from

woher, ad.

pages 20, 21.

— fore

wof iir, ad.

9r

wer or wer auch, p.

21.

— upon

worauf, ad.

wever

wen auch immer, p.

21.

— on

woran, ad.

bei, pr.

- <

wovon, ad.

«•)

neben, pr.

— with

womit, ad.

wo, ad.

— und^r

woninter, ad.

',n

worin, ad.

— as

wahrend, c.

mi

woraus, ad.

many

viel or viele (pi.) a. & ad

>y

wobei, ad.

shaU

sollen, y. n. ir., p. 28.

U

woran, ad.

Koch, s. m. 4 a.

yet

noch, ad.

Kochin, s. f. 3 b.

»>

doch, a

kochen, v. a.

»

dennoch, c.

y

Kochkunst, s. f. 3

a.

V.

bringen, v. a. ir.
was, p.

with
wUhin

mit, pr.
drinnen, ad.

!?er

was auch.

»>

in, pr.

^ever

was auch immer.

— out

ohne, pr.

Ihr or Euer, p., p. 20.

99

draussen (out of

nahe, a. k ad.

doors), ad.

an, pr.

wUhouty out of

' ausser, pr.

f

beinahe, ad.

to, too

zu, pr. & ad.

688

Nahe, s. f. 3 b.
unser, p., page 20.

my

mein, p.

xUehood) Liige, s. f. 3 b.

liigen, v. n. ir.
yum) liegen, v. n. ir.

wie, ad.

however

»

— 8oever

jedoch, c.
dennoch, ad.
wie auch.
wie auch immcr.

60

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

ADDITIONAL WORDS NECESSITATED

BT THE GERMAN CONSTRUCTION.

a

p. 6.

thereunth

damit, ad.

little
small

I klein, a.

— on

*""" 99

daran, ad.
darauf, ad.

both

beide, p.

— to

dazu, ad.

there

da, ad.

— from

davon, ad.

99

dort, ad.

— /ore

dafiir, ad.

y, {thither) dahin, ad.

— under

darunter, ad.

thereof

davon, ad.

— over

dariiber, ad.

-by

r dabei, ad.
1 dadurch, ad.

— (i/ier
unll

damach, ad.

wollen, V. n. ir., p. 27.

— in

darin or darein,

ad.

„ (desire)

wiiiischen, v. a.

at

dabei, ad.

9)

Testament, s. n. 4 a.

99

daran, ad.

»

Wille, 8. in. 1, p. 9.

11.

no

nein, ad.

wiUingly

gem, ad.

99

kein, p., p. 13.

of

von, pr.

none

keiner, e, es, p.,

P-

21.

here

hier, ad.

no one

Niemand, p. & Keiner.

— in

hierin, ad.

nat

nicht, ad.

-by

hierbei, ad.

nowhere

nirgends, ad.

^-on

hierauf, ad.

yes

ja,ad.

-of

hiervon, ad.

his

p., p. 20.

this

p., p. 13.

take

nehmen, v. a. ir.

do

to do

thiin, V. a. ir.

pray

• doch, c. & ad.

„ (make)

machen, v. a.

indeed

III.

aU

aller, e, es, a. or

P-

place (put)

stellen, v. a.

on

an, pr.

99 (««*^)

setzen, v. a.

„ (t'^on)
up

}

auf, pr.

„ (%)
or

legen, v. a.
c>der, a

place

Ort, 8. m. 4 b.

f<yr

fur, pr.

9>

Stelle, 8. f. 3 b.

99

nm, pr. & ad.

99

Lage, 8. f. 3 b.

99

denn, c

99

Platz, 3 m. 4 a.

m/ujch

viel, p.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULART, ETC.

61

ml

aber, c.

genug, a. & ad.
hinreichend, a. & ad.

beg (pray)
stand

bitten, v. a. ir.
stehen, v. n. ir.

IV.

mogen, v. n. ir., p.

30.

tchereto

wohin, ad.

pages 20, 21.

— from

woher, ad.

pages 20, 21.

— /are

wof iir, ad.

jr

wer or wer auch, p.

21.

— upon

worauf, ad.

toever

wen auch immer, p.

21.

— on

woran, ad.

bei, pr.

- of

wovon, ad.

yr)

neben, pr.

— with

womit, ad.

wo, ad.

— und^r

worunter, ad.

n

worin, ad.

— as

wahrend, c.

mi

woraus, ad.

many

viel oryiele(pl.)a.d^ ad.

y

wobei, ad.

shaU

sollen, v. n. ir., p. 28.

U

woran, ad.

Koch, s. m. 4 a.

yet

noch, ad.

Kochin, s. f. 3 b.

>»

doch, c

kochen, v. a.

»

dennoch, a

V

Kochkunst, s. f. 3

a.

V.

bringen, v. a. ir.
was, p.

with
within

mit, pr.
drinnen, ad.

?er

was auch.

»

in, pr.

}ever

was auch immer.

— out

ohne, pr.

Ihr or Euer, p., p. 20.

>»

draussen (out of

nahe, a. & ad.

doors), ad.

an, pr.

without^ out of

' ausser, pr.

t

beinahe, ad.

tOy too

zu, pr. & ad.

988

Nahe, s. f. 3 b.
unser, p., page 20.

my

mein, p.

Uaehaod) Liige, s. f. 3 b.

liigen, v. n. ir.
turn) liegen, v. n. ir.

wie, ad.

however

>»
— soever

jedoch, c.
dennoch, ad.
wie auch.
wie auch immcr.

62

THK PBACnCAL LDTGunrr.

carry, hear

tnigeiiy T. a. & n. ii

•

service

Dieiut, & m. 4 a.

bear (endure)

ertragen, v. a. ir.

— ant

Diener, & m. 1.

eerve

dienen, t. n.

n

Dieaerin, a. f. 3 b.

ff

bedienen, v. a.

»»

Magd,a£3a.

VL

can (able)

konDen, t. n. ir. p.

29.

at

an,pr.

eatmoi

nicht konneiL

»»

bei, pr.

I cannot
$o,ae,

ich kann nicht
80, c. A ad.

talk
speak

>

sprechen, t. a. & il ir.

$ay

tea

►
*

sagen, v. a.

n (craUjr)
speech

i^edcn, T. a. & h-
Rede, & £ 3 b.

give

geben, v. a. ir.

speaker

Sprecher, a. m. 1.

— er

Greber, s. m. 1.

thai {who

or

give back

zuruckgeben,T. a. ir.

(B)

which)

welchcr,p., p. 20 A 21

gift

Gabe, s. C 3 b.

>»

jener, p., p. 13.

hn-

ibr, p., p. 20.

»

der, p. 21.

their

*)

ihr, p., p. 20.

»

daas, c.

/{becom

werden, v. n. ir. p.

26.

right

Rechty 8. n. 4 a.

get) {obtain) [ ^o'^^^^' ^- «■ ^-
j L erhalten, v. a. ir.

upright
hope

aufrecht, a.
hoffen, V. il

^(brin^]

)

bringen, v. a. ir.

99

Hoffiinng, 8. f. 3 b.

sit

sitzen, v. n. ir.

-M

bofihungsvoll, a.

seat

Sitz, 8. m. 4 a.

to be hoped for

hoffentlich, ad.

to sit down

sich setzen, v. refl.

true

wahr, a.

also

auch, c.

truth

Wahrbeit, 8. £ 3 b.

right

> recht. a. & ad.

truly

wahrlich, ad.

-hf

4

\

V

— thful.

wabrhaft, a.

II.

desire

wiinschen, v. a.

ask (question)

fragen, v. a.

desire
wish

}

Wmisch, s. m. 4 a.

») heg

{

bitten, v. n- ir.
fordem, v. a.

desirable

wiinflchenswerthy a.

dema/nd

yerlangen, v. a.

see

look {at)

}

sehen, v. n. & a. ir.

»

c

Forderung, 8. £ 3 b.
vor, pr.

see again

wiedersehn, v. a ir.

(8.)

before

bevor, c.

sight

Aussicht, a f. 3 b.

c

ehe, c.

>f

Anblick, n. m. 4 a.

— hamd

Toraus, ad

»

Geucht, s. n. 4 b.

under

}

imtcr, pr.

among

' 1

THE PEKMAKINT VOCABULABT, ETC.

me

ansehen, v. a. ir. (s.)
zusehen, v. n. ir. (s.)
theuer, a.
Moved) lieb, a.

look (appear) aussehen, v. n. ir. (s.)
assert behaupten, v. a.

(usertian Behauptung, s. f . 3 b.

VIII.

sehr, ad.

same

derselbe, p., p. 20.

gut, a., p. 17.

— ness

Einformigkeit, s. f. 3 b.

ess

Gute, 8. f. 3 b.

endeavour ^

Gut, s. 11. 4 b.

<ry

versucben, v. a.

ander, a. & p.

attempt /

vt

eio anderer, p.

attempt.

Versucb, 8. m. 4 a (u).

wiker
4hffr /

einander, p.

trial (legal)

if

Prozeus, s. m. 4 a.
wenn, c.

nse

anders, ad.

let

lassen, v. & a. ir.,

danken, v. n.

p. 30.

W

dankbar, a.

„ (a house)

vermiethen, v. a.

^illness

Dankbarkeit, s. f. 3.

bad

8cblecbt, a.

9

Dank, s. m. 4.

why

warum, ad.

sie, p. 20.

heca^use

weil, c.

'y

scbon, ad.

order

bestellen, v. a.

he.

ein, p. 19.

„ {/or goods) Bestellung, 8. f. 3 b.

einmal, ad.

»

Ordnung, 8. f. 3 b.

voll, a.

„ (theatre]

I Freibillet, s. n. 4 a.

Yollig, a. & ad.

in order

in Ordnung.

erf iillen, v. a.

tidy
orderly

ordentlicb, a. & ad.

vr

ob, c.

tand)

stehen, v. n. ir.

to tidy

in Ordnung bringen.

olease)

gefallen, v. n. ir.

untidy

unordentlicb, a.

(U)

paasen, v. n.

distinguish

unterscbeiden, v. a. & n.

Anzug, 8. m. 4 a.

ir.

ile.

paflflend, a.

different

verscbieden, a.

(legal)

Anklager, 8. m. 1.

differ

sicb unterscbeiden, v.

\dmirer)

Vei*ehrer, s. m. 1.

refl ir.

Befehl, 8. m. 4 a.

differenos

Unterschied, 8. m. 4 a.

(com-

rather

lieber, ad.

id)

befehlen, v. a. ir.

99

eber, ad.

arrange)

ordnen, v. a.

THB PRACTICAL UHOUm*.

IX.

come
think

kommen, v. n. ir.
denken, v. a. ir.

s& } ««»>««'«««&••

thought

Gedanke, s. m. 1 ^

when ? wann f ad.

thoughtful
— nes8

sorgTaltig, a.
SorgTaltdgkeity s. £ 3.

„ \presen i ^^j^ ad. or c
i: future) / '

fmd

finden, v. a. ir.

„ {past) als, c.

9tiU

noch, ad.
jedoch, c.

> Bediirfhifls, a. n. 4 a.
want )

>»

still, a.

„ bediirfen, v. a. ir.

„ (to quiet)

stillen, v. a.

„ {necessary) nothig, a. & ad.

always

immer, ad.

require nothig hahen.

each
every

>

jeder, p., p. 13.

needy armselig, a.
know {by ex- kennen, v. a. ir.

tvery

je, ad.

perience)

love

lieben, v. a.

{by learning) wiRsen, v. a. ir.

lover

Geliebte, a. m. or f. *

— ingly wiasentlicli, a. & ad.

— ledge Kenntniss, a. £ 3 a.

believe

glauben, v. a.

indeed in der That.

— er

Glaubige *

„ allerdings, ad.

heUef

Glaiibe, s. m.^

„ wirklich, ad.

fain
gladly

}

gem, ad.

out aus, pr.

now nun, ad. & c.

„ jetzt, ad.

young jung, a.

youth {age) Jugend, s. f. 3.

„ {man) Jiingling, s. m. 4 a.

— f^ jugendlich, a.

then dann, ad.

show Ausstellung, s. fl 3 b.

zeigen, v. a.

>»

contrary

either {conj,) entweder, a
„ (/w^O einer von beiden.

neither {conj,) weder, c.

{pro,) keiner von beiden.
noch, c.
boren, v. a.

Hbrensagen, & n. 1.
zusammen, ad.

»

nor
hear

— 9a/y
together

Gregentheil, s. n. 4 a. covUrary

entg^n, a. ft ad.

knife

Dining-room

about

>»

Dialogue.

Words not in the foregoing Exercises,

Messer, s. n. 1. as so, c. & ad.

Esszimmer, s. n. 1. „ als, c.

umher, ad. „ da, c.
um, pr.

THS PERMAKEMT VOCABULABY, ETC

65

•

heitcr, a.

presence

Gegenwart, «. f. 3.

frph, a.

present

{at

gegenwartig, a. & ad.

adden

erfreuen, v. &.

hand)

99

erheitem, v. a.

self

selbst, p.

ngly i

gem, ad.

other
well

der, die, das Andere, p
wohl, ad.

1

Wort, 8. IL 4 a & b.

repeat

wiedorsagen, ▼. a. (b.)

ver

aber, c.

seek

1

suchen, v. a.

Jh

doch, c.

look for

1

wieder, ad.

keep

behalten, v. a. ir.

inly

allerdings, ad.

»»

halten, v. a. ir.

surely

gewiss, a. & ad.

just

grade, ad.

ni (giji) Geschenk, s. u. 4 &.

91

gerecht, a.

(give)

schenken, v. a.

99 «

eben alsi. o.

•

XI.

als, c.

/ ich >

stop J
>%n j

bleiben, v. n. ir.

fnysdf

dec.

jmir |8elbflt,p.,p.21

an, pr.

Wirklichkeit, s. f. 3 b.

se

verwirklichen, v. a.

Botion

Verwirklichung, s. f. 3.

nahen, v. a.

m

ann'ahen, v. a. (s.)

saen, v. a.

r

Saemann, s. m. 4. f

self

Sie selbst, p. 21.

must dlirfen, v. n. ir. p. 30.

may mogen, y. n. ir. p. 30.

go gehen, v. n. ir.

„ in a carriage fahren, v. n. ir.

„ on horseback reiten, v. n. ir.

to go out ausgehcn, v. n. ir (s.)

rruymerU )

instant

instantly

instantaneous

immedicUely sofort, ad.

I Augenblick, 8. m. 4 a.
> augenblicklich, a.&ad.

! {necessity) mussen, v. n. ir. p. 29.

r
t
\st

/ one

9
t

}

XII.

nie, ad.

sollen, V. n. ir. p. 28.

beinnbft. afl.

faHt, ad.

Alle, p.

Jerlermann, p., p. 21.

grofls, a.

lose
loss
loser
near

- ly

after

{behind)

99

aftervDcvrds \

vf-rlieren, v. a. ir.
Verluat, s. m. 4 a. (u.)
Verlierer, a. in. 1.
nahe, a. & ad.
beinahe, ad.
nach, pr.
hinter, pr.
nacbmals, ad.
nachher, ad.

fA

THB PBiML-rM^Al. LmsCIR

'tki

T. n. ir.

/nc

ft

require,
u§eful

XIII

r«»g.

AftiL

Natzen, s. m. 1.

f brmocben, v. a.

i benntaeD, v. a. /oMi)

/ Diitzlich, a.

mereKaikt KaufnymTi, & m. 4.t

mercAafylite Waure, s f. 3 K

^y legen, t. a.

before lay vorlegen, t. a. (s.)
vckai of
whereof

> woTODf ad.

perhaps rielleicht, ad.

/iit« / ^^"^'^ ^' ^' "■-

if you please gefaUigst, ad.

pleanng

agreeable

pleasure

delight

ever

such

XIV.

I gefallig, a.

Vergniigen, a n. 1.
vergniigen, v. a.
je or jemabs ad.
solcher, e. es. p. or a.

long

like {similar)
(love)

>»

»

»

thing

It
under

suffer

leiden, v. a. ir.

oh!

lang, a.

^eich, a. A ad.

gem haben.

leiden mogen (stronger

expression),
lieben, v. a. (strongest).
Sache, s. f. 3 b.
Ding, a. n. 4 a.
unter, pr.

O!

kind (sort)

»

kind (good)
„ (complai-
sant)
kindness
although
live

to live away
live (to lodge)
life
time

Sorte, 8. £ 3 b.
Grattung, 8. f. 3 b.
giitig, a. & ad.
gefallig, a.

GUte, 8. f. 3.
obgleich, c.
leben, v. n.
verleben, v. a.
wohnen, v. n.
Leben, s. n. 1.
Zeit, s. f. 3 b.

XV.

return (go

back)
return (turn

back)
return (give

back)
return

„ (again

come)
back

}

backwards
jyrice 1

prize J

zoriickgehen, v. n. ir. (a.)

zuriickkehreny v. n. (a.)

ziiriickgeben, v. a. ir. (s.)

ZnrUckkunft, s. f. 3 a.
wiederkommen, v. n.
ir. (s.)

zuriick, ad.

Preis, 8. m. 4 a.

THE PKBUAKBNT VOCABULARY, ETC.

67

Wlf

V
df

{of)

f iihren, v. a. ir.

send back

zuriickchicken, v. a. (a.)

Fuhrer, s. m. 1.

{

kosten, v. a.

y

taste

schmecken, v. a. & n.

' sich p., p. 21.

tasteful

Geschmack, & m. 4 a.
Bchmackhaft, a.

bezweifeln, v. a.

tasteless
cost

geschmacklos, a.
kosten, v. a.

zweifeln, v. n.
Zweifel, s. m. 1.

„ {expenses)
costless '

Kosten, s. f. 3 b., plural.
ko8tenlos, a.

{

arg., a,
schlecht, a.

compel
force

zwingen, v. a. ir.

senden, v. a. ir.
schickeu, v. a.
Absender, 8. ra. 1.

forceahh

compulsion

clock

gewaltaam, a.
Zwang, 8. m. 4.
Uhr, 8. f. 3 b.

n

W

'}/

1

Geld, ». n. 4 b.
zwischen, pr.

f schon, a.

Schunheity s. f. 3 b.
verschiinem, v. a.
gegen, pr.

. (some) gewiss, p. or a.

XVL

certain (sure)
certainly
certainty
sleep

tf

sleeper

sleepy

again

gewiss, a.
allerdings, ad.
Gewissheit^ s. f. 3 b.
schlafen, v. n. ir.
Scblaf, 8. m. 4.
Schlafer, s. m. 1.
Bchlafrig, a.
wieder, ad.

XVII.

to go

lassen, v. a. ir.

permit
allow

iway
depart

. ■

non )

weggehen, v. n. ir. (s.)
abreisen, v. n. (s.)

Erlaubni.ss, s. f. 3 »k

assure

oblige

obligation

trouble

! hehlii<l

hiiiterUutst^n, v. ii. ir.
Herr, s. ui. 2.

>»

r.

co7ivince

besuchen, v. a.

conviction

Besuch, s. m. 4 a. (u.)
Gast, 8. m. 4 a.

disquiet

(

erlauben, ▼. a.

versichem, v. a.
verbinden, v. a. ir.
Verbindlichkeit, 8.f. 3 b.
Obligation, s. f. 3 b.
bemiihen, v. a.
MUhe, 8. £ 3 b.

tiberzeugen, v. a.
Ueberzeugung, 8. £ 3 b.
beunruhigen, v. a.

E 2

08

THE PRACTICAL UNQUI8T.

XV III.

•

promise

versprechen, v. a. ir.

comprehend

einsehen, v. a. ir. (a.)

»

Versprechen, s. n. 1.

understand

verstehen, v. & ir.

mean

meinen, v. a.

ing

Verstand, 8. m. 4.

means

Mittel, s. n. 1.

probable

wahrscheinlich, a»

mean (sig- )

bedeuten, v. a.

friend
— ship

Freund, s. m. 4 a.
Freundschaffc, s. f. 3 b.

„ (stingy)

filzig, a.

friendly

freundlich, a.

signification

Bedeutung, s. f. 3 b.

enemy

Feind, s. m. 4 a.

another

ein anderer, e, es.

r*'^r I Absicht, 8. £ 3 b.
intention ) '

beabsichtigen, v. a.

vorhaben, v. a. (a.)

intend

{

ail fehlen, v. n.

to - Hvrow - otU zerwerfen, v. re£ ir.

person
people
nxtion
people

„ (th^y)
national
principle
principal

}(

91

„ (ground)
write

year

old

ancient

XIX.

Person, s. f. 3 b. writer

Volk, 8. n. 4 b. opinion

Nation, s^ f. 3 b. pardon

Leute, s. pi. forgive
man, p. sing. ,,

national, a. ago

Prinzip, s. n. 4, pi. ien. new

Prinzipal, s. m. 4 a. news

Haupt — (compound) hook

Grand, s. m. 4 a. read

schreiben, v. a. ir. — er

Jahr, s. n. 4 a. (a.)
\ alt, a.

over
aU over

Schreiber, s. m. 1.
Meinung, s. f. 3 b.
Verzeibiing, s. f. 3 b.
verzeihen, v. a. ir.
vergeben, v. a. ir.
vor, pr.
neu, a.

Neuigkeit, s. f. 3. b.
Buch, s. n. 4 b.
lesen, y. a. ir.
Vorleser, s. m. 1.

iiber, pr.
iiber and Uber.

road
way
agree

agreeable
agreeably
agreetnent

XX.

Str&sse, s. f. 3 b.
Weg, 8. m. 4 a.
iibereinstimmen, v.

n. (s.)
angenehm, a. & ad.
angemessen, a. & ad
Uebereinstimmung, s.

f. 3 b.

fi

>»

call (out J
fnamej

r/or)

reply

reply

answer

tiU

wait

rufen, v. a. ir.
nennen, v. a. ir.
vorsprecben, v. n. ir. (s.)
erwiedern, v. a.

I Antwort, s. f. 3. b.

bis, c.
warten, v. n.

THS PERMANENT VOOABULABT, ETa

69

underways

unterwegSy ad.

whole

Ganze, 8. n. *.

fetch

lio]cQ, V. a.

late

spat, a. & ad.

messenger

Bote, 8. m. 2.

to last

wahren, v. n.

whole

ganz, a. <b ad.

ANECDOTE.

Doctor

Arzt, 8. m. 4 a.

whine

winsebiy v. n.

India

Indien, s. u. 1.

away

hinweg, ad.

Monkey

Affe, 8. m. 2.

day

Tag, 8. m. 4 a. (a.)

tent

Zelt, s. n. 4 a.

die

8terben, v. n. ir.

distress

Noth, s. f. 3 a.

scratch

kratzen, v. a.

<o »

unglucklich machen.

If

zerkratzen, v. a.

>l >9

in Noth bringen.

care

Pflege, 8. f. 3 b.

nurse (sick)

Krankenwarterin, a.

9f

Serge, 8. f. 3 b.

f. 3 b.

9»

sorgen, v. n. <& a.

n (dry)

Kindermadchen,s.n. 1.

— Jul

— fuay

}

sorgfaltig, a. <& ad.

„ (wet)
inconsolahle

Am me, s. f. 3 b.
uutro8tlich, a.

carefulness

Sorgfalt, s. f. 3.

console

trosten, v. a.

careless

{

sorglos, a.
nachliissig, a.

lament
only

jammern, v. n.
nur, nd.

oareless7i£ss

{

Sorglosigkeit, s. f. 3 b.

discover

entdecken, v. a.

Nachlassigkeit, a. f. 3 b.

discoverer

Entdecker, 8. m. 1.

nurse

pflegen, v. a.

discovery

Entdeckung, 8. f . 3 b.

XXI.

morning

Morgen, 8. m. 1.

recollection

evening

Abend, s. m. 4 a.

remind

night

Nacht, 8. f. 3 a.

recollect

to-day

heute, ad.

reme^nher

sorry

traurig, a. & ad.

remembrance

sorrow

Kummer, s. m. 1.

good-bye

leben Sie wohl.

home

compliment

Compliment, s. n.

4

a.

mention

99

becomplimenten, ^

V.

a.

»

memory

Gedachtni88, s. n.

4

a.

Erinnerung, 8. f. 3 b.
> erinnem, v. a. & ref.

Rich erinnem, v. ref.
J Erinneioing, s. f. 3 b.
I Angedenken, s. n. 1.

Heimath, 8. f. 3 b.

erwiihnen, v. a.

Erwahnung, 8. £ 3 b.

70

THE PRACTICAL UNGUI8T.

gneve

fi

grief

>i

trauem, v. n. greet

leiden, v. a. & n. ir. greeting

\e\d, ad. family
I^idf 8. n. 4.

grussen, v. a.
Gnuv, 8. m. 4 a.
Familie, s. f. 3. b.

possible
possibly
possibility
impossible
impossibility
<M much as
possible

futture
natiMTol
natttrally
of course

XXII.

mofflich, a. « f Schande, s. f. 3.

® ' s/Mme <

moglicher Weiae. I Scham, a £ 3.

Moglichkeit, 8. £ 3 b. to be ashamed sich 8chamen, v. ref.

unmoglich, a. pity Schade, 8.

Unmoirlichkeit, s.£3b. exceed 1 .., . ^

,. f ' _ Vubertreffen, v. a. ir.

moglichst. excel J

exceedingly ausserordentlich, ad.

excellent vortrefflich, a.

Natur, 8. £ 3 b.
natUrlich, a. & ad.

temper
disgrace

>»

fid

Laune, 8. £ 3 b.
Schande, s. £ 3.
entehren, v. a.
Bchandlich, a^

since

Keit, c.

XXIII.
house

HauK, 8. n. 4 b.

XXIV.

German

Deutsch, a.

weath^' Wetter, s. n. 1.

age

Alter, 8. n. 1.

clovd Wolke, s. £ 3 b.

minute

Minute, s. £ 3 h.

eUyudy mit Wolken bedeckt.

pass

voriibergehen, v. u

fog Nebel, 8. m. 1.

ir. (h.)

fwy nebelig, a.

if

I^a88, 8. m. 4 a.

rain Kegen, 8. m. 1.

past

voriiber, ad.

rainy regnicht, a.

dull

triibe, a.

„ regnerisch, a.

If

ti-aurig, a.

„ f^to«a<A«r^Ilegenwetter, s. ii. 1.

sort (kind)

Art, 8. £ 3 b.

rwvgh raiih, a.

TUB PKRMANi£NT VOCABULABY, ETC.

71

XXV.

knock

klopfen, V. n.

part

Theil, a. in. 4 a.

open

offnen, v. a.

„ (dimde)

theilen, v. a.

»>

offen, a.

Gentleman

HeiT, a. m. 2.

door

Thur, 8. f. 3 b.

»

feiner Mann.

Mrs,

Frau, 8. f. 3 b.

mind

Geniuth, a. n. 4 b.

»>

Madam, s. f. 3.

„ (under-

Verstand, a. m. 4.

hurry (in a)

eilig, a.

standiftg)

M

eilen, v. n.

„ (sense)

Siuu, a. m. 4 a.

n

EUe, a. f. 3.

,, ( consider )hediin]i fin f v. a. ir.

prefer

vomehen, v. a. ir. (s.)

„ (mark)

merken, v. a.

— ence

Vorzug, 8. Di. 4 a.

cmisideration

Bedeuken, a. n. 1.

expect

erwarten, v. a.

(niy

kaufen, v. a.

— ation

•

Erwartung, s. f. 3 b.

buyer

Kiiufer, 8. in. 1.

company

Gesellschafb, a. f. 3 b.

sell

verkaufen, v. a.

companion

Gesellschafter, s. m. 1.

seller

Verkaufer, a. ui. 1.

>>

Gefahrte, s. m. 2.

indict I

vor Gericht atellen.

accompany

begleiten, v. a.

gcrichtlich belangen.

help

helfen, v. n. ir.

across

iiber, pr.

mofith

Moiiat, s. m, 4 a (a.)

accuse

beschuldigcn, v. a.

excuse

entschuldigen, v. a.

— ation

Beschuldigung, a. f. 3 b.

ft

Eutschuldiguug, a. f. 3 b.

accuser

Anklager, a. m. 1 .

piece

belong

herein bring

judicicUly

what/or

damage

hurt

h^ure

injury

damage

hurt

injurious

die
death
dead
devote

Stiick, 8. n. 4. a. suffice

gehoren, v. n. satisfy

hereinbringen, v.a.ir. (s. ) sufficient

gerichtlich, ad.
weaahalb, ad.

schaden, v. n.
[ bescliadigen, v. a.

Schaden, a. in. I.
> Beschadigung, a. f. 3. b.
achiidlich, a.

dissatisfy

\
i

genugen, v. n.

geiiug, ad.

iiuzufrieden inacheu,

V. a.

dissatisfaction Unzufriedenbeit,a.f. 3 b.

how-manyeth wievielste, a. & numeral.

what is the date der wievielste iat

to-day / heute \

prosecute \

pursue

I

liolangeu, v. a.

ANECDOTE.

aterben, v. n. ir.
Tod, a. m. 4.
tudt, a.
widmen, v. a

devoturu (sacri- Aufopteruiig, s. f. 3 b.
fee)
„ (l^^fy) Fi-oniinigkeit, a. f. 3 b.

nMrnuge

Hoinitb, a. f. 3 b.

72

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

heirathen, v. a.
Schuld, 8. f 3 b.
verschuldet, p. p.
Tugend, s. f. 3 b.
tugendliaft, a.
Dame, s. f. 3 b.
gebildet, a.

> reich, a.
Reichthum, s. m. 4 b.

matry
debt

indebted
virtue

OILS

lady
— like
rich
wealthy
riches
to be fond of gem haben.

>>

>>

ehow Pmnk, s. m. 4.

omamenl Zier, s. f. 3,

„ (decoration) Zierath, & m. 4 (pL en.)

Zieren, v. a.

verzieren, v. a.

verzierend, a. & ad.

bewundem, v. a.

bewunderungswiirdig,
a. & ad.

Bewundcrung, a. £ 3 1.

Bewunderer, s. m. 1.

ornamental
admire

— able

— €Uion
admirer

aoU

sole

solely

unparcUleled

reach

(get)

ft

edttcate

ton
or

99

receive

allein, a. & ad.
> einzigy a. & ad.

einzig in seiner Art
erreichen, v. a,
reichen, v. a.
Erreichung, s. f. 3.
erzieben, v. a. ir.
Erziehung, s. f. 3 b.
Erzieher, s. m. 1.
£rzieherin, s. f. 3 b.
erhalten, v. a. ir.
entgegennehmen, v.

a. ir. (s.)
empfangen, v. a. ir.

preserve

receiver

receipt

susceptible

owe

19

possess
„ ion
„ or

owner

refer

reference

99

show-love
spread

1

erhalten, v. tL ir.
Empfanger, s. m. 1.
Empfang. s. m. 4. a.
empfanglichy a.
verdanken, v. a.
schuldig sein
besitzen, v. a. ir.
BesitZy 8. m. 4 a.

Besitzer, s. m. 1.

beziehen, v. a. ir.
Bezug, s. m. 4 a.
Beziehung, s. f. 3 b.
Prunkliebe, s. f. 3.
ausbreiten, v. a.

XXVI.

I Bedingimg, 8. f. 3 b.

term

condition
smooth (water) glatt, a.
sq/t (wool) weich, a.
,1 Ranft, a.

^ '^<^' { :f xi'

fast (tight) fest, a.
jtLst (exactly) gRidc, ad.

a. & ad.

unjust

wrong

cUong

side

slow

slowly

work

laJbou/r

worker

)

ungerecht, a.
Unrecht, & n. 4 a.
entlang, pr.
Seite, 8. f. 3 b.

langsam, a. & ad.

arbeiten, v, a.

Arbeit, 8. f. 3 b.
Arbeiter, 3. m. 1.

THE PERMANEirr VOCABULABT, ETC.

73

tune

stimmen, v. a.

consequeiUly

folglich, ad.

it

Stimmung, s. f. 3. b.

consequence

Folge, 8. £ 3 b.

<mt of tune
h untune

verstiraiut, a.
veiijtiminen, v. a.

follow \
succeed f

folgen, V. n.

feel

fwhleu, V. a. & IL

introduce

vorstellen, v. a. (s.)

touch
onfeel

}

anfdlilen, v. a. (s.)

introduction
mistake

Vorstellung, 8. f. 3 b.
Feliler, s. m. 1.

form

Gestalt, 8. f. 3 b.

>»

Irrthum, 8. m. 4 b.

»

bilden, v. a.

»

sich irren, v. ref.

entire

ganz, a. & acL

dance

Tanz, 8. m. 4 a.

entire (in ^h/ohole einzig, a.

ft

tanzen, v. n.

and entire'*)

tt er

Tanzer, 8. m. 1.

consequent

folgend, a.

It tt

Tiinzerin, a. f. 3 b.

XXVII.

appearance

Schein, s. m. 4.

far

weit, a.

seem

)

8cheinen, v. n. ir.

easy \

leicht, a.

appear

9

hjlU j

#

correct

- ly

}

richtig, a. & ad.

object
to object

Gegeustand, s. m. 4 a.
eiuweuden, v. a. ir. (s.)

to correct

{

bericlitigen, v. a.

play

Spiel, 8. n. 4 a.

verbessern, v. a.

tt

8pielen, v. n.

(tnTTfLi*f. i/i n.

<

Berichtigung, & f. 3 b.

accept

annehmen, v. a. ir. (s.)

Wf # OOC'C'V/V

Verbcsserung, s. f. 3 b.

— able

annehmbaTj a.

reason (of

the Vermuifb, 8. f. 3.

tt tt

annebmlich, a.

inindj

1

acceptance

Aunahme, 8. f. 3 b.

»>

verniinfteln, v. n.

accepter

Aunehmer, s. m. 1.

„ (grou)

%d)

Grund, 8. m. 4 a.

>i

Empf anger, s. m. 1.

— abU
sensible

}

verniinftig, a.

unless
half

aiisgenommen wenn, c.
halb, a.

sense

Sinn, 8. m. 4 a.

halve

halbiren, v. a.

learn

leruen, v. a.

sfiut

8chliessen, v. a. ir.

learned

gelehrt, a. & ad.

shutter

liadcn, 8. m. 1.

learning

G^lehrsamkeit, 8. f. 3 b.

deceive

triigen, v. a. ir.

dirty (nasty J

garstig, a.

»»

betriigen, v. a. ir.

logic

Logik, 8. f. 3.

— er

Betriiger, s. m. 1.

logical

logisch, a.

deception
deceit

}

Betrug, 8. m. 4 a.

blame

tt

Tadel, 8. m. 1.
tadeln, v. a.

conclusion

Schluss, 8. m. 4 a.

„ able

tadelnswerth, a.

conclude

schliessen, v. a. ir.

tt ^

untadelhafl, a. & ad.

conclusive

entscheidend, a.

spend (time J

zubringen, v. a. ir. (s.)

down

nieder, ad.

„ (moneyj

) auHgebeu, v. a. ir. (s.)

dirt
fiUh

)

Schmutz, 8. m. 4.

spendthrift
bum

Versch wender, s. m. 1 •
Brandwiinde, 8. f. 3. b.

dirty

Bchtniitxie, n.

»>

brennen, v. a. & u. ir.

74

THE PRACTICAL UNOL'IST.

XXVIII.

to tire 1
fatigue (

ermiideu, v. a. k ii.

ahU 1

fabig, a.
im Stande.

fatigue

Ermudung, s. f. 3 b.

represetd

vonitellen, v. a.

to quiet

beruhigen, v. a.

— atioH

Vorstellung, s. £ 3 b.

reH^ repone

Ruhe, 8. f. 3 b.

represent

reprasentiren, v. a.

quiet 1

ruhig, a.

rej/resenUUite

Reprasentant, s. iil 2.

repose j

representation

Darstellung, s. £ 3 b.

to repose

ruheiif V. u.

fhemselces

sich selbst.

remdt

Erfolg, 8. m. 4 a. (o.)

own

eigen, a.

recommetid

euipfehlen, v. a. ir.

r admit

to oicn<

tpossess

zugeben, v. a. ir. (a)

recommenda-

Empfehlung, s. £ 3 b.

besitzen, v. a. ir.

tion

owner

Eigen thiimer, s. m. 1.

draw

zieheu, v. a, ir.

high

hoch. a.

„ (a picture^

) zeichnen, v. a.

height

Hohe, s. £ 3 b.

— en

erhohen, v. a.

occupy

beschaftigeii, v. a.

advice

[ Rath, 8. m. 4.

occupation y

Beschaftigiing, s. f. 3 b.

Rathschlage, plural.

employment f

adviser

Rathgeber, a m. 1.

employ

anwenden, v. a. ir. (s.)

consist

best^hen, v. n. ir.

resolve

sich eulschliesseu, v.

consistent

consequent, a.

ref. ir.

inconsistent

unvereinbar, a.

resoliUion

Entschlufw, H. 111. 4 a.

Sinn

Sumnie, s. £ 3 b.

go

gehen, v. n. ir.

ride {horseback) reiteii, v. n. ir.

to go away

weggehcn, v. u. ir. (s.)

,, (carriage)

fahren, v. n. ir.

cheque

Aiiweiijung, s. f. 3 b.

pretty

hiibsch, a.

advise

ratheii, v. a. ir.

XXIX

listen

horcbcn, v. ii.

modern

neuer, a. (comp.)

— er

Horcher, ». lu. 1.

»

modem, a.

weaken

bchwiichen, v. a.

attain

eiTeichen, v. a.

weak

Hchwach, a.

— nt^nl

Flrreichung, s. £ 3.

— ness

Schwache, 8. f. 3 b.

hour

Stunde, s. £ 3 b.

strengthen

starkeu, v. a.

round

rund, a.

strength

Starke, s. f. 3 b.

d^iinp

£eucht, a.

strong

Htark, a.

build

baut'U, V. a.

backwards

r lick warts, ad.

— vr

Erbauer, s. m. 1.

everyUiing

AUes, p.

uig

Gebaude, 8. n. 4 a.

judge

urtlieileii, v. n.

fall

Fall, 8. ni. 4 a.

ji

beurtheilen, v. a.

>>

fallen, v. n. ir.

„ (legal)

Richter, s. m. I.

use

Nutzen, a, m. 1.

>»

Kenner, s. m. I.

useful

niitzlich, a.

»>

Beurtheiler, s. m. 1.

use (w inf )

bi-auchen, v. a.

— meiU

tJrtheil, s. n. 4 a.

„ (to in' ike

benutzen, v. a.

consider

bedeuken, v. a. ir.

use of)

— atiim

RiickKicht, s. f. 3 b.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULARY, ETC.

75

scarce

>

- selten, a. 6^ ad.

persevere )

verhaiTen, v. n.

— ^y

sddoni

persist J
perseverance

AuHdaiier, 8. f. 3.

rare

J

perseverimj

ausdauernd, a. & ad

scarce

sparlich, a. <& ad.

. ( unterscbeiden, v. a. ir.
di»ttnguuh j ^„,^i^h„en, v. i^fl.

scarcity

Seltenheit, 8. f. 3 b.

heavy

schwer, a.

distinction

Aurtz^'ichnnng, 8. f. 3 b.

tongue

Zunge, 8. f. 3 b.

hereiny in (i.e.

herein, a<l.

us
ourselves

\ uns (selbst) p.

come in)
herein-caU

hereinmfen, v. a. ir. (s.)

position

Stelhuig, 8. f. 3 b.

passing-away

Verganglichkeit,8.f. 3b.

99

Stand, 8. m. 4 a.

perish

umkommen, V. n. ir.(s.)

suck-likes

dergleichen, p.

— able

verganglich, a.

•

XXX.

former

jener, e. es. p.

active

thatig, a.

first

erste, ordinal.

activity

Thatigkeit, s. f. 3 b.

latter

dieser, e. es. p.

circumstance

Umstand, 8. m. 4 a.

late

split, a. & ad.

pity

Mitleid, s. n. 4.

last

letzte, ordinal.

conceal

verhehlen, v. a.

99

dauern, v. n.

concealment

Verbehlung, a. f. 3 b.

reflect

nachdenken, V. n. ir. (s.)

ignorant

unwissend, a. & ad.

reflection

Nachdenken, s. n. 1.

ignorance

XJnwissenheit, s. f. 3 b.

wise

weLse, a.

ignore

nicht wissen.

wisdom

Weisheit, s. f. 3 b.

frerpvffnt

haufig, a.

ma it

Mann, s. m. 4 b.

- ly

„ ad.

despise

verachten, v. a.

cy

haufige Vorkommen.

ciilj/able

schuldig, a.

j> >i

Menge, 8. f. 3.

err

fclileii, V. n.

fix

I>efe8tigen, v. a.

defect

\ Fehler, s. m. 1.

suppose

voranssetzen, v. a. ir. (s.)

fauU

— itioii

Voraussetzung, 8. f. 3 b.

defect
deficiency

\ Mangel, h. m. 1.

express
— ive

auudriicken, v. a. (s.)
ansdnicksvoll, a.

defective

uiangelhaft, a.

— imi

Ausdnick, s. m. 4 a.

question

Frage, s. f. 3 b.

compare

vergleichen, v. a. ir.

>>

fragen, v. a.

— ison

Vergleich, 8. m. 4 a.

decide

\ entscheiden, v. a. ir.
1 beschliessen, v. a. ir.

metaphor

Vergleichung, s. f. 3 b.
Metapher, s. f. 3 b.

decision

J Entscheidung, s. f. 3 b.

— ical

inetai)liorisch, a.

( BeachlusA, h. ni. 4 a.

forget

vergesaen, v. a. ir.

decisive

entscheidend, a.

— fill

vergesslich, a.

indecision

Unentschlo8senheit,8.f. Z\i. figure

Figur, 8. f. 3 b.

undecided

I unentschlosscn, tk
( unent,achiedeii, a.

— ative

tigiirlicli, a.

language

Spraclie, s. f. 3 b.

trade

Handel, 8. ni. 1.

construe

construiren, v. a.

act

Handlung, 8. f. 3 b.

construction

Construction, s. f. 3 b.

>9

handeln, v. n.

literal \

wortlich, a. & ad.

actor

SchauspieltT, «. m. 1.

'>, I

buchstiiblich, a. & ad.

76

THB PAACTICAL LINGUIST.

>>

enjoy geniessen, v. a. ir. eaniMt

— meni Genuss, a. m. 4 a. measure

through durch, pr.

— ovi durchaus, ad. hit

manner-of-act- Handlungsweise, s. f.
ing 3 b.

emstlich, a.
messen, v. a. ir.
Maass, & n. 4.
treffen, v. a. ir.

XXXI.

number Zahl, s. f. 3 b.

„ (to count )2Ji\i\eiiy v. a.

idea
depend

— ent
independent
variety
vary
weigh
weig^U
move
movement
horn

bear (bring
forth)
„ (carryj
bemde
common
usual
general
generally
alike
eqtuU
equality
equally
a/muse

Idee, s. f. 3 b.
abbangen, v. n. ir. (s.)
abhangig, a.
unabbangig, a.
Abwechslung, s. £ 3 b.
abwecbseln, v. n. (s.)
wiegen, v. a. & n. ir.
Grewicht, s. n. 4 a.
bewegen, v. a.
Bewegung, s. f. 3 b.
geboren, pp. (gebaren)
gebaren, v. a. ir.

tragen, v. a. ir,
neben, pr.

gewohnlich, a. & ad.

> gleich, a. & ad .

Gleichheit, s. f. 3 b.
ebenHo, ad.

\ unterhalten, v. a. ir.

eniertatn

entertainment Unterhaltiing, s. f. 3 b.

'Haupt (with substan-
chiff tive)

^Cbef, 8. m. 4 (pi. s.)

head (body) Kopf, s. m. 4 a.
quantity Menge, s. f. 3.

study (room) Studiratube, b. f. 3 b.
„ (medita- Nachdenken, s. n. 1.
tion)

studiren, v. a. & n.

fleissig, a.

Seereise, s. f. 3 b.

Reisende, s. m. 2.*

schwer, a.

Schwierigkeit, s. £ 3 b.

am schwierigsten.

studious

Vortheil, a m. 4 a.

voyage
traveller
difficult
difficulty
most difficult
advatUage )
profit ■ J

— able 1

, . > vortheilhaft, a.

advantageous j *

toward (near) nahe, ad.

„ gegen, pr.

pure 1

7 > rein, a.

(deanly) reinhch, a.

reinigen, v. a.

— liness Heinlichkeit, s. £ 3 b.
take care of 1 ,

aufmerken, v. n. (s.)
Aufmerksamkeit, s. £

3 b.
aufmerksam, a.

atitnlion

attentive

hang

off
disorder

contribute

f hangen, v. n. ir.
I hangen, v. a.

ab, ad.

Unordnung, s. £ 3 b.

beitragen, ▼. a. ir. (s.)

contribution

forcible

dwelling

dwell

whilst

Beitrag, s. m. 4 a.
gewaltsam, a.
Wohnimg, s. f. 3 b.
"uohnen, v. n.
indem, c.

THE PERMANKXT VOCABULABT, ETC.

77

XXXII.

dispose (of J verfiigcn, v. n.

— Uion Charakter, b. m. 1.

favour Gunst, s. f. 3 a.

begunstigen, v. a.

habitttate

accustom

habitual

custom

overcome

V gewohneii, v. a.

gewohnlich, a.
Gewohnhoit, s. f. 3 b.
uberwaltigeu, v. a.
„ geruhrt, p p.

composefmusicjcompoiiivi^n, v. a.
„ (one^ssel/jfassen, v. ref.
„ (a 6ooA:^ vcrfassen, v. a.
— ition Composition, s. f. 3 b.
„ (printer sJSchriftsi^tz, s. m. 4 a.
composer (aii- Verfasser, s. m. 1.

tharj
rest Ruhe, s. f. 3.

„ nihen, v. n.

plain (simph) einfacb, a. & ad.
y, (clear) deutlicli, a. & ad.

Staat, s. m. 4 (pi. en.)
aussagen, v. a. (s.)
Aussage, s. f. 3 b.
klar, a. & ad.
/ aiifklaren, v. a. (s.)
( klar machen.
KJarheit, s. f. 3 b.

> TJmgekehrte, s. n.*

staU

— meni
dear

»

— ness
contrary
reverse

weUdo
expose

— sition

on the contrary
to-morrow

behind
incline

— ation
begin

— ning
well kept
increase

ft
over-estimate 1

over-rate /

wo7'th, valvs

value

worthless

— ness
worthy
unworthy
shareholder
share

»

afford (yield) I

„ (spare)
evil
root

umgekehrt, p. p.
morgig, a.
morgen, ad.
hinter, pr.
neigen, v. a.
Neigung, s. f. 3 b.
beginnen, v. a. ir.
anfangen, v. a. ir. (a)
Anfang, s. m. 4 a.
gut gelialten.
vermehren, v. a.
Vermehrung, s. f. 3 b.

iiberschatzen, v. a.

Werth, 8. m. 4 a.
schatzen, v. a.
werthlos.

Werthlosigkeit, s. f. 3 b.
wlirdig, a.
unwiirdig, a.
Aktionar, s. m. 4 a.
Aktie, or Actie, s. f. 3 b.
Antheil, s. m. 4 a.
theilen, v. a.
bringen, v. a. ir.
hervorbringen, v. a. (s.)
thun, V. a. ir.
Uebel, 8. n. 1.
Wurzel, 8. f. 3 b.
Wurzel fassen.

wohltbun, V. n. ir. (s.)
aussetzen, v. a. ir. (s.)
auseinandersetzen, v.

a. (8.)
Auseinandersetzung, s.

f. 3 b

postpone verschieben, v. a. ir.

worry Unruhe, s. f. 3 b.

„ (grieve) bekummem, v. a.

beyond voraus, ad.

catch fangen, v. a. ir.

so-ccUled sogenannt, p. p.

pay
end

XXXIII.

bezablen, v. a. endless

Bezahlung, s. f. 3 b. ojlen

Ende, s. n. 4 (pi. en) hire

unendlicb, &.
oft, ad.
miethen, v. a.

THE PRACTICAL LIXOUlflT.

iniftrtnce

1

unjjb'/iHfint j

Lob, s. n. 4.
loben, V. a.

Bewpiel, s. n. 4 a.

»>

Unangenehmes, s. n.*

unangenelim, a.
un/tliiaaanlnesi Uuanueliuilichkeit, s.

f. 3. b.
be.s^jiider8, ad.
lierionder, a.
erlangen, v. a.
Erwerbung, s. f. 3 b.
Spaziergang, s. m. 4 a.
Hpazieren, v. n.
Sj)azierganger, s. m. 1.

eapecifd
acquire

•— tntion
walk

»»

er

deep

prqfounil

dept/t

}

tief, a.

Tiefe, r. f. 3 b.

mortal
liable

— t/i/y
misfortune

if

mis/tap

calamity

proper

- ly

drive

driver

step

ft
hurt

break
rupture
break
rise

tf

}

sterblich, a.
untei'worfen, p. p.
Yerpflichtung, s. £ 3 b.
Mistjgeschick, s. n. 4 a.

XTngluck, 8. n. 4 a.

eigeD, a.
eigentlich, ad.
fahren, v. a. & n. ir.
Kutscher, s. m. 1.
Schritt, s. iiL 4 a.
treten, v. n. ir.
verletzen, v. a.

Bnich, 8. m. 4 a.

zerbrechen, v. a. ir.
Erhohung, ?. f. 3 b.
8teigen, v. n. ir.

turrif turning

99

at cUl

ready

prepared

foresee

foresight

aU-sorts^f

thhigs
in order ")
ahout^arowivd)
incense
strew
blessing
bless

particular
particidiirly
up'to-staiul
get up

glorious 1
magnificent /
magnificence \
splendour j
sound (inhofej

Wendung, s. f. 3 b.
wenden, v. a. ir.

gar, a. & ad.

voraussehen, v. a. ir. (s )
Vorsicht, s. f. 3.
allerlei, ad.

um, ad. & pr.

Weihrauch, s. m. 4 a.
streuen, v. a.
Segen, s. m. 1.
segnen, v. a.
besouder, a.
besonders, ad.

> aufstehen, v. n. ir. (f.)

herrlich, a.

Herrlichkoit, s. f. 3 b.
gesiind, a.

}

sound (noise)

99

lack
procure
manner
access

— ible

— ion
subject
svbmit
svJtject
sting
go up
up going
rising
mount

>>

— ain

mount-on
up hill
up step
step forth
amusement-
place

Gerausch, s. n. 4 a.
tonen, v. n.
entbehren, v. a.
verschaffen, v. a.
Weiae, s. f. 3 b.
ZugaUg, 8. m. 4 a.
zuganglicli, a.
Annaherung, s. f . 3 b.

unterwerfen, v. a. ir.

unterworfen, p. p.
8techen, v. a. ir.
aiifgehen, v. n. ir. (s.)

Aufgang, 8. m. 4 a.

betragen, v. a. ir.

Berg, 8. m. 4 a.

}
}

j- bergan, ad.

}

auftreten, v. n. ir. (s.)

Vergnugiingsplatc, s.
m. 4 a.

THE PERMANENT VOCABUIiARY, ETC.

79

XXXIV.

iiwigine

sicb einbilcloii, V. ref. (s. )

early

friib, a. & ad.

imaginatio/i

Einbildiiiif(skraft, s.f. 3.

aniidnt

mitten, ad.

ijiiage

Bild, 8. n. 4 b.

cover

Decke, s. f. 3 b.

society

GcrtellHciiaft, s. f. 3 b.

»»

bedecken, v. a.

sociahh

gesellig, a.

evident

augenscbeinlich, a.

associate

umgelien, v. n. ir. (s.)

evidence

Augeuschein, s. m. 4 a

association-

Association, s. f. 3 b.

enable

befahigen, v. a.

Twticithstand'

trotz, pr.

hither

hierher, ad.

aim

Ziel, a. 11. 4 a.

hitht'rto
till now

}

biaher, ad.

»>

ziden, v. n.

remain

bleiben, v. n. ir.

offer

Ant rag, s. m. 4 a.

remainder

Rest, s. m. 4 a.

j»

anbieten, v. a. ir. (s.)

remaining

Ubrig, a.

science

Wissenschaft, a. f. 3 b.

brief

kurz, a.

scientific

wisseuschaftlicb, a.

brevity

Kiirze, a. f. 3.

fresh

frlscb, a.

sketch

Skizze, a. f. 3 b.

letter

Brief, s. rn. 4 a.

sketch

akizzireu, v. a.

path

Pfad, a. m. 4 a. (a.)

prove

beweisen, v. a. ir.

middle "1
midst i

Mitte, a. f. 3 b.

proof
further

Beweia, a. m. 4 a.

uncondi- \

waiter, a. & ad.

tional f
unconditionr v

unbedingt, a. & ad.

shine scheinen, v. n. ir,
concern (care J Sorge, s. f. 3 b.

ally ^

))

anbetreffen, v. a, ir. (g.

chief-aim
marriage-offer

Hauptziel, s. n. 4 a.
HeirathsantragyS.m. 4a.

climb

{

klettem, v. n.
klimmen, v. n. ir.

decisive

entscheidend, a.^

material

StofT, s. m. 4 a. (o.)

decisi^i

Entscheidung, s. f. 3 b.

„ (im-

bedeutend, a.

decide

entscbeiden, v. a. ir.

portant)

word-store

Wortervorrath, s. m.4a.

XXXV.

cause

jy

effect

Ursache, s. £ 3 b.
verursachen, v. a.
Wirkung, a. f. 3 b.
„ bewirken, v. a.

conduct Betnigen, a. n. 1.

(lead) fiihren, v. a.
(guide) leiten, v. a.
to coTiduei flich betragen v. ref. ir.

oneself

>>

jt

alien

alienate
single
boy
fact

opportune
opporUmity

{

Fremde, s. m. & f. *
fremd, a.
entfremden, v. a.
einzig, a.
Knabe, a. m. 2.
Thatsache, a. f. 3 b.
giinatig, a.
gelegen, a.
Gelegenheit, s. f. 3 b.

80

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

»

ff

convert Bekehrtc, s. m. & £.•

C change JverwBindelUf v. a.
(religiousjhekehven, v. a.

Bekehning, s. f. 3 b.
Loos, 8. n. 3 a. (oo.)
Antheil, 3 m. 4 a.
verlassen, v. a. ir.
aufgeben, v. a. ir. (s.)
Aufgeben, s. n. 1.
versehen, v. a. ir.
Vorrath, s. m. 4 a.
Vorsehung, 8. f. 3.
schneebedeckt, a.
gestimt, a.
Stem, 8. m. 4 a.

conversion
lot (/ate)
„ (share)
aban/lan
give-up
abandonment
provide
provision
providence
snow-clad
starry
star

rapid achnell, a.

notice Beachtung, s. £ 3 K

„ (observe J beachten, v. a.
voluntary

willing > freiwilli^r, a. A ad.

willingly
run

> freiwillig,

deed

product

produce

production

produce

productive

}

originate

behave sich betragen, y. r. ir.

behaviour Betragen, s. n. 1.

estrange entfremden, v. a.

— ment Entfremdung, 8. f . 3 b.
( hervorbringen, v. a. ir.

(8.)

entstehen, v. n. ir.
seinen Ursprung neh-

men.
Ursprung, s. m. 4 a.
ursprunglich, a.

> Urheber, s. m. 1.

Urspriinglichkeit, s. f.

3 b.
Veranderung, s. £ 3 b.
verandern, v. a.
verwandeln, v. a.
veranderlich, a.
unveranderlich, a.

content

contentment

content

discontent

discontented

{

origin

original

originator

atU/ior

originality

change

»

ft
changeable

changeless

changeable-

ness

fickleness

Veranderlichkeit, s. f
3 b.

fate

faJtal
forsake
forsaken
foam

99

soft

sofUy

glide

rejoice |

to make glad j

tablet

spirit

„ (courage)
spirited

}

Lauf, 8. m. 4 a.
laufen, v. n. ir.
That, 8. £ 3 b.

Erzeugniss, s. n. 4 a.

hervorbringen, v. a. ir,

fruchtbar, a.

zufrieden, a.
Zufriedenheit, 8. £ 3 b.
zufrieden machen.
Unzufriedenheit, 8. £3.
unzufrieden, a.
Geschick, s. n. 4 a.
Verhangniss, s. n. 4 a.
verhangnissvoU, a.
verlassen, v. a. ir.
verlassen, p. p.
Schaum, s. m. 4 a.
Bchaumen, v. n.

sanfb, a. & ad.
gleiten, v. n. ir.

erfreuen, v. a.

Tafel, s. £ 3 b.
Geist, 8. m. 4 b.
Muth, 8. m. 4.
muthig, a.

XXXVI.

deliverer
liberate
liberation
liberty

Befreier, 8. m. 1.
befreien, v. a.
Befreiung, s. £ 3.
Freiheit, s. £ 3 b.

liberal (free) j freisinnig, a.
„ (generous) \ freigebig, a.
liberality Freisinnigkeit, s. £ 3 K

„ Freigebigkeit, a. £ 3 b.

TOE PERMAKEXT VOCABULABY, ETC.

81

alnue

abuser

abtuive

constant

constantly

constancy

throw

separate

>»
separation

separcMe

inseparable

peace

peaceful

peacefully

peaceable

moderation

to moderate
moderate

}

Missbrauch, s. m. 4 a.
missbrauchen, v. a.
Lasterer, s. m. 1.
Lelcidigend, a.

bestandig, a. & ad.

BcstamUgkeit, s. f. 3 b.

werfen, v. a. ir.

trennen, v. a.

getrennt, p. p.

TrenDung, s. f. 3 b.
f trennbar, a.
\ zertrennbar, a.

unzertrennlich, a.

Friede, s. m.J

}friedlich, a. & ad.
friedfertig, a,

{MaAHigiing, s. f. 3 b.
Maaaigkeit, s. f. 3 b.
massigen, v. a.
massig, a.

fool

folly

foolish

ascertain

duration
during
whilst
durable

durability

!

Thor, s. iiL 2.
Thorheit, s. f. 3 b.
tlioricht, a.

iausfindig machcn.
vergewissem, v. a.
Dauer, «. f. 3.

wahrend, pr. & c.

dauerhafl, a. & ad.
Dauerhaftigkcit, s. £
3 b.

{Antheil, s. m. 4. a.
Interesse, s. 4 (pL n. )
eigenniitzig, a.
interesairen, v. a.
comfort {well Wohlsein, «. n. 4.

being)
comfort {conso- Trost, s. m. 4.

lotion)
comfort trosten, v. a.

comfortable ) _. ,

, T 7 > trbfltlich, a.

consolable J '

interest

interested
interest

80 called
strive
strife

temperate one
time loss
in case

verrichten, v. a.

sogenannt, p. p. perform )

streben, v. n. accomplish J

Streit, 8. m. 4. acconiplish-

Massige, s. m. A f.* ment ^ Vollendung, s. f. 3 b.

Zeitverliist, s. m. 4 a. (u. ) performance

fidls, c. & ad.

XXXVII.

to make a noise larmen, v. n.

*

individuality

Individualitat, s. £ 3 b

noise

Larm. s. m. 4.

»

Einzelnheit, h. £ 3 b.

noisy

laruicnd, pr. p.

music

Musik, s. £ 3.

apply

beziehen, v. a. ir.

importance

Bedeutung, s. f. 3 b.

application

I FleiflR, s. m. 4.

important

bedeiitend, a.

industry

estimate

Abschatzung, s. f. 3 b.

sura

r flicher, a.

»

abschatzcn, v. a. (s.)

positive

< positiv, a.

„ (opinion)Mem\mgy s. f. 3 b.

C aiisdriicklich, a.

esteem

Achtimg, s. £ 3 b.

individual

Individuum, a.

n. 4

»

achten, v. a.

(pi. en.)

urge

treiben, v. a. ir.

>»

cinzeln, a.

99

dringen, v. n. ir.

F

82

THE PRACTICAL LIKOUIST.

v/rgerU

dringend, pr. p.

poor

arm, a.

spoil

•

'

I Verderben, s. n. 1.

poverty

Armuth, s. f. 3.

Tuvn

4

grand

priichtdg, a.

»

verderben, v. a. ir.

grcmdewr

Grosse, s. f. 3 b.

ruinous

verderblich, a.

d\Uy

Pflicht, 8.£1 3 b.

honor

Ehre, 8. f. 3 b.
ehren, v. a.

dvlifid
obedierU

4

gehomam, a.

hanorahU

ehrenvoll, a.

undo

aufloseiiy V. a. (8.)

fame

Rnf, & m. 4.

undone

ungescbeheiiy a.

infanuyus

vcmifen, a.

happen

gescheheiiy v. il ir.

induce

bewegen, v. a. ir.

glory

£,uhm, 8. m. 4.

exert

anstrengen, v. a. & ref.

glorious

rubmlichy a.

(8.)

glorify

verherrlichen, v. a.

exertion

Anstrengung, a. f. 3 b.

undertake

antemehinen, v. a. ir.

direct

richten, v. a.

enterprise

Untemehmung, s. fl3b.

»

grade, a.

undertaking

»

Untemehmen, a. n. 1.

»

direct, a.

enterprising

untemehmend, a.

direction

Eichtung, s. f. 3 b.

secure

4

8icher, a. & ad.

director

Vorsteher, s. m. 1.

securely

^^p^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^ ^m ^ " ■ ^^^^^ ^ ■ - - —

home

]

daheim, ad.

secure

sicheniy v. a.

at home

security

Sicherheity s. f. 3 b.

house

Haus, 8. n. 4 b.

harm

Leid, a. n. 4 (pL en.)

compensate

verguten, v. a.

»

Schade, 8. m.|

compensation

Vergutimg, s. f. 3 b.

harm

verletzen, v. a.

poor (person)

Arme, s. m. & f.*

harmless

unscliadlich, a.

temporary aeitweilig, a.

rate anachlageiiy v. a. ir. (s.)

press (printer^sJ'Pref^, a. £ 3 b.

„ (printer' sJdrvLcken, v. a.

„ (squeeze) driicken, v. a.

„ (fgura, dringen, v. n. ir.
tively)
pressing dringend, pr. p.

replace ersetzen, v. a.

happy
happily

actums-manner Handlung8wei8e,s. f.

3 b.
alter (change) andem, v. a.
negligence Nachlassigkeit, s. £ 3 b.

nachlassig, a.

vemachlassigen, v. a.

unterlassen, v. a. ir.

negligent
neglect
„ (leave

undone)

false

falsch, a.

I glucklich, a. & ad.

XXXVIII.

jay
joyful
r^oice
fortune
— ate

Freude, a. f . 3 b.
freudig, a.
freuen, t. ref.
Gluck, 8. n. 4.
glucklich, a.

anxiety
anxious
contain
contents
absent

Angst, 8. f. 3 &.
angsUich, a.
enihalten, t. a. ir.
Inhalt, 8. m. 4.
abwesend, a.

THE PEB31AN£IfT VOCABTTLABT, ETC.

83

absent (rmnow

\) entfemen, v. a. A re£

welfare

Woblergeben, 8. n. 1.

y, ((meself) abwesend sein.

delight

Entzucken, s. n. 1.

pain

SchmerZyS. ixl4 (pL en.)

»

sicb freuen, v. re£

»

schmerzen^ v. a.

delightful

ergotzlicb, a. & ad.

painfvl
child

schmerzlich, a.
Kind, 8. n. 4 b.

dislike
atfersion

}

Widerwille, 8. m.J

distribtiie

vertheilen, v. a.

dislike

nicbt mbgen.

distribiUion

Vertheilimg, s. £ 3 b.

,9 (hate)

ba88en, v. a.

ind^erenee

GleicbgUltigkeit, 8. f.
3 b.

proceeds
produce

}

£rtrag, s. m. 4 a.

indifferent

gleicbgliltig, a.

proceed

ansgeben, v. n. ir. (a.)

inflict

verursachen, v. a.

99

bervorgeben,v. n. ir.(8.)

infliction

Zufugung, 8. f. 3 b.

overloook

)

Uberseben, v. a. ir.

regard

Achtung, 8. £ 3 b.

review

^1^ w^^ ^/^ ^^ wmr ^ar ^■^^ ^^F ^^^^ W ^^ — -w

99

betrachten, v. a.

whatever

wa8 aucb immer.

regardless

unachtsam, a.

misunderstand missversteben, v. a. ir.

parent

Vater, 8. m. 1, or

ing Mi8sver8tandiii88y s. u.

Mutter, 8. £ 3, pi.

4 a.

Mutter.

apply

anwenden, v. a. ir. (a.)

parents

£lterny pi.

application

Anwendung, s. f. 3 b.

parental

vaterlicb or miitter-

misapplication scblecht^ Anwendung,

licby a.

(bad appli

8.£3b.

future

kiinftig, a.

cation)

99

zukunftig, a.

industry

Fleias, 8. m. 4.

JU

fabig, a.

y, (commerce

^Industrie, 8. £ 3 b.

perpetual (ever- immerwahrendy a.

approve

billigen, v. a.

ktstingj

approval

}

Biniflvmg, e. £ 3 b.

99

ewigy a.

approbation

•

perpetttate

fortsetzen, v. a. (s.)

(Mtonishment )

Erstaunen, 8. n. 1.

exist

exintiren, v. n.

surprise

J

existence

Ezistenz, 8. £ 3 b.

surprise

iiberrascben, v. a.

confide

vertrauen, t. a. & n.

style

nennen, y. a. ir.

confidence

Vertrauon, 8. n. 1.

99

Stjl, 8. m. 4 a.

eor^idant

Vertraute, 8. m. & £*

opposite

gegeniiber, ad. A pr.

confident

vertrauend, a. A ad.

99

entgegengesetzt, p. p.

coryidently

vertraulicb^ a. A ad.

opposition

Widerstand, 8. m. 4.

teach

lebren, v. a.

oppose

entgegenstellen, y.a. (8.)

teacher

Lebrer, 8. m. 1.

postman

Briefbrager, s. m. 1.

continucmce

.}

Fortaetzung, 8. £ 3 b.

pair (a few)

paar, a.

conttnv^aiion

c

99

paaren^ v. a. A re£

commit

begeben, v. a. ir.

continue <

fortsetzen, v. a. (s.)

commission

Begebung, a f . 3 b.

fortwabren, v. n. (s.)

99

Aufbrag, 8. m. 4 a.

continual'

fortwabrend, a. A ad.

99

einen Aufbrag geben.
F 2

S4

THE FBJkCnCAI. LDTGUIflT.

cofmniMu/ner

JCnmmistKir^ « m 4 A.

ext^/isit€

aosgedt^inty a. A ad.
einerlei, ad.

warm

wann, a.

aHihe-sams

»

n

warmeii, v. a.

sameness

Eineriei, & n. 4.

99

erwarmen, v. a.

admit

zolafiflen, t. a. ir. (a.)

warmth

Warme, 8. f. 3 b.

»

zugeben, v. a. ir. (&)

forOirUxaU

her\'omifen, v. a. ir. (a.)

admission

Einraamimg, & £ 3 b.

wule (far)

weit, a.

99

ZnbiflRnng, s. £ 3 bi

„ (l/road)

breit, a.

notion

BegnfT, a. m. 4 a.

wvWi

Weite, 8. £ 3.

wonder

Wander^ s n. 1.

w

Breite, s. £ 3.

»

wimdem, v. n. & ret

exUiU

Umfang, s. iil 4. a.

usonderful

/

wunderbar, a.

exterul

aufldehnen, v. a. (».)

i

wimdersam, a.

extengion

Au8dehnung, & f. 3 b.

XXXTX.

delay

Auflscbub, s. m. 4.

protection

<

Scbutz, s. m. 4.

»

aufscbielien, v. a. ir. (s.)

Bescbiitzung, s. f. 3 b.

in/lication

}

{

sonderbar, a.

mtimaiion

Andeutung, s. £ 3 b.

strange

fremd, a.

indicate

andeuten, v. a. (s.)

stranger

Fremde, s. m. A £*

inferior

untergeordnet, p. p.

aspire

{

streben, v. n.

relation (per-

Verwandte, s. m. A £*

anfHtrebeiifY.n. (s.)

son)

aspiration

Au&treben, n. n. 1.

„ (report) Erzahlung, s. f. 3 b.

genius

Genie, s. n. 4 a.

relative
proportional

■}

verba] tnissmassig, a.

aid (assistanee)Behst8aid, s. m. 4 a.
„ (support) Unterstiitzung, a. f.

relate

erzablen, v. a.

3 b.

a^icordingly

demgemass, ad.

,, (help)

Hillfe, 8. £ 3.

shelter

4

««

belfen, v. n. ir.

protection

Scbutz, 8. m. 4.

unterstiitzen, v. a.

protect

scbiitzen, v. a.

unaided

obne Unterstutznng,

shade

)

Scbatten, a. m. 1.

&c.

shadow

^

withstamd

widersteben, v. n. ir.

»

beschatten, v. a.

several

mehrere, a.

noble

edel, a.

degree

Grad, 8. m. 4 a. (a.)

nobility

Adel, 8. m. 1.

impress

einpragen, v. a. (s.)

recognition

Anerkennung, s. f. 3 b.

impression

Eindruck, s. m. 4 a.

recofpiue

erkennen, v. a. u*.

impressive

empfanglich, a. & ad.

reliarice

Vertrauen, 8. n. 1.

auxiliary

Verbiindete, s. m. & £*

roly

sich verlassen, V. ref. ir.

auxiliaries

Hiilfstnippen, s. £ 3

reliable

zuverlassig, a.

(pi)

external

ausserlich, a.

siraig/U

t

4

grade, or gerade, a. &

JfTOtcCt

beschiitzen, v. a.

direct

ad.

THE PERMANEirr TOCABULARY, ETC.

85

straighten

grade Tnachen.

wasteful

verschwenderisch, a. &

directly

sogleich, ad.

ad.

direct

richten, v. a.

reserve

Kiickhalt, s. m. 4.

„ (a letter) adreasiren, v. a.

»

vorbehalten, y. a. (s.)

tide

Fluth, s. f. 3 b.

„ (spare)

8paren, v. a.

ebb and flow

Ebbe und J^'luth.

reservation

Zuriickhaltung, 8. f.

solitary

einsam, a.

3 b.

prudence

Klugheit, 8. f. 3 b.

short

kurz, a.

prudent

klug, a.

boat

Boot, 8. n. 4 a.

might

Macht, s. f. 8 a.

boatTnan

Schiffer, 8. m. I.

toaste

Verschwenduug, s. f.

puU

Ziehen, v. a. ir.

3 b.

current

}

Strom, 8. uu 4 a.

■

verschwenden, v. a.

streofln

9

proportion

YerhdltnisB, s. n. 4 a.

rule

herrsclien, v. n.

proporti/ynale

verhaltniHsmaasig, a.

»

behen-schen, v. a.

behold

erblicken, v. a.

otherwise

1

yy

sehen, v. a. ir.

in a^wtlter

\

anderweitig, a. & ad.

yonder

jener, e, es, see p. 20.

manner

J

majesty
majestic

Majestat, s. f. 3 b.
majestatiscli, a.

sensible
intelligent

}

verstjindig, a.

else

anders, ad.

memory-poioer

Gedachtnisskraft, 8. f.

confess

gestohen, v. a. ir.

3 a.

confession

Grestandniss, s. n. 4 a.

save (money)

sparen, v. a.

foreign

fremd, a.

„ (danger)

retten, y. a.

foreigner

Auslander, s. m. I.

safe

sicber, a.

flee

Ziehen, v. a. ds n. ir.

salvation

Seligkeit, 8. f. 3.

upstriving

aufstrebeud, pr. p.

salvation

Heil, 8. n. 4 a.

support

UnterstUtzung, s. f. 3 b.

stream^

stromaufwarts, ad.

»

uuterstiitzen, y. a.

upwards

supporter

XJnterstutzer, s. m. 1.

row

Rudem, s n.

rule

Eogel, 8. f. 3 b.

rower

Ruderer, 8. lu. 1.

ruler

HeiTscher, s. m. 1.

XL.

u)ar

Krieg, 8. m. 4 a.

etUail

bringen, y. a. ir.

warlike

kriegeiisch, a.

misery

Eleud, 8. n. 4.

offensive

Aiigriff8=

miserable

elend, a.

defensive

Vertheidigungs =

connect

Yerbinden, y. a. ir.

defence

Vertheidigimg, 8 f. 3 b.

connexion

Verbindung, 8. f . 3 b,

defetul

vertheidigcn, y. a.

iU

iibel a. & ad.

defender

Vertheidiger, 8. m. I.

ills

XJebel, s. n. 1.

86

THE PBACnCAL lutoitist.

ready

bereit, a.

method

Metbode, s. f , 3 b.

readiness

Bereitachafl, s. £ 3 b.

methodical

methodisch, a.

conflagration

FeiiersbninBt, s. f. 3 a.

conftLse

verwirren, y. a.

reputation

Ruf, 8. m. 4.

coriftision

Verwiming, a. f. 3 b.

to he reputed

gebalten werden.

a,tt/ract

anriehen, y. a. ir. (s.)

destructive

zeratorend, a.

attraction

Anziehimg, s. £ 3 b.

destruction

Zersitorung, s. f. 3 b.

attractive

anziehend, a.

destroy

aaerstoren, y. a.

irreparable

nnervetzlicli, a.

avert

abweuden, v. a. ir. (s.)

cultivate (field) bebauen, v. a.

aversion

Abneigung, & f. 3 b.

„ (mind) pflegen, y. a.

energy

Nachdruck, & m. 4.

cuUiva>tion

Cultur, a £ 3 b.

energetic

nachdriicklich, a.

intercourse

Umgang, a m. 4 a.

fight

Kampf, s. m. 4 a.

sloven

Schmutzhammel (diri-

»

kampfen, v. n.

sheep), a m. 1.

>9

fechten, v. n. ir.

slovenly

nnordentlich, a. & ad.

safeguard

Schutzmittel, 8. n. 1.

annoy

plagen, y. a.

attendant

begleiteiid, pr. p.

»

belastigen, y. a.

alive

lebend, pr. p.

99

ennujiren, v. a.

*

master

HeiT, 8. m. 2.

annoyance

Plage, a £ 3 b.

Meister, s. m. 1.

repeat

wiederholen, y. a.

19

meisteniy v. a.

repetition

Wiederholung, a £ 3 b.

victory

Sieg, & m. 4 a.

to wa/rd off

abwehren, y. a. (a)

victorious

siegreicb, a.

terror

Schreoken, a m. 1.

fire

Feuer, s. n. 1.

terrible

entaetz.lich, a.

99

anfeuem, v. a. (8.)

terrify

erschrecken, y. a.

danger

Gefahr, s. f. 3 b.

»

in Schrecken setzen.

»

Crefahrlichkeit, 8. f. 3.

a,ssume

annehmen, y. a. ir. (a)

dangerjua

gefahrlich, a. & ad.

assumption

Annahme, 8. £ 3 b.

conspicuous /

sichtbar, a. & ad.

order-love

Ordnungsliebe, a f. 3.

evident J

klar, a. & ad.

inner

inner, a.

obvious \

augenscheinlich, a.&ad.

treatment

Behandlung, s. £ 3 b.

fail

fehlschlagen, y. n. ir. (s.)

treat

behandeln, y. a.

99

fehlen, y. n.

comprehend

Yerstehen, y. a. ir.

/adlure

Misslingen, a n. 1.

comprehenMon

t Verstand, a m. 4.

9>

Mangel, s. m. 1.

comprehen- "

\

mischief

99

Ungluck, 8. n. 4 a,
Schaden, 8. m. 1,

sive
comprehen-

> Yerstandlich, a.

mischievous

8chadeiiflroh, a.

sible

)

dispose

disponiren, v. a.

incomprehen-

TinYerstandlich, a.

disposition

Character, 8. m. 1.

sible

indisposition

XJnwohlsein, s. n. 4.

weary

langweilcn, y. a.

exhibit

ausstelleii, y. a. (s.)

»

miide, a.

exhibition

Auatellimg, s. f. 3 b.

THB PEB1CA17SHT T0GABT7LABT, BTO.

87

XT J,

change

amsatteln, y. a. (s.)

subscriber

Unterzeichner, s. m. 1.

changed

umgesattelt, p. p.

deposit

deponiren, v. a.

profession

Profeafiion, s. f. 3 b.

director

Director, s. m. 1 (pi. en.)

99

Stand, 8. m. 4 a.

fool

Narr, s. m, 2.

former

firiiher, a.

assist

beiwohnen, v. n. (s.)

betray

verrathen, v. a. ir.

meal

Mahlzeit, s. f. 3 b.

chose

wahlen, v. a.

conversation

Unterhaltung, a. f. 3 b.

bury

begraben, v. a. ir.

extrciordinary

annaerordentlich, a.

SotUhSea

Sudseemania, n. f. 3 b.

mortality

Sterblichkeit, 8. f . 3 b.

mania

laujyer (bar-

Advocat, 8. m. 2.

office

Biireau, s. n. 4 (pL x.)

rister)

subscription

Unterzeichnung, s. f.

t9

Anwalt, 8. m. 4 a. (a.)

3 b.

eminent

ansgezeichnet, a.

amount

Betrag, 8. m. 4 a.

hard of hearifig achwerhorig, a.

signing

Zeiclinung, 8. f. 3 b.

raise

erheben, v. a. ir.

public

Publikum, s. n. 4.

remark

Bemerkung, 8. f. 3 b.

stream

stromen, v. n.

thanks-prayer

Dankgebet, s. n. 4 a.

pound

Pfiind, s. n. 4 a. (u.)

sincerely

anfrichtig, a.

notice

Anzeige, s. f. 3 b.

XLII.

favourite

offence

court

infl/uenjce

condemn

result

irritate

strike

prison

prisoner

imprison

arrest

mearitime

law

inflict

lead-off

inform

cry

outburst

hail

}

Giinatling, 8. m. 4 a.
Vergehen, s. n. 1.
C^richt, 8. n. 4 a.
Einfluss, 8. m. 4 a.
verurtheilen, v. a.
Ansgang, 8. hl 4 a.
aiifbringen, v. a. ir. (a.)
Bchlttgen, V. a. ir.
Crefangnias, a. n. 4 a.
Gefangene, a. m. 2.

verhaften, v. a.

nnterdesa, ad.
Gesetz, s. n. 4 a.
zufiigen, v. a. (».)
abfiihren, v. a. (a.)
benachrichtigen, v. a.
weinen, v. a,
Jubel, 8. m. 1.
Heil, 8. n. 4.

courageous

chastisement

attack

castle

shoot

approach

wound

deserve

slay

likewise

kiU

strive

revenge

cool

torture

world

tyrant

free

bold

seize '

muthig, a.

Ziichtigung, 8. f. 3 b.
Angriff, a. m. 4 a.
Burg, 8. £ 3 b.
achiessen, v. a. ir.
herannahen, v. n. (s.)
verwunden, v. a.
verdienen, v. a.
erschlagen, v. a. ir.
gleichfalls, ad.
todten, V. a.
atreben, v. n.
Bache, 8. f. 3.
kiihlen, v. a.
Marter, s. f. 3 b.
Welt, a. f. 3 b.
Tyrann, a. m. 2.
befreien, v. a.
kiihn, a
ergreifen, v. a.

H6

THE PBACnCAL LDrGUlflT.

XLIII.

roUmr

Farbe, 8. f. 3 b.

rvyal

koniglich, a. A ad.

vnix

luiHcheii, V. a.

iicadeniy

Akademie, s. f. 3 b.

addrew

anretlen, v. a. (s.)

apjxnrU

emeimen, v. a.

inform/itlon

Belehrung, s. f. 3 b.

perform

vollbringen, v. a.

inquirer

Fragende, 8. m. 2.

explain

erklaren, v. a.

Uyntir-oa

anregen, v. a. (h.)

carry-out

austuhreD, v. a. (a)

deUiiUA

auHfiihrlichy a. <& acL

immediate

numittelbar, b.

regard (refe-

Bezug, 8. m. 4 a.

exact

genau, a. & ad.

rence)

vivid

lebhaft, a.

mecluxaicid

mechanisch, a. & ad.

mediate

vennitteln, v. a.

rub

reiben, v. a. ir.

acquisition

AufiasBung, s. f. 3 b.

jnU-OH

auftragen, v. a. ir. (b.)

fly-away

verfli^en, v. n. ir.

even

8elb8t, ad. •

passive

pa8Hiv, a.

lurch

Stick, 8. lu. 4 a.

7iote

Note, 8. f. 3 b.

C(jre

Kern, 8. lu. 4 a.

window

Fenster, 8. n. 1.

XLIV.

clergyiitan

Geistliche, am.* '

irritated

preac/ter

Prediger, 8. m. 1.

archbis/iop

vice-c/uinceUw

Vicekanzler, s. m. 1.

complain

preach

predigen, v. a.

on a^xount of

text

Text, 8. m. 4 a.

reproach

wake

wachen, v. n.

course

awake

aufwachen, v. n. (s.)

proof

sleepy

8chlafrig, a.

acuteness

hide

verbergeu, v. a. ir.

genuineness

emphatically

nachdriicklich, ad.

grace

divisuyth

Abtheilung, s. f. 3 b.

practise

sermon

Predigt, s. f. 3 b.

pra^ice

present

anwesend, a.

wit

at last

zuletzt, ad.

tvaver

joke

Scherz, 8. m. 4 a.

side-stroke

disturbance

Stoning, 8. £ 3 b.

fickle

happen

widerfahren, v. u. ir.

chaplain

cause

Yeranlassen, v a.

«

jxirting-speec/i

talk

Gerede, a. n. 4 b.

aufgebracht, p. pi
Erzbi8chof, a. m. 4 a.
beklagen, y. a. & re£
w^en, pr.
Vorwurf, 8. m. 4 a.
Lauf, 8. m. 4 a.
Probe, 8. f. 3 b.
Scharfsinn, a m. 4.
Gediegenheit, s. £ 3.
Gnade, 8. f. 3 b.
iiben, v. a.
Uebung, s. f. 3 b
Witz, a m. 4 a.
schwanken, v. n.
Seitenbieb, s. m. 4 a.
wankelmiithig, a.
Kapellan, 8. m. 4 a.
Absichiedsrede, s. £ 3 b.

THE PEBMANEKT YOOABULA&T, ETO.

89

XLV.

Serjeant

Kechtsgelehrte, s. m. *

calvinistic

calvinistisch, a.

weigh

erwagen, v. a.

board

Bord, 8. m. 4.

shine

leuchten, v. n.

ship

Schiff, 8. n. 4 a.

law-court

Gerichtshof, s. m 4 a.

intend

vorhaben, v. a. (8.)

appear

erscheinen, v. n. ir.

overreach

uberfliigeln, v, a.

bail

BuTgschafb, s. f. 3 b.

Jinn

fest, a.

fortune (pro-

Vemiogen, s. n. 1.

pine-wood

Fichtenholz, 8. n. 4 b.

perty)

safety-valve

Sicherheit8ventil, s. n.

detail

detailliren, v. a.

4 a.

8win

Betrag, s. m. 4 a.

boiler

Kes8el, 8. m. 1.

»

Summe, s. £ 3 b.

burst

apiingen, v. n. ir.

no ways

keineswegs, ad.

diviiie

Geistliche, s. m,*

daurU ( perplex jYGthWiScn.^ v. a.

disquiet

unnihig, a.

ua

Wechsel, b. m. 1.

mien

Miene, 8. f. 3 b.

honorable

ehrenhafb, a.

assume

annehmen, v. a. ir. (s.)

lav/ghter

Gelachter, s. n. 1.

7tu)ve-away

w^rucken,v. a &ii.(8.)

polite

hoflich, a.

afler-pa/rt

Hintertheil, 8. m. 4 a.

predestination

Vorherbestimmimg, s.

•

f. 3 b.

XLVI.

plan

Plan, 8. m. 4 a.

secret-keepi7ig

Geheimhtdtung, a. £

design

entwerfen, v. a. ir.

3 b.

Lacedemonian

. Lacedaiiionier, s. m. 1.

assembly

Versammlung, s. £ 3 b.

supplant

verdrangen, v. a.

one-voicedly

einstimmig, a. <fe ad.

government

Herrachafb, a. f. 3 b.

uprightness

RechtschafTenheit, s. £

Greece

Griechenland, s. n. 4.

3 b.

snatch-away

entreissen, v. a. ir.

ability

Klugheit, 8. £ 3 b.

Athenian

Athener, s. m. 1.

affair

Angelegeiiheit, s.£ 3 b.

to ^itm totooro?* zuwenden, v. a. ir. (s.)

view

Anaicht, a £ 3 b.

project

Entwurf, s. m. 4 a.

fleet

Fiotte, 8. £ 3 b.

to turn to

richten, v. a.

belong

angehoren, v. n. (s.)

choice

Wahl, s. f. 3 b.

n^ighbovnring

benachbart, a.

measure

Maasregel, s. f. 3 b.

haven

Hafen, a. m. 1.

regardful

riickaichtsvoll, a.

Athens

Athen.

cofiscientious

gewissenhafb, a.

u/ndoubtedly

unzweifelhafl, a. & ad.

lawful

gesetzinassig, a.

rvler

Beherrscher, a. m. 1.

gerteral

allgemein, a.

advantage

Vortheil, s. in. 4 a.

people's-

Volksversauunlung, s.

conww7iwealth Genieinwohl, s. n. 4.

assembly

f. 3 b.

a^-t/iesa7ne'

zugleich, ad.

proposal

Vorschlag, s. ui. 4 a.

tima

openly

offentlich, a. & ad.'

determine

beschliessen, v. a. ir.

reveal

enthiUlen, v. a.

to stand off

abtttehen, v. n. ir. (a.)

success

Erfolg, s. m. 1 a. (o.)

quite

ganzlich, ad.

90

THX P&AOnOAL LIKQUI8T.

XLVII.

against

gegen, pr.

spare

yerschonen, v. a.

emperor

I^aifler, s. m. 1.

senate

Senat, g. m. 4.

revolt

aich emporen, v. re£

interpose

sich verwenden, v. ref«

sruUch

reissen, v. a. ir.

ir.

urge

drangen, v. a.

Boman

Komifich, a.

empress

Kaiserin, s. f. 3 b.

mercy

Barmherzigkeit, s. f.

writing

Schreiben, 8. n. 1.

3 b.

husband

Gemahl, a. m. 4 a. (a.)

God

Gott, 8. m. 4 b.

utmost

auRAerst, ad.

sanctify

heiligen, v. a.

severity

Strenge, s. f. 3.

sv/mame

Beiname, s. m. |

conspirator

Mitverschworene, s. m.

pious

fromm, a.

&f. *

mildness

Milde, 8. f. 3.

however

aber, jedoch, c.

generous

gro8smuthig, a.

stirring

Regung, 8. f. 3 b.

fate

Schicksal, 8. n. 4 a. (a.)

good-natured'

Gutmiithigheit, s. f.

Ge8chick, 8. n. 4 a.

ness

3 b.

badly

bose, ad.

heariiig

Qehor, s. n. 4 a.

faithlessly

treulosy a. & ad.

follow

folgen, V. n.

predecessor

Vorganger, s. m. 1.

eompanion

Gef ahrte, s. m. & £•

add

hinziisetzen, v. a. (8.)

merit

verdienen, v. a.

altogether

ganz und gar, ad.

pledge

Pfand, 8. n. 4 b.

cruelty

Grausamkeit, 8. f. 3 b.

love

Liebe, s. f. 3.

^J^one-rolher

Thronrauber, s. m. 1.

harbour

hegen, y. a.

overcome

besiegen, v. a.

sonrin-law

Schwiegersohn , 8.m .4 a.

Spanish
history-
writer
remarkable
case
honour
truthfulness
cavalier
sudden
quarrel
Moorish
nobleman

flight

pursuer

unnoticed

gardcfk-wall

jut¥kp

Moor

XL VIII.

Spaniscli, a. accidentally

€}«schicht8clireiber, a. Spaniard

m. 1. happen

merkwurdig, a. implore

Fall, 8. m. 4 a. peach

Ehi^gefuhl, 8. n. 4. escape

Wahrheitsliebe, a. f. 3. scarcely
Cavalier, s. m. 4 a. heap

plotzlich, a. & ad.
Streit, 8. m. 4.
Maurisch, a.
Edelmann, s. m. 4. f
Flucht, 8, f. 3 a.
Verfolger, a. m. 1.
unberaerkt, a.

Gartenmaucr, s, f . 3 b. leave
springen, v. n. ir. Christian

Maure, s. m. 2. siufferfor

gate

corpse

unhappy

commit

power

fix

undisturbed

znTallig, a. & ad.
Spanier, s. m. 1
vorfallen, v. n. ir. (s.)
anflehen, v. a. (a.)
Pfiraich, s. m. 4 a.
entkommen, v. n. ir.
kauin, ad.
Haufe (n) s. m. X
Thor, 8. n. 4 a. (o.)
Leiche, a. f. 3 b.
imgliicklich, a.
veriiben, v. a
Gewalt, a. f. 3 b.
festaetzen, v a. (a.)
ungestort, a.
uberlaaaen, v. a. ir.
Christ, a. m. 2.
boaseiif t. a.

THX FKRMAKENT YOGABULABY, ETC.

91

dare

diiifen, v. a. ir.

safety

Sicherheit, 8. f. 3 b.

break

brechen, v. a. ir.

truly

wahrlich, ad.

stable

Stall, s. m. 4 a.

blood

Blut, 8. n. 4.

horse

Pferd, s. n. 4 a.

innocent

un8chuldig, a.

fly

fliehen, v. n. ir.

XTJX.

sincerelf^

auMchtig, ad.

off-give

abgeben, y. a. ir. (8.)

examine

priifen, v. a.

unveil

entschleiem, y. a.

zealously

eifrig, a. & ad.

sentiment

G^sinnung, 8. f. 3 b.

old age

Greisenalter, s. n. 1.

hard

hart, a.

co-emperor

Mitkaiser, s. m. 1.

renounce

entsagen, y. a.

sword

Schwert, s. n. 4 b.

praise

preiAon, y. a. ir.

p^secute

verfolgen, v. a.

treasure

Schatz, 8. m. 4 a.

likewise

ebenfallsy ad.

vanity

Eitelkeit, s. f. 3 b.

court-officer

Hofbeamte, s. m.*

dismiss

entlassen, y. a. ir.

governor

Statthalter, 8. m. 1.

off-stand

Anstand, 8. m. 4 a.

Christendom

Christenthum, s. n. 4.

(hesitation)

confess

bekennen, y. a. ir.

body-guard

Leibwache, 8. f. 3 b.

free

frei, a.

trusty entrust

Yertrauen, y. a.

sacrifice

opfem, V. a.

leading

Leitung, s. f. 3 b.

offi.ce

Amt, 8. n. 4 b.

public

ofientlich, a.

continiumce

Beharren, 8. n. 1.

faithfuiness

Treue, 8. f. 3.

imperial

kaiserlich, a.

reckon

rechnen, y. a.

forfeit

verwirken, v. a.

confidence

Vertrauen, s. n. 1.

declara>tion

Erklarung, s. f. 3 b.

announce

anklindigen, y. a. (a.)

L.

weep

weinen, y. n.

emotion

Bewegung, & f. 3 b.

aloud

laut, ad.

disciple

Schiller, s. m. 1.

there-stand

dastehen, y. n. ir. (a)

innocent

unschuldig, a.

excess

T7eberina88, 8. n. 4 a.

guilty

schuldig, a.

lament

wehklagen, y. n.

smile

lachela, y. n.

. Herz, 8. n. Sing.:

calmness

Ruhe, 8. f. 3.

1

Herz, Herzen8, Her-

birth

Geburt, s. f. 3 b.

heart -<

zen, Herz. Plur. :

ir^vstiice

Ungerechtigkeit,8.f. 3 b. 1

Herzen, etc.

death-cup

Todesbecher, s. m. 1.

pierce through durchdringen.

astonishing

erstaunlich, a.

unm4>ved

unbewegt, a.

firmness

Festigkeit, 8. f. 8 b.

wonted

gewohnt, p. p.

inexpressible

unbeechreiblich, a.

astonished

Yerwundert, p, p.

cheerfulness

Heiterkeit, 8. f. 3 b.

woman.

Weib, 8. n. 4 b

tear

Thiune, s. f. 3 b.

to send away

fortschicken, v. a. (s.)

refrain

8icheQthalten,v. ref. ii

calm

ruhig, a

poison

Gift, 8. n. 4 a.

resolution i

( £nt8chlo88enheit, a. f.
[ 3 b.

feeling

(}efuhl, 8. n. 4 a.

1

powerful

maclktig, a.

92

SPECIMEN AUXILIARY VOCABULARIES.

(When these are learned the student should construct others /or himself.)

The Meal Table.

Masculine.

Appetite
biscuit

Appetit, 4 a.
Zwieback, 4 a.

pepper
place

Pfeffer, 1.
Platz, 4 a.

hranfvdy .
cake

Branntwein, 4 a.
Kuchen, I.

plate
roast^meat

Teller, 1.
Braten, 1.

chair

Stub], 4 a.

salad

Salat, 4 a.

cheese

Kase, 4 a.

seat

Sitz, 4 a.

coffee
fish

Kaffee, 4 a.
Fisch, 4 a.

spoon
table

LoflTel, 1.
Tisch, 4 a.

hamfb

Schinken, 1.

tea

Thee, 4 a.

hunger

joiTU

mustard

Hunger, 1.
Braten, 1.
Senf, 4 a.

thirst

vinegar

wine

Durst, 4 a.
FiSsig, 4 a.
Wein, 4 a.

mustard-pot

Senftopf, 4 a.

Feminine.

biU
bottle

Kechnung, 3 b.
Flaflche, 3 b.

^ napkin
onion

Serviette, 3 b.
Zwiebel, 3 b.

butter

Butter, 3.

pie

Pastete, 3 b.

chocolate

Schokolate, 3 b.

sau^ce

Briihe, 3 b.

chop

Cotelette, 3 b.

saucer

Untertasse, 3 b.

cup

dish

fork

gravy

milk

Tjwse, 3 b.
Schiissel, 3 b.
Gttbel, 3 b.
Fleiscbbriihe, 3 b.
Milch, 3.

sausage
soup
tart
umie-card

Neuter.

Bratwurst, 3 a.
Suppe, 3 b.
Torte, 3 b.
Weinkarte, 3 b.

beef

Kindfleisch, 4.

dessert

Desert, 4 a.

beer

bread

breakfast

Bier, 4 a.
Brod, 4 a. (a.)
Friihstiick, 4 a.

dining-room
dinner

S[)ei8eziminer, 1
r ^littagessen, 1.
I das Epsen, 1.

candle

Licht, 4 a & b.

^0

Ei, 4 b.

cold meat

kaltes Fleisch, 4.

fat

Fett. 4 a.

THE PERMANENT VOCABULARY, ETC.

93

fowl

Grefliigel, 1.

pork

Schweinefleisch, 4.

frail

Obst, 4.

puHet

Huhnclien, 1.

game

Wildpret, 4 a.

salt

Salz, 4 a. (a.)

glass

Glas, 4 b.

saltdish

Salzfaaa, 4 b.

knife

Messer, 1.

supper

Abendessen, 1.

match

Schwefelholz, 4 b.

tumbler

Wasserglas, 4 b.

meat

Fleisch, 4.

veal

Kalbfleisch, 4.

mvMon

Hammelfleisch, 4.

vegetables

Gremiise, 4 a.

oil

Oel, 4 a.

water
Adjectives,

Wasser 1.

lean

mager.

well done

gar.

fried

gebraten.

smashed

zerdriickt.

sov/r

Rauer.

sweet

siiss.

stewed

geschmort

roast

gerostet

fat

fett

urulerdone

nicht gar.

hailed

gekocht.

baked

gebacken.

to eat

essen, v. a. ir.

to be hungry

hungrig sein.

to drink

trinken, v. a. ir.

to be satisfied

befriedigt sein.

to taste

schmecken, v. a. &

XL to dine

zu Mittag essen.

to taste

kosten, v. a.

to breakfast

fruhstucken.

to be thirsty

durstig sein.

to sup

11.
Dress.

zu Abend essen.

Masculine,

bonnet

Hut, 4 a.

head-dress

ICopfputz, 4 a.

hoot

Stiefel, 1.

nmff

Muff, 4 a.

seam

San ID, 1.

overcoat

Ueberrock, 4 a.

htitton

Knopf, 4 a.

petticoat

Unterrock, 4 a.

coat

Rock, 4 a.

ring

King, 4 a.

collar

Kragen, 1.

shawl

Shawl, 4 a.

dress-coal

Frack, 4 a.

shoe

Schuh, 4 a. (u.)

dressing-gown

Schlafrock, 4 a.

shoe-lace

Schnfirriemen, 4 a.

earrings

Ohning, 4 a.

slipper

Pantoffel, 1 pL n.

JUjmnel

Flanell, 4 a.

stocking

Stmmpf, 4 a.

glove

Handschuh, 4 a. {

[u.) stud

Manschettenknopf, 4 a.

goloshe

G uramischuh, 4 a.

umbrella

Regenschirm, 4 a.

hat

Hut, 4 a.

velvet
Jcemintne,

Sammt, 4 a.

apron

Schurze, 3 b.

brooch

Broche, 3 b.

braid, border

Leiste, 3 b.

buckle

Sclinalle, 3 b.

94

THB PRACTICAL UKGUIST.

chain

Kette, 3 b.

sock

Socke, 3 b.

crinoline

Crinoline, 3 b.

spectades

Brille, 3 b.

cuff

Manflcbette, 3 b.

stays

Scbnurbmst, 3 a.

drawers

TJnterbosen, 3 b.

string

Schnnr, 3 a.

dress

Kleidnng, 3 b.

trowsers

HoAe, 3 b.

jaekel

Jacke, 3 b.

waistcoat

We«t€, 3 b.

pocket

Tasche, 3 b.

watch

Uhr, 3 b.

Neuter.

band

Band, 4 b.

necktie

Halfftuch, 4 b.

bracelet

Armband, 4 b.

net

Netz, 4 a.

chemise

Hemd, 4 pL en.

nightshirt

Nacbthemd, 4.

doak
garter

Kleid, 4 b.
Stmmpfband, 4 b.

^^i^^^^^-Uaachentuch, 4 b.
chtef i

jersey

Unterbemd, 4.

ribbon

Band, 4 b.

necklace

Habband, 4 b.

shirt

Hemd, 4.

to wear

tragen, y. a. ir.

to takeoff

acLBziehen, y. a. ir. (s.),

to tie

binden, y. a. ir.

abnebmen,y.a.ir. (s.)

to wear out

abtragen, y. a. ir. (a.)

to mend

ansbessem, y. a. (a)

to dress

kleiden, y. a., anklei-

to sew

nahen, y. a.

den, V. a. (a)

tofit

passen^ y. n. (dat.) ste-

to undress

entkleiden, y. a., anA-

hen, y. n. ir. (dat.)

kleidcn, y. a. (a)

to brush

biirsten, y. a.

to put on

anziehen, y. a. ir. (s.),
&ufsetzen, y. a. (s.)

to dean

putzen, y. a.

III.

Tims, Seasons, Ac

Masculme.

afternoon

Kachmittag, 4 a.

month

Monat^ 4 a. (a.)

cwinmyn

Herbst, 4 a.

morning

Morgen, 1.

death

Tod, 4 a.

noon

Mittag, 4 a.

day

Tag, 4 a. (a.)

spring

Friihling, 4 a.

•

evening

Abend, 4 a.

summer

Sommer, 1.

fortnight

Yierzehn Tage, 4

a. winter
Feminine,

Winter, 1.

birth

Geburt, 3 b.

midnight

Mittemacht, 3 a.

harvest

Emte, 3 b.

second

Secunde, 3 b.

hour

Stunde, 3 b.

youth

Jugend, 3 b.

manhood

Mannbarkeit, 3 b.

week

Woche, ab.

minvie

Minute, 3 b.

THE PKRMANKNT YOCABULABT, ETC.

95

I^eiUer,

ceniury

Jahrhundert, 4 a

quarter

Vierteljahr, 4 a. (a.)

old-age

Alter, 1.

year

IV.

Monet.

Jahr, 4 a. (a.)

1 2 Pfeniiige=

=1 Silbergroschen^

Id. 30 Silbergroscl
V.

FUENITURB.

McuciUine.

len—l Thaler— 2«.10id

bookcase

Bucherschrank, 4

: a. comb

TCaTnm, 4 a.

bootjack

StiefeLdeher, 1.

curtain

Vorhang, 4 a.

broom

Besen, 1.

easy-chair

Seflsel, 1.

candlestick

Lenchter, 1.

gaselier

Qaaleuchter, 1.

cardplate

Yisitenkartenteller, 1. looking-glass

Spinel, 1.

carpet

Teppich, 4 a.

stove

Ofen, 1.

choir

Stiihl, 4 a.

table

Tisch, 4 a.

chamber

Nachttopf, 4 a.

VKuhing-stand Waschtisch, 4 a.

chess-table

Schachtisch, 4 a.

water-jug

Wasserkrug, 4 a.

eoalrsctUtle

Kohlenkasten, 1.

FeminiTie,

bedstead

BettJade, 3 b.

orTuvmerU

Vemening, 3 b.

beU

Glocke, 3 b.

shovel

Schanfel, 3 b.

brush

BiirRte, 3 b.

table-caver

Decke, 3 b.

dock

Standubr, 3 b.

tongs

Zange, 3 b.

drofuyers

Kommode, 3 b.

toothbrush

Zahnbiirste, 3 b.

globe

Weltktigel, 3 b.

vase

Vase, 3 b.

mat

Matte, 3 b.

I^euter.

bath

Bad, 4 b.

picture

BHd, 4 b.

bed

Bett, 4 (pL en.)

poker

Schilreisen, 1.

bedclothes

Bettiicher, 4 b.

razor

Basirmesaer, 1.

blind

Bouleau, 4.

sideboard

Biiffet, 4 a. (pi. s.)

couch

Sopha, 4 a.

tablecloth

Tischtuch, 4 b.

desk

Pult, 4 a. (u.)

towel

Handtuch, 4 b.

glass

aiftH, 4 b.

washing-basin

Waschbecken, 1.

oil painting

GemiQde, 4 a.

toork-box

Arbeitakorbchen, 1.

piano

Piano, 4.

96

THE PRACTICAL LINGUIST.

VI.

Parts op the Body.

Masculine,

ankle

Kii(5chel, 1.

mouih

Mund, 4.

arm

Ann, 4 a. (a.)

nail

Nagel, 1.

back

Riicken, 1.

neck

Hals, 4 a.

beard

Biirt, 4 a.

palate

Gaumen, 1.

body

Korper, 1.

stomach

Magen, 1.

elbow

Ellbogen, 1.

thigh

Schenkel, 1.

fitiger

Finger, 1.

thumb

Daumen, 1.

foot

FuRR, 4 a.

toenail

Fussnagel, 1.

Jiead

Kopf^ 4 a.

tooth

Zahn, 4 a.

knuckle

Knochel, 1.

whisker

Backenbart, 4 a.

moustache

Schnarrbart, 4 a.

Feminine.

calf

Wade, 3 b.

pupil

Pupille, 3 b.

cheek

Wange, 3 b.

rib

Rippe, 3 b.

chest

Brust, 3 a.

skin

Haut, 3 a.

eyebrow

Augenbraune, 3 I

K should^

Schulter, 3 b.

eyelash

Wimper, 3 b.

soul

Seele, 3 b.

hand

Hand, 3 a.

throat

Gurgel, 3 b.

lip

Lippe, 3 b.

toe

Zehe, 3 b.

liver

Leber, 3.

tongue

Zunge, 3 b.

loin

Hiifbe, 3 b.

Neuter,

blood

Blut, 4.

hair

Haar, 4 a. (a.)

bowels

Eingeweide, 4 a.

hea/rt

Herz, 4 a. (pi. en.)

brain

Gehim, 4 a.

knee

Knie, 4 a.

chin

Kiim, 4 a.

kg

Bein, 4 a.

ear

Ohr, 4 pi. en.

mind

G^muth, 4 b.

eye

Auge, 4 (pi. en.)

wrist

Handgelenk, 4 a.

eyelid

Augenlied, 4 b.

Adjectives,

bald

kahl.

dumb

stumm.

blind

blind.

faint

matt.

deaf

taiib.

lame
VII.
Relations.
Masculine.

lahm.

brother

Bruder, 1.

clerk

Commis.

— in-law

Sch wager, 1.

father.

Vater, 1.

THE PERMANENT VOCiAULlAT. ETC.

97

faUi,er-in4aw

Schwiegervater, 1.

nephew

Neffe, 2,

grandfather

Gross vater, 1.

( Diener, 1.
( Bediente.*

greair^and-

Urgrossvater, 1.

%M^W 1/VV#VV

father

son

Solm, 4 a.

grandson

Enkel, 1.

principal

Principal, 4 a.

godfather

Gevatter, 1.

trustee

Curator, 1 (pi. en.)

husband

Mann, 4 b.

uncle

Onkel, 1.

master

Meister, 1.

Feminine,

aunt

Xante, 3 b.

mother-indaw Schwiegermutter, 3.

duuglUer

Tochter,3 (pl.Tochter).

niece

Nichte, 3 b.

godmother

Gevatterin, 3 b.

sister

Schwester, 3 b.

grandmother

Gi*08smutter, 3.

stepmother

Stiefmutter, 3.

great^aml-

Urgrossmutter, 3.

sister-in^aw

Schwagerin, 3 b.

mother

sweetheart

Liebste.*

granddaughter Enkelin, 3 b.

wife

Frau, 3 b.

mother

Mutter, 3 (pi. Mutter).

friend

Freund, 4 a.
, Freundin, 3 b.

parents

Elt^-m, pi.

child

Blind, 4 b. neut

ward

Miindel, 1.

guardian

Vormund, 4 b.

part7ier

Associ^, 4 (pL 8.)

VIII.
Occupation and OpFicEa

actor

Scbauspieler, 1.

coac/iman

TTutscher, 1.

admired

Admiral, 4 a.

coal-merchant

Kohlenhandler, 1.

ao'chbisJ^p

Erzbischof, 4 a.

cook, 8. m.

Koch, 4 a.

artist

Kiinstler, 1.

cooky s. fl

Kochin, 3 b.

atiomef/

An wait, 4.

corporal

Korporal, 4 a.

baker

Backer, 1.

dean

Decan, 4 a.

banker

Banquier, 1.

doctor

Doctor, 1 (pi. en.)

barber

Barbier, 4 a.

duke

Fiirst, 2.

barrister

Advocat, 2.

dustman

Dreckmann, 4 b.

bishop

Bischof, 4 a.

emperor

Kaifler, 1.

bookbinder

Buchbinder, 1.

engine-driver

Locomotivfiihrer, 1.

bookseller

Buchhandler, 1.

engineer

Ingenieur, 4 a.

biUcher

Metzger, 1.

fireman

Feuermann, 4.

captain

Capitan, 4 a.

Jisherman

Fischer, 1.

carpenter

Tischler, 1.

Jishmonger

Fischhandler, 1.

chaplain

Kapellan, 4 a.

gardcTier

Gartner, 1.

chemist

Apotheker, 1.

general

General, 4 a.

clergyman

Geistliche.*

glazier

\Glafler, 1.

clerk

Commis.

greengrocer

Gemiisehandler, 1.

98

THE PRACTICAL UN0UI8T.

grocer

Kaufmann, 4.

painter

Maler, 1.

groom

Reitknecht, 4 a.

pJiotographer

Photograph, 2.

guard

Wachter, 1

physcian

Arzt, 4 a.

hatter

Hutmacher, 1.

pluinber

Bleiarbeiter, 1.

hosier

Kleinwaaren-

porter

Trager, 1.

handler, 1.

postman

Bneftrager, 1.

jeweller

Juwelier, 4 a.

priest

Priester, 1.

judge

Richter, 1.

prince

Prill 7., 2.

jurist

Jurist, 2.

princess

Prinzeasin, 3 b.

king

Konig, 4 a.

printer

Buchdrucker, 1.

lady

Dame, 3 b.

professor

Professor, 1 (pi. en.)

laundress

Waschfrau, 3 b.

pvhlican

Gastwirth, 4 a.

lawyer

Jurist, 2.

puhlisJier

Herausgeber, 1.

lieiUetiant

Lieutnant, 4 a.

queen

Konigin, 3 b.

linendraper

Leinwandhandler, 1.

scJiOolmast^T

Schnlmeister, 1.

lord

Lord, 4 (pi. s.)

secretary

Secretar, 4 a.

rtuigistraie

Magistrat, 4 a (a.)

Serjeant

Feldwebel, 1.

major

Major, 4 a.

servant

Diener, 1.

major-general

Creneralmajor, 4 a.

sJioeniaker

Schuhmachcr, 1.

mate

GeseU, 2.

soldier

Soldat, 2.

merchant

Kaufmann, 4.

steward

HaTishofmcister, 1.

monardi

Monarch, 2.

stockbroker

Makler, 1.

musician

Mu Hiker, 1.

stoker

Schiirer, 1.

newsagent

Zeitungsagent, 2.

tailor

Schneider, 1.

officer

Officier, 4 a.

tobacconist

Tabackliandler, 1.

ij

Beamte, s. m,*

waiter

Kellner, 1.

ostler

Stallknecht, 4 a.

IX.

Common Miscellaneous Objects.

MasciUine,

amhor

Anker, 1.

clay

Lehm, 4 a.

baU

Ball, 4 a.

cowrt

Hof, 4 a.

boMoon

Balon, 4 (pi. &)

dew

Thau, 4.

• •

barrow

Schubkarren, 1.

dock

Dock, 4 (pi. s.)

bird

Vogel, 1.

donkey

Ksel, 1.

branch

Zweig, 4 a.

fog

Nebel, 1.

brick

Zi^elstein, 4 a.

forest

VVald, 4 b.

bridle

Ziigel, 1.

fountain

Springbrunnen, 1.

buU

OchR, 2.

flea

Floh, 4 a.

bush

Busch, 4 a.

floor

Boden, 1.

cab

Fiaker, 1.

funnd

i Trichter, 1.
\ Schlot, 4 a.

canal

Kanal, 4 a.

cart

Wagen, 1.

garden

Garten, 1.

carriage

Wagen, 1.

gravel

Kies, 4 a.

cellar

Keller, 1.

hail

Hagel, 1.

TOE PERMANENT VOCABTTLABY, ETC.

99

haystack

Heuhaufen, f.

rye

Roggen, 1.

hUl

Pliigel, 1.

saddle

Sattel, 1.

lioof

Huf, 4 a. (u.)

sand

Sand, 4.

letter

Brief, 4 a.

seed

Ramen, 1.

liyJUning

Blitz, 4 a.

signpost

VVegweiser, 1.

niarsh

Morast, 4 a.

sky

Himmel, 1.

niast

Mast, 4 (pi. en.)

slate

Schieferstein, 4 a.

mist

Staubregen, 1.

snow

Schnee, 4 a.

monkey

Affe, 2.

spurs

Spom, 4.

moon

Mond, 4 a. (o.)

star

Stern, 4 a.

mou7iiain

Berg, 4 a.

stable

Stall, 4 a.

mud

Schinutz, 4.

stile

Stag, 4 a.

oats

Hafer, 1.

stirrup

Steigbiigel, 1.

omnibus

Omnibus, 4 a.

storm

Sturm, 4 a.

park

Park, 4 a. (a.)

stone

Stein, 4 a.

path

Fussweg, 4 a.

thunder

Donner, 1.

plough

Pflug, 4 a.

train

Zug, 4 a.

pond

Weiher, 1.

tree

Baum, 4 a.

rain

Regen, 1.

trunk

Stamm, 4 a.

rainbow

Regenbogen, 1.

vault

Keller, 1.

rake

Rechen, 1.

toaggon

Wagen, 1.

reins

Ziigel, 1.

well

Bnmnen, 1.

river

Fluss, 4 a.

wJieat

Weizen, 1.

road

Weg, 4 a.

Feminine,

air

Lnft, 3 a.

earth

Erde, 3 b.

axe

Axt, 3 a.

engine

Maschine, 3 b.

bank

Bank, 3 a.

estate

Besitzung, 3 b.

ba/rge

Barke, 3 b.

farm

Meierei, 3 b.

^' bark

Rinde, 3 b.

flower

Blume, 3 b.

barley

Gerste, 3 b.

fly

FUege, 3 b.

bam

Scheune, 3 b.

goat

Ziege, 3 b.

bridge

Briicke, 3 b.

la/inp

Laiupe, 3 b.

bug

Wanze, 3 b.

library

Bibliothek, 3 b.

cabin

Kajiite, 3 b.

miU

Miihle, 3 b.

carpet-bag

Reiseta«che, 3 b.

mou^e

Maus, 3 a.

ceiling

Decke, 3 b.

platform

Plattform, 3 b.

cJiapel

Kapelle, 3 b.

pump

Pumpe, 3 b.

clhurcli

Kirche, 3 b.

rat

Ratte, 3 b.

city

Stadt, 3 a.

railway

Eisenbahn, 3 b.

dovd

Wolke, 3 b.

root

VVurzel, 3 b.

cow

Kuh, 3 a.

screw

Sohraube, 3 b.

puddle

Pf utze, 3 b.

scytlie

Sense, 3 b.

door

Thure, 3 b.

shajt

Deichsel, 3 b.

vyy^''

100

THB PRACTICAL LIKGUIST.

shovel

Schiippe, 3 b.

sun

Sonne, 3 b.

stairs

Treppe, 3 b.

ioall

Mauer, 3 b.

step

Stufe, 3 b.

whip
Neuter.

Peitsche, 3 b.

animal

Thier, 4 a.

pavement

Trottoir, 4 a.

baUrooni

Ballzimmer, 1.

prison

Gefangniss, 4 a.

bit

Gebiss, 4 a.

rails

(Jelander, 1.

boat

Booty 4 a.

rigging

Takelwerk, 4 a.

chess

Schach, 4.

roof

Dach, 4 b.

cam

Kom, 4 b.

rope

Sell, 4 a.

cushion

Kissen, 1.

rudder

Ruder, 1.

deck

Verdeck, 4 a.

screw-steamer

Schraubenflchiff, 4 a.

field

Feld, 4 b.

sheep

Schaf, 4 a. (a.)

fire

Feuer, 1.

ship

Schiff, 4 a.

flour

Mehl, 4 a.

stea/mhoat

{ Dampf boot, 4 a.
( Dampfscbiff, 4 a.

gate

Thor, 4 a (o.)

%M^f\^^^f m 9 W^^^^^Mfw

grass

Gras, 4 b.

Straw

Stroh, 4 a.

hay

Heu, 4.

study

Studirzimmer, 1,

hedge

Gkbtisch, 4 a.

theatre

Theater, 1.

horse

Pferd, 4 a.

valley

Thai, 4 b.

horseshoe

Hufeisen, 1.

village

Dorf, 4 b.

hotel

Hotel, 4 a.

wareJumse

Waarenlager, 1.

house

Haus, 4 b.

weed

TJnkraut, 4 b.

leaf

Biatt, 4 b.

waiting-room

Wartezimmer, 1.

monument

Monument, 4 a.

wheatsheaf

Kombiindel, 1.

opera-house

Operuhaus, 4 b.

wheel

Bad, 4 b.

END OF VOL. II.

LOVDOV : B. X. BVST AVD CO., PBIVTZBB, WXVB OFHOB COUBT, B.C.

In the press.

rt^

rHE HISTORY

OF

KOMAN LAW

BEING THE TRANSLATION OF

OETOLAN'S

L'HISTOIRE DE LA LEOISLATIOR ROMAINE

depuis son origiDe jusqu'a la legislation moderne

AND

GENERALISATION DU DROIT ROMAIN

BY

ILTUDUS T. PRICHARD, Esq., F.S.S.

BAERI8TER-AT-LAW
AUTHOR OF THE ADMINISTRATION OF INDIA FROM 1809 TO 1868, ETC. ETO.

AND

DAVID NASMITH, Esq., LL.B.

BARRISTER-AT-LAW
AUTHOR OF THE CHRONOMETRIGAL CHART OF THE BISTORT OF ENGLAND

LONDON
BUTTERWORTHS, 7, FLEET STREET

LAW FUBLISHBBS

TO THB QVBBIl'8 HOST BZOBLLENT KAJISTX.

THE HISTORY OF ROMAN LAW.

Law students in England have long been familiar with the name of
M. Ortolan, Professor of Law in Paris.

His History of Roman Law, Explication Historique des InstUvUs de VEm-
pereur Jicstinien, avec le texte, la traduction en regard, et let explications sous
chaque paragraphe prfcSdie de VHistoire de la Legislation Romainty et d^uws
generalisation du droit Romain d'apris les textes andennement connus, ou plus
ric^mment dicoucert, by far the most exhaustive work on this interesting subject,
has for years been a source from which our English writers on jurisprudence have
drawn much of their material But the work itself, of whose excellence it would
be presumptuous in us, as it would be superfluous, to speak, has not formed to
the extent it ought to have done a text-book in our schools and universities ;
nor has it been so freely resorted to by the student or the professor as it would
have been had its extraordinary merits been more generally and more fully
recognised. This is owing partly, perhaps mainly, to its being in a foreign
language ; but it is also owing to the fact of its having been regarded too much
as a technical work, of interest only to the legal student, and to a mistaken
though too prevalent a view of the true province of history. That true province
of history has only begun to be recognised in comparatively recent years.
Dazzled by the glare and brilliance which attends great military achievements,
and led away by hero-worship, and by the admiration the human mind instinc-
tively feels for the glitter that surrounds a throne or an aristocracy, for the
chivalrous spirit of self-devotion which incites to deeds of patriotism and
national aggrandisement, and which can even gild with the lustre of renown
a guilty though perhaps noble ambition, writers of history are ever prone to
dwell too much on military events, and the career of great conquerors, and dis-
tinguished leaders. Yet in taking a comprehensive view of the history of the
rise and fall of the greatest nations of the earth, either in ancient or modem
times, we cannot fai> to be struck by the little permanent effect produced on
the destiny of nations by great wars and brilliant victories. Even in cases where
upon a superficial view we are at first tempted to believe we can trace lasting
and important changes in a nation's destiny to successful militar)' achievements,
we shaU find, if we look beneath the surface, that in attributing these results to
the immediate effects of a successful struggle, or series of struggles, we are in
reality mistaking effects for causes. In almost all — may we not say all ? — such
rases, the historian will find, if he looks below the surface, and does not allow

his eye to be dazzled with the glare of military glory, or his feelings to be
swayed by hero-worship, that the revolutions, and the changes, the rise to power
of one nation, or the decay of another, are in reality not the result of the
struggle in the battle-field, but the indications of great national movements
having their origin deeply seated in those unseen forces which control the
destinies of the human race. The impulse which sets in motion those forces,
whose effects we witness in the battle-field, in the noisy struggle of the forum,
in the tumult in the Senate or the market-place, in the assassination of a despot,
or the destniction of a popular leader, or in the simultaneous rising of a whole
people, is the pboorej»8 of thought. And hence the great value of
M. Ortolan s historical works. With the eye of a true philosopher, he traces the
stream of Roman history to its source, instead of dealing exclusively with events
that lie on the surface. In the history of individuals, as of nations, the pro-
gress of thought is the key to their career. And in the case of nations, that
progress of thought is indicated by the development of law. Thus, while
investigating the history of Roman law, M. Ortolan has elaborated the history
of Rome. And such a work in the hands of a skilled and profound jurist
is sure t4> possess this great advantage, that it will be distinguished by the
logical precision, clearness of arrangement, and exactitude which the study of
law is above all others calculated to impart.

Fully impressed with the immense value of M. Ortolan's work, the translators
have endeavoured to place within the reach of the English professor and his
pupil the first volume.

Believing that the work only requires to be more generally known to the
English public to be thoroughly appreciated, and believing that it well deserves
to take its place as a standard work on Roman history and Roman law in our
schools and universities, they have supplemented the text by a Chronometrical
Chart and an index affording easy reference to the numerous subjects embraced,
and to the classical and technical allusions and the principal historical incidents.
They have preserved the author's arrangement as to chapters, sections, &c.,
although this arrangement, familiar to the French, may at first be a little un-
familiar to the Fnglish reader, but it haa the great advantage of facilitating
reference to the original. The only change they have made is to substitute
the dates B.C. and A. D. for the date A. U.C.

LONDON:
BUTTERWORTHS, 7, FLEET STREET,

LAW PUBLIBHBBB TO THE QXJBEN*8 MOST EXCBLLSNT MAJESTY.

THE ADMINISTRATION OF INDIA

FROM 1859 TO 1868.

By ILTUDUS THOMAS PRICHARD, Barkisteb-at-Law.

In 2 vols., octavo, 21«.

OPINIONS OF THE PRESS.

*' A very able work. Mr. Prichard's style is clear and forcible, and he has evidently an
intimate knowledge of the country with which he deals. " — Law Times.

**Mr. Prichard has accumulated an immense amount of information respecting India
in the two volumes before us. The whole course of its administration since it came into
the hands of the Crown is detailed and considered. We can heartily recommend the
work to all who are in any way interested in the progress of India." — Standard,

** A most ample and lucid history of the country at large, with int*»rsper8ed chapters
at frequent intervals which deal with such important historical elements as the physical
features of tlie various provinces, natural products, trade, means of communication, and
the characteristics of the occupant tribes. • • • The recent history and condition of
India ; their relation to the immediate past and the immediate future, and that in all
departments, civil, military, legal, and commercial, have been described in a manner which
great knowledge, personal experience, indefatigable industry, and sound judgment could
alone attain." — Bombay Gazette.

** We are mistaken if these volumes are not widely read by our countrymen as faithful
records, written by an able, thousrhtful, and observant man, who has had unusually good
opportunities of making himself acquainted with his subject." — Law Magaziru and
Quarterly Review,

*'The work before us is an able and honest endeavour to supply thoroughly a want
that must have been keenly felt by many of those interested in recent Indian politics, — a
book, viz., of history and reference for the period which has elapsed since the extinction of
the Company's rule, and embracing the careers of Canning, Elgin, and Lawrence. • • «
Upon every conceivable subject connected with recent Indian history, the student will
find in it information ample, concise, and clear." — Asiatic.

** We can honestly recommend Mr. Prichard's history of the late decade as a convenient
book of reference, thorouglily trustworthy as to its facts and figures, though the opinions
hazarded and the conclusions arrived at are not always unassailable. " — CalcuUa Englishman.

**A period which includes the great famines of 1861 and 1866, the Umbeyla and
Bhotan campaii,^ns, the growth and collapse of the Bombay cotton mania, the progress of
tea culture in Bengal and Upper India, the indigo disturbances, the spread of railways and
canals, the introduction of the penal code, the great impulse given by the new order of
things political to the mental, social, and material life of all Hindustan — all these
subjects are handled by Mr. Prichard with the pen of a well-informed critic and an
informing writer. • ♦ ♦ To all who would know what India has been doing in the
last ten years, these volumes will be found to present a detailed and generally sulticient
answer." — Allen's Indian Mail.

** These volumes are manifestly the work of a shrewd observer who has passed many
years in India, and who gives us a non-official view of the history of the last ten years.
Besides an historical narrative, we have what we may almost style treatises on education,
social progress, the history of legislation, finance, hygiene and sanitation in India. • • •
A book which any officer likely to have to take a turn at Indian service would do well to
master." — Coulburns United Service Magazine.

** An able illustration of the present condition of India." — Morning Post.

** A new government, a re-organised army, a remodelled judicature, new taxes, new
financial arrangements, vast agricultural changes, and an immense influx of capital so
dizzied the observer that at the commencement of 1869 he could hardly recognise the India
of 1857. Worthily to describe the events of such a period would overtax, it might be
thought, the ablest writer. It is no small praise, then, when we say that Mr. Prichard has
left few topics untouched, and is always clear, always interesting and deserving attention,
even in places where bis information could not possibly be complete. He has written a
book which will assist the student of Indian affairs and save him the trouble of innumer-
able references." — Athenceum.

" A work which, while it forms no mean addition to general historical literature, will
be to the student of Indian Administration a standard book of reference." — Overland Mail.

I
I

THE

CHRONOMETRICAL CHART

OF THE

HISTORY OF ENGLAND,

BY

DAVID NASMITH, Esq.,

0/ the Middle Temple, Barruter-at-Law

ik*»x.*"^-^^

I

I

I.

This Chart embraces the History of England, from the invasion of
JuHus Caesar, 55 B.C., till the year i860 a.d. It is so arranged that the
position of each event determines its date, renders its relationship to
other events apparent, and enables the student to explain actions by
circumstances, and to associate men with their times. It also gives
what mere figures (dates) fail to impart, viz., a well-defined map of the
period, and entirely removes the difficulties of chronology.

Each dynasty is rendered distinct by being represented upon a
different coloured ground. The narrative is printed in ordinary type ;
legal matters in Old English ; statistics, in Egyptian ; literature, the
arts, inventions, acquisition of territory, social improvements, &c.,
in ItaHc ; each with suitable and distinct signs. By this com-
bination of local arrangement, colours, symbols, and types, an
entire picture of the History of England is placed before the eye in
a manner never before attempted, and by which the characteristic
features of each period are rendered conspicuous.

This Chart further differs from the generality of works bearing that
title, inasmuch as it is not a mere table of a few of the most prominent
events in English History, but is an arrangement of 3,210 facts,
selected from every class of information connected with the subject.
Though simple in form, it is comprehensive in matter ; and though
better adapted than any existing chart to aid the young, it will prove
equally valuable to the scholar as a work of reference.

The instructor who teaches Geography by the aid of a map will not,
when acquainted with the advantages of this chart, attempt to teach
English History without it

TO THE CHART IS ADDED A TABLE, GIVING AT ONE VIEW

THE CONTEMPORARY SOVEREIGNS OF EUROPE,

PROM

William the Conquee^i^to Yictoria,

AS ALSO

9n Introtuctton, anti an 3lpi)abettcal anti (Eiplanatots l^ntiex.

Price £2 28.

l/,B — Bound in cloth in the form of an Atlas^ or mounted on rollers forming a Map

Five Feet square.

r

^ ^^'- ■ ■iiMfcl

C^ronoimtrixal Cj^arl of t^e ^tstorji of (Snijlantr.

Extract from "The Times," February 10th, 1863,

An attempt to teach history by what geographers call " projection "
is certainly a novelty even among the phenomena of modem education.
This, however, is the object of the " Chart " above mentioned. It is a
map, not of a country, but of a period. Mr. Nasmith's fundamental
idea is that the abstract symbolism of numerals by which we express
what we call " dates " fails to yield any sufficient notion of chronology
to the minds of the young or uninstructed. A child may be taught to
repeat that Richard III. was killed in 1485, and Charles II. restored in
1660, without acquiring any accurate impression of the chronological
relation of the two facts. This is not the way in which we learn that
Durham is in the north of England, and Hampshire in the south. We
get that knowledge from a map by the aid of locality, and Mr. Nasmith
conceives that chronological knowledge may be imparted in like
manner. With this purpose in view he takes a certain period of time,
being that which coincides with the ascertainable history of this
country, and frames it, as it were, in a plane five feet square. This
quadrangular surface is to represent 1,860 years, or the interval between
the beginning of the Christian era and the time up to which the chart
is brought. That is the postulate. It remains only to treat this space
as any representation of territory would be treated in an ordinary map,
and to divide it into shires or shares. For symmetry's sake the chart is
supposed to contain a round 2,000 years, the odd 140 years required to
complete the 20 centuries being left, as we may say, unsurveyed. There
is no difficulty now in dividing the surface of the chart into parts or
squares, nor in subdividing these again, until we get certain measured
spaces representing centuries, and certain smaller ones representing
years. Time thus becomes expressed by locality. Early times are in
the north of the map, late times in the south, and a square of time to
the west is earlier than a square on the same line to the east We read
the chart, in short, as we should read any other page, beginning at the
top and going from left to right.

The next aid, and a very important one, is that of co.our. We have
all been taught that the first inhabitants of England were independent
Britons. Then came the Romans, then the Saxons, then the Danes,
then the Normans, and with these and after these a succession of
dynasties enduring to the present day. Let the times of the Britons,
then, be coloured green, those of the Romans brown, those of the
Saxons blue, those of the Danes orange, those of the Normans drab,

those of the Plantagenets yellow, those of the Lancastrians and Yorkists
shaded pink, those of the Tudors green, those of the Stuarts pink, and
those of the House of Hanover red. Here are very plain distinctions,
and we can tell one division of history from another by the colour as
easily as we can distinguish a pink Kentucky from a blue Tennessee on
a map of the old United States. Now, let us suppose this chart hung
up against a wall, and showing clearly and visibly certain great divi-
sions representing centuries, certain smaller divisions representing
decades, and certain still smaller divisions representing years. First
there will be the teaching of the colours. We observe, for instance,
that the great square which by its place in the map must represent the
1 2th century, is coloured irregularly, half drab and half yellow, and that
the yellow colour is then continued over the next two great squares, re-
presenting the 13th and 14th centuries. This tells us plainly enough
that the Normans began the 12th century for us, that they were suc-
ceeded in about the middle of it by the Plantagenets, and that the
Plantagenets reigned all through the 13th and 14th centuries.
Similarly the green colour, covering the whole of the great square or
century shown by its position to be the i6th, identifies that shire of
time with the Tudors, while a certain white enclave^ or district, in the
very middle of the Stuarts' pink division, gives us an unmistakable
notion of the Commonwealth. By going nearer to the map we shall
discover specifications corresponding to those villages, hamlets, or
tumuli on the map of a country ; viz., the principal events of successive
years, laid down duly in their successive small shires ; and so, in short,
we have our ** Chronometrical Chart of the History of England."

To the question. How will this teaching answer ? experience must
furnish a reply ; but we think the more the eye is thus used the better.
A pupil or student, however careless or however dull, could never fail
to carry away with him the general appearance of a large coloured
surface always before him. He would recollect it as he would recollect
the pattern of the paper-hangings or the position of the clock in the
school-room. He would remember that in the chart of history yellow
came before green, green before pink, and pink before red. He would
probably be able to say that blue was at the top and red at the bottom,
with the other principal colours between them. Yet, if he do all this,
and simply connect these half-a-dozen colours with half-a-dozen names,
he would have got an elementary notion of English chronology. If he
could go further, and recollect in which small subdivision of each great
square he used to find a certain event characteristically denoted, he
would know all the dates of importance in the history of England, and
be able to take a survey of the whole period besides. How much of
this can really be done teachers would soon discover, and, as the chart
is published in the form of an atlas as well as in the form of a map,
ordinary readers can make the discovery also.

TESTIMONIALS.

From the LORD CHANCELLOR.

5, Cromwell Houses, W.,

Mafj, 20, 1868.
Sir,

I have to thank you very much for the Chro-

nometrical Chart of English History^ which you have

been so good as to send me. I am satisfied there is

no way by which History can be taught, and no way by

which a reference to the prominent facts of History

can be made so easily as by means of a Synoptical

Chart of this description.

But the very original and striking arrangements as
to colour, type, order, and superficial division, which
you have adopted, appear to make your Chart very
superior to anything of the kind I have seen, and to
make it a great acquisition to the teacher and the
student, and indeed to every library.

I should think that a Law student, in particular,
would find it pre-eminently useful, fi:om the mauner in

which it interweaves the history of the Law with the

history of the Country, at the same time that the

threads of each can be distinctly traced.

I am. Sir,

Your obedient servant,

CAIRNS.
David Nasmith, Esq.

LORD BROUGHAM AND VAUX, F.R.S.

4, Grafton Street, May 20th, 1863.
Lord iJrougham presents his compliments to Mr. Nasmith, and
returns his best thanks for the valuable present of his Chronometrical
Chart, which he believes will prove most useful : it is a work of great
labour.

VISCOUNT PALMERSTON, M.R, K,G., G.C.B.

94, Piccadilly, May 16M, 1863.
Lord Palmerston presents his compliments to Mr. Nasmith, and
begs to return his best thanks for the highly interesting and instructive
volume which Mr. Nasmith has been so good as to send him.

THE EARL OF SHAFTESBURY, K.G.

24, Grosvenor Square, May 20/A, 1863.
Sir, — I must again thank you by letter for the very valuable and
interesting Historical Chart. The labour that you have expended on a
work of so much arrangement and research, will be the means of
sparing all who study it a great deal of persevering and perhaps
fruitless toiL Your obedient Servant,

SHAFTESBURY.

INSTITUT IMPERIAL DE FRANCE.

Paris, le 19 AcHt^ 1863.

LE SiCRilTAIRE PERPiTU^L DE L'ACADiMIE.

Monsieur, — L'Acad^mie a requ la Carte Chronom^trique de
rhistoire d'Angleterre, dont vous lui avez fait hommage. Elle a
ordonn^ que cette carte si ing^nieusement con9ue et si savamment
ex^cut^e serait d^pos^e k la Biblioth^que de Tlnstitut, et elle m'a
charg^ de vous transmettre ses remerclments. Veuillez aussi recevoir
mes remerclments particuliers pour la copie que vous avez bien voulu
m*en adresser, je Tai parcourue et examinee avec soin. Cet Atlas
offre, sous une forme nouvelle, tout ce qu'il y a de plus memorable et
de plus certain dans Thistoire d'Angleterre, depuis son origine jusqu' k
nos jours ; la distribution g^ographique des ^vbnements dans les
compartiments que vous avez imagines, avec Temploi de couleurs
diverses et de caractbres distincts suivant Tordre auquel ils appartien-
nent, permet k Tesprit de les saisir plus nettement et k la m^moire de

les retenir plus sdrement. La vue vient en aide k la connaissance ; et
les fiiits historiques de diverse nature, caract^ris^s avec pr^ision
peuvent 6tre mieux suivis dans leur d^veloppement progressif et mdme
appr^ci^s dans leurs rapports mutuels. II serait heureux que cette
m^thode que vous avez si bien appliqufe k I'histoire d'Angleterre, le
fQt k rhistoire des autres pays.

Agr^ez, Monsieur, Tassurance de ma consideration la plus distingufe
Monsieur David Nasmith. MIGNET.

H.I.H. PRINCE LOUIS LUCIEN BONAPARTE, F.RS.

London, February zZthy 1863.

Dear Sir, — I have examined carefully your Chronometrical Chart,
and I have been much pleased with it. I think that the idea of
using colour is a very good one, and in my opinion the teaching of
history will be made by this means much more easy ; nothing, in fact,
being capable of calling the attention more than colours, it follows that
they prove so useful in impressing the memory with the objects they
represent, of whatever kind they may be. I may add that, some years
ago, having published a work in which the difference of colours indicated
the difference of grammatical forms, these last, so difficult to convey to
the minds of others, have been very easily understood, and in some
cases learnt, by persons unacquainted with the complicate language
(the Basque) to which the aforesaid forms belong. So I should be
very much surprised if your excellent idea of appl)ring colours to the
study of history would not be crowned with deserved success.

And believe me, yours very sincerely,

LOUIS LUCIEN BONAPARTE.

M. THIERS

(Membre de TAcad^mie Franqaise, Auteur de THistoire du Consulat et

de r Empire).

Paris, /^ 25 Avril^ 1863.

Monsieur, — J*ai examine votre travail avec une serieuse attention.

Je suis port^ \ penser que le mode d'enseignement par Tableaux ou

Cartes, appliqu^ \ de simples faits isol^s et aux dates, toujours si

difficiles k retenir, peut offrir de v^ritables avantages. Lk ob le raisonne-

ment ne vient pas en aide k la m^moire, les Tableaux materiel
peuvent ^tre d'un grand secours. Uexp^rience ne tardera pas k nous
apprendre si les Cartes, qui ont toujours 6t6 employees comme
Tauxiliare le plus propre k seconder Tenseignement de la g^ographie
presentent le m^me avantage pour T^tude de la chronologie. Vous
aurez, en ce cas, Monsieur, rendu k I'art d'instruire, un service dont
TAngleterre ne sera pas seule ^ profiler, car votre systbme sera
promptement irait^ dans tous les pays du monde.

Agr^ez, Monsieur, mes f^^licitations avec Tassurance de mes senti-
ments les plus distingu^s. A. THIERS.

M. GUIZOT.
(Membre de Tlnstitut, etc., etc.)
Val Richer (par Lisieux-Calvados), 28 Afat\ 1863.

J'ai re^u, Monsieur, la Cart^ Chronomiirique de Vhistoire dAngUterre
que vouz avez bien voulu m'envoyer, et je vous en aurais remesci^ plus
tot si je n'avais tenu d'al}ord ^ Texaminer avec quelque soin; Cet
examen m'a convaincu que votre ouvrage ^tait remarquablement exact,
complet, et r^sumait tr^s-bien, dans des tableaux clairs, tous les faits
essentiels de I'histoire d'Angleterre. Je joins volontiers mon t^moignage
a ceux qui vous ont d^ji ^t^ adress^s, et je vous prie de recevoir,
avec mes remerciments, I'assurance de ma consideration tr^-distingu^e.

GUIZOT.

J. G. PHILLIMORE, ESQ., Q.C.
(Reader on Constitutional Law to the Inns of Court.)

Lincoln's Inn, May 19/A, 1863.

Dear Sir, — ^You are good enough to ask for my opinion of your
Chronometrical Chart I have examined it attentively, and have much
pleasure in assuring you that I think the work reflects great credit on
the attainments and industry of its author, and that when the principle
on which it has been drawn up has been mastered it will render most
valuable aid to the historical student, by abridging his labour and
fixing the events of the particular period which he is considering in his
recollection. Wishing it all success,

I remain, your faithful Servant,

J. G. PHILLIMQRE.

THOMAS CARLYLE, ESQ.

(Rector of the University of Edinburgh.)
Dear Sir, — I have more than once looked into your Map of the
History of England, and can now, since you request it, have no hesita-
tion in saying, what is strictly the truth, that, were I a schoolmaster,
teaching young people English History, I would decidedly procure
myself a copy of that map, and hang it up, where it should be continually
conspicuous and legible to all tny pupils.

Yours sincerely,

T. CARLYLE.
S, Great Chevne Road, Chelsea, Oct. 22, 1867.

THE DEAN OF CHICHESTER.
Mv DEAR Sir, — Illness has alone prevented me from thanking you
sooner for your great kindness in sending to me your Chronometrical
Chart It is a most important work, valuable to the general reader as
well as to the student

I am, dear Sir, your obliged and faithful Servant,

W. F. HOOK.

The Deanerv, Chichester, Oct. 22, 1866.

)t

JAMES ANTHONY FROUDE, Esq., M.A.
(Late Fellow of Exeter College, Oxford, and Author of " The History
of England," etc., etc.)
My DEAR Sir, — I have to thank you heartily for your excellent
Chart of English History, The plan of it is easily comprehended, and
I cannot doubt but that it will be of much service in helping school-
boys to apprehend and recollect the framework of our national annals.
I say schoolboys, but it will be handy and convenient for all of us.

Faithfully yours,

J. A. FROUDE.
5, Onslow Gardens, S.W. June 6, 1868.

J. STCJART LAURIE, Esq.

(H.M. Inspector of Schools, Assistant Commissioner on Education,
Director of Public Instruction, Ceylon, and Editor of various
Educational Works.)

I have minutely examined Mr. Nasmith's Chronometrical Chart of
English History, and I am convinced that it is the most wonderful
educational discovery of the age. The scheme is entirely unique,
practical, and complete ; and I believe it would be impossible to devise
a more effectual implement for teaching the cardinal facts of history.

The groundwork of the idea is the application of the plan of a topo-
graphical map to the portrayal of the past; accordingly, facts are
localised, and of course chronologically arranged. The events, in their
various leading divisions, have been selected with marvellous industry
and discrimination, and, I need scarcely add, with a thorough know-
ledge of the subject and of the positive requirements of the student of
History.

As a discovery, the gist of its importance lies in its so-styled " Chro-
nometrical " arrangement ; and this is exhibited in the ingenious mode
of grouping the facts, and of colouring the epochs. For example, the
centuries are arranged in successive squares; these are divided into
small spaces, each space representing a decade, and each decade is sub-
divided into tenths, to represent the years. In these smaller squares
there are delineated, in bold and appropriately varied typography, the
grand events, or assemblage of events, of the year. The result is, that
when looked at as a whole, the date and the event blended with it are
found to occupy a fixed spot on the map, and the mind not only becomes
unconsciously associated with the information given in that spot, but
also, what is better, the mind's eye retains the impression not less
faithfully than it can recall the position of a country on a map. An
instructive lesson is thus conveyed even by the blank spaces, as these
represent either national peace, or pauses in the progress of social,
constitutional, legal, or scientific affairs, while they are viewed in juxta
position with more pregnant years. The colouring of the epoch is an
important auxiliary to this technical device ; but this and the manifold
merits of Mr. Nasmith's discovery, can only be understood by seeing
the Chart itself, and having it explained. If understood aright, no
master would attempt to teach History without it;

J. S. LAURIE.

/ »^/.f / /» ♦;iF.v3»:*/», 'IT-u*? ?;««<£, trim msziQi^cd wxh mensj orSEarr
^" , ^ tf^^^-^j %n-.r4!/»Te«rtS4|f to &e pE^ GeiOfSipCT, oa tac odaer
fr^f^^ /*f# ^/^ ♦;ir.vjrh# tritfc eaaie awl ar^raGt2^ to a rrrf joong class^
7 ^^ f >r9^Hif09$^$\i^\ 0<wt. f^ tlie mtA^A €4 piofecaoa auplawcA in
'V K^^^ p^fi9{/% *t f^ niA fX/miM to foppfy lor fiie tfarfiing of historr
O^y^ «rl^f/^^f4 irf#f/ii relkr<; a gcci^afihy leHOO from dnlness; viz^
^>/^/<i^ «##/) Uf^ytfiy. Ihe tyt and oMtnory aie both a^>peakd to, and
^¥/ ^ (;#/ 1 ii« «/y //f/{ff#j())r made Cist hj a cwtiAt of finks which reciprocally
tt/^fttlj^lU'^ji rnjU ff^h^. The isolation^ too, whidi generally chanurterises
fii<»t//iMiil kri//w)i'/)^^, f« here remedied by judicious grouping. The
j/ftfN in r^ff^fM'ly t^imple and intelligible, and most creditable to the
uHiUiff'n UirAUin\ attd ingenuity* So far as I had time to examine it,
i\n* Mi f urta y of d<r(;iil and the judicious choice of really important facts
lift* mull Mti to nmke it a most valuable addition, not only to the
fi|i|MirMtiiN of M mlioo), but to the library of the advanced student of
liitiiory.

JOHN KKRR, M.A., H.M/s Inspector of Schools.

London, Sept. 26iA^ 1863.

Mv imAH Sim, Your excellent Chronometrical Chart has been used
III our m hoolN lor Nomc months post, and I am glad to be able to bear
lov ti»Mlhoouy U> itN grcftt pmttical \*alue. The advantage of your
i'\\M\ \\\ Wm\\\\\^ Kngliiih history is similar to that of a map in
^vo^^inplw i f\\\\{ {\\\\t it not only serves to imprint on the mind of
\\w U^^wwt A vivi^l \kWa of the precise ielati\*e positicHi which each
^'\>'ni ^H^^pit'^ Inn aIno timushcs a means by which an intelligent
l^s^v>uM \\^AV jvix^xciu A wM^plctc cx)x>sition of the causes and coo-

M^^«OU^V^ \M hl^UM1\ Nil \X\^irTCIUXS.

\ A\\\ my doAr Sir, faithfully 5tMu%

J, I .V\v;i\>\\ MA. Hc;^a Master. Boys* Model Schools,

l^^t)^ anJ K^rcigii School Socirtr.

H^

< I

J. M. D. MEIKLEJOHN, ESQ., M.A.

(Translator of Kant's Critique of Pure Reason ; Lecturer on English

Literature, &c. &c.)

Sir, — Instead of giving you my own opinion of your Chronometrical
Charts it will probably be better if I state a few facts about my ex-
perience of it.

I St. Each of my classes has learnt how to use the Chart in something
under twenty minutes ; and at the end of that time could name any
date pointed out without the smallest hesitation or error.

2nd. Even the dullest member of my classes can give a date for any
historical event that has been pointed out two or three times on the
Map, without hesitation ; and no date given has in any case ever been
forgotten.

3rd. From all I have seen of the Chart, I have a right to draw the
conclusion that, whereas the difficulty was with both young and old
people to remember a date, the difficulty now is with those who use yoiu:
Chart to forget a date. For your system is based upon nature and
habit — upon what we have been doing all our lives long; and we
might almost as soon forget which was our right hand and which our left,
as forget the simple spacing which dates have assigned to them in the
Chart.

4th. The evidence in fisivour of the system is cumulative. Each
square is a repetition of a larger square, which is itself a repetition
of a still larger square ; and as it is impossible for a boy who
knows thoroughly the compound rules of arithmetic to foiget simple
addition, so it is impossible for a person who has worked for twenty
minutes on this Chart, to forget its principle, its placing, or its dates.

I hope soon to see the time when a copy will be in every school and
college in England and America. The simple fact is, that your Chart
is to History and Chronology what the Arabic system of notation is to
Arithmetic, and the Map to Geography — the one essential condition of
learning the subject so that it can never be forgotten.

Your obedient Servant,

J. M. D. MEIKLEJOHN, M.A.

Hammersmith, Jan. 14/A, 1868.

II

. r

From the "PUBLIC SCHOOLS CHRONICLER

MAT 14111, 1809.

This chart is unique in character. It repfesents an edncatioiial i
discovery of great practical importance. It aims at teaching Fn gii<Ji |
chronology in an eaaer way tiian it has yet been taught, and yet by a i
method which must fix the facts noore firmly into the mind than any
which has yet been attempted. It succeeds in accomplishing for |
chronology what a map does for geography. It is in feet a chrono-
lo^cal map, teaching history by die aid of locality and colour, as a map
teaches geography. Mr. Thomas Carlyle, an old schoolmaster let it be
remembered, says of it — ** were I a schoolmaster, teaching young people
English history, I would deddedly procure mj^elf a copy of that map, !
\ and hang it up where it should be continually conspicuous and l^;ible ■
; to all my pupils." Historians like Froude, the Dean of Chichester,
i Guizot, and Thiers, have expressed their admiration of the idea which i
' Mr. Nasmith has embodied, and of the way in which he has wcxked out
his idea; while constitutional lawyers, like the late Lord Brougham,
Lord Cairns, and Mr. Phillimore, have given it the approval of their
great names.

The chart is a map of a period comprising two thousano years. This
is divided into a series of squares, each square representing a period of
a hundred years. These squares are clearly separated from each other,
and are coloured so as to show differences of dynasty. Each square is
subdivided into ten portions, exactly corresponding in the subdivision
to the large squares. A boy, as soon as Newcastle is mentioned to him,
instantly glances to the top of an imaginary map. A boy who has been
taught chronology by means of this chart will, in like manner, at once
localize any date given to him. The date 1588 will no longer |x>ssess
that kind of haziness about it which the position of a town possesses to
us when we have never seen it on a map, but will become possessed at
once of a local habitation. The year 1588 is there^ in such and such a
comer, and can no more be confused with any other year than Norwich
can be confounded with Canterbury, or Bristol with Scarborough. It
would take too much space to point out how the author has called to
his aid colour, orderly arrangement, variety of type, and symbols ; but
all these aids to memory have been used with the hand of a master, and
the result is a chart on which the educational world may congratulate
itself. It has already attracted considerable attention on the continent,
and charts of German and French history are said to be in preparation
for use in continental schools. We can only say in conclusion that for
all who wish to have a clear notion of English chronology no work can
be more useful than this, whether it be suspended in the study, the
library, or the school-room.

12

I

! i
I 1

I

; I

4fl

THE NEW
HBF

TUa book »
Ok

YORK PUBLIC LIBRARY

BRBNCB DEPARTMENT

«a (rom the Boildinl

t..r.H ,»

1